B.  0  «•  • 

LAV  . 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


.aB5; 

LA 


ENTERED,  ACCORDING  TO  ACT  OF  CONGRESS,  IN  THE  TEAR  1861,  BY 

ANDREW  J.  GRAHAM, 

is  THE  CLERK'S  OFFICE  OF  THE  DISTRICT  COURT  OF  THE  UNITED   STATES 
FOR  THE  SOUTHERN  DISTRICT  OF  NEW  YORK. 

ENTEF.ED,  ACCORDING  TO  ACT  OF   CONGRESS,  IN  THE  YEAR  1887,  BY 
ANDREW  J.  GRAHAM, 

IN   THE  OFFICE  OF    THE     LIBRARIAN     OF   CONGRESS,    AT   WASHINGTON,    D.    C. 


To  secure  the  Phonographic  Engraving  and  the  various  other  Revisions  of 
the  previous  edition. 


See  the  Preface,  Introduction,  and  Key  with  Notes,  following  the 
Engraved  Exercises, 


G- 


0 


c/-v 


J 

^ 


c^ 


;  -Jsir*  9 
./?}  ^ 


^ 


yc 


; 


c^-i 


-^^  "i 


•/I 


•»  i    "  ^  / .  \ 
%  *  •  v  v    /    V 


1  n     r  v 


x  /  -v...  -*  ^ 


448585 


J-T'VO  LTJ.  L  ^r.  n3 


x,        ^o 

^  .V?.  1V^      L^ 


) 


C"^ 

J^/ 

r 


y 


^ 


<* 


L 

/^f.^(~>. 

K  / 


^ 


<   _-  - — f^. . . 

%    X 

i^rv^ 


Vo   /..._  |^-_<r- 

-J^  x- 

^—-  0--^C 


k. 


X 


5 
^    /' 

AV 
-\ 

^ 

k^ 


•^ 


k 


X 

T^ 


.^AV, 

,.r^/ 


-=^-> 


^ 


(— M- 


I/ 


"\ 
* 


-  *-5\.T^Y/   '    * 


'  r 
n£ 


A 


k-n-J-^-- 


7 


idence  of  ihc  v^ircu  ation  olineJ! 


\ 


-/I 


.s    n 


o — »     i J\ 

- —  v  -\ 


*-^..V.-y%    — ~>      ~~^    $      ~J— • c    ^-^_    A. 

X  >•  /     \ 

.b.y.^A^  s^e..^  ^^..-^cr.^ 


<!.U.S-  V  ° ..lL-t  .-JDv,^1i -<f^.  ->!- 

)    ^  /  "  l^ — -^ — ?  ( 

fr  I  o  1  v 


c-^rric^:- ( s.U./  ^  z.  ^-^  ^?/!?.  o  v_^  c  .1 

N*  /  U-  -f  ^L«VLrHt*-'£r^.  S*S-*I'\  l^^JL 


/:       ^.(..r-xs^-^^^/- 


.1... 


I     \ 


<<;/•>>,. 

-x; 


1  1  -<-:/V  r 


N  V-          S        -          M 

OUT      rienos  ITJ  /  leoiu €r| 


12 


13 


A 


17 


\jr^t 

A 


£_,< -r-      < 

*— » .  .        t  s  -  •  - 


V 


J^yv'^v*/ 


Y 

I  /  ° %    ^^ 

S-.fc-Vs—  -\-- 


"tc 


19 


20 


c 


A, 


V 


v^Q. 


\    r  v-^-x 
\.J. ..     _n_. 


s.T^o..'/  "T,  U^A.^/v-  ).<r:.\«   /^.^/i  r  v 

^-/--^  ^  ^..^/^^ ,  L_N^-  4 

v^ '  ^  /•  7^  K./^  ^  -'-V-  ^-  -^/X- 

-•-•=*'-  J>-\./J-v^sr<;-<;-v£,-T-^ ,  v  A,-,- 


21 


O 


* 


*  O-/...IM 

/*e 


">       2 


\ 


x 
-7  7 


" 


"^"t^5~— "£^- 


22 


23 


rv. 


2-1 


(    7 


I. 

'..^ 


vr<  v 


Vr 


>  L  /r 


/."^/ 

C-t/  ^-v 


V        ^ 
w.^.. 


25 


27 


?_) 


LVL- 

I  x-r^  •. 

~V7 

/•\' 


I        /  " — "\  P  '•"N 

L  «         \     *J      ) 
X  \3 


r\»,/s 


>-  -\ 
N 


'  —  s  '"I 

- 


- 


V 


~\ 

—  ->« 


A 


28 


29 


•v^t  ^^w, 

^s  — -^     ^s 


v^KMunP^-V< 


—  7 

-- 


I  '  n  r^, 


Grr?." 


V 
v 


--— 

---- 


v  < 


x- «/•  I 

r 

3 


(5) 


"Z  *  V- 


^       ^  y =    \^  /'  °       ~Y 

—  /        -^--  '      -<^ 

.No  Laujfor  Slairery. 


, 

1 — » 


-4r-/9 


32 


33 


fro 


S/-A"--Q/'r^?  "*- 


,    J  l^_    -7    /i        -V 
~(r>-         ^J-f/k  %-: 

OL^ 


V=s^-i 


nr 


35 


r~ 


37 


c 


VI 


3- 


f  -= 


v  . 


^ 


vj-^vj-iy-v-v^   , 

-o._C  f^— /-vvO. 

V**/  (     ^/ 

ty J..,.^  -Y-,.   t».Vf.fc 


^ 


r 


/-^r 


^-/ 


.v- 


^-r  L>  .^°r  r\  .^r^ 


k  .C  ^SC  / 


448585 


38 


\  A,  w-o/7 


cX 


X* 


i      3    cT 

K .  V — 


_  4- 

/C-V\ 

•  \( 

1 

= — !>    - — -I      , —      \        ^-<       /    J     <r          f  c ^     p 

/    f       £.    t          I  ...   N»  C.^N.._  I 


C.C, 


r 


-,  ,  J.  v 

a 
.x  ? 

J 


v 


*• 


\ 


^\ 


.. 


LOfr* 


39 


—  — 

V-l 

..V         I 


i    ' 


//^-^  S2/ 


^~\      <;      If     ^~°\  (^ 

^>  >>  /  (,      r- —  I 


-^7 


•^-CxV-.^.  ^-L- 

^v^— 

-^-^ 


-x-^-s^vv-t// 


^l- 


<^A 


v-v./  (A^l^v^.K-s^  -,  &.:)  /*~S^.r:. 


Alexander  tfon  Humtoldi 


trx 

'  O 


P 


r:.  i 


.*^ 


-1 


2^  i  ~A 


^-v 

>  :>_  Y  :\  ^ ,  >  e. 

I  .L^7!r:n 

t^^r-i^v. 


<^  ^ 

\  -C^   "1   b.^  ? 
<r~^vA  L_-x 


Vl/ 

— -~i  H^  ^  vvv^/:    -"  ^-> 

I     ^i    ^_^ ^    ^_   x^  —j  _p__7^  (  5       /  \  S. 

ji..^  ^-(i- 1  U^St^ ,  X,  ^^  9   i  X  ^-  ^ 

|  bs      Vj,      ,  | 

I 

A.        ^— -r    f—*    •*} 

^-  v^-q^-^ 


i 
c  c  •  ^  /....  -  L- 


V. 


--1.~-  -x-< 


43 


44 


V-, 


S 


I 

- 


,  ,  i 

^ 

T  I  ^ 


C, 


/..V,  ' 

-*^ 


.._ 


}        i    v— -j        • 


1 


ji    -<s*^ 


k, 


"^s       N  rt~ 


-G-/-O- 


.^/...^..c^ 

1  \ 

b-.v--      ---I 


45 


A"V  "~£//    ^_'  '/V; 


46 
]  I— 


•w 


v—  f.    K 

»      W    A. 

..   / 


'  >->^      •   L  7 

,         1 — s/- 


...]       ...r 


"p-o     I 


47 

-\---l--        • — 7  •  ±— 

v  , 

v^>  '      '  ^ 

V\j^  """*?  x  f*l 

rrn   k  .  }...*-..(S-. 

I*. 8  /     I 

J\JL*  A    t— '• 

C  P  / 

^>' 

s  vVr°^.<r7'~x  )  "~ ^~ ^^     ^  ^       I     /i  v  ^  .          ,  ^X 

.^-  \J  *"'  ^ 

\  ^  •'-•Vac*  ^ 

\  _^     v f 

i"*"*1  \^~  T/  '^U 

^./i\      "^^  n^-,   .         /i<vc       -" —  -^  ^-^  7    / 

^^y 


48 


PREFACE. 


THIS,  the  fourth  volume  of  the  Series  of  Standard-Phonographic 
Text-Books,  is  designed  for  reading  and  study,  after  the  student  has 
read  and  copied  the  First  Reader,  and  studied  the  Compendium  thor- 
oughly from  §  255  to  §  280,  inclusive,  having  committed  to  memory 
the  word-signs  and  contractions,  and  familiarized  the  list  of  words 
distinguished  by  difference  of  outline  or  position. 

But  if  it  should  seem,  too  tedious  to  commit  the  lists  to  memovy 
before  commencing  to  read  these  reporting  exercises,  the  study  may 
be  varied  and  rendered  more  attractive  by  alternating  the  study  of 
the  lists  with  reading  the  engraving  in  this  work. 

But,  of  course,  if  the  reading  is  commenced  before  learning  the  lists, 
there  will  be  required  much  more  frequent  reference  to  the  Key ;  but 
in  this  manner  many  word-signs  and  contractions  will  bo  easily  and 
pleasantly  familiarized. 

But  no  method  of  study  can  obviate  the  absolute  necessity  of  acquiring  the  ut- 
most familiarity  with  the  reporting  lists. 

And,  in  no  case,  should  the  learner  allow  himself,  or  be  allowed,  to 
proceed  to  a  second  reading  lesson,  until  the  first  can  be  read  with  the 
utmost  rapidity  of  articulation. 

Considerable  assistance  will  be  derived  before  commencing  to  read 
the  Reporting  Exercises,  from  the  examination  of  the  chapter  on  the 
Characteristics  of  the  Reporting  Style,  on  page  60  of  this  volume. 

As  soon  as  a  page  or  exercise  can  be  read  easily,  it  should  be  placed 
in  view  as  a  "copy,"  and  copied  many  times,  with  both  pen  and  pen- 
cil, until  all  the  characters  are  familiarized  and  can  be  easily  and 
gracefully  formed,  and  especially  until  the  forms  and  positions  of 
word-signs,  contractions,  and  phrase-signs  are  carefully  impressed 
upon  the  memory. 

>  The  engraving  is  designed  as  a  good  example  for  close  imitation, 
both  as  to  the  size  of  characters  and  the  spacing  of  words.  A  consid- 
erable loss  of  speed  will  be  incurred  either  by  making  the  letters  larg- 
er than  is  necessary  for  a  proper  distinction  between  the  different 

49 


50  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

lengths  of  strokes,  or  by  writing  the  words  a  considerable  distance 
apart.  By  making  the  characters  quite  large  there  is  no  jrenter  diir- 
tinction  secured  between  the  different  lengths,  than  when  they  are 
made  of  the  size  in  these  exercises ;  for,  though  it  sometimes  happens 
in  small  writing  that  a  doubt  arises  as  to  the  intended  length  of  a 
particular  stroke,  the  same  doubt  is  as  liable  to  occur  in  reading  large 
writing,  and  even  more  so,  for  the  loss  of  time  resulting  from  writing 
large  necessitates  a  haste  and  movement  of  the  hand  which  are  rath- 
er inconsistent  with  making  due  distinctions  in  length. 

After  an  exercise  has  been  copied  several  times,  let  it  be  written 
from  the  reading  of  some  other  person,  the  rate  of  reading  being  such 
as  to  require  considerable  effort  to  keep  up,  but  not  so  fast  as  to  re- 
quire illegible  and  incorrect  writing,  or  to  induce  a  confused,  hesitating 
movement  of  the  hand— for,  the  hand  should  move  with  regular  and  uniform 


Compare  the  "notes"  thus  made  with  the  engraved  exercises,  ob- 
serve all  the  differences,  and  write  again  from  reading,  and  again  cor- 
rect ;  and  so  proceed  until  the  exercise  can  be  reported  correctly  and 
rather  neatly  at  a  speed  of  from  80  to  100  words  per  minute. 

Then  let  these  ' '  notes ' '  be  read  repeatedly  until  they  can  be  read 
with  the  utmost  rapidity  of  articulation. 

The  student  should  next,  especially  if  he  wishes  to  become  a  repor- 
ter, make  a  longhand  transcript  of  his  notes;  precisely  as  if  he  were 
to  furnish  it  for  publication.  The  Key,  of  course,  will  enable  him  to 
correct  any  orthographical,  punctuational,  or  other  errors  in  his 
transcript.  He  should  persevere  in  this  transcribing  until  his  tran- 
scripts coincide  with  the  Key,  though  he  should  not  require  of  him- 
self precise  agreement  therewith  in  respect  of  minor  particulars  of 
punctuation. 

Considerable  time,  and  perhaps  more  patience,  will  be  required  to 
finish  one  exercise  in  accordance  with  this  plan.  But  he  that  rules 
himself  is  greater  than  he  that  rules  a  city.  Don't  allow  any  impa- 
tience, or  wearisomeness  of  labor,  to  overcome  you.  Rule  yourself  in 
this  phonographic  study  in  the  very  first  lesson  ;  and,  instead  of  diffi- 
culties thickening  as  you  proceed,  the  way  will  constantly  become 
more  easy ;  and  you  will  acquire  a  habit  that  will  be  invaluable  to 
you  in  reporting  or  in  any  other  undertaking  or  profession;  and, 
what  will  be  of  great  moment,  you  will  possess  a  thoroughly  practical 
knowledge  of  a  highly  useful  art. 

The  learner  should  be  examined  by  himself,  or  by  his  teacher,  as  to 
the  principles  involved  in  each  exercise,  after  the  manner  of  syntac- 
tical examinations. 

After  this  Reader  has  been  thoroughly  studied  through  in  accordance 


PREFACE.  51 

with  the  preceding  directions,  and  through  again  and  again,  until  every 
page  of  the  exercises  can  be  written  with  a  speed  of  from  150  to  200 
words  per  minute,  the  student  may  write  from  dictation  from  other 
books,  etc.,  in  all  cases  of  doubt  as  to  the  proper  reporting  outlines 
referring  to  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary.  (That  work  gives 
an  immense  number  of  phrases  and  their  signs,  which  it  will  be  well  to 
write  repeatedly  from  dictation.)  This  practice  of  writing  from  dicta- 
tion, reading  notes,  and  transcribing,  should  be  continued  until  suffi- 
cient speed  has  been  attained  to  commence  the  reporting  of  moderate 
speakers.  But  whatever  opportunities  may  be  offered  to  report  from 
public  speakers,  the  practice  of  writing  from  dictation  should  not  be 
discontinued  until  a  speed  has  been  acquired  of  from  150  to  200  words 
per  minute  in  new  reading. 

To  attain  a  speed  greatly  surpassing  the  powers  of  the  Old  (or  Eng- 
lish) Phonography,  or  any  modification  that  has  been  made  of  it  since 
the  issue  of  the  Hand-Book,  all  that  is  necessary  is,  that  the  student, 
having  commenced  with  Standard  Phonography,  shall  perfectly  famil- 
iarize it,  not  meddling  with  works  on  the  Old  or  any  Compromise  sys- 
tem to  introduce  causes  of  confusion  and  hesitation.  See  p.  190. 

The  author's  system  of  Phonographic  Nomenclature  is  of  great  ser- 
vice in  the  study  of  Phonography,  by  enabling  conversation  to  be  car- 
ried on  easily  and  understandingly  between  the  student  and  his  teacher 
or  fellow- learner  as  to  phonographic  outlines.  It  will  be  especially 
useful  in  the  study  of  the  Reporting  Style.  This  system  familiarized 
describes  word-forms  and  phrase-signs  with  perfect  certainty.  It  is  as 
much  better  than  the  former  circumlocutory  descriptions  (as  for  in- 
stance, "p  with  an  Miook  and  a  circle  on  it  and  an  «-hook")  as  the 
modern  chemical  nomenclature  is  better  than  the  old  alchemistic 
names  for  elements  and  compounds.  For  convenience  of  reference,  a 
resume  [razuma-]  of  the  system  will  be  presented  in  a  following  chap- 
ter, there  being  added  to  the  system  as  presented  in  the  Hand-Book 
the  method  employed  in  the  Dictionary  of  naming  "ticks."  Another 
chapter  will  show  the  application  of  the  system,  by  describing  a  page 
of  the  engraving  in  the  Fieader. 

In  the  Notes,  the  aim  has  been  to  answer  every  question,  and  to 
clear  away  every  difficulty,  that  the  author  supposed  could  present  it- 
self. Especially  will  the  Notes  serve  to  thoroughly  educate  the  pupil 
in  Phrase-writing,  one  of  the  most  important  aids  to  speed,  and,  at 
times,  to  legibility. 

In  the  Notes,  also,  he  has,  in  a  comparatively  few  cases,  pointed  out 
the  difference  between  the  Old  and  the  New  Phonography,  and  shown 
the  advantages  of  the  latter  over  the  former.  He  has  also  exhibited 
the  reasons  for  and  against  various  phonographic  devices,  because  the 


52  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

student,  in  learning  the  reasons  in  any  rase,  becomes  possessed  of  use- 
ful principles  to  guide  him  in  analogous  cases;  and  these  reasons  be- 
ing understood,  and  a  knowledge  of  them  diffused,  will  perhaps  save 
Phonography  from  the  mischief  of  attempted  changes  by  persons  ig- 
norant of  the  principles  involved  in  the  art. 

Throughout  this  work,  it  should  be  observed — 

1.  That  the  references,  unless  otherwise  specified,  are  to  the  Com- 
pendium, Part  II.  of  the  Hand- Book. 

'2.  That  the  references  are  to  the  sections  and  their  subdivisions, 
unless  preceded  by  p=page.  Two  or  more  references  are  separated  by 
a  semicolon  ;  thus,  48;  150. 

In  making  the  selections  for  this  Reader,  the  aim  has  not  been  to 
make  those  with  which  everybody  would  agree,  for  that  would  be  impos- 
sible, but  to  make  such  as  would  afford  as  great  a  variety  as  possible 
of  styles  of  expression  and  thought  (for  the  reporter  must  study  styles 
of  thought  as  well  as  of  expression),  and  embrace  a  variety  of  the 
general  subjects  of  public  speaking,  so  as  to  introduce  an  extended 
vocabulary,  and  thus  prepare  the  student  for  ACTUAL  reporting,  by 
causing  him  to  familiarize  a  huge  number  of  the  most  useful  outlines, 
word-signs,  contractions,  and  phrase- signs,  and  by  acquainting  him 
somewhat  with  the  conflicting  thoughts  which  he  must  be  prepared  to 
report.  If  any  one  should  be  disposed  to  object  to  these  selections 
because  he  does  not,  perchance,  find  his  own  views  represented,  or 
because  he  finds  views  expressed  with  which  he  does  not  agree,  let 
him  philosophically  reflect,  that  if  he  should  seek  to  convince  an  op- 
ponent, it  could  be  done  only  upon  the  condition  of  a  patient  hearing 
which  he  is  disposed  to  refuse  to  the  expression  of  opinions  differing 
from  his  own.  in  this  instance,  even  when  the  object  of  presenting 
them  is  not  to  propagate  any  particular  opinion,  but  to  furnish  the  most  useful 
exercises  for  the  pupil. 

ANDREW  J.  GRAHAM. 

NEW  YOEK,  August  13th,  18CO. 


Kevised,  1887. 

In  this  New  and  Revised  Edition,  the  former  copperplate  engraving 
is  replaced  by  plates  produced  by  the  Author's  own  hand,  by  means 
of  his  process  of  stereography.  In  the  re-engraving,  the  few  transi- 
tional forms  of  twenty-six  years  before,  have  been  changed  to  agree 
with  the  later  thought  and  experience  embodied  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  NOMENCLATURE. 

1.  THE  names  of  the  simple-consonant  strokes  (ire — Pee,  Bee,  Tee, 
Dee,  Chay,  Jay,  Kay,  Gay,  Ef,  Vee,  Ith,  Dhee,  Es,  Zee,  Ish,  (sh  writ- 
ten downward),  Shay  (sh  written  upward),  Zhay,  El  (I  written  down- 
ward), Lay  (I  written  upward),  Ar  (r  written  downward),  Hay  (the 
upward  r),  Em,  En,  Ing,  Way,  Yay,  Hay. 

2.  The  circle  for  *  or  z,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  the  stroke,  is 
named  Iss.  where  its  sound  cannot  be  conveniently  spoken  in  one 
syllable  with  the  name  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  joined.     Skay  is 
the  s-circle  and  the  stroke  for  k.     Es-Kay,  the  stroke  for  s  and  the 
stroke  for  k.     Iss-Bee,  the  s-circle  and  the  stroke  for  b. 

3.  The  large  circle  is  named  Ses  or  Sez,  printed  either  in  a  separate 
syllable,  or  added  to  the  name  of  a  stroke  without  a  preceding  hy- 
phen.    Thus,  Ses-Tee.  Chay-Ses  or  Chay'sez. 

4.  The  loop  for  s/  is  named  Steh  (e  as  in  met),  or  the  sound  of  the 
letters  st  is  spoken  in  connection  with  the  name  of  the  stroke  to  whL-h 
the  loop  is  joined ;    thus,  Steh-Tee,  Steh-Pee,  Star  (sMoop  and  the 
downward  r)  Chayst,  Kayst,  Enst,  Wayst. 

5.  The  loop  for  str  is  named  Stcr.     To  distinguish  it  from  the  name 
of  another  letter  (Iss  and  Ter,  or  simply  Rter),  it  is  made  to  form,  with 
the  name  of  the  preceding  letter,  a  single  word,  accented  on  the  first 
syllable.     For  example,  En,  Bee,  and  Kay  form  with  the  name  for  the 
loop  Ster,  the  words  En'ster,  Bee'ster,  Kay'ster. 

0.  The  brief  sign  for  w  is  called  Brief  Way,  or,  in  order  to  distin- 
guish between  the  different  facings  of  the  sign,  Weh,  when  facing  to 
the  right,  and  Wuh,  when  facing  to  the  left.  When  joined  as  a  hook 
to  Em,  En,  Lay,  Ray,  the  characters  thus  formed  are  named  Wem, 
Wen,  Wei,  Wer. 

7.  The  brief  sign  for  y  is  named  Brief  Yay,  or,  in  order  to  distin- 
guish between  the  different  directions,  Yen,  when  the  sign  opens  up- 
ward, and  Yuh,  when  it  opens  downward. 

8.  The  brief  Way  and  Y(ay,  when  written  in  the  vowel-places  to 

53, 


54         SECOND  STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC  HEADER. 

Indicate  a  following  vowel,  arc  called  we,  yG,  wil,  ya,  etc  ,  the  w  and 
y  being  printed  Avith  a  small  letter. 

9.  The  tick  for  A  may  be  called  Heh,  or  named  in  accordance  with 
a  plan  hereafter  explained  (23)  of  naming  ticks,  vowel-dashes,  etc. 
The  dot  for  A  may  be  called  Hetch,  or  spoken  in  connection  with  the 
vowels ;  thus,  he,  ha,  ha,  etc. 

10.  The  El-hook  signs  are  named  Pel,  Bel,  Tel,  Del,  Kel,  Gel  (g  as 
in  gay},  Fel,  Vel,  Thcl,  Dhcl,  Shcl,  Zhel,  Yel,  Mel,  Nel,  Eel. 

11.  The  Ar-hook  signs  are  named,  Per,  Ber,  Ter,  Der,  Cher,  Jer, 
Ker,  Ger,  Fer,  Ver,  Ther,  Dher,  Sher,  Zher,  Mer,  Ner. 

12.  The  back  hook  for  in,  en,  or  vn,  written  at  the  beginning  of  Iss- 
Per  or  Sper,  Iss-Ter  or  Ster,  and  some  other  letters,  is  named  In  ;  thus, 
In-Sper=In-Iss-Per=Ins-Per,  In-Ster,  In-Sker.     In-Iss-Lay=In-Slay 
=Ins-Lay. 

13.  Tlic  enlarged  El-hook  signs,  i.e.,  the  Ler-hook  signs,  arc  named 
Pier,  Bier,  Tier,  Dler,  etc.     See  Compendium,  §175. 

14.  The  enlarged  Ar-hook  signs,  i. «.,  the  Rel-hook  signs,  are  named 
Prel,  Trel,  etc.     See  Compendium,  §175. 

15.  The  simple  or  group-signs  with  an  Ef-hook,  are  named  by  pre- 
fixing the  sounds  they  represent  to  the  syllable  Ef,  if  this  can  be  done 
conveniently;  if  not,  add  the  sound  of  f  to  the  syllable-name  of  the 
stroke ;  thus,  Pef,  Chef,  Kef,  Plef,  Tlef  or  Telf,  Chref  or  Cherf,  Prelf, 
Plerf,  Chlerf. 

16.  The  simple  and  the  group-signs  with  the  En-hook,  are  named 
by  prefixing  the  sounds  they  represent  to  the  syllable  En,  or,  if  more 
convenient,  or  better  for  distinction's  sake,  by  prefixing  the  syllable- 
name  of  the  stroke  to  the  syllable  En,  or  to  the  sound  of  n, the  accent 
being  placed  upon  the  name  of  the  stroke ;  thus,  Pen,  Ken,  Plen, 
Chlcn  or  Chel'en,  Pren,  Chren  or  Chern,  Prel'en,  Plern,  Chlern,  Es'en 
(not  Sen=Iss-En),  Wayn  (instead  of  Wen,  which  is  En  with  the  Way- 
hook),  Yayn. 

17.  The  name  of  a  Shon-hook  or  Tiv-hook  sign  is  formed  by  adding 
the  syllable  Shon  or  Tiv,  as  the  case  may  be,  to  the  name  of  the 
stroke;     thus,    Pee'shon,    Dee'shon,    Ray'shon,    Pel'shon,    Per'shon, 
Pler'shon,  Prel'shon,  Wer'shon,  Rel'shon ;  Pee'tiv,  Dee'tiv,  Chay'tiv, 
Pel'tiv,  Rel'tiv,  Per'tiv,  Cher'tiv,  Pler'tiv,  Prcl'tiv. 

18.  The  small  hook  for  slton,  is  named  Esh'on ;  thus,  Dces-Eshon, 
decision  ;    Pees-Eshon,  position,   possession  ;    Perseshon,   persuasion ; 
Trenseshon,  transition.     Sec  Compendium,  §197,  1. 

19.  The  widened  Em  is  named  Emp  or  Emb,  according  as  it  repre- 
sents mp  or  inb. 

20.  Lengthened  strokes,  doubled  or  trebled,  arc  named  by  prefixing 
the  name  of  the  stroke  to  the  sound  added  by  lengthening ;  thus, 


INTRODUCTION.  55 

IngTter,  Ing'ger,  Lay'ter,  Lay'ther  or  Lay'dher ;  Way'ter,  Wcn'dher, 
Fcl'ther,  Fer'dher;  Chay'dher,  Kay'dhcr;  Chay'dherdher,  Way'dher- 
dlier.  See  Compendimii,  §  207  ;  204 ;  264,  R.  9. 

21.  The  syllables  ter,  der,   tker,  dfier,  her,  ger,   when  they  indicate 
strokes,  arc  commenced  with  capital  letters,  and  are  separated  from 
the  name  of  any  preceding  stroke  to  which  they  are  joined,  by  a  hy- 
phen ;  thus,  En-Ter,  entry ;  Sen-Der,  sundry ;  Ver-Tlier,  overthrow ; 
Ef-Dher,  feathery;  Ing-Ger,  angry. 

22.  The  half-lengths  are  named  by  adding  the  syllable  Et  or  Ed  to 
the  sound  of  the  full-length,  except  when  it  is  more  convenient,  or 
better  for  distinction's  sake,  to  add  the  sound  of  t  or  d  to  the  syllable- 
name  of  the  full-length  ;  thus,  Pet  or  Fed,  Bet  or  Bed,  Let,  Eld,  Met, 
Med,  Net  or  Ent,  Ned  or  End,  Art,  Ard,  Berd  or  Bred,  Mert  or  Merd, 
Pee'shont  or  Pce'shond,   Dee'shond,  etc.;  Wcmt  or  Wemd,  Wert  or 
Werd,  Plet  or  Pled,  Tlet  or  Telt,  Delt  or  Deld,  Pret,  Bret. 

23.  The  dash-vowel  word-signs,  and  similar  small  signs,  may  be 
named  by  the  words  they  represent,  as  'all,'  'of,'  'to,'  'I,'  'he,'  etc.; 
or  names  may  be  formed  for  them  by  adding  the  syllable  old  (signify- 
ing like,  or  resembling)  to  the  names  of  the  half-lengths  which  these 
small  signs  resemble.     Bed'oid1  is  the  sign  for  all;  Ded'oid1  is  the  sign 
for  already ;   Kret'oid2  is  the  horizontal  anrf-tick  with  the  Ar-hook ; 
Peft'oid2  is  the  word-sign  for  to  with  the  Ef-hook. 

24.  Prefix  and  Affix  signs  are  indicated  by  quoting  them,  thus, 
*con,'   'com,'    'accom,'    'discon,'    'ing,'    'ingly,'  'bility;'  or,  their 
signs  may  be  indicated  by  their  S3rllable-names. 

25.  Enlarged  Way  is  named,  when  opening  to  the  East,  Weh'weh  ; 
to  the  West,  Wuh'wuh ;  to  the  North-east,  Weh'yeh ;  to  the  South- 
west, Wuh'yuh.     Way  may  be  substituted  for  the  first  syllable  of  these 
names,  if  the  sign  is  heavy.     Weh'wernt  is  the  name  of  Rent  with 
Weh'weh  joined  as  an  initial  hook.     See  Compendium,  §  262. 

26.  Enlarged  Yay  is  named,  when  opening  upward,  Yeh'weh ;  when 
opening  downward,  Yuh'wuh ;  when  the  sign  is  heavy,  '  Yay '  may  be 
substituted  for  the  first  syllable  of  these  names ;  thus,  YayVeh. 


27.  The  figures  1,  2,  3,  are  used  to  denote  respectively  the  first, 
second,  and  third  position.  The  figure  4  is  employed  to  indicate  that 
the  letter  after  whose  name  it  is  placed  is  to  be  written  to  imply  a 
preceding  to,  according  to  the  Compendium,  §250,  Rem.  2.  Thus,  Es4 
is  Es  commencing  at  the  line  of  writing,  as  iu  writing  '  to  say '  in  the 
Reporting  Style. 


5G  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    EEADEE. 


LETTERS  DISJOINED,    OR   CROSSING,    ETC. 

28.  To  indicate  that  a  sign  is  to  bo  written  disjoined  near  the  other 
portion  of  the  word,  it  is  preceded  or  followed  by  a  colon.     En:Beest, 
indicates  that  En  is  to  be  written  near,  but  not  joined  to  Beest. 

29.  The  dagger  (f)  is  printed  between  two  signs  to  indicate  that  the 
character  following  it  is  to  be  written  through  the  preceding  one  ; 
thus,  'EnfEf  indicates  that  the  Ef  is  to  be  written  through  the  En. 

30.  Words  or  letters  to  be  omitted  are  inclosed  in  brackets  [    ] . 
Words  that  are  omitted  but  implied  (as  o/and  to)  are  not  thus  printed. 


KEY  TO   THE  PRONUNCIATION. 

As  pronunciation  will  need  to  be  indicated  occasionally  in  the  sub- 
sequent pages,  the  following  Key  should  be  observed  by  the  student ; 

a,  e,  etc.,  long  ;  a,  e,  etc.,  short ;  u  as  in  full,  and  as  o  in  to;  v  as  in 
iip;  x  as  ai  in  air ;  o  as  a  in  all ;  6  as  o  in /or,  long ;  a  as  a  in  ah;  a  as  a 
in  art;  a  as  a  in  ask;  ui  as  oo  in  too;  dh  for  the  spoken  th,  as  in  then; 
and  th  for  the  whispered  th,  as  in  thin;  zh  for  the  spoken  sound  corre- 
sponding to  the  whispered  sh.  (•)  Accent;  thus,  ak'sent.  (•)  Sylla- 
ble-mark ;  thus,  iu.kwlr. 

For  ordinary  purposes  I  do  not  distinguish  between  o  and  6 ;  a,  a, 
and  a ;  e  and  e  ;  simply  because  the  different  situations  of  these  sounds 
are  suflicient  distinction  for  ordinary  piirposes.  In  the  Standard-Pho- 
nographic Dictionary  these  distinctions  are  always  carefully  indicated. 


EXAMPLES    OF    PHONOGRAPHIC 
DESCRIPTION. 

THE  following  paragraphs  are  designed  to  exhibit  the  application  of 
Phonographic  Nomenclature,  by  describing  p.  8  of  this  Reader.  The 
sign  (:)  may  be  read  "near"  when  in  the  place  of  of,  of  a-n,  of  the; 
"under,"  when  implying  cow,  com,  cog;  and  "disjoined,"  when  pre- 
ceding affixes  or  following  prefixes. 

Net-Els*  Dees-Pee-Jay:'ing'  Geds4-Zed-Em  Dhee^  Lays2-Dee-Strcf 
lVtsoid*-Ced-Ens  ZeeMletoid  Jel*-.Tay  Ith^-Ray  En- Vent*  Ketoid-Pet'- 
Ef  Eii»  '39— Nel2  IS-Ych'-Gay— Bce'-Chetoid  IlayS-Vee-Der  Pee(l)'- 


67 

Sem-Ith  Nerd'-Petoid-Ray:Slay-Retoid  Dhen*  Kay'-Ent-Pret:' first' 
Chay3:Jay2-Enses  Wch'-Chetoid  Dee2-Em-Stershons:Jel2-Jay-Es-Ens. 
Der'-Sem-Ith  Sded'  Es*:Chay3Es<-Ens  IKS"-  Dee'-Met-Dhet  Ar3-Gel-Bce 
Dcesesn-Ted  Ef-  Kent '-Lays-Jays  Ketoid- Dee3- Ben-En-Bet  Bee'-Vee- 
Rfty8-BftyBes:En*-Mels  Bef-'  Dee3-Em  Zee'--Kret(ya)  [to  be  read  Kvet  voc. 
with  ya,  or  kreat-]  ;  Tctoid2  Ef^-SkayrVend'-Ket/ing-a'  Layter'-Ent- 
Pret:Em-Zee2-Kay  Kcnt2:Kershon2— Kred'-Chay2  'the'  Sen2  Men3  Stars2 
Plents3  En'-Mels  Ketoid-Men2  Ems2  Weh2  Kret2  Net'-Ket  6  Ith»-Yeh- 
Gay  Kletoid' Dhen'-Petoid  [com]:Pees:6  Dee'-'-Ren-Lay  Dees9: 24  Ar<- 
Iss  Chay1 — Chetoid:'-Ment-End-Dhet  Sem°-Ray  Per2- Pees  In-Sem-  Sen- 
ter2-Pref-Ens:(a)Ish9— Ncn3  Ens^-Tees  Leta-Ted  Tetoid1  El-'-En-Jet 
Ketoid-Eri'-Jay-Gcr  Tetoid1  Jel2-Jay  Iss2  Dees-'-Kef  En-Tcrs(a)2-Vet— 
Dher2-Zee  Ketoid-Spet(o)1  Scin2  10  Em-Layses-Kay-Wer  Lay'-Kay- 
Clietoid  Dees*-Kel  Wcr2  Wei'  Bedoid1  Tees»-Det  En-Dheedher-'-Prets- 
Gel-Bee  "Zee2  Lay'-Ef  Kctoid-Let'  Dher«-Rend(a)  Ef^-Tee  Ncl2  Dee^- 
Ith  Ketoid-Drens3  (a)Med'-Retoid.  Wclter2-Ings:Kay-Tee2-Kay:Es> ; 
Ketoid-Chay2  Tee3-Retoid  Def  :End3  Zee2-Pent-Rct  Bec'-Let  Tetoid- 
Kay-Ped1  Bee'-Der(!)-Lend  Ketoid- Elt*-Met  (a)Ar2-Retoid-End:Kertiv* 
Wuh-Kay'  Bee2-Kay  Ketoid -Senter2  En-Chay2  Iss-Ret2- Plents  Ketoid- 
En'-Mels  Ketoid-Ef-Nel  Men2  Ems2  Well2  Kret2."  En5-Petoid,  Wnh'- 
Ketoid-Dees-Gays-Ef  En-Steus2  Iss-Dhees2 :Tee--Ens-Teo  Weh-Chay2 
Ith2-Jay  Per2:Speeshons2  Ar2-Eld  En-Dee'-Ef-Ens:Fels--Ef-Ter.  Spees1- 
Dhet  Wei1  Bedoid '  -Chetoid  JelJ-Jay-(e)Ar-Iss  Wen2  Eft-Endher  Weh2 
Pees3: 'ing'  Thcrdher*  Em'-Ens Skels1  Ketoid- Wcl'  Bedoid'-Rayst:Ray2- 
Itli  Zee2  Def :  'ing '  Steh-Tce1  :Per2-Pee-Ray  Ef-'-Chetoid-Rays-Dens  :Men2 
Ketoid-Let'-Pcrs-Ray  :Kay-Es2  Sem2-Ray  Retoid2-Bee-Kerf  Ef»-Enst  En' 
Ketoid-Chays'-El  Kay-Pet2  Tel3  6  Ith3-Yeh-Gay  Wen'-Chetoid  Wer« 
Zeether2-Den  En'-Skays-Dees  Chef-Dee  Lays'-'- Ar  Kay-Pet1  Kent-Lays- 
Jays  Pref  Ketoid-Dhet1  Erases2  En2-Chetoid  Bedoid'  Bet3-Dhees  Skays- 
Dees2  Wcr2  Tetoid2  Dent '-En  Bet3-Dheedher  Teftoid'-Petoid-Ded  En2 
Bet'-Tee  Kay-Pets2-En-Jay  Ems'.  Retoid3  Ef'-Kay-Ish  Wuh2-Bee- 
Chetoid  Nen3  Tetoid-Kay-Pcrshon2  :Ter3-Jcn  Ketoid-Ter3-Es-Ens  En- 
Pref^-Ent:'ing'  Schay2-Ray-Krcds:Ii?h-Em  Fcr2-Bee-Ing  In-Sker'  Ret- 
oid-Pce'?-Jays:Est'-Ray. 

Ver2-Bed  Ens2-Chetoid  EP-Kay  :Tee2-En-Dee  '  inter '  :Em-Ray- Jays 
Em2-Ing-Perses  Rel  -2Bee'  :Sen''-Gay-En-Tee.  ' The '  ' cog '  :Net'  Bled2: 
En-En-Ray-Chet  Ketoid-En-Stee2-Em-Let  Ferdher2  Fent3-Ens  Sen3 
Breds1  Wuh-Kay'-Ens  Deeses1  Ketoid-Embs-Let1.  Jays2-Ests  Weh'- 
Tetoid  Skct2  Dhet'  Ishts9-Tee  Tcr2  Kays-Tee2-Zee-Net  Em-Berst2  En'- 
Skay-Em  Vets'  Fend'-Rays.  'The'  I-Dees2:Schay--Sket  Vee°-En-Lay- 
ter-En-Tef  Efdher*  Tee-'-En-Deeses-Tens  Tetoid-'  Bred(e)<  En«-Ketoid- 
En  Ketoid-Dhees2  Bee'  Ketoid-Skel-Jay*-Lay  Iss2  Em-Tee2-Bel  Iss2- 
Chetoid  Efs?-Jay  Sen3  Bee2-Gets  Ketoid-Pcr2- Jay-En  :Ef-'-Ith  Ray'-Ens 


58  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

Bees'- Ard  Embs-Lay1  Ketoid-Dct'-Kay.  Tetoid*  Chetoid'-Kay-' we ' 
Way'  Jen'  Wch<-Dee  Es'-Ens.  Chetoid3-Kay-4  we '  Raya:Slay*  Es'-Ens 
Es?-Ing  Ester*-En-Jed  Ketoid-En*-Petoid  Retoid-Ef'-Ar  Her2  Ester*- 
En-.Jed  Dhon'-Vce  Ea'-Pees  Jen'  Ketoid-Dhees'  Spef-Chetoid  Nrl-'- 
Bred-Ger-Em  Dhcts'-Wer-Dhee:Ar'-Kay-Wen-El  Bet- Tetoid-Ar1  Em'- 
Gay  Dee^-Ray.  Retoid'-Ens-Ray  Es'-Ens  Snet'  Sket*.  Tee«-Dees-Net: 
Fen  Tees"  En<-Sgay-Ment:Iss-Rel2:Fels;-Ef-Ter  Tetoid*  Skays1  Em<- 
Bers-Chetoid  Enter1  Sef-Rens.  Tee3-Pers-Dee  Ketoid-Bee'-Get  En1- 
Es-Ens  Kent'-Lay-Vee. 


CHARACTERISTICS    OF  THE    REPORTING 
STYLE. 

THE  Corresponding  Style  of  Standard  Phonography  contains,  in  germ 
at  least,  nearly  every  principle  of  the  Reporting  Style.  The  latter  is 
distinguished  from  the  former  principally  by  the  following-mentioned 
characteristics. 

I.  By  usually  omitting  the  vowels. 

II.  By  the  extension  of  the  nse  of  three  positions  for  outlines.     See 
Exhibit  of  Reporting  Style  Position,  on  a  subsequent  page. 

III.  By  additions  to  the  word- signs  and  contractions  of  the  Corre- 
sponding Style. 

By  means  of  improvements  in  word-signs  and  contractions  alone 
(many  of  which  improvements,  however,  are  dependent  upon  the  new 
principles  embodied  in  Standard  Phonography)  a  great  gain  over  the 
Old  or  English  Phonography  is  made  in  respect  of  speed.  This  specifi- 
cation is  inclusive  of  the  general  principles  of  contraction  of  Standard 
Phonography,  but  exclusive  of  anything  specified  in  the  following 
paragraphs. 

IV.  By  substituting,  for  convenience  of  phrase-writing,  briefer  word- 
signs  for  some  of  the  Corresponding  word-signs ;  namely  : 

(1.)  By  expressing  He  by  a  tick,  whether  standing  alone  or  in  phrase- 
writing.  This  makes  an  important  gain  over  the  Old  reporting  style, 
in  which  lie  was  expressed  by  a  dot,  or  (as  improved  by  the  writer,  for 
convenience  of  phrase- writing)  by  Hay,  the  same  as  in  the  Correspond- 
ing Style  of  Standard  Phonography.  This  method  of  writing  he  secures 
thousands  of  phrase-signs  which  were  cither  difficult  or  impossible 


INTRODUCTION.  59 

ttpon  any  former  plan  of  writing  this  word.  See,  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary,  the  phrases  commencing  with  He. 

(2.)  By  expressing  How  by  the  Hay-tick  in  the  third  position.  This 
makes  a  gain  of  fifty  per  cent,  upon  the  Old  Phonography  in  the  ex- 
pression of  this  word,  and  secures  a  large  number  of  phrase-signs  which 
were  impossible  in  the  Old  Phonography.  See  the  phrases  beginning 
•with  How,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

(3.)  By  expressing  /  when  standing  alone  by  a  perpendicular  tick 
(271) ;  and  when  joined  to  a  preceding  word,  by  a  perpendicular  or 
horizontal  tick  (103,  E.  1).  This  makes  a  considerable  gain  over  the 
Old  Phonography,  securing  many  valuable  phrase-signs  where  none 
were  possible  iu  the  Pitman  Phonography. 

(4.)  By  expressing  You  in  phrase-writing  by  Yeh  whenever  Yuh  can 
not  be  employed  at  all,  or  without  difficulty ;  thus,  I  send  you,  Ket- 
oid1 -Scud- Yeh. 

V.  By  implying  To,  followed  or  not  by  a-n  or  the  (which  are  supplied 
by  means  of  the  context) . 

(1.)  Either  by  joining  the  following  word  to  the  preceding ;  thus, 
Ish'-Bee,  wish  to  be;  Kred-Dhet1,  according  to  that. 

(2. )  Or,  by  commencing  the  following  word  where  the  word-sign  for 
to  would  stop  (i.  e.,  so  as  to  just  touch  the  lower  edge  of  the  line  of 
writing).  P.  130,  11.  2;  §260,  b. 

This  single  principle  adds  greatly  to  the  speed  secured  by  the  Old 
Phonography. 

VI.  By  implying  Of,  followed  or  not  by  a,  an,  or  the  (which  are  sup- 
plied by  aid  of  the  context),  by  writing  the  following  word  near  or 
joined  to  the  preceding.     This  principle  adds  considerably  to  the  speed 
of  the  Old  Phonography.     This  principle  is  also  valuable  on  account 
of  its  distinguishing,  almost  always,  between  of  and  /  at  the  begin- 
ning of  phrases. 

VII.  By  writing  the  present  time  for  the  past  tense  or  time  when- 
ever a  stroke  or  more  can  be  saved  thereby. 

This  principle  makes  a  great  gain  over  the  Old  Phonography.  It  is 
a  general  principle  of  contraction  of  Standard  Phonography,  not  in- 
cluded in  specification  III. 

VIII.  By  using  a  large  hook  on  Em,  En,  Ray  for  I. 

This  principle  obviates  many  inconvenient  forms  of  the  Old  Pho- 
nography, 

IX.  By  enlarging  the  small  El-hook  t«  add  r,  and  the  Ar-hook  to 
r,dcl  I. 


CO  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    IJEADEB. 

This  new  principle  secures  a  great  advantage  over  the  Old  Phonog- 
raphy in  respect  of  brevity,  analogy,  and  distinctions. 

X.  By  enlarging  Brief  Way  and  Yay.     2G2  and  L'('K>.     Tin's  new- 
principle  renders  easy  the  writing  of  many  phrases  which  by  the  Old 
Phonography  were  written  slowly  and  with  comparative  difficulty — 
such  expressions,  for  instance,  as  the  following:  "If  we  cannot  do 
what  we  would,  let  us  do  what  we  can  ;"  "We  were  with  difficulty ;" 
"What  were  you  thinking?"     "What  you  would;"     "What  you 
were;"   "You  were;"   "You  would."     See  Odds  and  End*,  page  1 U8. 

XI.  By  frequently  prefixing  you  by  a  Yuh-hook,  and  by  frequently 
joining  we  by  the  Way-hook,  even  to  certain  straight  lines.     P.  107, 
11.  2 ;  p.  108,  R.  3. 

This  partially  new  principle  also  obviates  in  many  cases  the  slow- 
ness and  difficulty  of  writing  phrases  which  are  spoken  with  groat 
rapidity;  such  as,  "We  can,"  "we  cannot,"  "we  give,"  "we  may 
be,"  "you  do,"  "you  do  not,"  "if  yon  choose,"  "if  you  desire," 
"if  you  wish,"  "if  we  can,"  "if  we  cannot." 

By  this  principle  many  such  phrases  can  be  written  much  faster 
than  in  the  Old  Phonography.  See,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic 
Dictionary,  the  phrases  beginning  with  Have  you,  If  you,  If  u-c,  Are  you, 
Because  you,  Because  zee,  Can  we,  Can  you,  Could  you,  Shall  you,  May  you, 
You  do. 

XII.  By  lengthening  the  straight  lines  to  add  tlir  (and  by  the  ad- 
vanced reporter  sometimes  to  add  tr,  dr),  and  trebling  them  to  add 
thrt/ir ;  and  also  by  lengthening  Ing  and  the  other  curves  to  add  dhr— 
there,  their,  they  are,  they  were,  other.     See  DIIR  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary.     All  this  was  devised  by  the  Author,  with 
the  exception  of  lengthening  the  curves  to  add  there,  their,  and  they 
are. 

The  new  part  of  this  principle  makes  a  great  gain  over  the  Old 
Phonography. 

XIII.  By  expressing  dhr  (=thcir,  there,  they  are,  they  were,  other; 
see  DHR  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary)  by  a  heavy  tick 
(272)  when  it  cannot  be  more  conveniently  expressed  otherwise.  This 
frequently  gains  considerably  over  the  Old  Phonography. 

XIV.  By  the  frequent  expression  of  all  or  u-ill  by  an  El -hook  or  }>y 
enlarging  an  Ar-hook.     This  principle  makes  considerable  gain  over 
the  Old  Phonography  in  many  cases,  by  securing  a  condensed  and 
brief  expression  for  many  phrases  which  were  written  too  slowly  in 
the  Old  Phonography,  and  by  enabling  the  reporter  to  avail  himself 


INTRODUCTION.  61 

of  other  valuable  principles,  as  in  writing  by  all,  Bel1 ;  by  all  its,  Blets1; 
lyall  thr,  Beldher1;  by  all  (of)  our,  Bier1. 

XV.  By  the  frequent  expression  of  are,  were,  or  our  by  an  Ar-hook, 
or  by  enlarging  an  El-hook.     This  principle  makes  considerable  gain 
over  the  Old  Phonography,  by  rendering  possible  a  condensed  and 
brief  expression  for  many  phrases  which  were  written  too  slowly  in 
the  Old  Phonography,  and  by  securing  the  advantages  of  other  prin- 
ciples— as  in  writing  by  our,  Ber1 ;    by  our  other,  Berdher1 ;  which  are, 
Cher2  ;  which  were,  Chera ;  ivhich  are  therefore,  Chcrdherf- ;  which  arc  had, 
Cherd- ;  which  are  of,  Cherf- ;  for  all  are  (or  our),  Fler*. 

XVI.  By  making  it  a  general  principle  to  add  it,  had,  what,  or  would 
(and  occasionally,  in  the  writing  of  the  practiced  reporter,  at,  out),  by 
shortening  a  letter.  This  very  frequently  makes  a  great  gain  over  tho 
Old  Phonography.     See  phrases  tinder  it,  had,  what,  would,  at,  out,  in 
the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  especially  postpositive  phrases 
(that  is,  phrases  in  which  the  words  in  question  are  added  to  other 
words-). 

XVII.  By  tising  the  Ef-hook  on  curves,  both  to  express  simple/ or  v, 
and  to  express  have,  ever,  fore  (sometimes  for-th),  of,  and  the  affixes  f al- 
ly-ness.    This  method  frequently  makes  a  considerable  gain  over  the 
Old  Phonography.     For  example  :  Lef-Kend,  loving  kindness ;  Nef-Get, 
naviijatc ;    Dlief-,  tluy   have;  Emdhevf2,  may  there  ever,  or  may  therefore1; 
Es'eP,  uscful-ly-ness. 

XVIII.  By  frequently  adding  than  to  comparatives  by  an  En-hook, 
as  in  writing  more  than,  Mern2;  older  than,  Laydhcrn2 ;  longer  than,  Ing- 
dhern3 ;  better  than,  Bet2-Ren.     This  principle  frequently  makes  a  great 
gain  over  the  Old  Phonography. 

XIX.  By  omitting  to  a  greater  extent  than  in  the  Corresponding 
Style  words  which  may  be  supplied  ;  as  in  writing  more  than  one,  Mer2- 
Wen ;  over  and  above,  Ver'-Bee-Vce  ;  from  place  to  place,  Pels2- Pels ;  from 
time  to  time,  Tee':Tee';  in  connection  with,  En^Kayshon2. 

XX.  By  the  uses  of  the  mode  of  expressing  repetitions  explained  in 
the  Compendium,  §276.     This  principle  is  very  valuable  to  the  repor- 
ter, because  the  repetitions  for  the  expression  of  which  it  provides  arc 
usually  spoken  with  such  rapidity  that  it  was  at  least  very  difficult  to 
report  them  by  the  Old  Phonography.     See  an  instance  of  this  on  pager 
20  of  this  Picader,  line  17,  where  Standard  Phonography  gains  over  the 
Old  Phonography  in  writing  what  would  be  spoken  in  two  seconds 
seven  strokes  and  three  liftings  of  the  pen. 


62  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

XXI.  By  the  extensive  use  of  phrase-writing.  See  and  carefully 
study  the  Compendium  from  §244-240  inclusive,  and  the  following 
Exhibit,  or  Chart,  of  Phonographic  Phrase-Writing. 

The  following  rather  inelegant  yet  forcible  statement  of  the  advan- 
tages of  phrase-writing  is  commended  to  the  reader's  attention  : 

"  Phraseography  is  of  special  importance  to  the  reporter.  Whatever 
may  be  the  amount  of  his  practice,  the  reporter  will  sometimes  find 
himself  engaged  in  a  chase  with  the  speaker ;  [.]  it  is  then  that  the 
use  of  this  principle  will  be  felt  and  appreciated,  [;]  for  [,]  perhaps  a 
single  convenient  phraseograph  [phraseogram]  will  bring  him,  as  with 
a  bound,  close  \ip  to  the  speaker." 

\i  Standard  Phonography,  by  its  new  principles  of  writing,  indepen- 
dent of  its  peculiar  powers  of  phrase- writing,  renders  the  spectacle  of 
"a  chase  with  the  speaker"  far  less  necessary  than  with  the  Old  Pho- 
nography ;  and,  by  furnishing  in  abundance  those  convenient  phrase- 
signs  which  "bring  the  writer,  as  with  a  bound,  close  up  to  the  speak- 
er," and  which  in  the  Old  Phonography  were  frequently  absent  when 
most  needed,  enables  the  reporter  to  keep  pace  with  the  speaker,  and 
places  the  reporting  ability  within  the  reach  of  thousands  who  other- 
wise could  not  attain  it. 

Standard  Phonography,  by  many  of  its  new  principles,  greatly  facil- 
itates phrase-writing  ;  and  it  is  fully  adapted  to  the  easy  expression  of 
frequent  and  rapidly-spoken  phrases  of  ordinary  speaking,  which  by 
the  Old  Phonography  were  often  written  with  great  comparative  slow- 
ness. Many  phrases  are  of  frequent  occurrence  in  public  speaking, 
especially  if  extemporaneous,  which  rarely  occur  in  books ;  and  a  sys- 
tem of  shorthand,  when  applied  to  the  writing  of  the  language  of 
elaborate  compositions,  might  seem  sufficiently  rapid  for  reporting 
purposes,  and  yet  prove  very  deficient  or  fail  entirely  when  applied  to 
actual  reporting.  Any  one  who  will  observe  the  wonderful  phraseo- 
graphic  power  of  Standard  Phonography,  as  exhibited  in  the  exercises 
In  this  work,  must  see  that  it  is  greatly  superior  to  any  other  system. 
of  shorthand,  and  that  it  is  fully  adequate  to  the  requirements  of  ac- 
tual reporting, 


63 


EXHIBIT 

OF 


REPORHNG-STYLE  POSITION. 


[From  the  Student's  Journal,  Volume  4,  August,  1875.] 


DISTINCT-OUTLINE  WORDS— 

Usually  in  the  Corresponding-Style  Position  ; 

OTHER  WORDS— 

In  FIRST,  SECOND,  or  THIRD  position,  according  to 
Accented  Vowel  (Hand-Book  Comp.,  §  257-9) ; 

EXCEPT  FOK  DISTINCTION'S  SAKE  (§261)— 

I.  UNCONTRACTED  WORDS : 

A.  MOST  FREQUENT  WORDS — in  the  Corresponding- 

Style  Position. 

B.  DISTINGUISHED  WORDS — in  Other  positions  : 

1.  Either  Arbitrarily; 

2.  According  to  Ordinary  Accent ; 

3.  Or  According  to  the  Distinguishing,  or  Con- 

trasting, Accent. 

II.  CONTRACTED  WORDS  : 

According  to  Note  2  on  page  136  of  Second 
Reader* — i.  e.,  Derivatives  with  contractions 
of  same  form  as  Primitives,  are  to  keep  posi- 
tion assigned  the  Primitives. 


SECOND   STANDAnD-PHONOGItAPHIC    READER, 

As  derivative  word-signs  generally  keep  the 
primitive  form  ill  its  position.  See  Haud- 
Book,  §261,  Rein.  2f  (copied  on  next  page). 

J8@"Tlie  position  of  the  Primitive,  and  of  the  Deriva- 
tive with  primitive  form  as  a  contraction,  to  be 
that  of  the  Corresponding  Style,  UNLESS  distinction 
requires  a  different  position,  as  it  does  in  several 
cases  cited  in  Note  (6)*,  page  154  of  the  Second 
Reader,  which  is,  for  convenience  of  the  reader, 
copied  below. 


°  (i).  Generally,  in  Standard  Phonography,  when  the  same  sigft 
(stands  for  a  primitive  word  and  one  or  more  derivatives,  some  or  all 
of  them  being  contracted,  that  sign  is  written  in  the  proper  or  assigned 
position  of  the  primitive,  whatever  may  be  the  accented  vowel  (i.e., 
the  proper  position)  of  the  derivatives ;  thus  Es'-Em,  assimilate-d-ion; 
Plent3,  plant-ed-(er)-ation ;  Kay-Pee-,  capacious-ty ;  Dee'-Klen,  de- 
cline-able-ation  ;  Dees5-Pet,  despot-ic-ical-ically ;  Dee--Men,  diminish- 
ed-ution;  Dee3-Men,  admonish-ed-ition ;  Dee'-Men,  dom'inate-d-tion- 
nt ;  Kays2-Enter,  eccentric-al-ity ;  Kays-'-Kel,  exclaim-ed,  cxclama- 
tion-tory  ;  Fels*-P>ee,  flexible-ility  ;  Fer'-Jed,  frigid-ity  ;  Jay-'-Ger.  geo- 
graphy-ical-er  ;  Pee'-Kret,  hypocrite-ical ;  En-Dren1,  indoctrinate-d- 
ion  ;  En-Sper',  inspire-ation :  Ent'-Ket,  intellect-ual-ity ;  Ent'-Med, 
intimidate-d-ion  ;  En-Vet1,  invite-d-ation  ;  Em-Jay3,  majesty-ic ;  Em- 
Theda,  method- ic-ical,  Methodism;  Em-Thcdst2,  Methodist-ic-ical ; 
Fet'-Ger,  photography-ic-ist-er ;  Pers'-Pet,  precipitatc-d-ion ;  Eay-- 
Fet,  refnte-d-ation  ;  Ray'-Pct,  repeat-ed,  repetition  ;  Piay3-Pet,  repTite- 
d-ation ;  Eajr2-Ped.  rapid-ity-ly.  (c.)  This  general  principle  corre- 
sponds to  the  general  rule  of  position  applying  to  derivative 
word-signs.  See  Hand-Book,  §2G1,  Pi.  2.  It  serves  to  distinguish 
many  contracted  outlines,  which  by  the  general  rule  of  position  would 
occupy  the  same  position,  and  hence  be  undistinguished  except  by 
meaning  (or  the  context).  (d.)  The  suggestiveness  (i.e.,  legibility) 
of  contractions  for  derivative  words  is  favored  by  placing  them  in  the 
position  of  the  primitive  ;  for,  the  primitive  word  being  first  read  or 
suggested,  that  and  the  context  will  at  once  indicate  what  derivative 
is  to  be  employed.  For  instance.  Em-Thed-  will  easily  be  read  as,  or 
suggest,  method;  and  (hat,  if  it  be  not  the  required  word,  will  suggest, 


INTRODUCTION.  65 

in  connection  with  the  context,  the  proper  word  for  the  place,  name- 
ly, methodic,  methodical,  methodically,  or  Methodism,  (e).  When  the  prop- 
er position  of  a  primitive  word  and  that  of  the  derivative  words  would 
he  different,  as  of  Refute  (3)  and  Refutation  (-),  and  the  corresponding- 
style  position  of  the  two  words  would  he  the  same,  they  are  hoth 
placed  in  that  position  (as  Ray3-Fet,  refute-d-atiori) ,  unless  a  different 
position  is  required  for  distinction's  sake  ;  as  Ray3-Pet,  repute-d-ation,  to 
distinguish  these  words  from  Ray*-Ped,  rapid-ly,  rapidity  (which  is  in 
conformity  with  the  rule),  and  Ray'-Pet,  repeat-ed,  repetition. 

fREM.  2.  Derivatives  Following  the  Position  of  the  Primitive. — Legibility 
demands  that  in  most  cases  a  primitive  word-sign  depending  consid- 
erably on  position  for  legibility,  should,  when  a  formative  sign  is  add- 
ed, retain  its  position,  without  regard  to  the  general  rule ;  hence, 
Net'-,  nature — Net '-El,  not  Net-.E72,  natural;  Preft1,  prophet — Preft1- 
Kay,  not  Preft --K&y,  prophetic ;  Ken2,  question — A'en'-'-Bee,  not  Ken- 
Bee-,  questionable. 


POSITION  OF  WORDS  IN  THE  DICTIONARY. 

Word-Positions  are  noted  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary, 
according  to  paragraph  45  on  page  9  of  its  Introduction  ;  where  it  is 
said  :  "The  position  of  a  form  is  generally  left  to  he  determined  by 
the  rules  of  position,  except  in  case  of  word-signs,  contractions,  and 
phrase-signs."  Of  course,  if  one  is  writing  in  Corresponding  style, 
he  applies  the  Corresponding-style  rules  of  position  (Hand-Book,  §  § 
52,  58,  209,  219) ;  and  when  one  is  writing  in  the  Reporting,  he  should 
apply  the  Reporting-style  rules  of  position  (§256-261),  as  presented 
in  the  preceding  Exhibit  of  Reporting-Style  Position. 


66  SECOND   STANDAKD-rnONOGEAPHIC 


EXHIBIT. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  PHRASE- 
WRITING 

TREATS   OF   THE  JOINING  OF  WORDS. 


A.    GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

L  UNTECHNICAL   STATEMENT: 

GENERALLY  join  words  related  in  a  clause  or 
sentence  ;  that  is,  make  the  written  pln-ases 
correspond  to  ,<^>eec/i-phrases  ;  as,  I-told-him- 
ihat;  as-soon-as-possible;  enter-upon;  if-you- 
can-do-so  ; — 

EXCEPT— 

1.  Of  course,  when  tlie  junction  is  impossible; 

as  do-not  care;  most  words ;  gave  them. 

2.  "When  the  junction  is  inconvenient;  as — 

1.  Because  of  too  great  length : 

a.  Above  the  line. 

b.  Below  the  line. 

c.  Horizontally. 

2.  Because    of    confusing    succession    of 

signs  :    as,  in-many-names  ;    which  is 
better  written  in  many-names. 

3.  When  ambiguity  would  result. 


INTRODUCTION.  67 

4.  When  obvious  PAUSES  intervene  ;  as — 

a.  Separating  an  expression  of  circum- 

stance :  time,  manner,  purpose,  or- 
der, etc. ;  as,  at-that-time,  I  thought ; 
in-the-first-place  [En-EP-Pel],  I-will- 
say ;  secondly,  I-will-state. 

b.  Separating  a  direct  address,  or   ex- 

planatory term  :  Go,  Thomas ;  Jose- 
phus,  the  historian. 

c.  In  various  other  cases  ;   as  of  pause 

before  a  strongly  emphasized  word, 
etc. 

IL  TECHNICAL  STATEMENT : 

That  is,  using  grammatical  and  rhetorical  terms. 
This  is  convenient  in  teaching  students  well  versed  in 
grammar  and  rhetoric.  See  Technical  Statement  in  the 
Hand-Book,  §242-6. 

B.    SPECIAL    PRINCIPLES. 

I.  Lapping  may  be  used  instead  of  joining  ;  as,  told: 

it;  could:get ;  sot:much3;  chitl:chat. 

II.  Other  means  of  facilitating  Phrase-writing  : 

1.  Omitting  letters  and  words  ;  as,  bes[t]-way;  one- 

[of  the]  -most ;  upo  [  n  ]  -one-side. 

2.  Implications ;  as  by  nearness,  under,  fourth-posi- 

tion, etc. 

3.  Special  phrase-writing. 

This  Glance,  or  Chart,  of  Phrase- Writing  was  first  presented  in  the 
Author's  Phonographic  Visitor,  Vol.  IV.,  in  the  number  for  May  2,  1870. 
The  Glance  principle,  or  Chart-like  presentation  of  a  logical  (or  natu- 
ral) analysis  of  a  subject,  is  one  of  the  most  effective  modes  of  instruc- 
tion. It  is  a  valuable  characteristic  of  the  Author's  SYNOPSIS  op 
ENGLISH  GRAMMAR.  A  Logical  Analysis  of  a  subject  is  most  easily 
understood ;  and  a  Chart-like,  or  Outline,  presentation  of  the  same, 
impresses  it  strongly  on  the  memory,  calling  in  aid  (as  it  does)  the 
faculties  of  Form,  Size,  Number,  Locality,  and  Order, 


G8  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOQKAPHIC    KEADEB. 


PHRASE-SIGN  POSITION. 

I.  USUALLY,  First  sign  in  proper  position,  and  others 

following  without  regard  to  position.  See  Hand- 
Book,  p.  156. 

II.  SOMETIMES,  Second  sign  in  proper  position,  with  preced- 

ing adapted  ;  as,  in-those3;  I-think?;  I-thank?;  and-if; 
and-at3;  his-own3  (isl-no);  as-?/1;  as-feivs;  as-that\  See 
Hand-Book,  p.  128. 


WORD-DISTINCTIONS. 

Words  of  similar  or  different  meanings,  and  containing 
the  same  consonants,  are  distinguished — 

I.  By  difference  in  the  mode  of  representing  the 
first  consonant ;  as,  Rays-Let,  resolute ;  Ar- 
Slet,  irresolute;  Lay-Kay,  like;  El-Kay, 
alike. 

H.  By  some  other  difference  of  outline  ;  as,  Em- 
der-Tee,  moderate;  Mod-Ret1,  immoderate; 
Ket1,  quite;  Kay-Tee,  quiet;  Kayst,  cost; 
Kays-Dee1,  caused. 

III.  By  difference  in  position  ;  as,  Per'-Met,  per- 
mit (the  most  frequent  word  generally  in  cs 
position,  as  here)  ;  PerVMet,  prompt:  Per'- 
Met,  promote  (where  the  word  is  out  of  le- 
gitimate position,  for  distinction's  sake}. 

IV.  By  the  vocalization  of  one  or  more  of  the 
words   to   be   distinguished ;    as,  Em2-Gret, 
emigrate:     En^-Gret,   migrate;     lEn^-Gret, 
immigrate. 

t£&°  See  list  of  words  distinguished  in  the  Hand-Book, 
p.  195-8. 


KEY 

TO  THE 

REPORTING  EXERCISES. 


ANCIENT  AND  MODERN   PHILOSOPHY. 

PAGE 

3  TUB  end  which  the  great  Lord  Bacon  proposed  to  himself  was 
the  multiplying2  of  human  enjoyments3  and  the  mitigating 

PAGE 

31  to  himself.— P.  130,  R.  2.  The  caution  of  this  Remark— "  Provided,  that 
the  word  so  written  would  not  be  liable  to  be  mistaken  for  some  other  word  in  the 
third  position" — may  be  complied  with  in  respect  of  horizontals  by  writing  them 
(iis  always  in  this  revised  edition  of  the  Second  Reader),  for  the  FOURTH  position 
((.  e.,  to  imply  to),  close  against  the  lower  edge  of  the  line  ;  while  third-position 
Kigns,  slanting  or  perpendicular,  are  best  written  through  the  line,  except  put, 
about,  doubt  (written  below  and  free  from  the  line),  to  put  about  (or  remove)  doubt. 
The  FOURTH  position  is  so  designated,  because  it  was  the  fourth  in  the  histor- 
ical order  of  development.  It  was  unknown  to  the  Old  Phonography,  (b).  An 
initial  hook,  circle  or  loop,  on  an  ascending  letter,  may  be  written  in  the  fourth 
position,  to  imply  a  preceding  to ;  as,  Iss'-Lay-Vee,  to  solve;  WehJ-Rea,  to  [the  or 
«]  workman;  Ses'-Ray,  to  Cicero. 

2  multiplying  of  human  enjoyments.— Jlelt^  as  a  word-sign  for  multiply- 
ied,  multitude,  is  nearly  three  times  as  fast  as  the  old  forms,  Em-Let-Pel,  Em-Let- 
Pled,  Em-Let-Ted.    This  gain  is,  of  course,  dependent  upon  the  new  principle  of 
writing  a  large  initial  hook  on  Em,  En,  Ray,  for  I.     Experience  shows  that  a  largo 
initial  hook  may  be  written  as  readily  at  least  as  a  large  final  one.    The  Old  Pho- 
nography prohibited  the  shortening  of  a  large-hook  letter,  but  there  was  no  suf- 
ficient reason  for  such  prohibition.  The  shortening  of  large-hook  letters  obviates 
many  difficult  or  needlessly  long  outlines  of  the  Old  Phonography,  and  consti- 
tutes one  of  the  valuable  and  characteristic  features  of  Standard  Phonography. 
(6).  A  little  practice  will  show  any  one  who  may  think  that  a  large  initial  hook  is 
difficult,  that  it  is  so  for  just  the  same  reason  that  the  making  of  a  Pee  or  Gay  is 
difficult  to  the  beginner— namely,  that  it  is  new. 

3  of  human  enjoyments.— The  implying  of  O/by  writing  the  following  word 
near  the  preceding,  which  is  a  novel  feature  of  Standard  Phonography,  secures 

69 


70  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

of  human  sufferings.  The  ancient4  philosophy  disdained  to  he1*  use- 
ful,6 and  was7  content**  to  be  stationary.9  It  dealt  largely  in  theories 
of  moral  perfection,1"  which  were  so"  sublime,  that  they  never  could 
be12  more  than13  theories  ;  in  attempts  to  solve14  insoluble  enigmas, 


the  advantage  of  leaving  the  following  word  in  its  proper  position,  and  thus 
adding  to  legibility,  as  well  for  this  cause  as  by  usually  securing  a  different  in- 
dication of  /and  Of  at  the  beginning  of  phrase-signs.  "Of  human  enjoyments" 
expressed  by  the  Old  Phonography,  Petoid'-Meu-En-Jay-Ments,  not  only  requires 
an  additional  stroke  and  angle  (for  angles  of  themselves  consume  time,  and  must 
be  taken  into  account),  but  human  must  be  brought  out  of  its  proper  (third)  po- 
Eition,  and,  of  course,  its  legibility  somewhat  impaired. 

*  ancient.— See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  ANCIENT.     The 
Old-Phonographic  outline  for  this  word  was  En-Shayut. 

5  disdained  to  be.— 250,  2.  The  implying  of  to  by  the  principle  of  this  refer- 
ence is,  at  a  general  principle,  a  new  feature  of  Standard  Phonography.     Its  value 
will  be  better  understood  as  we  proceed.     The  principles  of  implying  of  and  to 
have  saved,  in  the  first  line  of  this  exercise,  three  strokes  and  one  lifting. 

6  useful. — See  p.  01,  xvii.  of  this  Reader. 

7  and  •was. — The  plan  of  joining  and  by  either  a  perpendicular  or  horizontal 
tick  was  introduced  by  the  author.     The  rule  of  the  Old  Phonography  was  that 
and  might  be  joiued  by  a  horizontal  tick  only,  and  only  in  the  Reporting  Style. 
Of  course,  the  writing  of  such  phrases  as  and  wot,  and  to,  and  many  other  phrases, 
required  the  lifting  of  the  pen  where  it  is  now  obviated. 

*  content. — Con-  is  here  implied  by  writing  Tent  under  Zee.    P.  112,  R.  7,  6. 
9  stationary. — See  Odds  and  Ends,  p.  18G,  "The  Shon  and  Tiv  Hooks." 

M  moral  perfection. — 175  ;  215.    See  p.  59,  ix.  of  this  Reader. 

11  -which  were  so. — See  p.  60,  xv.  of  this  work.  The  principle — I  mean  much 
more  than  exceptional  practice  or  single  instance — of  expressing  are  or  were  by  an 
Ar-hook,  is  a  novel  feature  of  Standard  Phonography  ;  and  so  also,  consequent- 
ly, the  method  of  distinguishing  between  which  are,  which,  were  ;  such,  are,  such 
were,  etc.     The  phrase  which  were  so  would  have  been  written  by  the  Old  Phonog- 
raphy Chay2  Weh2  Es2  ;  i.  e.,  would  have  required  one  character  and  two  liftings 
of  the  pen  more  than  the  Standard-Phonographic  expression. 

12  that  they  never  could  be. — 245.    The  advantage  of  a  good  word-sign  or 
contraction  is  not  simply  in  the  saving  of  strokes,  but  also  in  securing  greater 
powers  of  phrase-writing.     To  illustrate — the  Standard-Phonographic  word-sign 
for  never  not  only  saves  in  this  instance  one  of  the  slowest  kind  of  strokes  (a 
heavy  curve),  but  also  secures  a  phrase-sign  here  which  otherwise  would  have 
been  impossible. 

is  more  than. — See  p.  01,  xviii.  of  this  Reader. 

M  to  solve. — According  to  instruction  in  note  on  the  preceding  page,  Note, 
1,  (b)  the  initial  circle  on  Lay  is  written  in  the  fourth  position — that  is,  closo 
against  the  lower  edge  of  the  line — to  imply  a  preceding  to. 


KEY   TO    THE   RETORTING   EXERCISES.  71 

in  exhortations  to  the  attainment15  of  unattainable  frames  of  mind.16 
It  could  not  condescend  to  the  humble  office  of  ministering16  to  the 
comfort  of  human  beings.17  All  the  schools  regarded w  that  office  as 
degrading,  some  censured  it  as  immoral/Once,  indeed,  Posidonius, 
a  distinguished  writer  of  the  age  of  Cicero19  and  Caesar,  so  far  forgot 
himself  as  to  enumerate  among  the  humbler20  blessings  which  man- 
kind owed  to  philosophy,  the  discovery  of  the  principle  of  the  arch, 
and  the  introduction  of  the  use  of  metals.  This  eulogy81  was  consid- 

15  to  the  attainment. — A  distinction  should  be  made  between  supplying 
and  implying.  In  this  phrase,  only  to  is  implied  ;  but  whether  a-n  or  the  follows 
the  to  or  not  is  a  matter  to  be  determined  by  reference  to  the  context.  The,  in 
this  phrase,  therefore,  is  to  be  supplied.  250, 3.  (6).  The  Standard-Phonographic 
Fourth  position  corresponds  nearly  to  the  Latin  dative-case  form,  which  implied 
nearly  always  our  to,  leaving  the  sense  of  our  a-n  or  the  to  be  understood  if  re- 
quired. If  this  case  answered  in  the  use  of  the  Latin  language  for  many  centu- 
ries, it  may  be  assumed  that  the  corresponding  device  in  Standard  Phonography 
is  equally  safe. 

10  frames  of  mind.— See  p.  59,  vi.  This  novel  principle  of  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  reporting  style — implying  OF  by  nearness,  and  leaving  a-n  or  the  to 
be  supplied  if  required,— corresponds  nearly  to  the  Latin  genitive-case  form,  which 
implied  nearly  always  our  to,  leaving  the  sense  of  our  a-n  or  Vie  to  be  understood 
if  required.  If  this  case  answered  in  the  use  of  the  Latin  language  for  many 
centuries,  it  may  be  assumed  that  the  corresponding  device  in  Standard  Phonog- 
raphy is  equally  safe.  This  principle  for  implying  of,  and  that  for  implying  to, 
are  by  far  too  advantageous  to  be  lightly  dispensed  with.  Fully  one-fifth  of  the 
labor  of  writing  Of  (a-n  or  Hie)  and  To  (a-n  or  the)  as  in  the  Old-Phonographic  style 
is  saved  by  these  two  beautiful  principles  devised  by  the  Author. 

1'  to  the  comfort  of  human  beings. — Observe  how  beautifully  and  ad- 
vantageously the  two  principles  spoken  of  in  the  two  preceding  notes  combine 
here :  to  (the)  being  disposed  of  by  the  fourth  position,  and  of  by  writing  human 
near.  The  Old  style  for  this  expression  would  have  been  Petoid2  Chetoid  [to  tlie} 
EP-Ret  Petoidi  [of]  Men3-Bee-Ings. 

is  regarded. — See  p.  59,  vii.  of  this  Reader. 

19  Cicero. — The  plan  of  writing  a  large  initial  circle  was  first  presented  in 
the  Hand-Book.    It  makes  an  average  saving  of  14  per  cent,  (see  Hand-Book,  Part 
V.,  §9)  over  the  Old-Phonographic  way  of  writing  the  syllables  sys,  sus,  etc.,  in 
such  words  as  system,  sustain,  Sicily,  Cicero,  Ccesar  ;  besides  adding  to  the  power 
of  phrase-writing,  and,  in  many  cases,  securing  greater  analogy  or  convenience 
of  form.    For  example,  consistent,  Ses-Tent1  ;  inconsistent  or  in  consistent,  Enses- 
Tent1  (Old  Phonography,  Eni  Iss-Est-Ent)  ;  sustain,  Ses-Ten2  ;  in  sustaining,  Eu- 
Bes-TenVing' ; — suspect  (reporting  style),  Ses-Pee2  (Old  Phonography,  Es-Spee-Ket) ; 
unsuspecting,  Enses-Pee2:'ing.' 

20  humbler. — 175.    See  p.  59,  ix.  of  thia  Reader.    See,  also,  p.  186  of  Odds  and 
£nds. 

21  eulogy. — The  plan  of  joining  Brief  Way  and  Tay  as  simply  w  and  y  is  a 
novel  and  valuable  feature  of  Standard  Phonography,  securing  legibility  in  many 


72  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

ercd  as  an  affront,22  and  was  taken  up  with  proper  spirit.  Seneca  ve- 
hemently disclaims  these  insulting  compliments.  Philosophy,  accord- 
ing to  him,23  has  nothing  to  do  with  teaching  men  to  rear  arched 
roofs  over  their  heads.  "The  true  philosopher  does  not  cure  whether 
he  has  an  arched  roof,  or  any  roof.  Fhilosophy/ius  nothing  to  do 
with  teaching  men  the  uses  of  metals.24  She  teaches  us2"1  to  be  inde- 
pendent of  all  material  substances, 2J  of  all  mechanical  contrivances." 
He  labors  to  clear27  Democritus  from  the  disgraceful  imputation  of 

cases  where,  to  secure  it  in  the  Old  Phonography,  the  to  or  y  had  to  be  •written 
in  the  vowel-place,  necessitating  a  lii'ting  of  the  pen  which  Standard  Phonogra- 
phy avoids.  It  is  also  valuable  because  of  facilitating  phrase-writing. 

22  as  an   affront. — The  expression  of  a-n  by  a  horizontal  or  perpendicular 
tick  was  originated  by  the  author.     Its  value  is  well  illustrated  in  this  little 
phrase,  in  which  two  liftings  of  the  pen,  that  would  have  been  required  by  the 
Old  Phonography,  are  saved.     71.     And  is  expressed  in  Standard  Phonography 
in  the  same  way.    69,  R.  2.     Please  see  also  Note  7,  on  p.  70  of  this  Reader. 

23  according  to  him. — In  the  Old  Phonography,  Kred1  was  given  for  accord- 
ing or  according  to,  and  Nerd1  for  in  order  or  in  order  to.    This  is  an  absolute  proof 
that  the  plan  of  implying  to,  even   by  joining  the  following  to  the  preceding 
word,  was  not  a.principle  of  the  Old  Phonography.    In  Standard  Phonography 
there  is  no  lame  and  exceptional  method  of  meeting  an  acknowledged  necessity 
(namely,  of  getting  rid,  so  far  as  possible,  of  writing  the  frequent  to)  ;  but  the 
Gordian  knot  is  cut  by  implying  to  in  accordance  with  a  principle.     See  p.  59,  v. 
of  this  Reader.    Notice  the  application  of  this  principle  in  the  very  next  phrase, 
"  has  nothing  to  do,"  which  would  very  probably  have  been  written  by  any  one 
of  the  publishers  of  the  Old  Phonography,  Iss2  En-Ith2-Ing  Petoid--Dee,  i.e.,  with 
two  strokes  and  two  liftings  of  the  pen  more  than  are  required  by  Standard  Pho- 
nography. 

-'  men  the  uses  of  metals. — The,  when  not  connected  closely  with  the 
preceding  word,  is  usually,  in  the  author's  practice,  expressed  by  the  dot  ; 
though  it  is  allowable  to  join  it  to  the  following  word,  by  a  slanting  tick,  on  the 
line  as  the  best  position.  See  THE  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 
For  instance,  "  the  uses"  here  might  have  been  written  Chetoid2-Es-Iss,  or  Ret- 
oid'--Es-Iss. 

2:'  teaches  us. — The  principle  of  joining  us  by  a  circle  or  by  enlarging  a  circle 
is  a  novel  and  valuable  feature  of  Standard  Phonography.  P.  18:2,  R.  2  It  very 
frequently  is  nearly  equivalent  to  saving  entirely  the  expression  of  us,  and  often 
amounts  to  more,  by  saving  the  lifting  of  the  pen. 

26  of  all  material  substances. — The  advantage  of  the  novel  Standard-Pho- 
nographic principle  of  adding  all  by  an  El-hook  to  the  vowel-dashes  among  other 
signs,  is  partially  illustrated  in  this  case.  Without  it,  there  would  be  required 
after  making  o/^Petoid1)  the  lilting  of  the  pen  and  the  making  of  the  heavy  dash, 
Bedoid1  (for  all).  The  same  gain  is  repeated  in  tho  very  next  phrase.  See  Stand- 
ard-Phonographic Dictionary,  under  OF  ;  and  p.  GO,  xiv.  in  this  Reader. 

-'  he  labors  to  clear.— To  is  hero  meant  to  bo  implied  by  writing  Klcr  in 
the  fourth  position.  2CO,  6. 


KEY   TO   THE  REPORTING   EXERCISES.  73 

having  made  the  first  arch,  and  Anacharsis  from  the  charge  of  having23 
contrived  the  potter's-wheel.  The  business  of  these  philosophers  was 
to  declaim  in  praise  of  poverty,  with  two  millions  sterling  out  at  us- 
ury ;*9  to  meditate  epigrammatic  conceits30  about  the  evils  of  luxury, 
in  gardens  which  moved  the  envy  of  sovereigns  ;  to  rant  about  liber- 
ty, while  fawning  on  the  insolent  and  pampered  freedmen  oya  ty-  ^ 
rant ;  to  celebrate  the31  divine  beauty  of  virtue  with  the  same  pen 
which  had  just  before  written  a  defense  of  the  murder  of  a  mother  by  a 
son.  From  the  cant  of  this  philosophy,  a  philosophy  meanly  proud 
of  its  own  unprofitableness,  it  is  delightful  to  turn  to  the  lessons  of 
the  great  English  teacher.  The  philosophy  which  he  taught  was 
essentially  new.  Its  object  was  the  good  of  mankind,  in  the  sense  in 
which  the  mass  of  mankind  always  have  understood,  and  always  will 
understand,  the  word  good.  The  aim  of  the  Platonic  philosophy  was 
to  exalt  man/into  a  god.  The  aim  of  the  Baconian  philosophy  was 
to  provide  man  with  what  he  requires,32  while  he  continues  to  be  a 
man.  Th«  aim  of  the  Platonic  philosophy33  was  to  raise  us  far  above 
vulgar  wants.  The  aim  of  the  Baconian  philosophy33  was  to  supply 
our  vulgar  wants.  The  former  aim  was  noble  ;  but  the  latter  was 
attainable.  Ask  the  follower  of  Bacon  what  the  new  philosophy,  as 
it  was  called  in  the  time  of  Charles  the  Second,31  has  effected  for  man- 
kind, and  his  answer  is  ready.  It  has  lengthened  life  ;  it  has  miti- 

28  of  having. — It  is  better  in  this  case  to  add  having  by  the  hook  and  dot 
than  to  imply  o/and  write  Vee  and  the  dot. 

29  out  at  usury. — See  p.  61,  xvi.  of  this  Reader. 

30  epigrammatic  conceits. — Generally,  in  the  Reporting  Style,  the  Kay  of 
the  termination  Met-Kay  may  bo  omitted.     Con-  of  conceit*  is  implied  by  writing 
under. 

31  to  celebrate  the. — The  circle  is  in  the  fourth  position,  to  imply  a  pre- 
ceding to. 

32  with  what  he  requires. — 2G2.    See,  also,  p.  GO,  x.  of  this  Reader. 

S3  "Platonic  Philosophy"  and  "Baconian  Philosophy." — This  exerciso 
is  a  good  illustration  of  progressive  contractions.  The  first  time  a  rather  slowly- 
written  phrase  or  word  occurs,  it  may  be  written  without  contraction  ;  but  if  it 
should  occur  again,  and  the  reporter  should  anticipate  its  recurrence,  he  may 
contract  it  to  some  extent.  If  it  should  occur  frequently,  he  may  contract  it  inoro 
and  more  until  the  utmost  brevity  has  been  attained.  Such  are  special  contrac- 
tions. If  I  were  reporting  a  lecture  in  which  I  anticipated  the  frequent  occur- 
rence of  the  phrases,  "  Platonic  philosophy  "  and  "  Baconian  philosophy,"  I 
should  probably  write  Pel-Fel,  or  even  Plcf,  for  the  former,  and  Bee-Fel,  or  even 
Bef,  for  the  latter.  Be  sure  to  read,  in  this  connection,  Compendium,  §  237,  R.  2. 

M  Charles  the  Second. — When  several  Es-sounds  occur  together,  one  or 
more  may  be  omitted  to  secure  the  advantage  of  a  phrase-sign.  P.  191,  R.  8. 


74  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

gated3'1  pain  ;  it  has  extinguished/diseases  ;  it  lias  increased  the  fertil- 
ity of  the  soil  ;  it  has  given  new  securities  to  the  mariner  ;  it  lias 
spanned  great  rivers  and  estuaries  with  bridges,  of  form  unknown  to 
our  fathers  ;3ti  it  has  guided  the 

4  thunderbolt  innocuously  from  heaven  to  earth  ;  it  lias  lighted 
up  the  night  with  the  splendor  of  the  day  ;  it  has  extended 
the  range  of  the  human  vision  ;  it  has  rmiltiplied  the  power1  of  the 
human  muscles  ;  it  has  accelerated  motion  ;  it  has  annihilated  dis- 
tance ;  it  has  facilitated  intercourse,  correspondence,  all  friendly  of- 
fices, all  dispatch  of  business  ;  it  has  enabled  man  to  descend  to  the/ 
depths  of  the  sea  ;  to  soar  into  the  air  ;2  to  penetrate  securely  into 
the  noxious  recesses3  of  the  earth,  to  traverse  the  land  on  cars  which 
whirl  along  without  horses,  and  the  ocean  in  ships  which  sail  against 
the  wind.  These  are  but  a  part  of  its4  fruits,  and  of  its  first  fruit. 
For,  it  is  a  philosophy  which  never  rests,  which  is  never  perfect.  Its 
law  is  progress.  A  point,  which  was  yesterday  invisible,  is  its  goal 
to-day,  and  will  be  its  starting-post  io-mo\ro\v./—  Edinburgh  Review. 

' 


«  mitigated.—  P.  168,  R.  8  ;  p.  59,  vii.  of  this  Reader.  This  novel  principle 
Of  Standard  Phonography  is  of  such  frequent  application  that  even  if  the  gain 
effected  by  it  in  each  instance  were  slight,  it  would  in  the  course  of  a  siugle 
hour's  reporting  save  a  great  many  strokes,  and  also  many  liftings  of  the  pen, 
in  writing  both  words  and  phrases. 

36  to  our  fathers.—  Pretoid-  for  to  our  is  quicker  than  Ar<.  It  is  also  more 
legible,  and  more  easy  to  join  in  phrases. 

-»  j  i  power.  —  Power  being  a  rather  frequent  word,  it  is  •well  to  write  it  Pee-1- 
Qt  Bay  instead  of  Pee-Ar,  so  as  to  secure  the  greater  speed  of  the  straight 
line  for  r,  and  also  so  that  the  analogous  form,  Pee^-Ref,  may  be  used  for  the  de- 
rivatives powerful-ly-ncss.  To  write  power  with  Pee-Ar  and  powerful  with  Pee-Ref 
would  be  a  confusing  change  of  outline. 

2  into  the  air.  —  If  this  were  occurring  frequently,  I  should  write  it  En-Tee- 
(a)Ar. 

3  noxious   recesses.  —  In  the  Reporting  Stylo  of  Standard  Phonography, 
words  ending  in  the  sounds  slnis-li-nes,  are  usually  contracted,  —  the  contraction 
ending  with  Ish  ;  and  if  the  word  should  be  long,  and  less  of  the  word  would 
suffice  to  characterize  it,  even  more  may  be  cut  off;  as  in  Pren1,  pernicious-ly- 
ness. 

•>  but  a  pai't  of  its.  —  This  phrase  is  but  one  of  thousands  of  instances  in 
which  the  novel  characteristics  of  Standard  Phonography  combine  to  effect  a 
great  gain  over  the  Old  Phonography.  This  phrase  in  the  Old  Phonography 
would  have  been  written  Tetoid"  a8  (heavy  dot)  Pee2-Ret  Petoidi-Tees,  niuo 
strokes  and  liftings  of  the  pen.  This  phrase  in  Standard  Phonography  requires 
only  four  strokes,  i.e.,  it  is  twice  as  fast  aa  the  Old  Phonographic  expression. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  75 


LOGIC. 

IN  every  instance  in  which  we  reason,5 in  the  strict  sense  of  the  word, 
t.  e. ,  make6  use  of  arguments,  whether  for  the  sake  of  refuting  an  ad- 
versary, or  of  conveying  instruction,  or  of  satisfying  our  own  minds 
on  any  point,  whatever  may  be  the  subject  we  are  engaged  on,  a  cer- 
tain process  takes  place11  in  the  mind,  which  is  one  and  the  same7  in 
all  cases,  provided  it  be  correctly  conducted. 

Of  course  it  cannot  be  supposed  that  every  one  is  even  conscknis  of 
this  process  in  his  own  mind  ;  much  less,  is  competent  to  explain  the8 
principles  on/which  it  proceeds.  This  indeed  is,  and  cannot  but  be, 
the  case  with  every  other  process  respecting  which  any  system  has 
been  formed  ;  the  practice  not  only  may  exist  independently  of  the 
theory,  but  must  have  preceded  the9  theory.  There  must  have  been 
Language  before  a  system  of  Grammar1'1  could  be  devised  ;  and  musi- 
cal compositions,  previous  to  the  science  of  Music.  This,  by  the  way, 
will  serve  to  ercpose  the  futility11  of  the  popular  objection  against 
Logic,  that  men  may  reason  very  well  who  know  nothing  of  it.  The 
parallel  instances  adduced  show  that  such  an  objection  might  be  ap- 

6  we  reason. — P.  168,  R.  3,  6. 

«  make. — The  full  forms  for  make  and  take  are  too  long  for  the  Reporting 
Style  ;  they  are,  therefore,  provided  in  Standard  Phonography  with  word-signs — 
Em2,  make  ;  Tee2,  talce  (Tee:t,  took).  See  phrases  beginning  with  MAKE  and  TAKK 
in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

7  which  is  one  and  the  same. — The  is  omitted  here  as  the  impediment  to 
securing  a  phrase-sign  for  a  frequent  phrase — one  and  the  same.      Remove  the  im- 
pediments is  a  good  rule  in  making  contractions  and  phrase-signs. 

'to  explain  the. — The  plan  of  omitting  Kay  in  many  such  words  as  ex- 
plain, explore,  expend,  etc.,  is  a  novel  and  valuable  characteristic  of  Standard  Pho- 
nography. It  not  only  saves  a  stroke,  but  in  many  cases  avoids  a  difficult  junc- 
tion within  the  word,  and  facilitates  joining  with  other  words. 

9  but  must  have  preceded  the. — See  249  ;  and  especially  250,  3. 

19  before  a  system  of  Grammar.— See  remark  under  ABOVE  in  the  Stand- 
ard-Phonographic Dictionary.  This  phrase  illustrates  the  advantage  of  the  re- 
porter's availing  himself  of  every  judicious  expedient.  This  phrase  could  not 
have  been  written  without  the  use  of  three  novelties  of  Standard  Phonography, 
namely,  the  tick  for  a,  the  word-sign  for  system  (depending  upon  the  new  prin- 
ciple of  employing  a  large  initial  circle),  and  the  principle  of  implying  of  by 
joining. 

11  futility. — Many  words  ending  in  Uy  are  provided  in  Standard  Phonogra- 
phy with  contractions  by  adding  t  by  halving  El,  Lay,  or  an  El-hook  sign.  This, 
of  course,  saves  a  stroke  and  a  half,  and  in  most  cases  an  angle. 


76  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

5. plied/in  many  other  cases,  where  its14  absurdity  would  be  obvious; 
and  that  there  is  no  ground  for  deciding  thence,  either  that  the  sys- 
tem has  no  tendency  to  improve  practice,  or  that  even  if  it  had  not, 
it  might  not  still  he  a  dignified  and  interesting  pursuit. 

One  of  the  chief  impediments  to  the  attainment  of  a  just  view  of  the 
nature  and  object  of  Logic,  is  the  not  fully  understanding,  or  not  suf- 
ficiently keeping  in  mind,  the  SAMENESS  of  the  reasoning  process  in  all 
cases.  If,  as  the  ordinary  mode  of  speaking  would  seem13  to  indicate, 

A  mathematical  reasoning,  and  theologicaiyaud  metaphysical,  and  po- 

•^   litical,  etc.,  were  essentially  different  from  each  other,  i.  e.,  different 

kinds  of  reasoning,  it  would  follow,  that  supposing  there  could  be  at  all 

any  such  science,  as  we  have  described  Logic,  there  must  be  so  many 

different  species  or  at  least  different  branches  of  Logic. 

5    And  such  is  perhaps  the1  most  prevailing  notion.     Nor  is  this 
much  to  be  wondered  at ;  since  it  is  evident  to  all,  that  some 
men  converse  and  write,  in  an  argumentative  way,  very  justly2  on  one 
subject,3  and  very  erroneously  on  another,  in  which  again  others  ex- 

12  where  its.— 221,  R.  4.    See,  also,  p.  63,  xvi.  of  this  Reader. 

is  would  seem. — (a).  This  phrase-sign  closely  resembles  In-Sem  ;  but  I  have 
never  found  any  contusion  arising  from  this.  (b).  Just  as  in  the  common  or- 
thography, when  we  know  that  a  letter  has  several  different  powers,  we  readily 
discover  the  correct  power  to  assign  it  in  the  case  presented,  so  in  stenographic 
matters  we  need  apprehend  no  serious  difficulty  from  different  uses  of  the  same 
thing,  or  from  slight  differences  between  different  things,  so  long  as  we  are  aware 
of  such  different  uses  or  close  resemblances,  unless,  of  course,  the,  law  of  legibility  u  too 
much  neglected,  (c).  When  the  same  thing  has  different  uses,  or  when  things  of 
different  uses  or  values  are  not  readily  distinguishable  of  themselves,  the  uses  or 
values  must  be  so  different  that  one  could  not  reasonably  be  substituted  for  the  other  in 
any  case.  (d).  This  principle  saves  the  phrase  sign  Wuh-Sem  ;  for,  the  use  or 
value  cannot,  in  any  case,  reasonably  (i.  e.,  so  as  to  make  sense)  be  substituted 
for  the  use  or  value  of  In-Sem.  Try  it.  («).  This  also  saves  Pretoid,  Pletoid, 
Peftoid,  Pentoid,  Kletoid,  Keftoid,  etc.,  from  the  objection  that  they  too  closely 
resemble  Pret,  Plet,  Peft,  Pent,  Klet,  Kelt,  etc.,  as  thoroughly  and  completely  as 
it  saves  Petoid,  Tetoid,  Ketoid,  Retoid,  etc.,  from  the  precisely  similar  and  no 
less  valid  objection — which,  however,  is  not  now  made,  though  it  was  formerly — 
that  they  too  much  resembled  Pet,  Tet,  Ket,  Ret,  etc. 

51  and  such  is  perhaps  the. — We  here  write  together  the  words  of  the 
speech-phrase,  disjoining  at  the,  because  it  will  not  easily  join  with  most, 
and  in  order  to  get  a  fresh  impulse  ;  i.e.,  so  as  not  to  make  the  written  phras* 
inconvenient.    See  Phrase-Writing  Exhibit,  p.  66  of  this  Reader,  A,  I.,  Exc.  2. 

2  justly.— 237,  R.  1,  b;  p.  1C8,  R.  5. 

3  on  one  subject.— 250,  3,  On.    See  p.  67  of  this  Reader,  Special  Principles, 
IL;  I,  --          ---     ,--  - 


KEY   TO   THE  REPORTING    EXERCISES.  77 

eel,  who  fail  in  th^nformer.  This  error  may  be  at  once  illustrated 
and  removed,  by  considering  the4  parallel  instance  of  Arithmetic,5  in 
which  every  one  is  aware  that  the  process  of  a  calculation  is  not  af- 
fected3 by  the  nature  of  the  objects  whose  numbers  ais  before  us; 
but  that  (e.g.)  the  multiplication  of  a  number  is  the  very  same  opera- 
tion,whether  it  be  a  number  of  men,  of  miles,  or  of  pounds  ;  though 
nevertheless  persons  may  perhaps  be  found  who  are  accurate  in  calcu- 
lations relative  to  natural  philosophy,  and  incorrect  in  those  of  polit- 
ical economy,  from  their  different  degrees  of  skill  in  the/subjects  of 
these  two  sciences ;  not  surely  because  there  are7  different  arts  of 
arithmetic  applicable  to  each  of  these  respectively. 

Others  again,  who  are8  aware  that  the  simple  system  of  Logic  may 
be  applied  to  all  subjects  whatever,  are  yet  disposed  to  view  it  as  a 
peculiar  method  of  reasoning,  and  not,  as  it  is,  a  method  of  unfolding 
and  analyzing  our  reasoning  :  whence  many  have  been  led9  (e.  g. ,  the 
author  of  the  Philosophy  of  Rhetoric)  to  talk  of  comparing  Syllogis- 
tic10 reasoning  with  Moral  reasoning  ;  taking  it  for  granted"  that  it  is 
possible  to  reason  correctly  without  reasoning  logically  -./which  is,  in 

4  by  considering  the. — The  plan  of  implying  ing  preceding  a-n  or  the,  by 
•writing  the  latter  in  the  place  of  the  'ing' -Hot,  originated  with  the  author.    How 
admirably  it  works,  and  how  valuable  it  is,  will  be  seen  in  the  course  of  reading 
the  reporting  exercises  of  this  Reader.    Isaac  Pitman  has  proposed  to  use  the 
disjoined  tick  at  the  end  to  signify  the  rarely  occurring  ings.    This  plan  sup- 
poses the  objection  that  ings  written  with  a  heavy  dot  cannot  be  distinguished 
from  ing  written  with  a  light  dot.     If  this  objection  were  valid  in  this  case,  it 
would  be  equally  valid  against  the  whole  Phonographic  plan  of  heavy  and  light 
dots  for  long  and  short  vowels.     See  the  same  objection  to  the  heavy  dot  for  oc- 
com,  disposed  of  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary  under  ACCOM. 

5  arithmetic. — See  above,  p.  3,  note  30. 

«  is  not  affected. — The  word-sign  for  is  not  is  here  adapted  to  the  position 
of  affected  for  the  sake  of  greater  legibility.  246,  1.  See  this  Reader,  page  68, 
Phrase-Sign  Position,  II. 

7  because  there  are. — 272  ;  also  p.  60,  xiii.  of  this  Reader. 

8  who  are. — 178,  R.  5 ;  also  p.  61,  xv.  of  this  Reader.    See  these  notes,  p.  4, 
R.  13,  e. 

9  many  have  been  led. — 249. 

10  syllogistic.— Contractions    for  words  ending  in  istic-al-ally  are   usually 
formed  in  analogy  with  this  contraction  ;  for  example,  Ker2-Kayst,  characteris- 
tic ;  Thest2,  atheist-ic-al. 

11  taking  it  for  granted. — That  we  may  have  a  written  phrase  for  this  fa- 
miliar speech-phrase,  we  must  omit  the  impediments,  namely,  the  ing-dot  and  for. 
Omit  the  ing-dot  and  shorten  take  (Tee2),  to  add  it,  and  then  omit  for  (because  it 
cannot  be  joined  to  Tet2)  and  then  add  granted  (by  Grent).    See  this  Reader,  p. 
67,  B,  II.,  1.  -    - -   - 


78  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

fact,  as  gi-eat  a  blunder  as  if  any  one  were  to  mistake  grammar  for  a 
peculiar  language,  and  to  suppose  it  possible  to  speak  correctly  with- 
out speaking  grammatically.  They  have,  in  short,  considered  Logic 
as  an  art  of  reasoning  ;  whereas  (so  far  as  it  is  an  art)  it  is  the™  art  of 
reasoning  ;  the  logician's  object  being,  not  to  lay  down  principles  by 
which  one  may  reason,  but  by  which  all  must  reason,  even  though 
not  distinctly  aware  of  them13 — to  lay  down  rules,  not  which  may  be 
followed  with  advantage,  but  which  cannot  possibly  be  departed/' f 
in  sound  reasoning. —  Whateley's  Elements  of  Logic. 


GEOLOGY. 

THE  manner  in  which  the  geologists  have  been  able  to  restore  the 
history  of  the  primeval  earth,  affords  one  of  the  most  brilliant  tri- 
umphs of  the  human  intellect.  Chemistry,  botany,  mineralogy,  and 
physical  geography1"1  have  all"5  aided  in  unfolding  this  enigma  ;  but  it 
is17  perhaps  to  comparative  anatomy,  which  enables  us  to  identify  an 
animal  by  a  single  bone  that  the  principal  merit  is  due.  A  laborer, 
in  blasting  a  limestone  rock  cr  sinking  a  well,  throws  up  a  bone, 
wrhich  has  been  buried  there 1S  for  millions  of  ages  ;13  it  is  looked  upon 

12  the.— 69,  R.  1. 

13  aware  of  them. — See  p.  59,  vi.  of  this  Reader. 

n  departed  from. — 244,  R.  3  (2).  In  this  phrase,  the  peculiar  Standard- 
Phonographic  principle  of  writing  the  present  lor  the  past  time  whenever  a 
stroke  or  more  can  be  saved  thereby,  not  only  saves  a  stroke  and  the  difficult  ob- 
tuse angle  formed  by  Per  and  Ted,  but  avoids  the  lifting  of  the  pen  which  would 
otherwise  have  been  required. 

1R  and  physical  geography. — The  word  physical  written  alone  would  not 
be  contracted  ;  and  this  contraction  of  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  falling  under  the 
rule  for  special  contractions.  See  these  notes,  p.  3,  note  33.  Words  ending  in 
ography-ic-ical  are  usually  provided  with  contractions  ending  in  Ger,  in  analogy 
wilh  this  contraction.  See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  ADMON- 
ISH-ED-ITION  and  APPREHENSIVE. 

16  have  all. — 178,  R.  4  ;  and  p.  62,  xiv.  of  this  Reader.    See  phrases  begin- 
ning with  HAVE  ALL  in  the  Standard-Phonogi'aphic  Dictionary. 

17  but  it  is. — This  is  distinguishable  from  Tees3  both  from  the  context  and 
from  the  fact  that  it  commences  slightly  above  the  line,  while  one  half  of  Tecs1' 
is  above  the  line.    This  useful  phrase-sign  was  first  presented  by  the  Hand- 
Book. 

i"  which  has  been  buried  there. — 2G4 ;  and  p.  62,  xii.  of  this  Reader. 
19  for  minings  of  ages. — The  Old  Phonography  was  defective  in  not  having 


6 


KEY  TO   THE  REPORTING   EXERCISES.  79 

1  with  wonder  by  the  simple  rustic,  who/supposes  that  it  must  have 
been  there20  ever  since  the  flood  ;  but,  to  the  eye  of  Cuvier,21  that 
bone  suggests  a  whole  animal,  with  all  the  conditions  necessary  for  its 
existence.  The  mastodon,  the  megatherium,  the  paleotherium,  and 
pterodactyl  are  thus  restored  to  our  natural  history, 

and  live  again  in  our  literature.  Nor  is  this  all ;  for,  where 
there  arc  no  bones1  to  speak,  the  strata  often  contains  the  im- 
press of  their*  former  inhabitants.  In  a  thin  bed  of  clay,  occurring 
between  two3  beds  of  sandstone,  this  evidence  is  often  preserved.  The 
ripple-mark,  the  worm-track,  the  scratching  oy  a  small  crab  on  the 
sand,  and  even  the  impression  of  a  raindrop,  so  distinct  as  to  indicate 
the  direction  of  the  wind  at  the  time  of  the  shower — these,  and  the 
footprints  of  the  bird  and  reptile,  are  all  stereotyped,  and  offer  an 
evidence  which  no  argument  can  gainsay,  no  prejudice  resist,  con- 
cerning the  natural  history  of  a  very  ancient  period  of  the  earth's 
life.  But  the  wave  that  made  that  ripple-mark  has  long  ceased  to 
wash  those  shores.  For  ages  has  the  surface  then  exposed  been  con- 
cealed  under  great  thicknesses  of  strata.  The  worm  and  the  crab/ 
have  left  no  solid  fragment  to  speak  of  their  form  or  structure  ;4  the 
bird  has  left  no  bone  that  has  yet  been  discovered  ;4  the  fragments  of 

provided  any  word-signs  for  the  frequently  occurring  numerical  denominations 
liuudred-th,  thousaud-th,  million-th. 

20  that  it  must   have  been  there. — This  phrase  can  be  rendered  perfectly 
distinct  from  must  b&  there,  by  writing  Eins-Ben-Jedoid  ;  but  as  the  context  fur- 
nishes sufficient  distinction,  I  prefer  this  mode  because  more  rapid, 

21  but  to  the  eye  of  Cuvier. — Cuvier  is  pronounced  kii-via ;  u  being  sound 
No.  29,  and  i  sound  No.  2  of  the  Extended  Alphabet.     P.  210,  §  25,  No,  29  ;  p.  206. 
§  24,  No.  29  ;  p.  201,  §  2,  2  ;  p.  202,  §  7.— (6).    This  expression  of  these  six  words 
gains  three  strokes  and  one   lifting  of  the  pen  over  tho  Old-Phonographic  ex- 
pression. 

61  where  there  are  no  bones. — This  speech-phrase  might  have  differ- 
ent representations.  Proceeding  in  the  Author's  chosen  way — (1)  Length- 
t-n  Wer2  (where)  to  add  there ;  and  (2)  lap  Ray  for  are ;  (3)  for  greatest  legibility, 
disjoin  no  bones,  writing  the  no  in  its  position. 

2  of  their. — Veedher1  for  ofthr,  and  Vet1  for  of  it,  are  new  and  useful  word- 
signs  introduced  by  the  Hand-Book. 

3  two. — As  numbers  are  usually  written  by  figures,  as  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  I  find  it 
generally  most  convenient  to  write  two  in  the  same  way  ;  and  besides,  Bedoid2  is 
not  so  distinct  as  2  ;  though,  of  course,  in  phrases,  such  as  one  or  two,  Wen2-Bed- 
oid  ;  two  or  three,  Bedoid2-Ther  ;  year  or  two,  Yeh!-Bedoid  ;   the  word-sign  must 
be  used. 

4  ••structure"  and  "discovered." — The  engraving,  by  presenting  a  larger 
space  than  usual  after  these  words,  affords  a  good  illustration  of  the  manner  of 


80  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

the  reptile  are  small,  imperfect,  and  extremely  rare.  Still,  enough 
is  known  to  determine  the  fact ;  and  that  fact  is  all  the  more  inter- 
esting and  valuable  from  the  very  circumstance  under  which  it  is 
Ansted.  3  G> 


EVIDENCE  OF  THE  CIRCULATION  OF  THE 
BLOOD. 

1.  WITH  the  microscope,  in  the  transparent  parts  of  animals,  the 
blood  can  be  seen  in  motion  ;   and  if  its  course  be  attentively5  ob- 
served, its  route  may  be  clearly  traced. 

2.  The  membranes,  termed  valves,  are  so  placed  as  to  allow  of  the 
freest  passage  to  the  blood  in  the  circle  described  ;  while  they  either 
altogether  prevent,  or  exceedingly  impede,   its  movements  fn  any 
direction. 

3.  The  effect  of  a  ligature  placed  around  a  vein  and  an  artery,  and 
of  a  puncture  made  above  the  ligature  in  the  one  vessel  and  below  it6 
in  the  other,  demonstrates  both  the  motion  of  the  blood  and  the 
course  of  it.     When  a  ligature  is  placed  around  a  vein,  that  part  of 
the  vessel  which  is  most  distant  from  the  heart  becomes  full  and  tur- 
gid, on  account  of  the  accumulation  of  blood  in  it ;  while  the  part  of 
the  vessel  which  is  between  the  ligature  and  the  heart  becomes  empty 
and  flaccid,  because  it  has  carried  on7  its  contents  to  the  heart  and  it 
can  receive  no  fresh  supply  from  the  body.     When,  on  the  contrary, 
a  ligature  is  placed  round  an  artery,  that  portion  of  the  vessel  which 
lies  between  the  ligature  and  the  heart  becomes  full  and  turgid,  and 
the  other  portion  empty  and  flaccid.     This  can  only  be8  because  the 
contents  of  the  two  vessels  move  in  opposite  directions — from  the 

•writing  by  a  good  reporter,  to  indicate  punctuation.  By  leaving  little  spaces,  in 
this  way,  corresponding  to  the  pauses  of  the  voice,  the  legibility  of  the  writing 
will  be  greatly  increased  ;  for  frequently  the  greatest  difficulty  in  reading  notes 
arises  from  misapprehending  the  punctuation. 

s  attentively.— 237,  R.  1,  b. 

*  below  it.— 221,  B.  *  ;  and  p.  61,  xvi.  of  this  Reader. 

7  because  it  has  carried  on.— 171,  3.     On  is  an  adverbial  modifier  of  car- 
ried, and  not  a  preposition  to  be  joined  to  ttt.  The  advanced  reporter  might  write 
this  phrase  (because  it  has  carnal  on  its  contents)  thus  :  Kays-Tees2-Krents:Tents. 

8  this   can   only   be.— P.  IG'J,  R.  12.     The  En-hook  is  here  omitted  as  an 
impediment. 


KEY  TO  TfiE  REPORTING  EXERCISES.  81 

heart  to  the  artery,  from  the  artery  to  the  vein,  and  from  the  vein  to 
the  heart.  At  the  same  time,  if  the  vein  be  punctured  above  the  lig- 
ature, there  will  be0  little  or  no  loss  of  blood ;  while,  if  it  be 
punctured  below  the  ligature,  the  blood  will  continue  to  flow  until 
the  loss  of  it  occasions  death,  which  could  not  be  unless  the  blood 
were  in  motion,  nor  unless  the  direction  of  its  course  were  from  the 
artery  to  the  vein,  and  from  the  vein  to  the  heart. 
4.  If  fluids  be  injected  into  the  veins  or  arteries,  whether  of  the  dead 

Tor  the  living  body,  they  readily  make  their  way  and  fill  the1  ves- 
sels, if  thrown  in  the  direction  stated  to  be  the  natural  course 
of  the  circulation  ;  but  they  are  strongly  resisted  if  forced  in  the  op- 
posite direction. 

Such  is  the  description,  and,  with  the  exception  of  the  first  proof, 
such  the  evidence  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  in  the  human  body, 
pretty  much  as  it  was  given  by  the  discoverer2  of  it,  the  illustrious 
Harvey.  Before  the  time  of  Harvey,  a  vague  and  indistinct  concep- 
tion that  the  blood  was  not  without  motion  in  the  body  had  been 
formed3  by  several  anatomists.  It  is  analogous  to  the  ordinary  mode 
in  which  the  human  mind4  arrives  at  discovery,  that  many  minds 
should  have  an  imperfect  perception  of  an  unknown  truth  before 
some  one  mind  sees  it  in  its  completeness,  .and  fully  discloses  it. 
Having  about  the  year  1620'  succeeded  in  completely  tracing  the  cir- 

9  there  will  be.— 175  ;  178,  B.  4,  6;  p.  60,  xiv.  of  this  Reader. 

71  and  fill  the. — When  the  perpendicular  tick  is  joined  for  a-n-d  how  is 
it  distinguished  from  or  ?    By  this  :  A-n-d  when  it  has  to  be  joined  by 
Tetoid  is  joined  in  preference  to  or  ;  and  or  is  disjoined  when  a-n-d  has  to  be 
written  by  Tetoid  because  the  Ketoid  will  not  join  conveniently. 

2  discoverer.— P.  194,  R.  7. 

s  had  been  formed.— P.  169,  R.  12.  En-hook  dropped  because  in  the  way; 
see  also  Phrase-Writing  Exhibit  (p.  67  of  this  Reader),  B,  II.,  1. 

•*  human  mind. — Under  principle  just  referred  to  we  can  facilitate  our  writ- 
ing by  omitting  the  n  of  human  ;  or,  we  can  make  a  slight  offset  for  the  En-hook. 

8  162O. — Throughout  these  exercises  I  have  given  the  common  figures  for 
dates,  instead  of  Phonographic  numerals  ;  because  if  any  one  were  not  disposed 
to  make  use  of  the  Phonographic  numerals,  he  need  not  be  troubled  to  read 
them  ;  but  any  one  who  has  studied  them  may  substitute  them  lor  the  figures  ; 
as  for  instance,  Kays-Lay-Tee,  for  1G20.  1  have  sometimes,  in  order  the  better  to 
distinguish  the  Phonographic  numerals,  written  a  long  Kay  above  the  line,  and 
written  the  remainder  of  the  date  below  ;  thus,  Kay1. Slay  Tee=1620.  This  corre- 
sponds to  the  longhand  practice,  which  is  sometimes  followed  in  these  exercises, 
of  placing  a  long  stroke  (which  may  be  regarded  as  a  long  1.  though  really  tho 
old-fashion  apostrophe)  before  the  concluding  figures  of  a  date. 


82  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

cle  in  which  the  blood  moves,  and  having  at  that  time  collected  all 
the  evidence  of  the  fact,  with  a  rare  degree  of  philosophical  forbear- 
ance, Harvey  still  spent  no  less  than  eight  years  in  re-examining  the 
subject  and  in  maturing  the  proof  of  every  point,  before  he  ventured 
to  speak  of  it'  in  public.  The  brief  tract  which  at  length  he  published 
was  written  with  extreme  simplicity,  clearness,  and  perspicuity,  and 
has  been  justly  characterized  as  one  of  the  most  admirable  examples 
of  a  series  of  arguments  deduced  from  observation  and  experiment 
that  ever  appeared  on  any  subject. 

Contemporaries  are  seldom  grateful  to  discoverers.  More  than  one 
instance7  is  on  record,  in  which  a  man  has  injured  his  fortune  and 
lost  his  happiness  through  the  elucidation  and  establishment  of  a 
truth  which  has  given  him  immortality.  It  may  be  that  there  are8 
physical  truths  yet  to  be  brought  to  light,9  to  say  nothing  of  new  ap- 
plications of  old  truths,  which,  if  they  could  be10  announced  and  dem- 
onstrated to-day,  would  be  the  ruin  of  the  discoverer.  It  is  certain 
that  there  are  moral  truths  to  be  discovered,  expounded,  and  en- 
forced, which,  if  any  man  had  now  penetration  enough  to  see 
them,  and  courage  enough  to  express  them,  would  cause  him  to 
be  regarded"  by  the  present  generation  with  horror  and  detestation. 
Perhaps,  during  those  eight  years  of  re  examination,  the  discoverer 
of  the  circulation  sometimes  endeavored  in  imagination  to  trace 
the  effect  which  the  stupendous  fact  at  the  knowledge  of  which 


«  before  he  ventured  to  speak  of  it.— It  is  sometimes  well  to  vocalize  a 
wo'd-sign  in  phrase-signs  when  there  is  seen  a  possibility  of  its  being  read  for 
some  otber  word.  In  this  case,  however,  there  is  no  such  necessity  lor  the  vo- 
calization of  Spee  ;  for  the  context  will  not  allow  it  to  be  read  for  anything  but 
speak ;  and  it  is  a  principle  of  Standard  Phonography  to  have  the  word-signs  and 
contractions  so  constructed  that  they  may  be  introduced  in  phrases  without 
their  legibility  being  seriously  impaired  thereby. 

"  more  than  one  instance. — 250,  3  ;  see  also  Phrase- Writing  (in  this  Reader) 
Special  Principles,  B,  II.,  1.  Here  than  (omitted)  is  obviously  the  impediment  in 
the  way  of  this  desirable  phrase-sign. 

*  it  may  be  that  there  are.— This  beautiful  writing-phrase  is  secured  by 
making  Em  heavy  to  add  be  ,  by  adding  Dheedher  for  tha'  lliere ,  and  by  adding 
are  by  Ray  (rather  than  Ar),  to  carry  the  pen  back  toward  the  line. 

3  yet  to  he  brought  to  light.— See  this  Reader,  p.  59,  v.,  1. 

"'  if  they  could  be. — To  join  could  distinctly  to  they,  let  the  latter  word  end 
a  little  heavy,  and  with  less  curve  than  usual. 

11  would  cause  him  to  be  regarded. — In  this  case  be  is  added  to  Jiim  by 
widening  the  Em,  and  to  is  omitted.  To  be  may  frequently  be  added  to  Em  in 
this  way  ;  for  instance,  Kel2-Emb,  dcum-ed  to  be;  Tee2  Semb,  it  seemed  to  be;  Tee2- 
Sernben,  it  seemed  to  have  been. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  S3 

he  had  arrived  would  have  on  the  progress  of  his  favorite  science ; 
and,  it  may  be,  the  hope  and  the  expectation  occasionally  arose,  that 
the  inestimable  benefit  he  was  about  to  confer  on  his  fellow-men 
would  secure  to  him  some  portion  of  their  esteem  and  confidence. 
What  must  have  been  his  disappointment  when  he  found,  after  the 
publication  of  his  tract,  that  the  little  practice  he  had  had  as  a  phy- 
sician by  degrees  fell  off!  He  was  too  speculative,  too  theoretical, 
not  practical.  Such  was  the  view  taken  even  by  his  friends.  His  en- 
emies saw  in  his  tract  nothing  but  indications  of  a  presumptuous 
mind,  that  dared  to  call  in  question  the  revered  authority  of  the  an- 
ck'nts  ;  and  some  of  them  saw,  moreover,  indications  of  a  malignant 
mind,  that  conceived  and  defended  doctrines  which,  if  not  checked, 
would  undermine  the  very  foundations  of  morality  and  religion. 
When  the  evidence  of  the  truth  became  irresistible,  then  these  per- 
sons suddenly  turned  round  and  said  that  it  was  all  known  before, 
and  that  the  sole  merit  of  this  vaunted  discoverer  consisted  in  having 
circulated  the  circulation.  The  pun  was  not  fatal  to  the  future  fume 
of  this  truly  great  man,  nor  even  to  the  gradual  though  slow  return 
of  the  public  confidence,  even  during  his  own  time,  for  he  lived  to 
attain  the  summit  of  reputation. — Philosophy  of  Health. 


RELIGION    AND    SCIENCE. 

8    NOT  less  disparaging  to  God's  wisdom,  though  less  destructive 
to  his  goodness,  was  the  geologic  theory,  invented  and  put 
forth1  in  18392 — only  fifteen  years  ago — by  the  Rev.  Dr.  Pye  Smith, 
in  order  to  reconcile  the  then  common  interpretation  of  the  lirst 
chapter  of  Genesis  with  the  demonstrations  of  geological  science.    Dr. 

o     i  and  pvit  forth.— P.  169,  R.  16. 

2  1839. — It  is  always  sufficient  to  write  the  last  two  figures  of  a  date  of 
the  present  century,  and  simply  the  last  figure  of  the  present  decade.  These  fig- 
ures may  be  preceded  by  an  apostrophe  ;  thus,  '39  (1839),  '0  (I860) ;  or  by  a  long 
stroke  like  Chay-Chay  close  to  them.  If  a  particular  date  or  a  fow  dates  are  fre- 
quently occurring,  sufficiently  distinguished  to  the  memory  of  the  reporter  liy 
the  last  figure,  of  course  that  figure  would  be  all  that  need  bo  written  after  (he 
apostrophe  or  the  long  stroke.  (In  such  a  case,  though  the  Phonographic  num- 
erals would  be  more  rapid,  it  is  sometimes  better  to  employ  the  common  figures, 
because  they  more  readily  catch  the  eye  and  are  of  advantage  in  finding  a  certain 
part  of  your  notes.)  But  this  plan  must  not  be  employed  if  the  reporter  employs 
the  plan  of  writing  only  the  last  figure  of  a  date  of  the  present  decade,  UNLESS  those 
dates  belong  to  the  present  decade,  or  if  not,  are  so  few  and  so  well  known  to 


84  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READM. 

Smith  conceded  so  much3  to  the  science  as  to  admit  that  our  glob« 
had  existed  for  countless  ages,  and  had  been  inhabited  by  various 
races  of  animals  before  Adam  was  created  ;  but,  for  the  sake  of  vin- 
dicating a  literal  interpretation  of  the  Mosaic  account  of  the  creation 
according  to  which  sun,  moon,  stars,  plants,  animals,  and  man  him- 
self were  created  not  quite  six  thousand  years  ago,  and  all  within  the 
compass  of  six  diurnal  days,  of  twenty-four  hours  each — he  main- 
tained that  somewhere,  perhaps  in  some  central  province  of  Asia- 
no  one  knows  its  latitude  or  longitude,  and  no  geography  or  geology 
has  discovered  any  trace  of  it — there  was  a  spot,  some  "ten  miles 
square,"  like  the  District  of  Columbia,  where,  while  all  outside  of  it, 
in  the  other  parts  of  the  globe,  "  was  life  and  light,  there  reigned 
for  a  time  only  death  and  darkness  amid  the  welterings  of  a  chaotic 
sea ;  and  which,  at  the  Divine  command,  was  penetrated  by  light, 
and  occupied  by  dry  land,  and  ultimately,  ere  the  end  of  the  creative 
week,  became  a  center  in  which  certain  plants  and  animals,  and  final- 
ly man  himself,  Avere  created  "  Now  what  a  disgraceful  instance  is 
this  of  the  tenacity  with  which  theological  pre-conceptions  are  held, 
in  defiance  of  philosophical  truth  I  To  suppose  that  while  all  the 
geologic  eras,  one  after  another,  were  passing  through  their  immense 
cycles,  and  while  all  the  rest  of  the  earth  was  advancing  to  a  state  of 
preparation  for  the  residence  of  man,  a  little  "  preserve  of  chaos," 
somewhere,  should  be  carefully  fenced  in,  and  choicely  kept,  until 
six  thousand  years  ago.  when  the  work  was  there  done  in  six  days 
which  it  had  elsewhere  occupied  countless  ages  to  perfect ;  and  that 
Moses  knew  all  about  this  six  day's  work,  but  did  not  know  about 
the  other  ;  or,  if  he  did  know  about  it,  kept  his  knowledge  to  him- 
self !  How  efficacious  would  be  the  union  and  co-operation  of  true 
religion  and  true  science  in  preventing  such  records  of  shame  from 
being  inscribed  on  the  pages  of  history  ! 

Everybody  knows  the  effect  of  continued  intermarriages  among 
persons  related  by  consanguinity.  The  cognate  blood,  unenriched 
and  unstimulated  from  other  fountains,  soon  breeds  weakness,  dis- 
ease, and  imbecility.  Just  so  it  is  with  a  sect  that  shuts  out  truth 
because  it  was  not  embraced  in  the  scheme  of  its  founders.  The  ideas 
of  suck  a  sect  have  no  alternative  for  their  continued  existence  but  10 
breed  in  and  in,  and  this,  by  a  psychological  law  as  immutable  as  the 
physiological,  soon  begets  a  progeny  of  faith  erroneous,  ausuid,  im- 
becile, and  idiotic. 

the  reporter  that  uo  confusion  can  possibly  arise  Irom  writing  only  the  last 
figure. 

*  so  much.— Lap  much,  instead  of  joining.    Sec  Phrase  Writing  Exhibit  (in 
this  Header),  p.  67,  B,  L 


KEY   TO  THE  REPORTING  EXERCISES,  85 

f  But  how  can  we  woo  Religion  to  wed  Science  ?  How  can  we  recon- 
cile Science,  so  long  estranged,  and  now,  I  fear,  more  estranged  than 
ever,  to  espouse  Religion,  and  thus  accept  the  only  bridegroom  that 
is  worthy  of  her  queenly  beauty  and  her  magnificent  dowry  ? 

I  answer,  Science  is  not  sectarian.  It  does  not  confine  itself  to  any 
segment  of  the  circle  of  philosophic  truth,  but  seeks  to  embrace  the 
entire  circumference.  At  the  present  day  a  bigot  in  science  cannot 
live. 

9  Its  pure  empyrean  air  either  exorcises  the  demon  of  bigotry 
out  of  him,  or  sends  him  and  it  after  the  swine  of  the  Gada- 
renes,  to  be  choked  in  the  sea  of  oblivion.  Let  any  man  at  this  time, 
in  any  scientific  body  or  association  in  Christendom,  defend  any  dog- 
ma on  the  authority1  of  his  government,  or  by  any  decree  of  old  coun- 
cil, or  assembly,  or  sanhedrim,  against  the  facts  of  observation  and 
the  results  of  experiment,  and  he  is  considered  as  blaspheming  against 
the2  "  higher  law,"  and  his  words  accounted  as  "  vain  babbling."  He 
cannot  be  heard  to  set  up  theory  against  fact,  authority  against  ex- 
perience, or  the  tradition  of  a  thousand  years  against  the  demonstra- 
tion of  yesterday.  The  only  religion,  therefore,  with  which  science 
will  freely  and  rejoicingly3  consent  to  live  and  to  work,4  is  an  unsectar- 
ian  religion.  Any  other  union  is  forced  and  unnatural,  involving 
discord,  dishonest  compliances,  and  a  suspension  of  progress  in  the 
pursuit  of  truth.  In  fine,  any  other  union  is  not  wedlock,  but  concu- 
binage only.  Science  has  no  creed  or  articles  of  faith  which  a  man 
must  subscribe  before  he  can  be  allowed  to  enroll  his  name  as  her 
follower,  and  to  offer  his  acceptable  contributions  at  her  shrine.  Sci- 
ence welcome*  all  new  truth,  all  honest  lovers  of  truth,  and  all  honest 
inquirers  after  truth,  from  whatever  quarter  they  may  come  ;  and  the 
recommendation  of  her  votaries  is,  not  that  they  have  attached  them- 
selves to  the  school  of  Werner  or  Hutton,  of  Newton  or  Laplace,  but 
that  they  have  not.  The  great  book  of  Nature  is  her  Bible.  Devoutly 
she  believes  that,  " 'tis  elder  Scripture,  writ  by  God's  own  hand," 
and  she  suffers  no  one  to  shut  it  up  in  order  that  he  may  open  in  its 
stead  some  philosophy  of  the  Dark  Ages,  or  substitute  for  it  some 


1  on   the    authority. — The  articles  a-n  and  the  are  generally  omitted, 
where  they  may  be  readily  supplied,  unless  they  are  convenient  connect- 


9 

ing  strokes. 

2  against  the. — Genst2-Chetoid  seems  about  as  convenient  a  sign,  and 
sometimes  better  for  adding  other  words. 

s  rejoicingly.— See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  DHR,  4. 
*  ami  to  work.— Weh4-Bay,  to  ^vork,  to  which  prefix  the  and  tick. 


'8C  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

cosmogony  of  the  heathen.  And  therefore  science  demands  of  relig- 
ion that  she,  too,  shall  love  truth  supremely  ;  not  Talmuds,  nor  acts 
of  Parliament,  nor  decrees  of  Councils  or  Synods,  and  that  she  shall 
subject  the  old  interpretation  to  every  new  test  which  the  continual 
evolution  or  unrolling  of  God's  providence  shall  supply. 

Science  is  the  interpreter  of  Nature.  It  reverently  inquires  ;  it  list- 
ens to  know  ;  it  seeks  ;  it  knocks  to  obtain  communication  ;  and  then 
all  that  it  does  is  reverently  to  record  nature's  processes,  and  accept 
them  as  true.  And  it  demands  that  religion  shall  proceed  on  similar 
exegetical  principles. — Hon.  Horace  Mann. 


OUR    FRIENDS    IN    HEAVEN. 

SUMMER  is  coming  to  us  once  more,  with  its  flowers,  and  its  grass, 
and  its  waving  trees  ;  and  naturally5  in  our6  gladness  our  hearts  turn 
to  our  friends,  scattered,  driven  hither  and  thither  over  life's  prairie. 
How  few  can  we7  draw  to  our  side  !  how  few  surround  us  in  our  walks, 
and  gather  in  our  home  circle  !  Yet  we  think  of  them  in  their  dis- 
persion, and  we  send  them  letter  or  token,  and  receive  from  them  from 
afar  greeting  and  token  in  reply.  But  we  have  friends  to  whom  we 
can  send8  no  word,  no  token.  We  arc  certain  that  we  still  have  these 
friends.  We  call  them  ours ;  and  though  the  places  that  once  knew 
them,  now  know  them  no  more  ;  though  their  name  is  effaced  from 
the  roll  of  living 


10 


names,  yet  we  call  them  still  our  own.     Amid  our  summer 
wreaths  and  joyous  garlands,  let  there  be1  one  to  Our  Friends 


5  and  naturally.— 261,  R.  2. 

6  in  our. — If  placed  by   the  first  word,  would  be  Her1,  which  may  conflict 
•with  near,  Ner1.     Greater  certainty  demands  that  the  our  should  determine  the 
position  of  this  phrase-sign.  Sec,  in  this  Reader,  Phrase-Sign  Position,  II.,  on  p.  C8. 

i  can  -we.— P.  1C9,  R.  12. 

8  we  can  send.— P.  1G8,  R..  3  ;  p.  109,  R.  12  ;  p.  CO,  xi.  of  this  Reader.  It  is 
very  desirable  that  such  phrases  as  we  give,  we  can,  we  could,  which  are  spoken  as 
rapidly  as  7  give,  I  can,  I  could,  should  bo  as  conveniently  and  rapidly  written. 
To  attain  this,  I  introduced  the  method  of  joining  we  as  a  hook  in  a  lew  such 
cases.  See  remarks  as  to  different  uses  of  the  same  signs  and  of  those  nearly 
alike,  in  note  13,  p.  70  of  this  Header. 

\\j    !  let  there  be. — See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  DHH,  3,  a. 


KEY   TO   TfiE  tUEfOfcTlNG   EXERCISES.  87 

fn  Heaven.  Are  we  not  richer  for  their  being  there  ?  Arc  we  not  made 
nearer  to  heaven  by  thinking  of  them  there  ?  They  have  known  us 
so  intimately  ;  they  have  known  our  history,  our  individualities,  our 
soul-wants,  our  aspirations,  our  trials.  We  have  wandered  with  them 
•hand  in  hand  through  the  tangled  wood  of  life.  We  have  lost  our 
way  together.  We  have  hungered  and  thirsted  together,  and  looked 
out2  with  weary  and  perplexed  star-gazing,  now  trying  this  path  and 
now  that ;  and  we  have  rejoiced  together  when  our  way  has  been 
made  plain  before  us.  We  have  seen  them  wrestle  and  strive  with 
life,  as  wo  still  must.  We  have  seen  their  heart  fail,  and  their  hand 
fall  slack,  as  ours,3  full  oft,  may  do.  We  have  seen  them  bear  the 
wrench  and  strain,  the  cruel  agony  which  life  forces  inexorably  on  all, 
in  one  or  other4  of  its  phases  ;  and,  last  of  all,  we  have  seen  them  at 
the  river  of  death.  We  have  seen  the  heaven  opening,  and  the  angels 
descending,  and  they  have  been  borne  from  our  sight,  and  as  they 
rose  they  were  transfigured,  and  became  as  the  sons  of  God. 

It  is  strange  what  a  change  is  wrought  in  one  hour  by  death.  Tho 
moment  our  friend  is  gone  from  us  forever,  what  sacredness  invests 
him  !  Everything  he  ever  said  or  did  seems  to  return  to  us  clothed  in 
new  significance.  A  thousand  yearnings  rise  of  things  we  would  fain3 
say  to  him — of  questions  unanswered,  and  now  unanswerable.  All  he 
wore,  or  touched,  or  looked  iipon  familiarly,  become  sacred  as  relics. 
Yesterday  these  were  homely  articles,  to  be  tossed  to  and  fro,  handled 
lightly,  given  away  thoughtlessly  ;  to-day  we  touch  them  softly,  our 
tears  drop  on  them  ;  death  has  laid  his  hand  on  them,  and  they 
have  become  holy  in  our  eyes.  Those  are  sad  hours  when  one  has 
passed  from  our  doors  never  to  return,  and  we  go  back  to  set  the 
place  in  order.  There  the  room  so  familiar,  the  homely  belongings 
of  their  daily  life — each  one  seems  to  say  to  us,  in  its  turn,  "  Neither 
shall  their  place  know  them  any  more." 

Ah  !°  why  does  this  bring  a  secret  pang  with  \  it,  when  we  know 
that  they  are  where  none  shall  any  more  say,  "  I  am  sick  !  "  Could 
only  one  flutter  of  their  immortal  garments  be  visible  in  such  mo- 


2  and  looked  out.— In  this  case  the  principle  of  writing  the  present  for 
the  past  time  is  availed  of.  Were  it  not  for  this,  there  would  have  been  re- 
quired an  additional  stroke  and  lilting  of  the  pen. 

a  as  ours.— 21G,  i. 

•'  in  one  or  other. — Sec  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  DHB. 

5  we  -would  faiu.— 262  ;  and  p.  60,  x.  of  this  Header. 

6  Ah  !— As  the  words  Ah !  and  Oh!  or  0!  are  usually  spoken  quite  slowly, 
I  prefer  to  write  them  in  longhand. 


$8  SECOND    STA^DAHD-PHOSOGRAPSIC   KtACEE. 

ments — could  their  face,7  glorious  Avith  the  light  of  heaven,  once  smile 
on  the  deserted  room,  it  might  he  hetter.  One  needs  to  lose  friends 
to  understand  one's  self  truly.  The  death  of  a  friend  teaches  things 
within  that  we  never  knew  before.  We  may  have  expected  it,  pre- 
pared for  it,  it  may  have  been  hourly  expected  for  weeks  ;  yet  when 
It  comes,  it  falls  on  us  suddenly,  and  reveals  in  us  emotions  we  could 
not  dream.  The  opening  of  those  heavenly  gates  for  them  startles 
and  flutters  our  souls  with  strange,  mysterious  thrills  tmfclt  before. 
The  glimpse  of  glories,  the  sweep  of  voices,  all  startle  and  dazzle  us, 
and  the  soul  for  many  a  day  aches  and  longs  with  untold  longings. 

We  divide  among  ourselves  the  possessions  of  our  lost  ones.  Each 
well-known  thing  comes  to  us  with  an  almost  supernatural  power. 
The  book  we  once  read  with  them,  the  old  Bible,  the  familiar  hymn  ; 
then,  perhaps,  little  pet  articles  of  fancy,  made  dear  to  them  by  some 
peculiar  taste,  the  picture,  the  vase — 

Uhow  costly  are  they  now  in  our  eyes !  We  value  them  not 
for  their  beauty  or  worth,  hut  for  the  frequency  with  which 
We  have  seen  them  touched  or  used  by  them  ;  and  our  eye  runs  over 
the  collection,  and  perhaps  lights  most  lovingly  on  the  homeliest 
thing  which  may  have  been  oftenest  touched  or  worn  by  them. 

But  there  are  invisible  relics  of  our  lost  ones'  more  precious  than  the 
book,  the  picture,  or  the  vase.  Let  us  treasure  them  in  our  hearts. 
Let  us  bind  to  our  hearts  the  patience  which  they  will  never  need 
again  ;  the  fortitude  in  suffering  which  belonged  only  to  this  suffering 
state.  Let  us  take  from  their  dying  hand  that  submission  under  af- 
fliction Avhich  they  shall  need  no  more  in  a  world  where  affliction  is 
unknown.  Let  us  collect  in  our  thoughts  all  those  cheerful  and 
hopeful  sayings  which  they  threw  out  from  time  to  time,2  as  they 
walked  with  us,  and  string  them  as  a  rosary  to  be  daily  counted  over. 
Let  us  test  our  own  daily  life  by  what  must  be  their  now  perfected 
estimate  ;  and  as  they  once  walked  with  us  on  earth,  let  us  walk  with 
them  in  heaven. 

We  may  learn  at  the  grave  of  our  lost  ones  how  to  live  with  the 
living.  It  is  a  fearful  thing  to  live  so  carelessly  as  we  often  do  with 
those  dearest  to  us,  who  may  at  any  moment  be  gone  forever.  The 
life  we  are  living,  the  words  we  are  now  saying,  wTill  all  be  lived  over 

"  could  their   face.— To  distinguish  cou'  thr  from  ca'  thr,  keep  the  more 
frequent  (ca'  thr)  in  the  natural  position,  and  \vrite  could  thr  by  Kaydher5. 


1  of  our  lost  ones. — To  secure  this  convenient  phrase-sign,  drop  the 
t  of  lost,  and  write  it  downward  so  that  Wens  may  be  joined. 


11 

2  from  time  to  time.— 250,  3,  From— to. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  89 

in  memory  over  some  future  grave.  If  we  would  know  how  to  meas- 
ure our  words  to  living  friends,  let  us  see  how  we  feel  towards  the 
dead.  Let  us  walk  softly  ;  let  us  forbear  and  love  ;  none  ever  repent- 
ed of  too  much3  love  to  a  departed  friend  ;  none  ever  regretted  too 
much4  tenderness  and  indulgence  ;  but  many  a  tear  has  been  shed  for 
too  much  Ixardness  and  severity.  Let  our  friends  in  heaven,  then, 
teach  us  how  to  treat  our  friends  on  earth  ;  thus,  by  no  vain  fruitless- 
sorrow,  but  by  a  deeper  self-knowledge,5  a  tenderer  and  more  sacred 
estimate  of  life,  may  our  heavenly  friends  prove  to  us  ministering 
spirits.6 

The  Apostle  Paul  says  to  the  Christian,  "  All  things7  are  yours — life 
and  death."  Let  us  not  lose  either  ;  let  us  make  Death  our  own,  in  a 
richer,  deeper,  and  more  solemn  earnestness  of  life.  So  those  souls 
which  have  gone  from  our  ark,  and  seemed  lost  over  the  gloomy  ocean 
of  the  unknown,  shall  return  to  us,  bearing  the  olive  leaves  of  Para- 
disc  I—Mrs.  II.  B.  Stowe. 


CREATION. 

CREATION,  in  its  primary  import,  signifies  the  bringing  into  being 
something  which  did  not  before  exist.  The  term  is  therefore8  most 
generally  applied  to  the  original9  production  of  the  materials  whereof 
the  visible  world  is  composed.  It  is  also  used  in  a  secondary  or  sub- 
ordinate sense,  to  denote  those  subsequent  operations  of  the  Deity 
xipon  the  matter  so  produced,  by  which  the  whole  system  of  Nature, 
and  all  the  primitive  genera  of  things,  receive  their  form,  qualities, 
and  laws. 

There  is  no  subject  concerning  which  learned  men  have  differed  in 

(  *  too  much. — Here  much  may  bo  safely  joined.  In  so  much,  write  Es2  and 
Ch'ay3  lapped,  as  it  cannot  be  clearly  joined.  See  phrases  under  MUCH  in  the 
Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

*  too  much.— Safely  written  Bedoid2-Chay. 
6  self-knowledge. — P.  113,  R.  14. 

6  ministering  spirits. — Drop  the  tn</-dot  to  secure  this  phrase-sign. 

1  all  things.— In  the  Old  Phonography,  the  advantage  of  niauy  phrase-signs 
was  lost  from  prohibiting  many  junctions  which  the  practiced  writer  will  find 
sufficiently  easy,  especially  by  proper  variations  of  the  inclination  of  sloping 
strokes  and  of  the  curvature  of  curved  ones.  See  Compendium,  §  25. 

*  is  therefore.— 261,  R.  C,  2. 

»  to  the  original.— To  is  here  implied  by  writing  the  <fte-(ick  (Petoid  in  this 
case)  iu  the  fourth  position.  260,  6.  Chetoid*  is  reserved  for  to  how. 


90  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

their  conjectures  more  than  in  this  of  creation.  "  It  is  certain,"  as  a 
good  writer10  observes,  "  that  none  of  the  ancient  philosophers  had 
the  smallest  idea  of  its  being  possible  to  produce  a  substance  out  of 
nothing,"  or  that12  even  the  power  of  the  Deity  himself  could  work 
without  any 

-J  Ci  materials  to  work  upon.'  Hence  some  of  them,  among  whom 
J[  h  was  Aristotle,  asserted  that  'the  world  was  eternal,  both  as  to 
its  matter2  and  form.  Others,  though  they  believed  that  the  gods  had 
given  the  world  its  form,  yet  imagined  the  materials  whereof  it  is 
composed  to  have  been3  eternal.  Indeed,  the  opinions  of  the  ancients, 
who  had  not  the  benefit  of  revelation,  were  on  this  head  so  confused 
and  contradictory,  that  nothing  of  any  consequence  can  be  deduced 
from  them.  The  free-thinkers  of  our  own  and  of1  former  ages  have 
denied  the  possibility  of  creation,  as  being  a  contradiction  to  reason  ; 
and  of  consequence  have  taken  the  opportunity  from  thence  to  dis- 
credit revelation.  On  the  other  hand,5  many  defenders  of  the0  sacred 

1°  good  writer.— 164,  R.  2  ;  p.  GO,  xii.  of  this  Reader. 

n  out  of  nothing. — The  maxim  of  the  ancients  upon  this  subject  was,  Ex 
nihilo  nihilfit— Nothing  from  nothing  springs.  (&).  In  this  case  it  is  better  to  ex- 
press o/by  the  Vee  hook  than  to  imply  it. 

12  or  that. — It  is  allowable  to  join  or  (Tetoidi)  to  any  following  word  to  which 
and  would  be  joined  by  a  horizontal  tick  (i.e.,  Ketoid).  Ketoid^Dhet,  and  that. 

Af\     !  to  work  upon. — Putting  the  \Veh-hook  in  the  fourth  position  im- 
-l  £     plies  a  preceding  to.     See  this  Reader,  p.  59,  v.  2. 

2  as  to  its  matter. — Tees*  =to  its;  at  prefixed  will  rest  on  the  line.  Observe 
that  Stee3  would  have  the  Tee  through  the  line ;  and  Stee<  (to  sit,  or  to  tlte  city) 
•would  have  the  circle  close  against  the  lower  edge  of  the  line. 

3  to    have    been. — This  new  word-sign  is  made  thus:  Bee3=  to  be,  plus  En- 
hook  =to  been ;  have  being  omitted,  and  naturally   supplied,  as  there  is  no  such 
phrase  as  to  been.  Bee3  for  to  be  originated  in  the  Old  Phonography,  in  the  seventh 
or  eighth  edition,  when  Bedoid3  was  to,  to  which  bt  was   added  by  Bee,  resulting 
in  Bee'. 

4  "  of  our  own  "  and  "  and  of." — Here  are  two  beautiful  instances  of  add- 
ing hooks  to  ticks.     The  ticks  are  shorter  theoretically  than  a  half-length,  and 
by  sense   are  distinguished  from  half-length  signs.     But,  by  a  little  care  the 
writer  will  find  it  easy  to  distinguish  by  Bize  half-lengths  from  licks,  as  Prent 
aud  Kelt  from  Prentoid  and  Keftoid. 

5  on  the  other  hand.— This  phrase-sign  is  arrived  at  by  omitting  the  read- 
ily supplied  of  the,  and  expressing  in  the  briefest  manner  other  hand,  Dhrend. 
But  why  make  it  second  position  ?    To  distinguish  it  from  the  desirable  phrase- 
fiign,  Dhrent3,  there  would  (or  had)  not,  in  which  the  vowel  of  the  second  word  is 
allowed  to  determine  the  position  ;  as  in  Dhrent1,  there  OUGHT  not. 

6  many  defenders  of  the.— Here  of  the  is  omitted,  although  the  following 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  91 

writings  have  asserted  that7  creation  out  of  nothing,  so  far  from  being 
a  contradiction  to  reason,  is  not  only  probable,  but  demonstrably 
certain.  Nay,  some  have  gone*  so  far  as  to  say,9  that  from  the  very 
inspection  of  the  visible  system  of  Nature,  we  are  able  to  infer  that  it 
was  once  in  a  state  of  non-existence."  \Vc  cannot,  however,  here 
enter  into  the  multiplicity  of  the  arguments  on  both  sides;  it  is  enough 
for  us  to  know  what  God  has  been  pleased  to  reveal,  both  concerning 
himself  and  the  works  of  his  hands.  Men,  and  other  animals  that 
inhabit  the  earth  and  the  seas  ;  all  the  immense  varieties  of  herbs  and 
plants  of  which  the  vegetable  kingdom  consists;  the  globe  of  the  earth; 
and  the  expanse  of  the  ocean— these  we  know  to  have  been  produced 
by  his  power.  Besides  the  terrestrial  world,  which  we  inhabit,  we  see 
many  other  material  bodies  disposed  around  it  in  the  wide  extent  of 
space.  The  moon,  which  is  in  a  particular  manner  connected  with 
our  earth,  and  even  dependent  upon  it ;  the  sun,  and  the  other  plan- 
ets, with  their10  satellites,  which,  like  the  earth,  circulate  round  the 
sun,  and  appear  to  derive  from  him  light  and  heat ;  those  bodies 
which  we  call  fixed  stars,"  and  consider  as  illuminating  and  cherishing 
with  heat  each  its  peculiar  system  of  planets ;  and  the  comets  which 
at  certain  periods  surprise  us  with  their  appearance,  and  the  nature 
of  whose  connection1'2  with  the  general  system  of  Nature,  or  with  any 
particular  system  of  planets,  we  cannot  pretend  to  have  fully  discov- 
ered ;  these  are  so  many  more  of  the  Deity's  works,  from  the  contem- 


word  is  carried  to  the  next  line,  an  example  which  the  reporter  may  safely  follow 
in  almost  all  cases. 

7  have  asserted  that. — That  what?  What  Is  said  in  the  following  sentence. 
That  hi  such  relations  is  called  a  conjunction,  or  joining  word,  and  in  most  of 
such  cases  is  best  joined  to  the  preceding  word. 

s  some  have  gone. — 250,  3  ;  see  also  p.  61,  xix.  of  this  Reader. 

9  so  far  as  to  say. — This  speech-phrase  might  be  written  thus :  Es2-Ef-Iss,  so 
far  as;  then  join  the  dependent  to  say  that,  omitting  the  to  as  easily  supplied.  But 
it  is  better  to  divide  the  phrase  thus,  so-fa[r]-as  \to\-say-that.    It  is  better  to  let  as 
go  with  its  related  word/ar,  than  to  join  it  (as  it  is  sometimes)  to  Es^. 

< 

10  with  their. — To  get  this  desirable  phrase-sign,  let  us  change  Web1,  wi(th}, 
to  Way1,  and  then  we  can  add  thr  by  lengthening,  as  in  so  many  other  cases. 

11  fixed  stars.— In  astronomical  matters  it  is  desirable  to  have  a  convenient 
phrase-sign  for  this  phrase.     If  we  write  Ef-Kayst  forjixed,  we  cannot  join  Steh- 
Ars  for  stars.    Let  us,  therefore,  omit  the  impediment,  Kayst,  and  write  Efsters, 
that  is,  Ji'  stars.    See  237,  R.  2. 

12  and  the  nature  of  whose  connection.— Join  nal[ure]  to  and  the  by  a  good 
angle  ;  imply  o/by  nearness  of  whose;  under  which  write  ekshon,  to  imply  con. 


92  SECOND  STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC  READER. 

plation  of  which  we  cannot  but  conceive  the  most  awful  ideas  of  his 
creative  power. 

"Matter,  however,  whatever  the  varieties  of  form  under  which  it 
is  made  to  appear,13  the  relative  disposition  of  its  parts,  or  the  motions 
communicated  to  it,  is  but  an  inferior  part  of  the  works  of  creation. 
We  believe  ourselves  to  be  animated  with  a  much  higher  principle 
than  brute  matter  ;  in  viewing  the  manners  and  economy  of  the  lower 
animals,  we  can  scarce  avoid  acknowledging  even  them  to  consist  of 
something  more  than  various  modifications  of  matter  and  motion. 
The  other  planetary  bodies,  which  seem  to  be  in  circumstances  nearly 
analogoiis  to  those  of  our  earth,  are  surely,  as  well  as  it,  destined  for 
the  habitations  of  rational,  intelligent  beings.  The  existence  of  in- 
telligences of  a  higher  order  than  man,  though  infinitely14  below  the 
Deity,  appears  extremely  probable.  Of  these  spiritual  beings,  called 
angels,  Ave  have  express  intimation  in  Scripture.  But  the  limits  of  the 
creation  we  must  not  pretend  to  define.  How  far  the  regions  of  space 
extend,  or  how  they  are  filled,  we  know  not.  How  the  planetary 
worlds,  the  sun,  and  the  fixed  stars  are  occupied,  we  do  not  pretend  to 
have  ascertained.  We  are  even  ignorant  how  wide  a  diversity  of 

I'  tinder  which  it  is  made  to  appear.— Here  Is  a  speech-phrase.  How 
can  we  best  secure  a  writing-phrase  ?  To  under  (Ned)  join  winch,  shortening  it  to 
to  add  it ;  then  add  is  made,  and  then  add  the  dependent  [to]  appear.  Remember 
that  these  phrases  are  not  to  be  regarded  as  arbitraries,  but  as  exemplars,  senr- 
ing  to  suggest  many  others. 

u  infinitely.— One  great  object  kept  constantly  in  view  by  me  in  my  Phono- 
graphic improvements  was  the  removal  of  the  disparities  which  existed  in  the  Old 
Phonography,  in  which  the  outlines  for  many  frequent  and  rapidly-spoken  words 
were  fifty  per  cent,  slower  than  speech,  BO  that  if  the  other  words  could  be  writ- 
ten with  the  rapidity  of  speech,  the  reporter  was  obliged  to  fall  behind  in  writing 
the  slow  words,  of  which,  for  example,  the  word  infinitely  (En-Ef-Net  El),  was  one, 
requiring  four  slowly-written  strokes,  i.e.,  slow  as  compared  with  straight  lines. 
For  Infinite-ly,  etc.,  Standard  Phonography  provides  a  word-sign  which  can  be 
written  with  sufficient  rapidity ;  and  by  providing  appropriate  word-signs  (of 
which  this  is,  of  course,  but  a  single  instance),  by  new  principles  of  writing  and 
new  sources  of  brevity,  and  by  general  principles  of  contraction,  "the  rough 
places  have  been  made  smooth,"  so  that  the  pen  or  pencil  by  an  even  movement 
keeps  pace  with  the  speaker.  For  further  illustration — the  old  form  Tetoid-Kot- 
oid,  when  employed  for  why  and  while,  was  too  slow,  requiring  two  strokes  lor 
rapidly-spoken  monosyllables,  and  allowing  but  little  opportunity  for  joining  in 
phrases  ;  but  when  used,  as  in  Standard  Phonography,  to  represent  two  words, 
it  is  sufficiently  rapid  ;  and  the  use  of  Tetoid-Ketoid  in  this  way,  and  providing 
quickly-written  word-signs  for  why  (Way1)  and  while  (Wei1),  serve  to  remove  a 
disparity  of  speed  which  must  have  been  felt  by  any  Old  Phonographer  who  has 
had  to  write  after  a  rapid  speaker  such  phrases  as  the  following :  Wky  is  it ;  why 
are  you ;  why  were  you;  while  it;  while  thr ;  but  a  htlle  time  (Tetoid2-Ketoid-Let- 
Tee)  ;  or  a-n  (Tetoid'-Ketoid);  but  lam  (Tetoid^-Ketojd-Em). 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  93 

forms,  what  an1'  infinity  of  living  animated  beings  may  inhabit  our 
own  globe.  So  confined  is  our  knowledge  of  creation,  yet  so  grand, 
so  awful,  that  part  which  our  narrow  understandings  can  compre- 
hend. 

"Concerning  the  periods  of  time  at  which  the  Deity  executed  his 
several  works,  it  cannot  be  pretended  that  mankind  have  had  oppor- 
tunities of  receiving  very  particular  information.  Many  have  been 
the  conjectures,  and  curious  the  fancies  of  learned  men,  respecting  it ; 
but,  after  all,  we  must  be  indebted  to  the  sacred  writings  for  the  best 
information."  Different  copies,  indeed,  give  different  dates. 


The  Hebrew  copy  of  the  Bible,  which  we  Christians,  for  good 
reasons,  consider  as  the  most  authentic,  dates  the  creation 
of  the  world  3,944  years  before  the  Christian  era.  The  Samaritan  Bi- 
ble, again,  fixes  the  era  of  the  creation  4,305  years  before  the  birth  of 
Christ.  And  the  Greek  translation,  known  by  the  name1  of  the  Sep- 
tuagint  version  of  the  Bible,  gives  5,270  as  the  number  of  the  years 
which  intervened  between  these  two  periods.  By  comparing  the  va- 
rious dates  in  the  sacred  writings,2  examining  how  these  have  come3  to 
disagree,  and  to  be  diversified  in  different  copies;  endeavoring  to  re- 
concile the  most  authentic  profane  with  sacred  chronology,  some  ingen- 
ious men  have  formed  schemes  of  chronology  plausible,  indeed,  but 
not  supported  by  sufficient  authorities,  which  they  would  gladly  per- 
suade us  to  receive  in  preference  to  any  of  those4  above  mentioned. 

1S  what  an. — The  article  o  or  an  is  generally  joined  to  the  following  word, 
except  when  the  preceding  related  word  is  a  breve  (that  is,  a  circle,  semi-circle, 
dash,  or  tick). 


13 


i  by  the  name. — Obviously  name  will  join  better  with  Retoid  than 
with  Chetoid  (which  more  commonly  follows  Bee1,  for  6^  the),  Chetoid 

generally  joining  more  easily  than  Retoid  with  the  following  word  ;  as  in  Bee1- 

Chetoid-Way,  by  the  way. 

f"  2  m  the  sacred  writings. — If  we  omit  the  as  an  impediment  and  as  readily 
supplied,  then  we  may  joiu  in  by  the  In-hook  ;  and  as  that  is  adapted  to  the 
following  stroke  (for  sacred  here),  we  shall  secure  at  once  the  highest  legibility 
and  brevity. 

3  these  have  come. — Although  this  is  a  speech  phrase,  we  disjoin  come  for 
greater  legibility. 


_'  of  those. — En4-Dhees  might  be  safely  used  for  to  any  of  th  (=these, 
this,  or  those)  ;  but  for  Bake  of  greatest  certainty  those  is  disjoined  and  put  in  its 
ition. 


*  to  any  of  those.— En^-Dh 

is,  or  those)  ;  '     '  "         

assigned  posit 


94  SECOKD    STANDARD-PHOXOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Usher  makes  out  from  the  Hebrew  Bible  4,004  years  as  the  term  be- 
tween the  creation  and  the  birth  of  Christ.  Josephus,  according  to 
Dr.  AVills  and  Mr.  Winston,  makes  it  4,G58  years;  and  M.  Pezion, 
with  the  help  of  the  Septuagint,  extends  it  to  5,872  years.  Usher's 
system  is  the  most  generally  received.  But  though  these  different 
systems  of  chronology  arc  so  inconsistent,  and  so  slenderly  supported, 
yet  the  differences  among  them  are  so  inconsiderable  in  comparison 
•with  those  which5  arise  before  us  when  we  contemplate  the  chronology 
of  the  Chinese,  the  Chaldeans,  and  the  Egyptians,  and  they  agree  so 
well0  with  the  general  information  of  authentic  history,  and  with  the 
appearances  of  nature  and  of  society,  that  they  may  be  considered  us 
nearly  fixing  the  true  period  of  the  creation  of  the  earth."  Uncer- 
tain, however,  as  we  may  be7  as  to  the  exact  time  of  the  creation,  we 
may  profitably  apply  ourselves  to  the  contemplation  of  this  immense 
fabric.8  Indeed,  the  beautiful  and  multiform  works  around  us  must 
strike  the  mind  of  every  beholder  with  wonder  and  admiration,  un- 
less he  be  enveloped  in  ignorance,  and  chaiaed  down  to  the  earth 
with  sensuality.  These  works  every  way  proclaim  the  wisdom,  the 
power,  and  the  goodness  of  the  Creator.  Creation  is  a  book  which 
the  nicest  philosopher  may  study  with  the  deepest  attention.  Unlike 
the  works  of  art,  the  more  it  is  examined,  the  more  it  opens  to  us 
sources  of  admiration  of  its  great  Author  ;  the  more  it  calls  for  our 
inspection,  and  the  more  it  demands  our  praise.  Here  everything  is 
adjusted  in  the  exactest  order;  all  answering  the  wisest  ends,  and 

5  in  comparison  with  those  which.— Let  us  omit  the  two  impediments, 

com  and  with. 

6  so  well. — So  what  ?    So  well.    The  Way-hook  in  well  secnres  the  greatest 
legibility,  but  it  may  be  safely  dropped  in  many  phrases  where  the  hook  would 
not  join  ;  as  in  Es2-Lay,  so  [w]ell  ;  Ver2-Lay,  very  [w]elt.  See  WELL  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary  ;  especially  the  postpositive  phrases  (that  is,  phrases 
in  which  well  follows  other  words). 

'  we  may  be. — P.  168,  R.  3  ;  see  also  in  this  Reader,  p.  CO,  xi.,  second  para- 
graph. 

*  this  immense  fabric. — The  Compendium,  §  27,  4,  requires  that  a  cir- 
cle between  two  strokes  shall  be  written  in  the  most  convenient  manner.  In 
Tees-Kay,  Tees-Pee,  Chays-Gay,  Chays-Pee,  the  most  convenient  manner  is  to 
turn  the  circle  on  the  left-hand  side  of  Tee  and  Chay.  In  such  a  combination  as 
Dhees-Em  the  question  of  convenience  must  be  settled  in  favor  of  turning  the 
circle  on  the  right-hand  side  of  Dhee  ;  i.e.,  so  that  it  comes  on  the  concave  side 
of  both  Dhee  and  Em.  "Dhees  (with  Iss  on  the  back)-Em"  is  apt  to  be  written 
"  Vee-Ar-Sem,"  unless  the  pupil  trains  the  pen  to  stop  a  little  at  the  end  of  Dhee  be- 
fore adding  Sem.  As  to  Ef-Sem,  the  most  convenient  way  of  writing  the  circle  is 
undoubtedly  on  the  back  of  Ef. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  95 

acting  according  to  the  appointed  laws  of  Deity,  Here  the  Christian 
is  led  into  the  most  delightful  field  of  contemplation.  To  him  every 
pebble  becomes  a  preacher,  and  every  atom  a  step  by  which  he  ascends 
to  his  Creator.  Placed  in  this  beautiful  temple,  and  looking  around 
on  all  its  various  parts,  he  cannot  help  joining  with  the  Psalmist  in 
saying,  "0  Lord,  how  manifold  are  thy  works!  in  wisdom  hast 
thou  made  them  all."9 — Buck's  Theological  Dictionary. 


THE  AGE   OF   THE  HUMAN   RACE. 

OF  all  the  subjects  which  have  occupied  the  attention  of  the  scien- 
tific societies10  and  journals  of  Europe  during  the  past  year,  none  have 
excited  so  much  interest  as  the  geological  evidence  lately  adduced 
from  various  sources,  tending  to  prove  that  the  period  of  man's  exist- 
ence upon  our  planet  has  been  greatly  vaster  than"  that  hitherto  as- 
signed by  biblical  and  common  chronology.  It  is  also  a  very  notice- 
able circumstance  that, 12  notwithstanding  this  subject  has  occupied 
the 

U    attention  of  the  scientific  men,  generally,  of  Europe,  during 
the  past  year,  to  a  greater  extent  than  any  other,  hardly  a 
word  relative  to  the  evidence  or  discussion  has  found  its  way1  into  any 
American  publication  (book  or  newspaper)  save  the  Annual  of  Scienhjic 
Discovery.     Whether  theological  prejudice  or  censorship  has  contrib- 


9  hast  thou  made  them  all. — Write  has  for  hast ;  adapt  it  to  the  position 
of  thou  (for  sake  of  legibility)  and  join  made  them. 

1°  scientific  societies. — The  word  society  is  frequently  represented  in  phrase- 
writing  by  Es.  It  is  rendered  more  legible  in  such  case  by  writing  it  through  the 
last  stroke  of  the  preceding  word. 

11  vaster  than.— 201,  R.  8  ;  and  in  this  Reader,  p.  Cl,  xviii. 

12  noticeable  circumstance  that. — How  can  we  join  this  conjunction  that 
to  Stens=  circumstance?    By  turning  the  circle  on  the  back  of  Sten,  which  makes 
an  Ens-circle,  and  then  adding  that. 

Ui  has  found  its  way. — As  we  cannot  join  to  the  verb  has  found,  its 
object  its  way,  wo  must  disjoin  it.     As  both  speed  and  legibility  are  the 
objects  of  the  reporter,  we  should  not  make,  slow  and  difficult  junctions,  nor  sac- 
rifice legibility  by  the  same.     Read  and  study  carefully  the  Exhibit  of  Phrase- 
Writing  on  p.  CO  of  this  Reader.    Sec  there  A,  I.,  Exc.  1  and  2, 


96  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

uted2  to  this  result,  may  be  a  question.3  The  following,  however,  is 
a  brief  resume  of  the  recent  contributions  which  have  been  made1  to 
our  knowledge1  on  the  subject : 

Some  two  years  ago  or  more,  Mr.  Leonard  Horner,  an  English  engi- 
neer of  wealth,  and  a  member  of  the  Royal  Society,  undertook,  in 
connection  with6  some  French  engineers  in  the  employ  of  the  1'a.sha 
of  Egypt,  to  determine  the  depth  of  the  alluvial  deposits  in  the  valley 
of  the  Nile.  This  river,  as  is  well  known,  is  remarkable  for  its  annual 
overflow,  whereby  a  great  part  of  all  the  arable  land  of  Egypt  is  sub- 
merged for  the  period  of  several  weeks,  and  covered  with  a  thin  de- 
posit of  mud,  or  sediment,  which  in  geological  language  is  termed 
"alluvium."  This  action  recurring  with  great  regularity,  year  after 
year,  has  produced  on  both  sides  of  the  Nile  a  strip  of  land  of  unex- 
ampled fertility,  and  is  also  yearly7  extending  the  delta  or  coast-line, 
at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  farther  and  farther*  into  the  Mediterranean. 
In  all  places  in  the  valley  of  the  Nile  where  the  soil  has  remained 
undisturbed  by  human  agency,  the  annual  deposits  of  mud  can  be 
Been  reposing  upon  each  other  with  great  regularity — each  successive 
layer  or  stratum  of  sediment  representing  a  year  in  time,  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  successive  rings  in  the  trunk  of  a  tree  represent  the 
wood-growth  of  successive  seasons.  By  counting,  therefore,9  the  num- 
ber of  layers  in  a  given  thickness  of  Nile  deposit,  we  have  an  almost 
certain  measure  of  the  time  required  for  its  formation. 

Mr.  Homer's  researches  were  based  upon  these  facts,  and  were 
made  by  sinking  a  series  of  shafts,  ninety-five  in  all,  across  the  Nile 
valley,  nearly  in  a  line  with,  and  crossing  the  site  of  the  ancient  city 

*  contributed. — 'Contri*  is  here  joined  to  Bet.     See  this  word  in  the  Stand- 
ard-Phonographic Dictionary.    P.  112,  R.  8.     Beeshou3  is  a  word-sign  lor  contri- 
bution. 

3  question. — Ken2  as  a  word-sign  for  question-ed  was  first  introduced  in  the 
Hind-Book. 

*  which  have  been  made.— P.  169,  R.  12. 

6  to  our  knowledge. — To  secure  a  pood  junction  between  Pretoid  and  En, 
make  the  former  quite  slanting,  and  begin  En  with  more  than  usual  curvature. 

6  in  connection  with. — 250,  3,  and  example  With. 
i  yearly.— P.  118.  R.  3,  c. 

8  farther  and  farther.— 276,  c.  See  p.  61,  xix.  of  this  Reader.  The  beat  Old- 
Phonographic  expression  of  this  phrase  is  Ferdher  Ketoid-Ferdher. 

9  counting,  therefore.— The  Dher-tick  is  here  written  in  place  of  the  ing- 
dot,  to  imply  tng ;  a.ndjore  is  added  by  an  Ef-hook.    See  Standard-Phonographic 
Dictionary,  DHU,  5. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  97 

of  Heliopolis.  la  every  case  the  alluvium  was  found  to  be  regularly 
«livi<letl  into  layers,  and  the  average  of  many  careful  measurements 
indicated  that  the  rate  of  vertical  increase  of  sediment  was  about  three 
and  one-half10  inches  per  century.  One  of  these  shafts,  in  particular, 
was  sunk  close  to  the  great  monolithic  statue  of  Kameses  II.,  at  Mem- 
phis, and  it  was  found  that  there  were  nine  feet  four  inches  of  Nile 
sediment  between  eight  inches  below  the  present  surface  of  the  ground 
and  the  lowest  part  of  the  platforms  on  which  the  statue  stands.  Now 
this  statue  has  been  determined  by  Lepsius  and  other  Egyptian  schol- 
ars to  have  been  erected  1,361  years  before  Christ,  and  this  date, 
added  to  1858,  gives,  therefore,  3,219  years,  during  which  the  above- 
mentioned  depth  of  sediment  accumulated,  a  rate  of  increase  in  strict 
accordance  with  the"  results  of  the  measurements  above  alluded  to. 
Below  the  platform  of  stone  on  which  the  statue  rests,  the  shaft  was 
driven  thirty-two  feet ;  but  the  lowest  two  feet  consisted  of  sand,  thus 
leaving  thirty  feet  of  true  Nile  sediment  in  an  undisturbed  condition 
below  this  foundation.  At  the  base  of  this  sediment,  or  at  a  depth  of 
thirty-nine  feet  four  inches  from  the  present  surface  of  the  ground, 
fragments  of  pottery  were  found  in  a  good  state  of  preservation,  and 
exhibiting  some  considerable  artistic  skill.  Allowing  now  that  the 
thirty  feet  of  sediment  covering  these  remains  (below  the  platform  of 
the  statue)  were  deposited  at  the  rate  oC  three  and  one-half  inches  per 
century,  we  have  in  the  fragments  of  pottery  a  record  of  the  existence 
of  man  13,500  years  before  A.D.  1858,  11,500  years  before  the  Christian 
era,  and  7,600  years  before  the  commencement  of  the  reign  of  Menes 
as  assigned  by  Lepsius  ;  of  man,  moreover, 

~j  ]t     in  a  state  of  civilization1  sufficiently  advanced  to  be  able 
Li)     to  fashion  clay  into  vessels,  and  harden  it*  by  heat. 
The  fragments  in  question  are  now  deposited  in  the  British  Museum, 

18  3  1-2.— In  writing  fractions,  the  reporter  may  save  himself  the  trouble  of 
writing  the  horizontal  line,  as  in  the  engraving. 

11  in    strict   accordance  with  the.— P.  1C8,  R.  10;   250,3,  and  example 
With. 

A^  !  in  a  state  of  civilization. — See  how  beautifully  speech-writing  cor- 
AtJ  responds  to  speech-phrasing.  In  what?  In-a-state-of-civMzation.  We 
can  drop  the  a.  and  of  as  superfluities  in  the  writing,  because  they  are  readily 
supplied.  As  the  legitimate  form  for  state,  Steu-Tee,  would  not  join  with  in, 
let  us  use  an  equivalent  expression,  Iss-Tet ;  and  then  join  to  this  Iss-Velseshon, 
civilization. 

2  and  harden  it.— 221,  B.  4. 


98  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

and  Mr.  Homer,  in  exhibiting  them  to  the  lloyal  Society,  expressed  a 
confident  opinion  that  their  antiquity  was  at  least3  equal  to  the  calcu- 
lation4 above  given.  At  any  rate,5  it  seems  certain  that  they  were'' 
deposited  in  the  place  whence  they  were  taken  long  anterior  to  the 
time7  when  the  workmen  of  Rameses  II.  laid  the  platform  for  the 
reception  of  his  statue,  3,000  years  ago. 

The  results  of  Mr.  Horncr's  investigations  are,  however,  cast  entire- 
ly into  the  shade  by  the  discovery  of  flint  weapons,  spear-heads,  axes, 
etc.,  associated  with  the  remains  of  extinct  animals — elephant,  rhino- 
ceros, bear,  tiger,  hyena,  etc. — in  imdisturbed  beds  of  gravel,  in  the 
north  of  France.  The  cannouncement  of  this  discovery  was  first  made 
by  Mr.  Evans,  an  English  geologist,  to  the  London  Society  of  Anti- 
quaries, in  June,  1859,  and  subsequent  researches  have  fully  confirm- 
ed it.  The  weapons  and  bones  occur  in  what  iss  geologically  known 
as  the  drift,0  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  town  of  Amiens, I0  and  present 
unmistakable  evidence  of  having  been  buried  cotemporancously.  At 

3  at  least. — Telst:!  for  at  least,  is  distinguished  from  Tee3-Layst,  at  last. 

*  to  the  calculation. — Here  KcP,  calculation}  is  put  close  against  the  line 
to  imply  to;  the  being  readily  supplied.  If  you  wish  to  distinguish  most  cer- 
tainly between  to  the  and  to  a-n,  write  the  by  Petoid  iu  the  fourth  position  for  to 
the,  and  write  the  a-n  by  Tetoid  iu  the  fourth  position  for  to  a-n.  Chetoid'  is  to 
how.  » 

5  at  any  rate. — For  greater  ease  of  writing  join  any  rate  by  one  stroke,  Nert 
=  nrt,  instead  of  using  three  strokes,  En-Ray  -Tee  —nrt. 

6  it  seems  certain  that  they  were. — This  phrase  might  bo  written  Tces2- 
Emses-Ret-Dhee-Weh  ;  but  it  will  be  better  for  the  beginner  to  break  the  phraso 
into  two  parts  :  it-seems-certain     that-they-were.    The  first  part  illustrates  the  en- 
larging a  small  circle  at  the  end  of  one  word,  as  seems,  to  express  the  s  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  following  word. 

"  to  the  time. — Write  Petoid4  (to  the)  Tee1,  time;  or  omit  the  and  put  time  in 
fourth  position.  To  become  a  ready  reader  of  your  notes,  practice  reading  your 
shorthand,  and  study  the  principles  of  note-reading.  For  instance  of  the  con- 
text helping,  you  will  see  here  that  Tee4  is  interpreted  readily  by  aid  of  the  pre- 
ceding words,  long  (Ing3)  anteriorCtSct2),  and  to  implied  by  the  fourth  position, 
and  by  when  (Wen1)  following. 

8  in  what  is. — 221,  K.  4  ;  see  in  this  Reader  also,  p  61,  xx. 

9  drift. — A  word  used  as  here  as  a  name  or   "as  a    word,"  should  bo  under 
scored  or  quoted. 

10  Amiens.— Pronounced  amiii, — (.)  expressing  the  nasalization  of  the  preced- 
ing a.     The  t  is  represented  by  Yay,  eo  as  to  help  give  a  suggestive  outline.    For 
the  stenographic  representation  of  nasalized  vowels,  see  p.  203,  §  12.     My  usu:il 
plan  is  in  reporting  foreign  names,  when  their  pronunciation  is  quite  different 
from  the  values  of  the  letters  interpreted  by  general  English  analogies,  to  write  tho 


B,  0.  BAK 

LAV;'". 

DAI  L1       •  '  •  * 

KEY    TO    THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  99 

the  meeting  of  the  British  Association"  in  September,  1859,  Sir  Charles 
Lycll,  who  has  hitherto  favored  the  received  chronology  respecting 
man's  existence  as  a  race,  said  that  he  fully  believed  that  the  anti- 
quity of  these  flint  weapons  was  "immensely  great  as  compared  with 
the  times  of  either  history  or  '-tradition  ; "  and  it  is  conceded  by  all 
geologists  that  the  continued  existence  of  tropical  animals  is  not  pos- 
sible13 in  Central  Europe,  under  the  present  conditions  of  climate.  The 
conclusion,  therefore,  seems  unavoidable,  that  there  were  races  of 
men  inhabiting  Europe  at  a  period  when  this  temperature  was  alto- 
gether different  from  what  it  now  is,  and  when  the  country  was  the 
natural  habitation  of  species  of  animals  now  restricted  to  the  tropics. 
— Life  Illustrated. 


THE   INFALLIBILITY   OF   THE    CHURCH. 

THE  infallibility  of  the  Church  of  Rome  has  been  one  of  the  great 
controversies  between  the  Protestants  and  Papists.  By  this  infallibil- 
ity it  is  understood  that  she  cannot  at  any  time  cease  to  be  orthodox 
in  her  doctrine,  or  fall  into  any  pernicious  errors ;  but  that  she  is 
constituted,  by  Divine  authority,14  the  judge  of  all  controversies  of  re- 
word as  though  it  were  English  ;  for  instance,  writing  Amiens  as  though  it  were 
pronounced  Am-ienz.  This,  of  course,  is  upon  the  supposition  that  the  orthog- 
raphy is  known.  If  not,  you  are,  of  course,  to  write  the  spoken  word. 

11  British  Association. — If  this  should  occur  frequently,  it  might  be  writ- 
ten Breteshou1,  and  British  Society,  if  occurring  frequently,  might  bo  written 
Brets1,  the  circle  standing  for  society,  the  entire  contraction  transferred  to  com- 
mon print  being  "Brit.  S." 

12  Prof.  Agassiz  estimates  the  age  of  a  human  foot  and  jaw,  discovered  by  him 
in  the  coast  limestone  of  Florida,  Irom  data  furnished  by  the  growth  of  the  laud, 
at  135,000  years.     [In  au  Essay  contributed  to  Types  of  Mankind.] 

In  making  an  excavation  at  New  Orleans,  an  Indian's  skull  was  found  be- 
neath four  cypress  forests,  the  production  of  each  of  which,  it  is  estimated,  re- 
quired 14,400  years.  Allowing  a  period  of  500  years' rest  between  the  different 
productions,  59,100  years  must  have  passed  away  since  the  skull  was  deposited 
in  the  position  where  it  was  discovered. 

13  is  not  possible. — This  is  an  illustration  of  slightly  raising  or  lowering  a 
horizontal  word-sign  of  the  first  position,  in  order  to  get  a  joined  word  in  place  ; 
as  Eu-Dhees1,  in  these;    En-Dhees-,  in  this;    En-Dhees3,  in  those.     §246,1. 

14  constituted  by  divine  authority.— Though  this  is  a  speech-phrase,  we 
are  compelled,  in  our  writing,  as  in  many  other  cases,  to  break  up  or  disjoin  tho 


100  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

ligion,  and  that  all  Christians  are  obliged  to  acquiesce  in  her  decis- 
ions. This  is  the  chain  which  keeps  its  members  fast  bound  to  its 
communion  ;  the  charm  which  retains  them  within  its  magic  circle  ; 
the  opiate  which  lays  asleep  all  their  doubts  and  difficulties ;  it  is 
likewise  the  magnet  which  attracts  the  desultory  and  unstable  in 
other  persuasions  within  the  sphere  of  popery,  the  foundation  of  its 
whole  superstructure,  the  cement  of  all  its  parts,  and  its  fence  and 
fortress  against  all  inroads  and  attacks. 

Under  the  idea  of  this  infallibility,  the  Church  of  Rome  claims — 1.  To 
determine  what  books  are  and  what  are  not  canonical,  and  to  oblige13 
all  Christians  to  receive  or  reject  them  accordingly.  2.  To  communicate 
authority  to  the  Scripture ;  or,  in  other  words,  that  the  Scripture 
(quoad  nos),  as  to  us,  receives  its  authority  from  her.  3.  To  assign  and 
fix  the  sense  of  Scripture,  which  all  Christians  arc  submissively  to  re- 


16 


4.  To  decree  as  necessary  to  salvation1  whatever  she  judges 
so,  although  not  contained  in  Scripture.  5.  To  decide  all 
controversies  respecting  matters  of  faith.  These  are  the  claims  to 
which  the  Church  of  Rome  pretends,  but  which  we  shall  not  here  at- 
tempt to  refute,  because  any  man  with  the  Bible  in  his  hand,  and  a 
little  common  sense,  will  easily  see  that  they  are  all  founded  upon 
ignorance,  superstition,  and  error.  It  is  not  a  little  remarkable, 
however,  that  the  Roman  Catholics2  themselves  are  much  divided  as 
to  the'1  seat  of  this  infallibility,  and  which,  indeed,  may  be  considered 
as  a  satisfactory  proof  that  no  such  privilege  exists  in  the  Church. 
For  is  it  consistent  with  reason  to  think  that  God  would  have  im- 
parted so  extraordinary  a  gift  to  prevent  errors  and  dissensions  in  the 
Church,  and  yet  have  left  an  additional  cause  of  error  and  dissension, 
viz.,  the  uncertainty  of  the  place  of  its  abode  ?  No,  surely.  Some  place 

words.  After  Beei,  by,  we  see  at  once  that  Defi,  divine,  should  be  disjoined  and 
put  in  its  proper  position  ;  since  if  joined,  Def  would  more  naturally  be  given 
its  more  jrequeut  value,  different.  Then  we  see  that  Ihret1  (authority)  cannot 
be  joined  to  Def1.  See,  in  this  Reader,  the  Exhibit  of  Phrase-Writing. 

Jj  and  to  oblige.—  BeH-Jay,  to  oblige  •  to  which  prefix  and, 

A  n    !  to  salvation. — Iss4-Lay.     For  greatest  legibility  here  write  Petoid2, 
1 0     Slay*,  sal[vatwn]. 

2  Roman  Catholics. — \Ve  may  safely  reduce  the  phrase  to  R.  Cs. 

3  as  to  the. — As  to,  Spetoid2,  rests  on  the  line  ;  but  as  to  Hie  is  distinguished 
from  it  by  ths  circle's  resting  on  the  line  and  the  extending  below  the  line.     It  is 
to  the  (i.e.,  the  written  in  the  fourth  position  to  imply  to)  with  as  prefixed. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  101 

this  infallibility  in  the  Pope  or  Bishop  of  Rome ;  some  in  a  general 
council ;  others  in  neither  Pope  nor  council  separately,  but  in  both 
conjointly  ;  whilst  others  arc  said  to  place  it  in  the  church  diffusive, 
or  in  all  churches  throughout  the  world.  But  that  it  could  not 
be  deposited  in  the  Pope  is  evident ;  for,  many  Popes  have  been  her- 
etics, and  on  that  account  censured  and  deposed,  and  therefore 
could  not  have  been  infallible.  That  it  could  not  be  placed  in  a 
general  council4  is  as  evident ;  for,  general  councils  have  actually  err- 
ed. Neither  could  it  be  placed  in  the  Pope  and  council  conjointly  ; 
for  two  fallibles5  could  not  make  one  infallible,  any  more  than  two 
ciphers  could  make  an  integer.  To  say  that  it  is  lodged  in  the  church 
universal  or  diffusive,  is  equally  erroneous ;  for,  this  would  be  useless 
and  insignificant,  because  it  could  never  be  exercised.  The  whole 
church  could  not  meet  to  make  decrees,  or  to  choose  representatives, 
or  to  deliver  their  sentiments  on  any  question  started  ;  and  less  than 
all  would  not  be  the  whole  church,  and  so  could  not  claim  that  priv- 
ilege. 

The  most  general  opinion,  however,  it  is  said,  is  that  of  its  being 
seated  in  a  Pope  and  general  council.  The  advocates  for  this  opinion 
consider  the  Pope  as  the  vicar  of  Christ,  head  of  the  church,  and  cen- 
ter of  unity ;  and  therefore  conclude  that  his  concurrence  with  and 
approbation  of  the  decrees  of  a  general  council  are  necessary,  and  suf- 
ficient to  afford  it  an  indispensable  sanction  and  plenary  authority. 
A  general  council  they  regard  as  the  church  representative,  and  sup- 
pose that  nothing  can  be  wanting  to  ascertain  the  truth  of  any  con- 
troversial point,  when  the  pretended  head  of  the  church  and  its  mem  - 
bers,  assembled  in  their  supposed  representatives,  mutually  concur 
and  coincide  in  judicial  definitions  and  decrees,  but  that  infallibility 
attends  their  coalition  and  conjunction  in  all  their  determinations. 

Every  impartial  person,  who  considers  this  subject  with  the  least 
degree  of  attention,  must  clearly  perceive  that  neither  any  individual 
nor  body  of  Christians  have  any  ground  from  reason  or  Scripture  for 

4  in  a  general  council. — Presuming  that  the  phrase  general  council  will  oc- 
cur frequently,  let  us  make  a  special  contraction  for  it,  namely,  J.  K.  As  a  sign 
of  contraction  use  intersection,  writing  J|K,  that  is,  J  crossed  by  K.  If  the  phrase 
should  occur  once  or  twice  more,  we  may  omit  the  intersection  and  write  Jay2- 
Kay  ;  or  Jay3-Kay,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  established  contraction  Jay-Kay, 
Jesus  Cknst. 

B  fallibles. — The  reporter  may  frequently  write  'bio  '  by  its  sign  '  Bee,'  in- 
stead of  Bel,  thus  making  a  slight  though  desirable  saving  in  some  cases.  Capa- 
ble, for  instance,  a  contraction  (Kay-Bel2)  of  the  Corresponding  Style,  may  be 
shortened  a  little  more  ia  the  Reporting  Style  by  leaving  off  the  hook,  i.e.,  by 
writing  Kay-Bee2. 


102  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

pretending  to  infallibility.  It  is  evidently  the  attribute  of  the  Su- 
preme Being  alone,  which  we  have  all  the  foundation  imaginable  t<> 
conclude  he  has  not  communicated  to  any  mortal,  or  association  of 
mortals.  The  human  being  who  challenges  infallibility  seems  to  imi- 
tate the  pride  and  presumption  of  Lucifer,  when  he  said,  "I  will  as- 
cend, and  will  be  like  the  Most  High."''  A  claim  to  it  was  unheard  of 
in  the  primitive  and  purest  ages  of  the  church,  but  became,  after  that 
period,  the  arrogant  pretension  of  papal  ambition.  History  plainly 
informs  us  that  the  bishops  of  Rome,  on  the  declension  of  the  western 
Roman  Empire,7  began  to  put  in  their  claim*  of  being  the  supreme  and 
infallible  heads  of  the  Christian  church  ;  which  they'  at  length10  estab- 
lished by  their  deep  policy  and  unremitting  efforts  ;  by  the  concurrence 
of  fortunate  circumstances ;  by  the  advantages  which  they  reaped 
from  the  necessities  of  some  princes,  and  the  superstition  of  others; 
and  by  the  general  and  excessive  credulity  of  the  people.  However, 
when  they  had  grossly  abused  this  absurd  pretension,  and  committed" 


17 


various  acts  of  injustice,  tyranny,  and  cruelty ;  when  the 
blind  veneration  for  the  papal  dignity1  had  been  greatly  di- 


6  Most  High. — See  in  the  Standard  Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  HIGH, 
how  phrase-writing  with  that  word  is  rendered  possible  at  times  by  using  the  H 
instead  of  the  i  lor  this  word. 

7  Western    Roman    Empire. — Roman   Is  here  contracted  to  Ar.     If  this 
phrase  were  occurring  frequently,  I  would  con  tract  it  (in  accordance  with  the. 
principle  of  23  f,  R.  2)  to  Way-Ar-Emp  (i.e.,  W.  R.  Emp.). 

8  put  in  their  claim. — The  verb  is  noiput,  but  put-in  ;  therefore  join  them, 
making  the  angle  easy  by  writing  put  quite  slanting  and  by  beginning  ire  quite 
curved.     The  object  of  the   verb   (tltetr  claim)  will  be  written  most  easily  dis- 
joined from  the  verb. 

9  which  they. — In  writing  this  phrase-sign,  Dhee  must  be  joined,  as  in  the 
engraving,  without  an  angle.     It  it  should  seem  difficult  it  should  be  the  more 
practiced,  until  it  becomes  easy. 

10  at  length.— That  is,  Tien11,  at  length]. 

11  and  committed. — Write  Ketoid2  for  and,  so  that  the  following  com  may 
be  implied  by  writing  itted  (Ted)  under. 


ni  for  the  papal  dignity. — Here  is  a  speech-phrase,  consisting   of  a 
preposition  and  its  object.     As  naturally  as  we  speak  together  these 
words,  so  naturally  should  we  write  them  together,  unless  there  is  some  hin- 
drance.   There  is  a  hindrance  to  joining  dignity — namely,  that  it  would  run  into 
the  space  for  the  line  below. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  103 

minished  by  the  long3  and  scandalous  schism  occasioned  by  contending 
Popes  ;3  when  these  had  been  for  a  considerable  time4  roaming  about 
Europe,  fawning  on  princes,  squeezing  their  adherents,  and  cursing 
their5  rivals ;  and  when  the  councils  of  Constance  and  Basil  had  chal- 
lenged and  exercised  the  right  of  deposing  and  electing  the  bishops  of 
Home,  then  their3  pretensions  to  infallibility  were  called  in  question, 
and  the  world  discovered  that  councils  were  a  jurisdiction  superior  to 
that  of  the  towering  pontiffs.  Then  it  was  that  this  infallibility  was 
transferred7  by  many  divines  from  Popes  to  general  councils,  and  the 
opinion  of  the  superior  authority  of  a  council  above  that  of  a  Pope 
spread  vastly,  especially  under  the  profligate  pontificate8  of  Alexander 
VI.  and  the  martial  one  of  Julius  II.9  The  Popes  were  thought  by 

2  by  the  long. — We  disjoin  long,  and  put  it  in  its  proper  position  for  legibil- 
ity's sake.    There  aro  many  words  with  which  longer  may  be  joined  without  re- 
gard to  its  position  ;  as,  for  [a]  long  time,  just  as  long,  a  little  longer  than,  much 
longer,  not  long  ago,  so  long,  such  a  long  time,  twice  as  long  as  (TeesesMngs). 
very  long.    Why  in  some  cases  do  you  join  long  without  endangering  legibility? 
By  the  words  aesociatcd  with  it  helping  to  read  it. 

3  by  contending  popes. — Here  you  naturally  relate  in  writing,  as  you  do 
in  speaking,  the  object,  contending  popes,  with  the  preposition  by. 

4  for  a  considerable  time. — It  is  well  to  make  use  of  a  species  of  phrase- 
signs,  like  that  for  this  phrase,  in  which,  though  there  is  a  disjoining,  the  pen 
moves  but  a  slight  distance  before  commencing  the  disjoined  word,  that  being 
made  to  overlap  the  preceding  as  a  sort  of  indication  that  it  forms  a  part  of  the 
phrase-sign,  just  as  in  cases  of  necessary  disjoining  in  writing  a  single  word,  the 
disjoined  part  is  made  to  slightly  overlap  the  preceding  one — the  word  being 
thus  distinguished  from  two  words.     See  dated  (Dce:Ted),  218.    If  in  writing  this 
phrase,  time  had  been  written  Tee1,  there  would  have  been  lost  the  time  of  a  long 
air-stroke,  and,  moreover,  the  writing  would  not  be  so  legible ;  for,  judicious 
phrase-writing  adds  to  legibility. 

6  cursing  their. — See  this  Reader,  p.  CO,  xii. 

*  then  their.— I  prefer  to  join  there,  etc.,  by  the  Dher-tick  rather  than  to 
employ  the  lengthening  principle  when  it  produces  a  form  which  needs  vocal- 
ization to  distinguish  it  from  some  other,  though  there  is  hardly  ever  any  such 
necessity. 

'  was  transferred.— In  accordance  with  the  great  principle  of  UNIFORM- 
ITY of  Standard  Phonography,  all  contracted  words  ending  in  fcr-red  are  con- 
tracted in  a  like  manner,  as  'rcfcr-red,  Ray— Ef ;  infer-red,  En-Ef2 ;  transfer-red, 
Ten*-E£. 

s  profligate  pontificate. — The  full  forms  for  these  words  would  be  too 
Blow.  Wo  can  readily  secure  good  forms  by  omitting  the  impeding  letters — I  iu 
the  first,  and/in  the  second.  If  you  retain  I  in  the  first  you  must  write  Gay- 
Tee  for  -gate ;  and  if  you  retain /in  the  second  word  you  must  write  Kay -Tee  for 
-cate. 

fl  Julius  II.— P.  194,  R.  8. 


SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER.  104: 

numbers  to  be  too  unworthy  possessors  of  so  rich  a  jewel ;  at  the  same 
time  it  appeared  to  be10  of  too  great  a  value,  and  of  too  extensive  con- 
sequence, to  be  parted  with  entirely.  It  was,  therefore,  by  the  major 
part  of  the  lloman  Church,  deposited  with,  or  made  the  property  of 
general  councils,  either  solely  or  conjointly  with  the  Pope. — Suck's 
Theological  Dictionary, 


AUDI    ALTERAM    PARTEM." 

[Abstract  of  a  Lecture  by  Rev.  Dr.  Cahill,  delivered  in  Brooklyn.    Reported  in 
full  by  Andrew  J.  Graham. la] 

DEAREST  BRETHREN,   I  am  now  going  to  deliver  a  discourse  upon 

1°  R  appeared  to  be. — The  ed  is  the  impediment  Lore  to  making  a  good 
writing-phrase.  It  is  rulable,  in  many  cases,  to  join  a  dependent  infinitive,  as 
to  be,  to  the  word  on  which  it  depends,  omitting  the  to. 

11  Atuli  alteram  partem — Hear  the  other  side. — A  Roman  and  Grecian  max- 
im of  fairness  and  justice,  which  it  would  be  well  to  adopt  ill  modern  times,  es- 
pecially as  it  may  sometimes  happen  that  after  hearing  both  sides  we  may  see 
that  the  truth  lies  with  "the  other  side,"  or  only  in  part  with  either,  or  witlt 
neither.     "  Veritas  nihil  veretur  nisi  abscondi." — Veritas  visu  etmora,  falsa  festatione 
et  insertis  valescunt. — Tac. 

12  A  reporter  having  established  in  the  only  possible  manner  a  reputation  for 
accuracy  and  impartiality,  will  find  no  difficulty,  on  account  of  difference  of 
opinions,  in  getting  business  from  parties  of  opinions  directly  contrary  to  his 
own,  if  the  desire  is  to  have  a  report  at  all.     I  do  not  say  a  correct  report,  for  a 
garbled  or  misrepresenting  report  is  no  report  at  all.    A  misrepresentation  of  a 
speaker  may  be  made  from  putting  words  into  his  mouth  which  it  is  known  ho 
never  uttered — words  calculated  to  subject  him  to  odium  or  ridicule  ;  which  is 
morally  nothing  less  than  forgery  and  libel.    A  misrepresentation  may  be  made 
by  taking  from  his  words  clauses  or  sentences  which  serve  to  modify  a  proposi- 
tion which,  perhaps,   without  such  modification,  would  be  repugnant  to  the 
common-sense  of  mankind,  and  detestable  to  himself.     This  also  is  moral  forgery 
and  libel.    A  misrepresentation  may  also  be  made  from  throwing  aronnd  the 
speaker  such  circumstances  as  will  give  to  the  reader  an  untrue  idea  of  the  spirit 
or  occasion  of  the  speech. 

No  reporter  who  would  keep  his  soul  unspotted  from  such  injustice,  will  either 
seek  or  accept  a  situation  as  reporter  upon  any  paper  whose  conductors  either 
expect,  require,  or  (what  is  the  same)  allow  the  misrepresentation  of  a  speaker, 
unless  it  be  with  the  most  distinct  understanding  that  ho  is  not  himself  to  be  di- 
rectly concerned  in  such  disreputable  business,  and  that  his  reports  are  not  to 
be  altered  for  the  purposes  of  misrepresentation.  No  thoroughly  honest  reporter 
can  take  a  less  sturdy  position  than  that ;  for,  by  the  same  reasoning  that  a  man 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  105 

what13  we  call  the  Infallibility  of  the  Catholic  Church.  By  infallibility 
I  do  not  mean  that  no  man  in  the  Church  can  fail,14  but  that  the  doc- 
trines taught  by  Christ  to  his  Apostles  are  still  taught  in  the  Church, 
and  will  be  taught  throughout  all  countries  and  all  time  to  the  end 
of  the  world.  The  infallibility  of  the  Church,  therefore,  means  this, 
that  I,  having  passed1'  my  examinations  in  college,  taken  out  my  de- 
gree, and  being  recognized  and  approved  as  a  priest  by  my  bishop, 
you  may  rely  upon  what  I  tell  you  with  the  same  certitude  as  if  you 
heard  Christ  himself  speaking.  You  say  that  is16  a  large  proposition  ; 
it  is,  but  I  assert  it  boldly,  with  perfect  confidence,  believing  it  as 
firmly  as  my  existence.  I  have  no  more  doubt  of  it  than  I  have  of 
the  life,  death,  or  resurrection  of  Christ.  I  shall  endeavor  to  fully 
convince  you  of  the  truth  of  this  proposition. " 

I1*  commence  by  saying  that  Christ  ought  to  make  as  good  rules  for 
the  soul  as  his  Father  has  made  for  the  body.  You  say  yes.  The 
Father  has  established  all  the  laws  of  Nature,  and  I  want  to  know  if 
any  of  them  have  ever  failed  ?  I  think  not.  The  sun  has  never  been 
one  second  too  late  in  his  brilliant  course  since  the  day  he  said  "  Let 
there  be  light,"  and  there  was  light.  The  tides  have  never  ceased  to 
flow  since  that  time.  The  seasons  have  never  failed — spring,  summer, 
autumn,  winter.  The  great  panorama  over  your  head  appears  to 
move  with  perfect  order  and  regularity.  All  the  plants  arise  in  their 
proper  time,  decay,  and  fall  into  their  autumnal  graves,  and  are  lost 
until  another  season ;  and  the  young  baby  plant  makes  its  appearance 

has  a  right  to  air  because  he  has  lungs,  he  has  a  right  to  think  freely,  aud  to  ut- 
ter his  honest  convictions,  because  he  has  a  soul ;  and  the  cause  of  Everlasting 
Truth  and  every  elementary  principle  of  human  rights  demand  that  if  a  paper 
report  his  utterances,  it  shall  do  it  fairly. 

is  upon  what.— 221,  R.  4. 

n  can  fail. — Omit  the  impediment  here,  the  En  hook,  so  you  may  join  the 
parts  of  the  compound  verb,  can  fail. 

18  that  I  having  passed. — 237,  R.  1,  b.  If  you  write  the  ing-Hot  you  must 
break  up  the  phrase-sign  ;  so  omit  it  as  an  impediment,  it  a  good  junction  can 
be  secured  thereby,  aud  the  ing  can  be  supplied. 

i«  yon   say  that  is.— P.  167,  R.  2  ;  p.  CO,  xi.  of  this  Reader. 

i'  this  proposition. — It  is  rather  easier  to  make  the  Ar-hook  distinctly 
here  than  to  imply  it  by  simply  turning  the  hook  on  the  back  of  the  Dhee.  This 
combination  is  not  difficult,  alter  a  little  practice  of  it.  Although  the  Dhee  is  a 
curve,  the  beginning  and  the  end  will  be  seen  to  be  quite  straight  at  the  point  of 
junction. 

is  The  pronoun  I  when  written  alone  may  be  safely  written  Tetoid1 ;  to 
which  you  prefix  Ketoid  for  and  I;  and  to  which  you  add  the  Ef-hook  for  /  have. 


18 


10G  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    HEADER. 

the  next  spring,  and  perpetuates  the  memory  of  its  parents,  and  goes 
on  through  ages.  It  is  the  same  with  the  bird  and  the  fish  tribes. 
The  animal  tribes  still  carry  out  their19  instincts,  and  there  they  are, 
family  after  family'-0,  and  so  it  will  be  through  ages  to  come.  The  vast 
variety  of  these  philosophical  phenomena  are  maintained  with  per- 
petual order  and  beauty.  Whether  this  country  were  Mohammedan, 
Catholic,  Christian,  or  Infidel,  these  laws  remain  the  same.  Do  what 
you  will,  you  cannot  cause  an  eclipse  of  the  sun.  By  holding  up  your 
hand,  you  may  cast  a  shadow  on  yourself,  but  you  cannot  do  away 
with  the  light  of  the  great  luminary.  When  you  and  I  have  dis- 
coursed upon  this  subject — 

a  favorite  topic  of  mine — I  say  to  you  :  These  are  the  laws 
of  the  Father  over  nature.  Don't  you  think  there  ought 
to  be  as  good  a  set  of  laws  for  the  soul  instituted  by  Christ  as  these 
laws  of  the  Father  for  nature?  What  would  you  think1  if  two  suns 
were  made,  when  only  one2  would  be  necessary?  I  say  no;  it  cannot 
be  ;  it  would  cause  confusion.  One  sun  is  the  proper  plan  ;  anything 
else  would  cause  disorder.  Everything3  seems  to  have  been  estab- 

19  carry    out    their. — See  p.  61,  xvi  ;  p.  60,  xiii.  of  this  Reader. 

20  family    after    family.— 250,  3. 

A  Q    l  what    would   you    think. — A  beautiful  and  highly  useful  charac- 
J. 0     teristio  principle  of  Standard  Phonography  ia 

THE    ENLARGEMENT    OF    THE    SEMICIRCLES. 

I.  TVEH    OR    WTJH— 

1.  In  Natural  Position,  to  add  another  TT-word  ;  as  in  we1  were  (or  would}, 
with1  what,   were2  we   (with  or  ichat),  what1  we  (with,  were,  or  would), 
would-  we. 

2.  Inclined,  to  intimate  the  addition  of  a  K-word  ;  as  in  we1  yet.  with^  you, 
were-  ye  (you  or  yet),  what1  ye  (you  or  yet),  would-  ye  (you  or  yet). 

II.  YEH    OR    YITII— 

In  Vie  Natural  Position  only,    o     n    ,  to  add  a  IP-word  ;  as  in  ye1  would  (or 

were),  yet-  were  (what  or  would),  beyond1  what,  you"1  were  (or  would). 
(6)  TJie  shape  of  the  enlarged  semicircles. — The  enlargement  is  not  only  sideivise  but 
also  lengthwise — usually  of  horseshoe  form ;  or,  better  described  as  an  unclosed 
Ster-lonp.  Make  the  semicircle  in  any  desired  direction,  and  then,  for  the  en- 
larged sign,  make  two-thirds  of  a  Ster-loop  ;  and  you  will  find  you  have  made 
the  horse  shoe  curve.  ,$35-  See  page  191  of  this  Reader  for  a  presentation  of  the 
ENLARGEMENT  OF  THE  CIBCLES  AND  SEMICIRCLES,  accompanied  with  engraved 
illustrations  of  the  same. 

-  only   one.— P.  169,  R.  11.     See  ONE  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Diction- 
ary. 

-  everything. — For  greatest  speed  with  this  word,  keep  on  the  heaviness  from 
middle  of  Ver  to  the  middle  of  lug,  and  make  a  smooth  junction,    If  you  doubt 


KEY    TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  107 

lished'  to  be  permanent — to  carry  out  his  great  philosophical  econo- 
my. You  agree  with  me5  decidedly  that  these  laws  are  the  same, 
whatever  may  be6  the  people  in  the  world ;  these  laws  arc  beyond 
their  reach.  Now,  if  the  laws  of  nature  are  not  dependent  on  the 
flitting  opinions  of  men,  how  can  it  be  believed  that  Christ  instituted 
laws  for  the  soul  on  any  such  basis,  when  the  interests  of  the  soul  are 
so  much  more  important  than  those7  of  the  philosophical  economy  ? 
One  soul  is  worth  a  million  of  suns — yea,  worth  all  the  suns  that  could 
ever  escape  from  the  fingers  of  the  omnipotent  Creator,  because  the 
soul  has  on  it  his  own  image.  More — it  has  the  blood  of  Christ  upon 
it ;  and  one  drop  of  his  blood  is  infinite  in  value.8  As  compared  with 
the  infini to  value  of  the  soul,  all  that  he  can  ever  create  must  bo  fi- 
nite. I  place  that  programme  before  you,  and  say  that  if  you  do  not 
believe  what  I  am  going  to9  say  to  you,  you  cannot  believe  one  word 
of  Christ. 


the  importance,  compare  the  recommended  way  of  writing  the  word  with  tlio 
two  letters  tapering  at  the  junction  and  then  with  au  angular  junction. 

*  seems  to  have  !>eeu  established. — This  is  a  beautiful  instance  of 
greatly  facilitating  tho  recording  by  a  due  use  and  combination  of  the  princi- 
ples; thus:  Somsi  (<•/:•/(.•.-).  j  >iu  the  dependent  infinitive  (to  have  been  establiski'd), 
omitting  as  usual  tlio  infinitive  particle  to,  and  omitting  the  have  as  readily 
supplied  before  Item,  done,  and  other  similar  irregular  past  participles.  A  list  of 
such  participles  will  be  giveu  hereafter. 

5  you    agree    with    me. — A  speech-phraso    written   thus :    Yuh-Ger  (the 
Ar-hook  being  a  slight  offset)-Wem.    Though  the  speech-phraso  includes  decided- 
ly that,  it  is  well  to  disjoin  the  latter.     Why?    To  avoid  running  too  far  down, 
and  to  give  the  pen  a  new  impulse.    Liftings  in  phrase-writing  to  give  the  pen  a 
new  impulse,  correspond  to  a  speaker's  division  and  repeated  accents  in  a  very 
long  word  ;  as,  an-ti-trin-i-ta-i-ianism  ;  in-di-vis-i-bil'ity. 

6  whatever    may    be.— Illustrating  variations  from  the    usual   forms  of 
signs  to  make  the  junctions  easier.     Here,  observe  lio\y  tho  Vec-hook  is  curved 
inwardly  a  little,  to  join  better  with  Emp. 

"  so  much  more  important  than  those. — To  sign-phrase  this  speech- 
phrase,  it  will  be  best  to  write  so  (Es^),  and,  as  a  sort  of  joining,  lap  much; 
join  Her  (omitting  its  hook  as  readily  supplied  by  the  experienced  writer 
and  reader) ;  then  add  the  modified  important.  Then,  to  give  our  pen  a  uc\v  im- 
pulse, disjoin  titan  those. 

f  in  value. — In  which  the  first-position  horizontal  is  brought  down  a  little, 
so  that  value  may  go  in  its  proper  position.  246,  1.  See  also  in  this  Reader  tho 
Exhibit  of  PHRASE-SIGN  POSITION,  p.  GS,  II. 

9  what  I  am  {joins:  to.— To  make  the  writing-phrase  correspond  to 
the  speech-phrase,  use  a  form  for  /  that  will  join  between  the  two  words  what, 
and  am;  Ketoid  answers  the  purpose.  "We  must  drop  the  ing-dot,  and  then  the 
to  bsfore  the  infinitive  say  and  to  before  the  you  (in  the  dative  case). 


108  SECOND    STANDARD-rilOXOGRAPnjC    READER. 

Christ  addressing  his  Apostles  said,  ''As  the  Father  sent  me,  so  I 
send  you." 

The  first  thing  that  strikes  me  is  this  sending.  Was  he  not  God,  like 
his  Father  ?  Why  does  he  acknowledge  the  inferiority  of  being  sent  ? 
Could  he  not  come  himself?  This  is  the  language  of  the  Holy  Ghost, 
the  inspiration  of  the  Holy  Ghost  through  the  pen  of  John,  and  every 
word  of  the  text  I  shall  read  borrows  omnipotent  importance  from 
the  source  whence  it  proceeds.  "As  the  Father  sent  me."  The  Father 
gives  him  a  command,  when  one  would  suppose  that  he  requires  no 
command.  He  receives  this  command  in  his  mediatorial  office.  Man- 
kind having  sinned,  and  being  all  sinful  and  cast  out,  how  could  they 
recover  their  position ?  How  could  finite  men  pay  an  infinite  debt? 
How  could  fallen  man  restore  himself?  He  had  sinned  against  the 
Father,  and  heaven  was  bolted  against  him,  and  he  was  excluded,  a 
rebel,  banished,  having  lost  all  his  position.  Being  in  sin,  he  is  not 
acceptable  in  the  sight  of  God.  But  the  Son  of  God — beautiful  phrase 
—  said:  Father,  I  know  that  the  blood  of  oxen  cannot  please  you, 
therefore  I  go.  I  will  take  man's  flesh,  his  chains,  liis  rags — all  but 
his  sins,  on  my  bare  head  before  you,  and  I  shall  pay  the  whole  debt. 
I  go  at  the  command  from  my  father ;  I  give  you  what  he  gave  me. 
He  sent  me  into  the  world  to  preach  against  sin,  to  advocate  sanctity, 
to  publish  the  gospel.  I  send  you  in  the  same  office.  Then  as  to  the 
authority — so  far  as  that  goes,  you  have  it. 

Xn  man  can  preach  unless  he  has  got  a  command  from  God  the 
Father.  He  sent  Christ  to  discharge  this  duty,  and  he  subdclegates 
the  power  he  receives  himself.  That  is  what  I  call  the  commission. 
But  you  may  say,  where  did  these  men  who  preach  to  you  get  the 
knowledge  to  discharge  the  duty  ?  John  xv.  15  :;0  "All  things  what- 
soever I  have  heard  from  my  Father  I  have  made  known  to  you." 
Recollect,  every  word  of  this  must  be  weighed  in  its  atomic  value. 
I  do  not  like  to  be  speaking  Greek  to  you,  but  the  Greek  is,  I  will 
make  it"  perfectly  known  to  you.  You  havo  all  knowledge.  You 
know  that  warrant  is  from  God,  so  far  as  it  goes.  The  commission 
comes  from  the  Father  certainly,  and  the  knowledge  comes  from  the 
Father.  Was  this  knowledge  got  from  schoolmasters  ?  No.  From 
posture-masters?  Certainly  not.  From  elocutionists?  Not  at  all. 
They  may  advance  the  telling  of  the  knowledge,  but  the  whole  of  the 
the  knowledge  is  from  above.  I  send  you 

10  John  chapter  15  and  verse  15 — 275. 

11  I    will    make    it. — I  usually  vocalize  Em  ami  Tec,  when  shortened  for 
male  it  and  lake  it,  with  a  ;  but  I  have  always  found  them  legible  when  the  vowel 
has  bccu  omitted. 


19 


KEY   TO   THE  REPORTING   EXERCISES.  109 

with  my  own  office,  I  give  you  my  own  knowledge — ex- 
quisite warrant,  title. 
Mark  xvi.  15  :  "  Go  ye  into  the  whole  world,  and  preach  the  Gospel 
to  every  creature."  He  does  not  gay,  "  I  hope  you  will  go."  Impera- 
tive mood — "Go."  Where?  Into  the  whole  world.  "  I  command 
you  to  go1  and  preach  !  "  He  does  not  say,  "I  hope  you  will  preach 
— it  will  be  a  good  thing  to  preach;"  but  he  commands  to  preach. 
What  ?  The  gospel  I  have  published.  To  whom  ?  To  every  creature. 
You  have  my  authority,  fully  given  me  by  my  Father.  You  have  all 
the  knowledge  you  want-  for  the  purpose3  given  from  my  Father.  The 
whole  world  is  your  diocese — the  field  for  your  labors ;  all  mankind 
your  congregation.  Go,  therefore,-1  in  consequence  of  your  commis- 
sion5 and  your  knowledge,  into  the  whole  world.  Do  not  leave  a 
corner  of  the  earth  which  shall  not  be  the  scene  of  your  labors.  The 
boundlessness3  of  the  whole  horizon  alone  is  the  terminus  of  your  ex- 
ertions. Preach  the  Gospel  to  every  creature.  The  Church,  there- 
fore, is  commanded  to  send7  missionaries  all  over  the  world.  All 
mankind  are  subjects  of  their  official  duties,  and  all  mankind  arc 
clearly  called  upon  to  listen.  The  man  who  stays  at  home  and  reads 
does  not  discharge  his  duty  ;  he  is  not  listening  to  the  official  man. 


!I  command  you  to  go. — Written  thus  :    Tetoid1, /;   under  which 
write  Ned",  to  imply  com  of  command  ;  to  which  join  Yob  for  Ynh  (you); 


19 

then  write  Gay4  for  to  go. 

2  you  -\vant.-Yuh2-Went.    Observe  how  the  hook  of  Went  is  made  very 
small  to  join  with  Yuh,  and  that  the  letter  is  shaped  to  suit  the  junction.    The 
beginner  would  consider  many  junctions  difficult  which  would  be  easy  to  the 
experienced  writer.     The  beginner's  difficulty  is  in  not  shaping  the  letters  to 
their  junctions. 

3  for  the  purpose. — That  is,  f.  p.,  for  [the]  purpose;   similar  to  the  com- 
mon  print  "«. g.,"  exempli  gratia;  and  the  "/i.e.,"  hoc  est=the  still  used  "i.e." 
(id  est),  that  is. 

*  go,  therefore.— 264,  and  R.  5,  2.  As  to  the  written  pause  before  therefore, 
we  may  omit  it,  iu  order  to  secure  the  great  saying  of  this  mode  of  adding 
the  word. 

5  in  consequence  of  yonr  commission. — A  beautiful  phrase.  En1 
plus  Skens=tn  [con]sequence  plus  Yay,  [of]  your ;  Shen  under  to  imply  com  of  com- 
mission. 

11  boundlessness.— 232,  7,  and  R.  1,  c.  This  mode  of  expressing  -lessness,  and 
also  the  mode  of  expressing  -fulness,  were  introduced  by  the  Author. 

7  is  commanded  to  send. — Another  beautiful  phrase.  Is  (Iss1)  comm 
(implied  by  writing  Tinder)-anded(Ned3,  present  tense  for  past  participle)-fo  (in- 
finitive particle  omitted)-send  (Send  joined  as  a  dependent  infinitive).  But  why 
not  join  in  writing  as  in  speech,  the  object  of  send,  namely,  missionaries?  Becauso 
it  will  not  join  easily  ;  and,  of  course,  really  difficult  junctions  do  not  favor  speed. 


110  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

I  do  not  care  what  he  reads.  He  is  not  in  the  order.*  We  shall  pres- 
ently'J  learn  that  it  will  not  do.  We  have  now  gone  so  far  as  to  show 
the  commission  granted  to  vis,  and  the  knowledge  that  is  communi- 
cated. "Go  ye,  therefore,  and  teach  all  nations."  You  are  to  do 
the  whole  command — you  are  to  teach  them.  Do  not  allow  any  one 
to  teach  them  without  your  control.  You  are  the  shepherds.  Allow 
no  man  to  feed  your  lamhs  without  your  sanction.  Do  not  ask  leave 
of  the  wolf  to  visit  your  flock.  Do  not  ask  permission  of  the  wolf  to 
go  into  your  fold.  "Go  and  teach  all  nations,  teaching  them  to  ob- 
st'rve  all  tilings  whatsoever  I  have  commanded  you."  I'y  this  time 
I  think  everybody  begins  to  sec  that  these  men  have  the  Gospel  in 
their  mouths,  and  that  all  arc  commanded  to  go  and  learn  of  them. 
It  would  l>e  alisurd  to  go  and  teach  all  nations10  unless  they  were 
called  upon  to  learn  from  them,  so  that  the  command  to  go  and  teach 
all  nations  is  the  same  as  commanding"  all  nations  to  learn  from 
them,  for  there  cannot  be  teachers  without  learners — they  are  roi rel- 
ative words.  It  may,  perhaps,  be  said  that  it  is  possible14  for  me  to 
go  astray.  No,  I  cannot  as  long  as  I  hold13  my  place  under  the  bish- 
op, and  he  is  in  communication  with  the  Pope. 

Matthew  xxviii.  19:  "Go  ye,  therefore,  and  teach  all  nations, 
teaching  them  to  observe  all  things  whatsoever  I  have  commanded 
you,  and  behold  I  am  with  you11  all  days,  even  to  the  consummation 
of  the  world."  Go,  teach  them  ;  I  am  not  the  teacher,  but  I  am  with 
you  while  you  arc  teaching.  He  does  not  say  I  am  with  you  in  the 

*  Nerd1,  for  the  conjunctive  phrase  in  order  [lo],  may  he  advantageously  used 
for  this  phrase,  in  order. 

9  presently. — Express  ly  whenever  it  seems  required  for  legibility  ;    Borne- 
times  in  words  in  which  it  is  commonly  unwritten,  as  in  this  case.  On  the  other 
hand,  ly  is  sometimes  omitted  as  a  superfluity  or  as  an  impediment,  from  words 
in  which  it  is  usually  written. 

10  teacli   all    nations. — As  this  phrase  has  occurred  several  times,  we  may 
reduce  it  to  its  briefest  consonantal  expression— namely,  Tce'-Chel-Eushous. 

11  is  the  same  as  commanding.— IBS'  (is)  enlarged  to  add  s  of  same,  omit- 
ting the  as  an  impediment;    adding  Iss  for  as;  then  Eud:ing  under  for  com- 
manding. 

12  it    may    perhaps   be  saul  that  it  is  possible.— It  will  be  seen  to  be 
best  to  break  this  one  speech-phrase  into  three  writing-phrases,  "it  may  per- 
haps," "be  said  that,"  "it  is  possible." 

M  as   long  as  I  hold. — Iss2  (as)  determines  the  position  because  it  makes 
long  legible  out  of  its  position. 

"  and  behold  I  am  with  you.— Ketoid(and)-Bled  (a  word-sign  forlehold)- 
Tetoid-Em(7  am)-Weh-yeh(tw'M  you). 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  Ill 

present  tense  ;  "I  am  always  with  you,  not  a  year  or  two,15  but  until 
the  consummation  of  the  world."  This  language10  is  exceedingly  im- 
portant. All  mankind  is  your  congregation,  and  the  tenure  of  your 
office  until  eternity  begins — until  my  Father  seizes  the  pendulum  of 
time,  and  stops  the  last  moment  of  time,  and  eternity  begins.  What 
has  the  Father  ever  done  like  that?  Compare  that  with  the  sun,  the 
moon,  and  the  tides.  I  expect  that  this  rule  will  be  as  far  beyond  the 
Father's  natural  philosophy17  as  the  soul  is  beyond  the  body. 

Timothy  ii.  7.  St.  Paul's  said  to  Timothy,  a  bishop,  "Timothy,  I 
am  appointed  a  preacher  and  an  apostle,  a  doctor  of  the  Gentiles  in 
faith  and  truth."  He  had  before  listened  to  Christ's  doctrine.  I 
may  be  asked,  Did  the  Apostles  understand  Christ  as  speaking  to 
them  ?  Did  they  comprehend  him  perfectly  in  knowing  that  they 
were  appointed  to  this  office?  Yes.  St.  Paul  said  to  Timothy,  "I 
am  appointed  a  preacher  [to  the  whole  world,  of  course]  and  a  doctor 
in  the  faith19  and  truth."  The  priests  may  make  a  mistake  in  politics. 
Probably  they  will, 


20 


because  they  arc  not  educated  in  politics.  But  they  can- 
not1 make  a  mistake  in  faith.  "  I  am  with  you."  He 
stands  by  our  side.  Now  I  come  with  double  force  to  you.  You  take 
that  Gospel  and  read  it'1  at  home,  and  you  have  no  guarantee  that 


lf)  not  a  year  or  two. — Or  is  best  omitted  here.  See  OR  ill  the  Staudard- 
Phonographie  Dictionary. 

10  this  language. — Vocalization  is  occasionally  applied  to  word-signs,  to 
insure  legibility  ;  as  hero  we  write  tkis-'ang  for  this  language,  lest  the  lug  should 
be  given  its  more  common  meaning,  thing. 

17  natural  philosophy. — The  al  omitted  as  unnecessary  for  legibility.  See 
NATURAL-LY  in  the  Standard  Phonographic  Dictionary. 

is  Saint  Paul. — The  word  "St.,"  quite  legible  in  such  phrases,  may  be  best 
adapted  to  the  position  of  the  name  following,  to  help  the  legibility  of  the 
latter. 

19  in  the  faith.— To  be  sure  that  this  shall  read  "  in  the  faith,"  write  the  by 
Petoid,  to  secure  a  practical  junction  with  Ef-Ith. 

nn    i  they    cannot.— To  insure  the  legibility  of  Kent,  do  not  join  it  with 

£"    they  with  such  a  smooth  junction  as  you  would  join  can ;  but  continue 

the  heaviness  of  Dhee  to  the  bottom,  and  then  you  join  Kent  (cannot)  as  easily  as 

you  would  join  the  same  to  Dee.    The  lower  end  of  tbe  Dhee  thus  made  is  indeed 

a  straight  line,  and  readily  makes  an  angle  with  cannot. 

2  and  read  it.— A  good  instance  of  lapping  instead  of  joining,  where  the  lat- 
ter would  not  answer. 


112  SECOND    STANDARD-MONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

you  cannot  go  astray  ;  but  there  is  guarantee  that  the  priest  from 
whom  you  are  to  learn  cannot  go  astray.  He  is  with  him.  He  is 
with  me  while  I  am  talking.  You  come  here  to  learn,  and  you  have 
a  guarantee  that  I  cannot  make  a  mistake.  This  is  the  place  where 
the  guarantee  is  given,  and  nowhere  else.  "Timothy,  my  associate 
bishop,  I  am  appointed  a  preacher."  Paul  was  appointed  by  Christ, 
of  course.  "  I  am  appointed  a  doctor,  too,  but  I  am  limited  to  faith 
and  truth  ;  I  am  appointed  to  discharge  all  the  duties  that  concern 
faith  and  truth.  The  Gospel,  the  fountain  of  truth,  is  my  thesis." 
Paul  appointed  others,  and  they  others  again,  and  they  others  again,3 
and  here  we  are.  "Timothy,"  he  said  again,  "the  things  you  have 
heard  from  me  before  many  witnesses,  the  same  commend  to  faithful 
men,  who  will  teach  others4  also."  The  Father  appointed  Christ, 
two  ;  Christ  appointed  Paul,  three  ;  Paul  appointed  Timothy,  four ; 
Timothy  appointed  others,  five  ;  and  they  appointed  others,  six ;  and 
BO  on  in  succession  down  to  us. 

'2  Timothy  iv.  1:  "Timothy,  I  charge  you  before  God  and  Jesus 
Christ,  who  shall  judge  the  living  and  the  dead,  and  I  charge  yon  by 
his  coming  and  by  his  kingdom,  to  preach  the  Word."  "  Preach" — • 
imperative  mood.  "  Be  constant,  in  season  and  out  of  season,  reprove 
and  rebuke,  but  do  it  in  all  patience."  "I  call  upon  you  in  the  name 
of  the  Trinity  to  recollect  your  primal  duty,  to  preach."  We  see  now 
the  original  power  communicated  from  the  Father,  communicated  all 
along  by  the  regular5  links  of  a  chain. 

3  and    they   others    again. — There  is  furnished  here  an  example  of  pro- 
gressive degrees  of  phrase-writing.    A  number  of  words  which  might  be  written 
without  lifting  the  pen  may  not  be  so  expressed  until  it  occurs  a  second  time. 
Then,  not  only  may  these  words  be  expressed  by  a  single  phrase-sign,  but  con- 
tractions may  take  place  in  the  sign  if  it  occurs  frequently.     This  cannot  be  bet- 
ter illustrated,  perhaps,  than  by  an  example  that  occurred  on  a  preceding  page 
— the  phrase  Western  Roman  Empire.     The  first  time  this  occurred  it  would  very 
probably  be    written  Ways2-Ren-Ar-Men:Emp-Ray — Empire  being  disjoined  be 
cause  the  junction  might  seem  somewhat  difficult.    The  next  time  it  occurred 
Empire  would  probably  be  joined.     Then,  the  next  time,  to  avoid  the  somewhat 
difficult  junction,  Roman  would  be  contracted  to  Ar  ;  and  for  such  a  phrase,  oc- 
curring several  times,  such  a  contraction  would  not  impair  legibility.    But  sup- 
pose that  it  occtirs  many  times  more — it  will  very  probably  be  contracted  (in  ac- 
cordance with  the  principles  of  237,  R.  2,  b)  to  Way  (for  Western)-A.i(foi  Roman)- 
Empffor  Empire),  i.e.,  W.  R.  Emp. 

4  teach    others.— See  DHB  in  the  Dictionary  ;    see  also  in  this  Reader,  p. 
60,  xii. 

5  by  the  regular. — The  the  may  be  omitted  as  both  an  impediment  in  join- 
ing and  as  a  word  that  may  be  readily  supplied  and  therefore  superfluously 
written. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  113 

2  Corinthians,  v.  20  :  "  We  are,  therefore,  ambassadors  for  Christ." 
We  stand  in  his  shoes.  Paul  was  a  scholar'1  before  he  was  called.  He 
learned  how  to  write  well  before  the  pen  of  inspiration  was  put  into 
his  hands.  "For  Christ  we  are  ambassadors."  What  a  beautiful 
phrase !  What  is  an  ambassador  ?  The  representative  of  the  queen 
or  king,  so  far  as  the  authority  is  communicated.  "Go  to  America," 
the  Queen  said  to  the  ambassador,  "  and  represent  me.  You  cannot 
declare  war  and  make  peace,  but  so  far  as  I  give  you  power  plenipo- 
tentiary, you  have  the  power  of  the  Queen  there  pro  tanto. ' '  As  am- 
bassadors of  Christ,  we  hold  his  place.  We  are  all  ambassadors,  ex- 
horting as  if  God  spoke  in  our  mouths.  So  we  hold  the  place  of  Christ, 
and  our  exhortation  is  the  language  and  speech  of  God  the  Father. 
There  is  no  more  presumption  for  the  bishop  to  say  that  he  occupies 
such  a  position  than  for  the  chancellor  to  say,  "I  am  chancellor;" 
for  the  general  of  the  army  to  say,  "  I  am  commander-in-chief ; "  for 
the  man  in  the  navy  to  say,  "I  am  chief  admiral  aboard  this  licet." 
I  have  the  power ;  I  am  the  ambassador  of  Christ,  and  God  speaks  in 
my  mouth.  Turn  the  whole  Bible  through,  and  you  cannot  find  such 
another7  document.  This  is  the  fullest  document  in  the  whole  Bible. 
Here  is  text  after  text,  title  after  title,  power  after  power8 — an  accu- 
mulation- of  titles  and  warrants  for  fear  this  great  case  should  lose 
any  importance  for  want  of  the  largest  amount  of  accumulative  evi- 
dence. 

Luke,  x.  1C  :  "He  that  heareth  you,  heareth  Me  ;  he  that  despiseth 
you,  despiseth  Me."  Now  the  Greek  is  better  than  the  English.  It 
says,  "he  who  hears  you,  hears  Me."  It  is  not  " who  understands 
you,9  understands  Me."  The  Greek  word  afcouo  signifies  what  falls 
on  the  ear.  So  perfectly  are  you  identified  with  me  in  my  office. 


21 


The  moment  your  words  fall  upon  the  ear  of  a  man,  he  is 
to  take  them  as  my  words.     Hearing  and  understanding 
in  Greek  are  two  words. 


6  a  scholar. — On  account  of  the  deep  hook  of  Skier,  we  cannot  easily  preflx 
a  by  Kotoid,  ami  lieuce  use  Tetoiil.  Tetoid  can  IK  it  bo  read  as  or  here,  because 
when  a,  an,  or  and  would  bo  preferably  joined  by  Tetoid — or  should  be  written 
separately. 

'  such  another. — Let  us  here  drop  an,  because  In  the  way  of  lengthening 
to  add  otlter.  See  DHR  iii  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

s  text   after   text,  title  after   title,  power    after    powe*. — 276 ;  p.  61, 

xix.  of  this  Header. 

9  wlio    xmtlerstamls    you« — To  add  you  here,  we  must  drop  tho  En-hools 


114  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    HEADER. 

0  QHOUUV  0[iuv,  E\iov  aMOuef  xcii  o  afitruv  v^iac,,^!  aoErtr  o  fie 
tpl  aSc-ruv,  aGe-rel  TOV  airocfTefXavTa  ^.e.  A 

The  moment  your  words  barely  fall  upon  the  ear  of  a  man,  that 
moment  lie  hears  my  words.  He  who  despiseth  you  despises  me.  I 
urn  so  identified  with  you2  that  my  words  are  your  words,  and  a  con- 
tempt of  you  is  a  contempt  of  me. 

St.  Paul  uses  a  beautiful  text,  which  you  will  not  forget.  "Faith," 
he  says,  "comes  by  hearing."  He  does  not  say  my  faith  comes  by 
understanding.  If  you  look  at  that  text,  there  will  be  found  more 
than  at  first3  strikes  the  eye.  Faith  comes  by  hearing.  How  can  a 


implied  in  the  Eus-circle  in  Ned-Stens,  understands.    So  also  drop  n  in  undcrsta'ds 
me. 


21 


1  Pronounced,  according  to  the  usual  modification  of  the  Erasmian 
pronunciation,  Ho  akuron  hu-nion,  em-tu  aknri  ;  ki  lid  ath-etOn  Lu-- 
mas  eni-c  atlreti ;  ho-de  em-e  ath-eton,  ath-eti  ton  apostilau-ta  me. 

No  system  of  stenography  can  enable  a  reporter  to  take  down  accurately  a  pas- 
sage as  long  as  this,  in  a  language  with  which  he  is  not  nearly  as  familiar  as  his 
own  ;  and  hardly  then,  if  the  reporter  has  not  accustomed  himself  to  writing  it, 
especially  if  it  should  be  uttered  rapidly.  But  a  reporter  who  has  some  gem-i-al 
knowledge  of  one  or  more  foreign  languages,  especially  if  he  has  a  quick  ear  for 
discriminating  sounds,  may  usually  take  a  few  words  at  the  beginning,  aud  the 
concluding  word,  aud  thus  be  able  to  eomplete  the  extract  by  referring  to  the 
proper  books. 

In  this  case,  I  very  well  knew  that  the  speaker  gave  the  Greek  for  Luke,  x.  16, 
which  he  had  just  before  quoted,  and  upon  referring  to  my  Greek  New  Testa- 
ment, I  there  found  it ;  and  the  Greek  letters  being  quite  familiar  to  both  eye  and 
hand,  it  was  easy  to  insert  the  quotation  in  my  transcript. 

The  student  will  naturally  ask,  what  would  have  been  done  if  you  had  not  been 
so  fortunate  as  to  get  a  clew  to  the  passage  ?  I  will  answer,  that  usually,  unless 
you  desire  and  are  able  to  be  very  accurate,  you  would  omit  such  passages  ;  and 
in  the  majority  of  cases,  such  omission  would  be  no  detriment  to  a  report ;  for, 
often  such  passages  are  thrown  in  more  for  a  display  of  learning  than  to  add  any- 
thing by  the  way  of  idea  or  illustration.  Take  this  very  case.  How  mnch  is 
lost  of  real  force  of  argument,  or  of  idea,  by  omitting  this  Greek  quotation,  and 
the  sentences  introducing  it  ?  Thus — 

Luke,  x.  16 :  "  He  that  heareth  you  heareth  me  ;  he  that  despiseth  you  despis- 
eth me."  Now  the  Greek  is  better  than  the  English.  It  says,  "  He  who  hears  you 
hears  me."  It  is  not  "who  understands  you  understands  me."  The  Greek  word 
akouo  signifies  what  falls  on  the  ear.  .  .  .  "  The  moment  your  words  barely 
fall  upon  the  ear  of  a  man,  that  moment  he  hears  my  words." 

2  with  you.— See  Exhibit  of  Semicircles  Enlarged,  on  p.  IOC  of  this  Header. 

3  at  first. This  sign  is  formed  thus :  Tee3  -pins  first,  the  loop  joined  as  usu- 
al and  not  at  angle  as  usual  -with  the  loop  for  first.    See  FIRST  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary. 


KEY  TO   THE   REPOKTJNO   EXEKCISES.  115 

man  hear  unless  somebody1  speaks  to  him?  Faith  does  not  come  by 
reading  nor  by  reasoning  No ;  it  comes  from  the  speaking  of  the 
accredited  orator. 

Galatians,  iv.  13  :  "I  preached  the  Gospel  heretofore,* and  you  re- 
ceived me  as  the  angel  of  God,  even  as  Christ  Jesus."  That  answers 
all  the  objections  you  can  propose.  Did  the  Apostles  understand  what 
Christ  said  ?  Yes.  But  did  the  people  understand  ?  Yes.  Galatians, 
iv.  13:  "I  preached  the  Gospel  heretofore,  and  you  received  me  as 
the  angel  of  God,  even  as  Christ  Jesus."6 

Now,  you  have  the  warrant  given  by  the  Father  and  by  the  Son  : 
you  have  Paul's  assertion  that  the  people  of  Galatia  received  him  as 
if  Christ  spoke.  Now,  have  I  got  out  of  my  way  ?  Have  I  said  a 
word  too  much  when  I  said  you  were  called  upon  to  hear  me  as  if 


4  somebody. — That  is,  Semb2,  someb[ody].  As  body  is  usually  contracted  to 
bod  (as  in  every-body,  no-body,  anylbody,  in  our  rs)  would  some  have  us  write 
Seni2-Bed  for  some  body  ?  The  d  of  body  would  be  the  impediment  to  easy  phrase- 
writing  here  ;  and,  therefore,  let  us  drop  the  d  of  bod,  and  add  the  U  by  widening 
the  Em  of  some. 

6  heretofore.— Ret2 -Ef-Ar  would  be  the  full  form,  the  position  ruij  quir- 
ing "  the  first  stroke  not  horizontal " — liet  in  this  case — to  be  written  in  tho  po- 
sition required  by  the  accented  vowel — 6  in  this  case.  Therefore,  write  Ret2-Ef- 
Ar,  heretovoiiE,  dropping  the  Ar  in  the  reporting  style.  By  the  same  principle, 
write  llet'-Ef-Shel,  artificial,  dropping  the  cial  in  the  reporting  style. 

6  I  preached  the  Gospel — Christ  Jesus. — When  a  reporter  knows  that  ho 
can  have  easy  access  to  a  work  from  which  quotations  are  made,  especially  if  the 
quotations  are  long,  and  particular  reference  is  made,  it  will  be  suUicient  to  take 
the  beginning  and  concluding  words,  and,  of  course,  the  reference  to  chapter, 
page,  or  section,  if  such  a  relerence  is  given.  The  extracts  can  be  afterward 
found  and  inserted  in  the  transcript.  (6).  If  the  quotations  are  short,  and  the 
reporter  wishes  to  save  himself  the  trouble  of  reference,  he  may  take  the  com- 
plete quotation,  (c).  But  where  the  same  quotation  is  made  several  times,  it 
would  not  only  be  unnecessary  to  take  it  in  full,  but  injudicious;  for,  the  oftener 
the  quotation — as,  for  instance,  a  text — is  repeated,  the  more  rapidly,  as  a  usual 
thing,  it  is  uttered  ;  and  it  may  easily  happen  that  it  would  be  uttered  so  rapidly 
that  the  reporter  would  fall  so  far  behind  the  speaker  in  taking  it  down,  that  he 
might  lose  the  following  sentence,  (d).  It  is  no  discredit  to  a  reporter  that  ho 
cannot  take  down  a  long  and  rapidly-uttered  passage,  quoted  from  the  distinct 
memory  or  read  from  a  book  ;  for,  it  may  be  uttered  too  rapidly  to  bo  reported. 
A  practiced  speaker  can  read  with  tolerably  good  articulation  from  400  to  450  or 
500  words  in  a  minute— varying,  of  course,  with  different  individuals  and  the 
different  matter  spoken.  It  is  not  a  necessary  part  of  the  business  of  a  reporter 
:o  insert  such  extracts,  though  it  is  usually  done,  when  it  can  be  conveniently, 
the  reporter  being  paid  for  them  at  the  same  rate  as  for  other  matter. 

When  the  reporter  intends  to  insert  the  quotations,  if  they  are  long,  he  should 
usually  take  not  only  the  beginning  and  concluding  words,  but  a  number  of 
words  or  sentences  in  the  body  of  the  quotation,  for  the  purpose  of  more  readily 


116  SECOXD   STAXDAnD-PEONOGKAPHlC 

Jesus  Christ  addressed  you?7  Not  from  any  importance  of  mine,  but 
from  the  office  I  hold.  What  the  people  of  Galatia  did,  the  people  of 
Brooklyn  ought  to  do.  We  have  here  the  Galatian.s  proving  to  your 
face  my  proposition.  They  received  Paul  as  the  angel  of  God,  even 
as  Christ  Jesus.  Would  they  not  receive  Timothy  in  the  same  way, 
and  the  men  appointed  by  Timothy,  wherever  that  Cross  is  seen. 

Mark,  xvi.  16  :  "Go,  and  preach  the  Gospel,  and  he  that  believeth 
and  is  baptized  shall  be  saved,  and  he  that  believeth  nots  shall  be 
condemned." 

Here  we  have  Christ  saying,  "Go  and  preach" — two  command- 
ments— "and  he  that  believeth  and  is  baptized  shall  be  saved,  and 
he  that  believeth  not  shall  be  damned."  "  Do  you  say  that  if  the 
people  believe  the  Gospel  in  the  mouth  of  this  man,  that  they  are 
saved,  and  that  if  they  believe  not  they  shall  be  damned  ?"  Yes. 
Can  there  be9  any  mistake  in  their  believing  ?  No.  How  could  God 
attach  damnation  as  a  penalty,  unless  they  were  wrong  in  rejecting 

finding  or  identifying  the  extract.  This  will  be  the  more  necessary  when  the 
reference  to  page,  etc.,  has  not  been  given  ;  and  it  is  sometimes  more  neces- 
sary when  the  reference  has  been  given  ;  for  the  reference  is  not  unfrequeutly 
wrong. 

i  Jesus  Christ  addressed  you. — A  speech-phrase.  How  shall  we  best  dis- 
pose of  it  in  writing?  Here  J.  C.=  Jay-Kay,  as  a  familiar  and  distinct  form  in 
religious  matter,  may  be  as  safely  joined  as  the  subject  of  the  verb,  as  would  a 
pronoun.  In  order  to  join  you  to  addressed,  drop  the  ed  as  an  impediment,  and 
join  Vuh  as  shown  in  the  engraving. 

8  believeth  not. — This  phrase  may  be  written  as  here,  Bel2-Ith-Net — that  is, 
with  the  customary  word-forms  simply  joined,  only  taking  care  to  shape  them  so 
as  to  sharpen  the  required  angle.    But  the  phrase  recurring  (as  below)  or  the 
angle  being  thought  too  difficult,  simply  express  the  consonants  of  eth  not  in  the 
briefest  manner,  namely,  by  Thent ;  in  the  same  way  as  we  make  the  word-signs 
for  may  not,  Ment2  ;  are  not,  Arnt2,  or  Kent*  ;  will  not,  Lent' ;  cannot,  KenU  ;  have 
not,  Vents  (or  Vee2-Net) ;    there  ought  not,  Dhreuti  ;    they  are  not,  Dbrent2 ;  Uiere 
•would  (or  had)  not,  Dhreut3  ;  tell  me  not,  Tel2-Ment ;  why  not,  \Vayiit1  ;  your  not  do- 
ing so,  Yaynt2-Dee[ing]-so.     See  postpositive  phrases  under  NOT  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary. 

9  can  there  be. — Ken2  being  can  we  cannot  use  lengthening  to  add  tlir; 
but,  to  use  this  desirable  principle,  let  us  drop  the  n  of  can,  and  write  ca'  there  be, 
Kaydher--Bee.     In  could  thr,  we  drop  the  impediment  to  lengthening,  namely, 
the  d,  and  then  write  Kaydher,  could  thr,  but  putting  it  in  the  third  position  to 
imply  its  vowel,  60.     To  such  lengthened  signs  we  may  add  a  circle,  loop,  or 
hook,  as  required;    as  in  Kaydherf2,  can  therefore;    KaydherP,  could  tlterefore ; 
Kaydhern2,  ca[n]  tfiere  no\t] ;  Peedhern2,  upo[n]  their  own ;  Kaydbern2,  rather  [iha]n; 
Embdherft,  may  be  therefore]  ;  Gaydherf2,  go  therefore.    This  is  the  only  reasona- 
ble use  of  the  lengthening  principle — that  is  as  to  hooks,  etc.,  following  the 
lengthened  stroke. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXKUCISE&  117 

it  ?  Could  that  faith  be  fallible  ?  No  ;  how  could  eternal  fire  be  at- 
tached to  disbelieving  it,  if  it  were  uncertain  or  erroneous?  There- 
fore, it  is  a  clear  case  that10  since  Christ  attaches  eternal  damnation 
to  the  man  who  does  not  believe  my  words,  that  my  words  must  be 
us  infallible  as  his  own  existence.  How  could  He  punish  you  by  an 
eternal  penalty,  if  my  words  could  possibly  lead  to  error  ?  How  could 
He  attach  lasting  punishment,  in  His  imperial  anger,  for  not  believing 
my  words,  unless  my  words  were  beyond  all  cavil,  perfectly,  consti- 
tutionally, and  metaphysically  infallible  ?  Eternal  damnation,  there- 
fore, being  the  penalty  attached  to  any  one  not  believing  my  declar- 
ation, 


22 


proves  that  my  words  must  be  as  infallible  as  the  very 


with  me,  but  do  not  reject  what  I  say.  Am  I  talking  anything  but 
what  is  in  the  Gospel  ? 

Matthew,  xviii.  17  :  "He  that  will  not  hear  the  Church,  let  him  be 
as  the  heathen  and  the  publican."  If  he  will  not  hear  the  Church, 
I  command  you1  to  look  upon  him2  as  a  heathen  and  a  publican — a 
man  of  the  most  atrociously  bad  morals.  The  man  who  will  not 
hear  the  Church — that  sole  crime  constitutes  him  per  se  a  man  desti- 
tute of  all  religion,  a  man  of  the  most  degraded  character. 

Matthew,  xvi.  19  :  "  Peter,  who  do  men  say  that  I  am?  They  say 
that  you  are  Christ.  Blessed  art  thou,  Simon  Barjona,  because  nei- 
ther flesh  nor  blood  told  you  that,  but  my  Father  who  is  in  heaven." 
Simon  was  his  name,  but  after  he  fell  everybody  doubted  him.  Oh, 
they  said,  Peter  can  never  be  depended  upon  ;  he  betrayed  his  Master. 
You  recollect  the  text.  Peter,  said  Christ,  Satan  attempted  to  take 
you  from  me,  but  I  prayed  that  your  faith  shall  never  fail.  Your 
name  was  Simon  ;  I  now  call  you  Peter — Petros,  a  rock3  within  a  rock. 

1°  therefore,  it  is  a  clear  case  that.— To  get  a  convenient  writing  phrase 
for  this  speech-phrase,  let  us  reject  the  slight  pause  as  an  impediment,  and  omit 
a,  not  because  an  impediment,  but  as  easily  supplied — and  we  have  a  beautiful 
phraae-sign,  Dher2-Fets-Kler-Kays-Dhet ;  that  is,  four  strokes  for  a  phrase  requir- 
ing seven  times  as  many  letters  in  longhand.  The  number  of  strokes  in  those 
longhand  letters  is  quite  a  different  matter. 

of)     1 1  command  you. — TetoidH^-commfimplied  by  writing  under):Endl 

uu     (and)-Yeh(j/o«). 

2  to  look  upon  him. — The  n  of  upon  omitted  so  that  him  (the  object  of  the 
verb  look  upon)  may  be  joined. 

3  a  rock. — Observe  how  the  engraving  teaches  to  sharpen  the  angle  before 
and  after  Ray.    Ray  when  not  connected  with  any  character  showing  its  direc- 


118  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Peter,  you  will  yet  betray  me,  and  the  world1  will  think  7011  are  a 
coward,5  and  not  to  be  depended  upon  ;  but  I  want  to  show  you  that 
I  can  raise  a  man  of  the  most  despicable  character  into  the  most  ex- 
alted position  of  a  human  being.6  I  will  now  satisfy  the  world  by 
changing  your  name.  I  will  lift  you  up  and  call  you  Petros,  a  rock 
within  a  rock.  You  can  never  be  touched  by  the  waves  that  beat 
against  the  rock.  You  are  in  the  rock.  I  am  the  rock.  1  eter,  thou 
art  Peter ;  I  give  you  the  keys  of  all  my  possessions.  I  give  the  whole 
flock  into  your  hands;7  feed  the  lambs,  the  little  children,  and  feed 
my  sheep,  the  parents,  secondly.  The  whole  flock,  the  sheep  and  the 
lambs,  are  under  your  control,  and  1<> !  I  am  with  you  all  the  days, 
even  to  the  consummation  of  the  world,  and  the  gates  of  hell  shall 
not  prevail  against  you.H 

Peter,  I  have  given  that  statement  to  all  the  bishops  through  Paul. 
I  said  I  would  teach9  them.     I  am  now  with  you  particularly.    I  give 

tion,  must,  for  distinction's  sake,  be  written  more  slanting  than  Chay — say  at  an 
angle  with  the  line  of  30  degrees.  But  in  other  cases,  more  or  less  slanting  ac- 
cording to  ease  of  junction. 

'  4  and  the  world. — Reject  the  as  easily  supplied,  and  also  as  an  impediment 
to  writing  the  phrase,  and  write  Ketoid-Eld2,  and  [the]  world.  This  secures  Kid 
in  its  position. 

5  will  think  you  are  a  coward. — How  shall  we  dispose  of  this  speech- 
phrase?  Write  in  the  order :  Lay2-Ith-Yuh  Ray-Tetoid  ;  and  for  greater  legibility 
put  coward,  Kary-Red,  in  the  third  position,  that  is,  with  the  first  stroke  not  hori- 
zontal through  the  line.  It  is  not  the  Kay  being  below  the  line  that  makes  such 
a  form  third  position.  Why  not  join  the  a  to  the  following  word  as  usual  ?  Be- 
cause Tetoid  prefixed  to  Kay  Red3,  would  be  in  position  of  Tetoid4,  to  a. 

£  of  a  human  being. — Observe  that  nearness  here  implies  of:  that  Men  is 
not  in  the  fourth,  but  in  the  third  position,  and  is  read  human  ;  and  that  being 
(written  Bee  in  this  phrase)  is  perfectly  legible  without  the  Ing  usually  required. 

"  into  your  hands. — As  Ends  for  hands  will  hardly  join  to  Yay,  let  us  try, 
as  in  many  other  cases,  writing,  in  the  briefest  practicable  way,  the  consonants 
of  Tay-Ends,  namely,  by  Yaynds=y  nds=your  hands.  Does  the  pupil  say  that  all 
such  devices  would  have  to  be  memorized  in  addition  to  the  "Lists"  of  word- 
signs,  contractions,  etc.?  By  no  means.  The  principles  exemplified  by  this 
Reader  will  enable  you  with  a  pleasurable  spontaneity  to  form  thousands  of 
phrases  you  never  before  saw,  perhaps,  and  to  see  that  the  "  Lists  "  are  so  found- 
ed on  rule  or  reason  as  to  be  regarded  as  natural,  according  to  the  Hand-Book 
system,  rather  than  as  "  Lists  "  of  arbitraries. 

*  against  you. — Try  joining  these  words  without  any  omission,  and  say 
what  consonants  are  in  the  way.  Evidently  the  n  and  t,  Omit  these,  and  then 
yon  can  write  Gays-Yuh,  agai's'  you.  Observe  that  the  circle  here  is  the  simple 
circle  and  not  the  Ens-circli-. 

9  I  said  I  would  teach.—  Would  is  here  joined  as  a  hook,  upon  the  princi- 
ple of  joining  it  to  the  horizontal  ond-tick.  See  201,  H.  C,  o,  which,  to  be  sufflci- 


KEY    TO    THE   E2POKTIXG   EXERCISES.  119 

you  a  promise  by  yourself.  I  give  you  supreme  authority  over  the 
whole  Church.  Here  are  the  keys  of  the  whole  kingdom  of  heaven. 
You  have  all  the  keys  and  all  the  flock,  and  lo !  I  am  with  you  al- 
ways, to  the  consummation  of  the  world.  Peter,  there  shall  be  but 
one  fold,  and  one  shepherd,  even  as  there  is10  one  faith,  one  Lord,  one 
baptism.11  There  shall  be  but  one  fold  and  one  shepherd,  and  you 
are  the  shepherd  over  all  my  flock.  The  oneness  of  faith  is  the 
same  as  the  oneness  of  God.  There  is  no  change  in  God,  and  there  is 
none  in  faith.  God  the  same  yesterday,  to-day,  and  forever ;  the 
same  in  faith.  God,  one ;  faith,  one.  No  other  idea'2  in  the  whole 
universality  of  human  thought  can  tell  you  what  the  oneness  of  faith 
is  except  comparing  it  to  the  oneness  and  unchangeableness  of  God 
himself.  "Lo!  I  am  with  you  always13  and  the  gates  of  hell  shall 
not  prevail  against  you."  I  therefore  put  my  document  out  of  my 
hand,  and  I  ask  you  is  the  death  of  Christ  itself  put 

in  stronger  language  than  that  ?    No.     Is  it  oftoner  ex- 
pressed?     No.     Is  it  clearer?     No.     If  you  cannot  be- 
lieve that,  therefore,  hov,r  can  you  believe1  in  the  death  of  Christ,  or 

cicntly  comprehensive,  should  read — "Tho  reporter  joins  a  brief  Way  like  an  Eu- 
hook  to  tho  ticks  and  dashes  iu  tho  direction  of  Pec,  Kay,  or  Hay  to  add  what  or 
would;  thiis,  PentouU,  of  what;  Pentoid2,  <o  wAa£;  Beudoid1,  ail  would;  Keiitoid1, 
and  w'tat ;  Kentoid2,  and  would  (sometimes,  ia  phrase-writing,  I  would);  Rontoid-. 
he  would." 

1°  as  t>ere  is.— To  harmonize,  as  fir  and  is  thr  with  was  thr,  substitute  Zoo 
for  tho  circle  ;  and  add  tor  by  lengthening.  Thus  you  will  securo  a  beautiful 
series  :  Zeedher1,  is  thr ;  Zeedher2,  was  thr  ;  Zeedher3,  as  (or  has)  Ihr.  There  are 
occasional  instances  where  the  Dhcr-ticli  may  be  advantageously  joined  to  Iss  foi- 
l's thr,  has  tlir.  Seo  DHB,  THEIB,  THEY  ABE,  THEBE,  and  OTHEB,  in  the  Dictionary. 

11  baptism. — Tho  word  one  is  here  omitted  twice,  and  a  space  left  for  it.     As 
It  ia  not  a  "clauso"  or  "a  few  words"  omitted  each  time,  neither  a  dasli  nor 
comma  is  substituted  ;  a  little  more  space  than  usual  between  words  serving  to 
suggest  the  omitted  word.    Seo  276. 

12  no   other   idea. — Another  being  written  Endhcr2,  tho  consonant  of  an 
lengthened,  wo  write  Eudher3,  no  other ;  Endher1,  any  other,  in  thr. 

13  Ix>  !  I  am  \vitli  you  always. — This  is  a  good  illustration  of  tho  gradual 
agglutination  of  words  ia  phrase-writing.     The  stenographer,  perhaps,  breaks  up 
such  a  phrase  into  several  parts;  as,  "Lo!  /-am. with-you  always."    Then,  lo-I- 
am-with->jou.    Finally,  always  may  bo  added. 

2r»    i  how  can  you  believe. — How  shall  wo  dispose  of  this  speech-phrase 
«J     in  writing?     limn,  of  course,  we  shall  not  write  by  tho  Old  word-sign, 
on,  which  is  left  to  stand  in  the  corresponding  style,  being  the  vowel  part  of  the 
word,  suggestive,  and  for  that  style  sufficiently  brief;  but  not  answering  well 


120  SECOND    STANDAED-PHONOGUAPHIO    HEADER. 

his  life,  or  resurrection  ?  What  do  you  depend  on  for  salvation  ?  The 
death  of  Christ.  Is  it  clearer  than  the  document  I  have  read?  No. 
Is  it  fuller?  No.  It  is  one  plain,  legal,  constitutional,  did.-irtir  doc- 
ument. Do  you  believe  it  as  firmly  as  the  cross?  I  certainly  do. 
Therefore,  instructed  according  to  all  this  testimony,2  the  testimony 
of  God  the  Father,  the  Son,  and  the  Holy  Ghost,  you  must  believe  me 
or  any  man  in  my  place.  It  is  a  plain  statement — clear,  constitu- 
tional language.  I  therefore  submit  to  you — Is  the  death  of  Christ, 
or  his  resurrection,  or  his  cross,  told  with  a  more  accumulated  evi- 
dence than  the  clear  infallibility  of  the  Catholic  Church  ?  You  say, 
certainly  not.  You  believe,  then,  we  are  infallible?  I  do.  Now,  I 
conclude  my  argument.  I  call  the  Pope,  and  I  put  him  in  a  largo 
chair,  and  I  say,  Sir,  you  will  please  take  the  presidency  of  this  meet- 
ing. Then  I  call  all  the  bishops,  and  I  put  them  in  one  large  con- 
gregation before  the  Pope.  I  say  there  is  Peter,  and  here  arc  Paul 
and  the  apostles  and  all  the  bishops  of  the  Church.  Then  recollect 
the  promise  that  he  is  with  them.  The  Father  has  given  a  particu- 
lar promise.  The  Father  has  said  it,'-1  the  Son  has  avowed  it,  and  the 
Holy  Ghost  declares  it.  Now,  I  call  upon  that  whole  assembly  to  tell 
me  what  is  the  faith.  They  do  ;  and  when  they  have  got  up  a  docu- 
ment and  signed  it,  I  believe  that  is  infallible  as  surely  as  Christ  is 
alive.  And  if  you  can  put  that  out  of  my  head,  I  do  not  believe  one 
word  of  the  Book. 


for  a  reporting  style.  Nor  will  we  write  it  by  the  "  heavy  mfur  h,"  because  of  its 
absurdity ;  nor  by  the  Pitmauic  Iss-Cher  for  h,  because  not  only  absurd,  but  vio- 
lating every  principal  purpose  of  shorthand.  But  let  us  use  the  Standard-Pho- 
nographic A-tick.  As  the  word  he  is  represented  by  the  A-tick  in  the  second 
position,  let  us,  for  the  sake  of  legibility,  put  the  A-tick  for  how  iu  the  third  posi- 
tion ;  then  add  can  by  Kay  (omitting  the  En-hook  as  an  impediment  here  to  join- 
ing); join  Yen  for  you,  to  which  you  may  easily  join  Bel  for  believe. 

4  according  to  all  tills  testimony. — Kred1  =according  ;  to  which  add  to  all 
by  its  Standard-Phonographic  sign  Pletoid  (that  is,  the  tick  for  to,  with  the  El- 
hook  adding  all);  then  add  the  rest  of  the  phrase. 

2  the  Father  has  said  it. — The  principal  subjects  joined  are  pronouns, 
because  of  their  frequency  and  distinctiveness  of  form,  and  the  need  of  their 
being  written  with  great  speed.  But  other  words  in  the  subjective  relation,  may 
be  joined  when  sufficiently  distinct  by  form  or  by  recurrence  ;  and,  of  course, 
when  easily  joinable.  Here,  for  instance,  the  familiar  word  Father  (=God)  is 
being  spoken  of  (i.'.,  is  in  the  subjective,  or  nominative  case) ;  to  this  we  add 
has  by  Iss  ;  we  enlarge  the  Iss  to  add  the  *  of  said ;  and  we  shorten  the  d  of  said 
to  add  it.  Under  the  same  principle  we  join  in  this  sentence,  Son  to  has-avoioed- 
it;  and  Hay3-Gay  (Holy  Ghost)  is  joined  to  declares  it. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  121 


THE    AMERICAN    BIBLE    SOCIETY. 

[An  Address  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  William  J.  Sassnelt,  of  Alabama,  delivered  at  the 
Academy  of  Music,  at  the  celebration  of  the  Forty-Fourth  Anniversary 
(18fiO)  of  the  American  Bible  Society.  Reported  in  full  by  Andrew  J. 
Graham,  for  the  Society.*] 

THE  Rev.  WILLIAM  J.  SASSNETT,  D.D.,  of  Alabama,  offered  the  fol- 
lowing resolution : 

"  Resolved,  That  this  Society  is  entitled  to  the  hearty  co-operation* 
of  every  philanthropist  and  Christian,  because,  in  the  principles  upon 
which  it  is  based,  and  in  its  grand  design,  it  prominently'J  represents 
those  great  central  ideas  which  most  concern  the  highest  and  best 
interests7  of  the  human  race." 

Sir,  I  offers  this  resolution,  because  I  believe  it  expresses  a  great 
truth  in  connection  with  the  enterprise  which  it  is  the  object  of  this 
occasion  to  serve,9  a  truth  which  ought  always  to  be  clearly  set  forth 
and  urged  whenever  we  attempt  to  announce  to  the  world  the 
grounds  upon  which  this  enterprise  rests  its  claim  to  public  sympa- 
thy, confidence,  and  co-operation. 

Sir,  the  only  conflict10  in  the  world 


*  The  officers  of  tho  Society,  in  the  pamphlet  containing  the  Anniversary  ad- 
dresses, credit  the  reporting  in  the  following  words  :  "We  are  indebted,  for  tho 
excellent  reports  of  several  of  theso  addresses  [all  the  unwritten  ones],  to  tho  skill 
and  fidelity  of  tho  reporter,  Mr.  Andrew  J.  Graham." 

c  to  tho  licarty  co-operation.— Put  the  hook  of  Ilay  in  the  fourth  posi- 
tion to  imply  to,  and  supply  the,  to  which  add  hearty  co-operation 

c  prominently.— See  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  ADMONISH. 

7  and  best  interests. — Hero  you  could  omit  the  t  of  best  and  Bees2  might  be 
misread  base. 

8  I  offer. — Fcr1  for  offer  is  hero  vocalized,  to  distinguish  it  from  form  (Fer1); 
though  there  is  no  special  need  of  its  being  vocalized. 

1J  to  serve. — Here  the  Iss  of  serve  may  bo  put  in  the  fourth  position  to  imply 
the  innnitivo  particle  to. 

10  only  conflict. — Here  con  may  be  implied  by  writing  under.  This  implica- 
tion, however,  would  not  bo  used  when  tho  following  word  would  run  too  far 
below  the  line,  or  when  you  particularly  desire  tho  following  word  in  its  posi- 
tion. 


122  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 


24 


is  between  ideas — good  ideas  and  bad1  ideas,  true  ideas 
and  false  ones.2 

The  American  Bible  Society  is  based  upon3  and  represents  ideas— 
ideas  vast,  all-comprehending  ;  as  wide  as  is  the  sphere  of  human  in- 
terest, as  enduring  as  human  destiny. 

It  is  because  it  does  represent  these  ideas,  and  for  their  vast  dynam- 
ic and  aggressive  operations,  that  I  shall  claim,  to-day,  that  this 
Institution  is  one  of  the  grandest  agencies  of  usefulness  that  the  world 
now  affords ;  that  it  is  an  honor  to  the  American  people  ;'  and  that  it 
deserves  the  countenance  and  the  co-operation  of  every  man  and  wo- 
man who  wishes  to  turn  his  or  her  influence  to  the  very  best  account 
in  advancing  the  happiness  of  mankind. 

What,  now,  are  these  ideas?5  To  some  of  them,  at  least,  I  propose 
to  call  the  attention  of  this  assembly  to-day.  The  first  great  idea 
upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society8  is  based  is  this,  that  if  the 


24 


and  bad.— 259,  II.  1,  6. 


8  and  false  ones. — As  Ketoid  for  and  could  not  be  quite  conveniently 
prefixed  to  Fel  and  Thel  and  their  mates,  use  Tetoid  instead  ;  aud,  therefore, 
disjoin  or  preceding  them. 

3  based  upon. — We  drop  the  cd=t  of  based,  BO  that  we  may,  as  is  desirable, 
join  upon. 

4  American  people.— If  this  phrase  were  occurring  often,  I  should  omit 
one  of  the  hooks  ;  that  of  American  (Em-Ken),  of  course,  rather  than  of  people ; 
lor  this  can,  on  account  of  its  larger  number  of  consonants,  best  suffer  contrac- 
tion without  impairing  its  legibility. 

5  these  ideas. — With  such  frequent  use  of  idea-s  as  in  this  speech,  wo  may 
safely  omit  the  diphthong  when  it  is  in  the.  way  of  joining,  as  it  is  here. 

6  American  Bible  Society. — The  engraving  of  this  speech  will  finely  illus- 
trate progressive  contractions.    When  this  phrase  occurred  above,  it  was  writ, 
ten  in  full,  with  tho  exception  that  the  settled  contraction  (Em-Ken)  for  American 
was  used.     In  this  case  the  principle  of  237,  R.  2,  6,  is  acted  upon  in  writing 
Bee  for  Bible,  and  Es  for  Society,  the  latter  being  written  through  Bee,  to  secure 
greater  legibility.    Let  me  write  as  though  I  were  describing  the  actual,  the 
\vouderJully-rapid  and  marvelous  operations  of  the  mind  in  reporting.     "  This 
phrase  will  probably  occur  many  times  in  this  speech.     The  next  time  it  occurs 
I  will  fully  apply  tho  principle  fcr  forming  special  contractions  (237,  R.  2,  6). 
writing  Em  for  American,  Bee  for  Bible  (to  be  expressed  by  widening  Em)  and  Kg 
for  Society. "    Suppose  that  the  form  ErnbfEs  has  been  employed  one  or  more 
times,  tho  Es,  for  the  sako  of  legibility,  being  written  through  Emb  ;  the  prac- 
ticed reporter  will  next  seek  to  save  tho  lifting  of  tho  pen,  and  will  join  Es  to 
Emb,  (rusting  that  memory  and  the  context  will  enable  him  to  read  correctly 
this  very  brief  contraction,  by  which  he  will  save  as  much  as  tho  writing  of  Bible 
and  Society  every  time  the  phraso  "American  Bible  Society  "  occurs. 


KEY   TO   THE  nEPORTHCa   EXEBCISES.  123 

world  is  ever  redeemed  it  must  be  by  external,  supernatural  agencies. 
There  have7  always  been  two  leading  opinions  or  theories  in  the  world 
in  reference  to  religion.  The  one  is,  that  the  world  contains  or  em. 
braces*  within  itself-1  all  needed  elements  for  its  own  development, 
and  progress,  and  salvation  ;  and  that  whatever  has  ever  been  achieved 
of  good,  and  whatever  has  pertained  to  the  world's  progress,  is  duo 
alone  to  these  elements  embodied  within  its  own  organization.  Tho 
other  is,  that  the  world  has  within  itself,  that  man  has  within  him- 
self,  no  good,  and  that  all  that  is  redeeming  and  saving  must  coma 
from  a  higher  and  supernatural  source ;  and  that  whatever  exists, 
that  whatever  may  exist,  whatever  may  have  the  appearance  of  im- 
provement, of  growth  and  progress,  outside  of  these  agencies  and  ele- 
ments, but  leaves  man  upon  the  same1"  dead  level  of  moral  depravity 
and  alienation  from  God.  These  two  theories,  we  say,  have  ever 
been  in  conflict ;  and  perhaps  this  conflict  was  never  waged  with  more, 
violence  than  in  the  present  day.  The  activity  of  the  human  reason, 
the  degree  in  which  all  those  fields  of  thought  have  been  occupied 
which  come  under  the  supervision  of  the  mere  reason,  the  activity 
which  is  given  to  human  elements,  has  developed  a  vain  philosophy, 
in  the  form"  of  rationalism,  naturalism,12  and  secularism,13  which  is 
at  this  time  imperiling  the  faith  of  God's  people,  antagonizing  tho. 
divine  and  supernatural  as  regards  our  faith,  and  as  regards  what  pro- 
motes the  weal  of  our  race.  If  there  ever  was  a  time  when  God's 
people  should  fall  back  upon  the  supernatural,  and  should  express 
their  faith  in  God  and  his  sovereignty ;  if  there  ever  was  a  time  when 
they  should  bring  out  this  faith  in  a  spiritual14  and  personal  God,  and 

*  there  have.— Dherf 2  ia  a  word-sign  for  there  have,  introduced  into  Stand- 
ard Phonography,  in  accordance  with  the  license  of  182,  E.  1,  6. 

*  or  embraces.— As  and  could  here  be  written  by  Eetoid  (as  is  best  when  it 
Is  easy),  we  know  that  Tetoid  hero  is  or. 

9  within  itself. — See  the  Standard- Phonographic  Dictionary,  tinder  ITSELK 

10  upon  the  same. — Let  us  here  write  the  by  Petoid  so  that  same  may  join 
easily. 

11  in  the  form.— \Ve  may  omit  the  here  as  it  may  readily  be  supplied.    If  the 
•writer  desired  ho  could  write  Petoid  for  the  the  and  not  break  up  the  phrase. 

12  naturalism.— This  presents  one  of  the  several  applications  of  the  rule  to 
tarn  the  simple  circle  in  the  most  convenient  way.    To  write  It  on  the  concava 
aides  of  both  of  the  letters,  is  obviously  easier  than  to  write  on  the  back  of  the  El 
as  prescribed  by  the  Old-Phonographic  practice. 

13  and  secularism.— Here  write  Tetoid  for  and  as  tie  horizontal  tick  would 
COt  be  quite  easy. 

win  a  spiritual. -P.  168, R.  10. 


124  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

rely  upon  agencies  that  are  alone  spiritual  and  supernatural  for  the 
accomplishment  of  these  great  results,15  now  is  that  time.  If  there 
ever  was  a  time  when  we  should  cling  to  those  institutions  whose™ 
design  is  to  hold  up  the  supernatural  and  the  divine  in  opposition  to 
a  vain,  worldly  philosophy,  now  is  that  time.  I  glory  in  the  Ameri- 
can Bible  Society  because  it  is  such  an  Institution,  and  that,  as  far  as 
it  speaks  at  all,  it  speaks  for  God — a  personal  God — for  the  supernat- 
ural, for  the  divine,  for  the  spiritual,  in  all  the  agencies  which  look 
to  the  growth  and  the  salvation  of  man.  Let  us  cleave  to  it,  there- 
fore." If  all  else  were  banished,  if  it  were  to  lose  all  other  agencies, 
still,  as  far  as  the  American  Bible  Society  lives,  and  speaks,  and  has 
influence  in  the  world  at  all,  it  is  for  the  truth,  for  evangelical  truth, 
for  a  spiritual  religion,  for  the  Bible  in  opposition  to  the  tide  of  secu- 
larism and  a  vain,  wicked  philosophy,  that  is  now  doing  so  much  to 
damage  the  faith  and  practice  of  God's  people. 

Another  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society  is  based  is, 
that  if  the  world  is  ever181  Christianized  it  must  be  by  the  active  in- 
strumentality of  those  among  whom  God's  oracles  are  deposited. 
While  the  Society  clings  to  the  supernatural,  while  it  recognizes  the 
fact  that  the  world  is  redeemed  and  saved  only  through  the  agency 
of  God — a  personal,  spiritual  God — yet  at  the  same  time  it  does  not 
hold  that  it  is  by  an  invisible,  miraculous  agency  that  the  world,  af- 
ter all,  is  to  be  redeemed  and  saved,  to  the  exclusion  of  the  human  ; 
but  that  God  expects  every  man  and  woman  to  contribute  to  the 
great  work  of  redeeming  the  human  race.  The  American  Bible  So- 


i-  these  great  results.— The  essential  principle  of  §  171, 1,  2, 3,  and  4,  of  the 
Compendium  is  that  An  initial  circle  implies  an  Ar-liook  when  tontttn  differently 
from  the  simple  circle.  No  case  of  joining  a  Sper  Rign  to  a  preceding  curve  was 
there  specified,  because  there  if  no  instance  of  it  in  a  simple  word  ;  but  such 
joining  is  sometimes  useful  in  phrase- writing,  as  in  the  present  phrase-sign.  In 
this  sign,  Iss  must  be  understood  to  imply  an  Ar-hook  (in  accordance  with  the 
principle  just  mentioned;;  for  otherwise  it  should  have  been  on  the  upper  side 
of  Get,  in  accordance  with  the  rule  tor  writing  the  circle  between  two  strokes. 
27,4. 

is  -whoso. — In  the  Old  Phonography  tclio,  vhoff,  and  wliom  were  written  re- 
spectively Jedoid2,  Zee11,  Em3.  In  Standard  Phonography  this  confusion  is  re- 
moved by  writing  who  and  whom  by  Jedoid'2.  and  forming  a  sign  for  whose  by  the 
general  rule  for  writing  derivative  sign-words.  Please  read  p.  142,  E.  5. 

17  to  it,  therefore.— 204,  R.  5,  2.  This  instance  of  the  advantageous  com- 
bination of  two  of  the  peculiar  principles  of  Standard  Phonography  ought  not  to 
bo  pafsed  over  without  remark.  Compare  it  with  the  Old  Phonographic  espres- 
Bion,  Petoid2-Tee  Dher^-Ef.  See  Part  V.  of  the  Hand  Book,  S  11. 

i*  is  ever.— 2iG,  4. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  125 

ciety  looks  abroad  ;  and  while  it  does  not  controvert  the19  question 
or  the  position  as  to  whether  the20  heathen  are  to  be  saved  outside  of 
religious  life,  the  advantages  and  teachings  of  the  Bible,  or  not,21 
yet  it  proclaims  that  more  heathen  will  be  saved,  under  any  and  all 
circumstances, 


25 


•with  the  light  of  the  Bible  than  without  it.  It  claims 
that  it  would  lead  them  to  a  higher1  standard-  than  they 
have  under  heathenism.  It  claims,  too,  that  the  salvation  which 
would  bo  realized  under  the  teachings  of  the  Bible  is  a  nobler  and 
broader  salvation,  brought  about  under  the  full  development  of  God 
Ahuighty's  agency3  for  the  world's  salvation.  It  claims,  too,  as  a 
matter  of  some  consequence,  to  banish  from  heathen  lands  the  cruel- 
tics,  the  immoralities,  and  depravities  that  prevail,  and  to  let  in 
among  them  the1  light,  knowledge,  and  happiness  which  flow  from 
the  prevalence  of  a  lofty  Christian  civilization.  Hence  it  is  that  they 
arc  eager  to  disseminate  Christianity  in  heathen  lands.  The  Bible 
Society  is  founded  upon  the  idea  of  aggression  in  these  quarters  ;  and 
the  Bible  Society  looks  around  and  sees  these  dark  places  that  arc  in 

19  and  -while  it  does  not  controvert   the. — The  practiced  reporter  may 
imply  contra-o,  etc.,  as  well  as  con-m,  by  writing  the  remainder  of  the  word  par- 
tially under  the  preceding,  as  in  this  phrase-sign. 

20  as  to  whether  the. — Waydheri=<o  whether,  to  which  add  as  by  Iss2. 

21  or  not. — The  defect  of  the  Old  Phonography  iii  providing  only  a  compara- 
tively slow  expression  for  the  rapidly-spoken  phrases  or  not,  but  not,  is  removed 
in  Standard  Phonography  by  adding  an  En-hook  (for  not)  to  or  (Tetoid1)  and  but 
(Tetoid-).     Soe  p.  90,   12  •',  of  this  Reader,  as  to  the  liability  of  such,  signs  (as 
Tentoid,  etc.)  conflicting  with  other  signs. 

n  "     J  to   a    higher. — I*  being  a  word-sign  for  high,  wo  add  Est  for  highest, 
£>*J    In  the  cs  (where  legibility  is  the  greater  need),  join  Ar  to  high  (i')  for 

higher.  The  reporter  may  employ  the  same  form,  or  write  Ar1,  omitting  the  vowel. 

But  the  vowel  is  preferable  where  the  word  is  out  of  position,  as  here. 

-  standard.— 23G,  4. 

3  God  Almighty's  agency. — To  sernre  a  desirable,  writing-phrase  for  this 
speech-phrase,  omit  from  Bedoid'-Mets  (Almighty's)  the  Bedoid  and  join  agency. 

4  among  them  the. — Why  not  join  the  to  among  them?    Because  among  them 
is  not  related  to,  or  phraseographioally  connected  with  the ;  "the"  here  is  a  part 
of  the  phrase  and  to  let  in  the;  and  "among  them,''  as  shown  by  the  obvious  pauses 
of  the  voice  (although  no  pauses  are  written),  is  parenthetic  ;  and  such  parenthet- 
ic phrases  may  frequently  t.-ike  two  or  more  positions  ;    as,  "  In  the  next  place,  1 
will  remark  that—"  or,  "  I  will,  in  the  next  place,  remark  that — "  or,  "I  will  re- 
mark, in  the  next  place,  that — ." 


126  SECOND    STANDAKDrPnONOGEAl'HIC    READER. 

our  cities  and  towns,  these  precincts  of  deadncss  and  darkness  where 
there  is  no  God  recognized,  and  where  the  people  are  sunken  in  their 
ignorance  and  depravity,  and  feels  that  if  these  people  are  ever  en- 
lightened and  redeemed,3  it  must  be  through  the  instrumentality  of 
those  outside  of  them  whom  God  has  enlightened,  and  with  whom 
He  lias  deposited  his  Sacred  Oracles.  Hence  it  is  that  the  American 
Bible  Society  is  engaged  in  the  work  of  translating  the  Bible  into  all 
languages ;  and  0,  how  it  presents  itself  to  my  mind,  that  from  this 
Society  a  Bible  is  to  go  out  adapted  to  all  people"  in  all  climes  and  all 
circumstances — a  Bible  translated  for  the  hordes  of  Asia.  Africa,  and 
South  America,  and  the  islands  of  the  sea — our  own  Bible  translated. 
so  as  to  be  accessible7  to  all  these  people.  The  Bible  Society  is 
aggressive  in  its  relations  in  other  respects.  Look  at  its  system  of 
colportage,  with  agents  scattered  all  over  this  land ;  and  that  is 

one  reason  why  I  have  loved  the9  Bible   Society  so  long.     I  have 

% 

5  and  redeemed. — Why  not  read  Tetoid  here  as  or?    Because  and  has  the 
preference  in  joining.    We  use  for  and  the  horizontal  tick  when  it  joins  easily 
and  legibly  ;  otherwise  use  the  secondary  form  ;  and  remember  that  where  and 
would  necessarily  be  joined  by  Tetoid,  that  Tetoid1  for  or  must  be  disjoined.  The 
disjoining  of  or  in  such  cases  is  suggested  by  a  slight  voice  pause  occurring  after 
or,  while  and  ADDS  or  ands  the  following  word,  and  there  is  usually  no  voice- 
pause  following  it.     See  examples  of  the  same  distinction  in  "and  feels  that"  a 
little  before  the  phrase  commented  on. 

6  to  all  people. — How  beautifully  works  here  the  Standard-Phonographic 
principles  of  varied  modes  of  expression  for  frequently-occurring  sign-words, 
such  as  all,  of,  to,  or,  but,  on,  should,  etc.    If  we  had  but  one  possible  representa- 
tion for  each  of  the  sign-words  alluded  to,  many  rapidly-uttered  speech-phrases 
would  have  to  be  slowly  written  by  the  reporter.  In  the  first  of  the  three  phrases 
occurring  together  here,  we  add  all  by  a  small  El-hook  on  a  tick  ;  and  so  in  "and 
all  circumstances,"  while  in  "  ire  all  climes,"  we  use  a  new  principle  introduced  by 
the  Haml-Book,  namely,  using  a  large  El-hook  on  En. 

"  accessible. — In  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  access  has  its  posi- 
tion noted  thus  :  "  rs,  KaysesV  to  insure  the  distinguishing  of  it  from  Kayses2, 
exercise.  If  these  words  be  regarded  as  word-signs,  then  an  added  Bee  for  ble  or 
bility  should  NOT  take  them  from  their  position  ;  and  we  should  write  Kayses2- 
Bee,  exercixible  f-ility);  Kayses3-Bee,  accessible  f-ility).  But  if  you  prefer  to  regard 
exercise  and  access  as  NOT  sign  words,  then,  under  the  general  rule  of  word-posi- 
tion, the  "first  stroke  not  horizontal,"  namel-,  Bee  in  exercisible  and  accessible, 
would  rest  on  the  line  ;  Kayses-Bee2,  being  either  EX'ercmfcfe  or  accEss-iWe.  But 
Kayses2-Bee,  exercisible,  and  Kayses^-Bee,  accessible,  under  dws  rules  of  position, 
secure  a  complete  distinction.  See,  in  this  Reader,  pp.  63-64,  the  Exhibit  of 
Reporting-Style  Position.  See  first  paragraph  of  p.  64,  and  on  p.  65  see  "Remark 
2,"  quoted  from  the  Hand-Book,  §  261,  R.  2. 

8  I  have  loved  the.— When  the  Vee-hook  of  Teftoidi  (for /flare)  will  prevent 
the  formation  of  a  desirable  phrase-sign,  the  hook  (for  ftare)  may  be  omitted,  aud 
ftare  be  supplied  by  the  context,  especially  if  it  be  made  a  rule  that  Tetoid1  for  / 


KEY  TO   THE  REPORTING   EXERCISES.  127 

Been'  those  agents  moving  about  here  and  there,1"  over  those  plains 
and  mountain  sides,  carrying  the  Word  of  God,  and  scattering  it  among 
the  destitute  of  the  land.  I  love  the  Bible  Society  because  I  see  that 
it  is  aggressive,  that  it  is  missionary,  and  that  it  has  planted  itself 
upon  the  true  missionary  principle  of  the  Gospel— that  of  carrying, 
by  its  own  active  efforts,  the  Bible  into  all  lands  and  countries. 

Again,  we  could  not  get"  along,  and  I  tell  our  people  so,  in  our 
missionary  operations  without  the  Bible  Society.  We  send  our  mis- 
sionaries to  China,  to  Turkey,  and  elsewhere  over  the  earth ;  and 
what12  can  we  accomplish  there,13  but  for  our14  reliance  upon  the 
American  Bible  Society  ?  It  is  our  strong  earthly  arm  of  support. 
And  so  in  reference  to  our  missionary  fields  among  these  thinly-popu- 

is  followed  by  hive,  WHENEVER  SOME  OTHEB  DIRECTION  OF  THE  /-TICK  MIGHT  HAVE 
BEEN  AS  CONVENIENTLY  EMPLOYED.  Hence,  Tetoid  in  this  phrase-sign  is  to  l)o 
read  /  have,  because  /  without  have  might  have  been  even  more  conveniently  writ- 
ten by  Petoid.  (6).  But  observe  that  this  rule  does  not  apply  in  the  phrase- 
signs  TetoicU-Wuh,  I  would ;  and  Tetoid^Retoid,  I  should. 

9  I  have  seen. — (a).  Have  in  this  phrase  must  and  may  readily  be  supplied 
to  complete  the  sense,  and  is  omitted  under  the  principle  of  250,  3.  (6).  There  is 
no  difficulty  in  supplying  have  preceding  ANY  past  participle  whose  outline  differs 
from  the  past  tense  (or  time),  as  do  the  following: 


Arisen 

Driven 

Laden 

Stolen 

Awaked 

Eaten 

Lain 

Striven 

Beaten 

Fallen 

Risen 

Sworn 

Been 

Flown 

Seen 

Taken 

Bitten 

Forsaken 

Shaken 

Thrown 

Blown 

Frozen 

Slain 

Told 

Borne 

Gone 

Smitten 

Torn 

Broken 

Grown 

Sown 

Woven 

Chosen 

Hidden 

Spoken 

Written 

Drawn 

Known 

(c).  BUT  OBSERVE,  that  have  should  not  be  omitted  when  it  can  be  conven- 
iently expressed  by  a  hook,  as  in  writing  /  have  chosen,  Teftoid^Chays-En  ;  /  have 
taken,  Teftoid^Ten  ;  /  have  known,  Teftoid^Ncn  ;  I  have  gone,  Teftoidl-Gen. 

i"  here  and  there. — See,  in  this  Reader,  Exhibit  of  Phonographic  Phrase- 
Writing,  B,  II.,  1. 

11  we  could  not  {ret. — See  Introduction  of  this  Reader,  p.  CO,  xi. 
ls  and  what. — See  p.  76,  note  13,  «,  of  this  Reader. 

13  can  we  accomplish  there.— 169,  R.  12.  See,  also,  p.  86,  9°,  of  this 
Reader. 

11  for  our. — The  general  rule  is  that  when  our  is  added  by  an  Ar-hook,  the 
word  to  which  it  is  added  should  retain  its  position  ;  thus,  Beri,  by  our;  Ter',  at 
our ;  Cher*.  ?o/n'c/i  our.  But  in  a  few  oases  the  new  sign  takes  the  position  of  the 
added  word  for  the  sukc  of  distinguishing  it  from  some  other  sign,  as  Fcr3,  for 
our,  to  distinguish  it  from  For2,  from. 


128  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

lated  sections  of  our  country,  and  in  the  dark  places  of  the  land,  wo 
could  not  achieve  anything  without  the  agencies  which  are  furnished 
from  the  American  Bible  (Society.  Therefore  it  is,15  that  I  regard  this 
Society  as  based  upon  a  great  idea,  the  missionary  idea,  the  idea  of 
aggression,  the  idea  of  putting  into  the  hands  of  God's  people  a  Bible 
to  be  carried  anywhere  on  the  face  of  the  earth.  And  in  this  view 
how  the  importance  of  the  American  Bible  Society  is  magnified 

Look  around. '»  For  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  this  world,  the 
bars  of  intolerance  everywhere  upon  the  face  of  the  earth  are  broken 
down.  In  Europe,  by  reason  of  international  association  and  commer- 
cial communication ;  in  Asia,  China,  Japan,  the  islands  of  the  sea, 
anywhere  and  everywhere  over  the  face  of  the  earth,  the  Bible  and 
missionaries  may  now  have  access.  Why  should  not  this  excite  with- 
in us  a  desire  to  do  more  than  we  have  ever  done,  that  we  may  make 
our  labors  in  this  respect  commensurate  with  our  responsibilities ! 
Oh !  if  there  ever  was  a  time  when  God's  people  should  be  aroused,  it 
is  now.  The  world  is  open  to  us ;  the  Protestant  nations  of  the  world 
have  acquired  an  ascendancy  over  the  balance  of  mankind,  such  as 
gives  us  unlimited  access  to  all  portions17  of  the  race.  The  old,  effete, 
worn-out  religions  arc  actually  turning  loose  their18  millions  to  our 
embrace,  and  they  are  ready  to  receive  the  Word  of  God,  and  all  that 
is  necessary  is  to  furnish  this  agency  with  the  means,  and  soon  all 
over  the  earth  the  Bible  of  God  will  circulate. 

Another  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society  is 
based  is,  that1  if  the  Christian  religion  is  to2  save  the 
world,  the  Bible  is  the  grand  instrumentality  by  which  this  work  is 

is  therefore  it  is. — P.  61,  xvi.  of  this  Reader. 

i"  look  around. — This  phrase  may  be  expressed  by  an  occasional  phraseo- 
graphic  principle,  namely,  writing  the  consonants  of  the  phrase  in  the  most 
speedy  manner,  without  reference  to  the  forms  of  the  separate  words  ;  as,  Lay3- 
Krent,  look  around;  Tend3,  at  hand;  TensS,  at  once;  Telsts,  at  least;  TeeS-Nert, 
at  any  rate. 

17  to  all  portions. — This  phrase  is  constructed  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciple of  But  it  (Tetoid2-Tee).  Pletoid^-Pee  is  distinguished  from  Pels  t>y  the  fact 
that  the  El-hook  is  barely  above  the  line,  whereas  on  Pel*  it  would  be  considera- 
bly higher  ;  for  half  of  Pel3  would  bo  above  the  line. 

is  turning  loose  their. — Omit  the  ing-dot  as  an  impediment  to  a  desirable 
phrase  here,  and  join  loose  their. 

f^n     l  is  that.— Here  it  is  convenient  to  join  to  is  the  conjunction  that. 

"  is  to.— IsB'-Petowl,  ts  to,  is  written  very  easily  thus,  with  the  advan- 
tage of  putting  save  in  its  position. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  129 

to  be  accomplished.  No  matter  what  other  means3  may  bo  relied 
upon,  and  there  should  be  other  means,4  there  must  be  church  organ- 
ization ;  there  must  be  ministers ;  there  must  be  prayer  and  faith  ; 
yet,  after  all,5  God  expects  U8S  to  employ  and  rely  upon  the  Bible,  as 
one  of  the  chief  agencies  by  which  this  great  work7  is  to  be  accom- 
plished; and  I  tell  you  that1*  we  honor  God  most  when  we  honor  his 
Bible  most ;  when  we  rely  upon  his  Word  most,  when  we  bring  it  out* 
and  give  prominence  to  it  in  all  our  church  movements  and  evangel- 
ical enterprises,  we  honor  God  most,  and  put  ourselves  where  we  open 
most  of  the  channels  through  which10  God's  grace,  and  love,  and 
mercy  shall  flow  out  upon  the  world.  Now,  I  believe  in  employing 
all  other  instrumentalities  that  arc  recognized  as  right  and  proper.  I 
believe  that  it  is  right  to  have"  a  religious  literature.  I  believe  that 
we  should  rely  upon  these  subordinate  agencies ;  but  I  am  not  sure 
that1'-  in  our  reliance  upon  these,  we  have  not  too  much  excluded  the 
Bible  as  the  grand  instrumentality  in  the  conversion  of  the  world.13 

s  what  other  means.— P.  CO,  xiii.  of  this  Reader.  Here  tins  rapid  means  of 
expressing  other  not  only  secures  speed  iu  writing  this  word,  but  avoids  two  lift- 
ings or  inconvenient  junctions  that  would  otherwise  have  been  required. 

4  and  there  should  T>e  other  means.— lu  this  phrase  other  might  have 
been  joined  in  the.  Old  Phonograph y  by  Dlier  ;  but  the  novel  Standard-Phono- 
graphic principle  of  lengthening  to  express  other  secures  a  great  gain.    See  DHB 
in  the  Standard -Phonographic  Dictionary. 

5  yet  after  all.— To  secure  this  phrase,  drop  the  slight  pause  before  tho 
parenthetical  "  after  all." 

6  God  expects  ns — 244,  R.  3,  1 ;  182,  R.  2. 

"  this  great  work. — See  p.  124,  note  15,  of  this  Reader. 

8  and  I  tell  you  that.— And  is  joined  by  Ketoid  to  /  (written  by  one  of  its 
joining  forms— Tetoid  best  here);  to  which  yon  join  tho  verb  tell;  to  which  you 
join  you  (the  indirect  object,  or  dative);  to  which  join  that  (the  conjunction). 

°  when  •wo  bring  it  out. —  When-we-brwg-it-out  (shortening  tho  it  to  add  t 

for  out,  rendered  more  certain  by  vocalizing). 

10  through  which. — Observe  the  required  shape  to  distinguish  Ther--Chay 
from  Therdhei-2. 

i'  I  believe  that  it  is  right  to  have.—  Retoid-BeP  (T  believe  what  ?)  Dhet- 
Tees-Ray-Tee  (that  it  is  rjV/Mj-Vee-hook  (have,  the  to  being  supplied). 

i'- but  I  am  not  sure  that. —  But  what  ?  /  (Ketoid)  am  not  what  ?  Sure 
(joined  easily  by  a  little  offset  for  each  of  tho  hooks);  to  which  join  the  conjunc- 
tion (hat. 

13  in  the  conversion  of  the  •world. — To  secure  for  this  speech-phrase  an 
easy  writing  phrase,  wo  raise  tho  I'H,  to  keep  Vershoii1  (conversion)  in  its  assigned 
position,  and  join  Eld  for  world;  having  omitted  the  and  of  the  as  impedimenta 
and  as  readily  supplied. 


130  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

I  am  not  so  sure  but  that  we  ignore14  and  disregard  this,  God's  own 
light,  too  much  in  all  our  efforts  to  save  the  world.1*  The  church 
must  embody  it.  Not  that  it  should  rely  less  upon  other  means10  and 
and  agencies  which  it  employs,  but  that  it  should  use  this17  more.  I 
would  to  God1'  that  all  our  denominations  were  more  active  in  the 
circulation  of  the  Bible.  I  would  that  they  felt  more  that  it  is  God's 
Word,19  and  that,  whatever  other  means  they  may  employ,  this  is 
the  light  of  heaven,  and  the  instrumentality  which  God  recognized  in 
the  accomplishment  of  this  grand  design.20  Now,  the  American  Bible 
Society  is  based  upon  this  grand  idea.u  Its  whole  effort  is  to  circu- 
late God's  Word  ;  in  so  far  as  it  has  any  design,  any  efliciency  at  all, 
it  is  to  give  prominence  to  the  Bible  ;  it  is  to  give  it  a  worldwide  cir- 
culation. And  if  the  views  I  have  presented-2  in  regard  to  it  be  true, 

14  ignore. — In  the  second  position,  because  the  accent  is  on  the  6  not  i.  But 
we  write  Noras1  for  ignorance,  and  Nerut1  for  ignorant,  because  in  these  words  the 
accent  is  on  i,  a  first-place  vowel. 

15  to  save  the  world.— Imply  to  by  putting  save  in  the  fourth  position  ; 
omit  the  as  an  impediment  ;  and  join  world  ;  thus  writing  four  words  (twelve  vo- 
cal elements)  by  two  strokes. 

i«  upon  other  means.— P.  169,  R.  12.  See  Standard-Phonographic  Diction- 
ary, Dan. 

17  use  this.— Keep  on  the  heaviness  from  the  middle  of  Zee  to  the  middle  of 
Dhee  ;  which  makes  the  combination  easier  than  if  you  write  the  Zee  ending 
light,  and  the  Dhee  beginning  light. 

18  I  would  to  God.— This,  and  thousands  of  similar  phrases — exclamations, 
modifying  clauses,  etc.,  which  are  rarely  found  iu  books,  but  which  are  fre- 
quently introduced  into  extemporaneous  discourses,  and  spoken  with  great  ra- 
pidity— are  expressed  in  Standard  Phonography   with  ease  and  rapidity,  which 
iu  the  Old  Phonography  were  not  only  expressed  with  confusing  slowness,  but 
not  unfrequently  with  considerably  less  speed  than  other  portions  of  speech  less 
rapidly  uttered. 

19  I  would  that  they  felt  more  that  it  is  God's  Word.—  This  speech- 
phrase  might  be  nisely  written  thus:    Tetoidl-\Viih  (I-viould)  Dhet'-Dhee-Felt- 
Mer-Dhet{tta<-///«y  felt-  7norc-Vi.a,'):Tep$--Geds  Word  (it-is-  God  s-Word).     The  first  that, 
not  very  easily  joined  to  would,  is  put  with  the  following  word  ;  and  the  second 
tliat  you  will  feel  must  not  be  joined  with  more  unless  it  is  joined  to  felt.    This 
fiat  depends  upon  the  verb  felt,  and  is  the  representative  of  the  following  words, 
it  is  God's  word. 

20  this  grand  design.— See  p.  124,  note  15,  of  this  Reader. 

-1  this  grand  idea.— As  the  i  of  idea  will  not  join  with  grand,  drop  it,  and 
write  it  sepaartely. 

"I  have  presented.— See  note  18  on  p.  105  of  this  Reader.  To  secure  a 
writiag-phnM  for  this  speech-phrase,  omit  the  Vee-hook.  supplying  it  by  the 
context.  As  I  present  would  be  written  Petoid'-Perib-Ent,  the  use  of  Tetoid  rather 
implies  have. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  131 

then  is  the  American  Bible  Society  an  important  agency,  one  that  we 
should  all  love,  and  shoiild  co-operate  with— one  which  we  should 
seek  to  develop,  and  make  more  efficient  than  it  ever  has  been  in  all 
the  past.  I  have  had  my  heart-3  often  glow  with  enthusiastic  delight 
when  traveling  up  and  down  the-4  coimtry,  going  into  log  cabins25  to 
preach,  and  finding  a  Bible,  and  upon  opening  it,  seeing  the  imprint 
of  the  American  Bible  Society.  It  is  this  agency,  I  tell  you,  which 
gives  prominency  to  the  Bible  over  American  lands.  Depend  upon  it, 
if  you  were-6  to  shut  out  the  American  Bible  Society,  and  the  circula- 
tion which  it  gives  to  the  Bible,  and  banish  it  from  the  land,  awful 
would  be  the  vacuum.  It  does  more  to  give  prominence  to  the  Bible, 
to  bring  out  a  pure  evangelical  religion,  to  resist  the  tide  of  infidel- 
ity and  secularism,  I  verily  believe  before  God,  than  any  other  one 
distinct,  isolated  agency  in  this  country.'  I  love  the  Society,  because 
I  have  seen  its  fruits  away  off  yonder  ;  I  have  seen  what  it  has  done 
in  circulating  the  Bible  among  the  poor  and  destitute,  by  means  of  the 
efficient  agency  system  which  it  has  employed  in  those  dark  and  desti- 
tute places.  I  feel,  before  God,  that  if  3-011  have  money,  and  means, 
and  influence,  and  want  to  do  good,  and  lay  up  treasure  in  heaven;  if 
you  want  to  make  an  impress  for  God,  in  your  day  and  generation, 
stand  nobly  by  the  American  Bible  Society. 

Another  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society  is  based  is  this, 
that  the  Christian  religion  is  the  world's  great  civilizer ;  and  the  great 
blunder  of  the  world  is  in  trying  to  find  out  the  best  means  to  govern 
men,  whereas  the  true  idea  should  be  to  teach  men  to  govern  them- 
selves. We  look  around27  over  the  country  ;  we  look  at  our  states- 

23  I  have  had  my  heart. — Here  the  curves  for  my  and  heart  should  be  con- 
siderably curved,  to  sharpen  and  nuiko  easier  the  angle — this  rather  than  write 
heart  with  the  occasional  form  Ret. 

21  up  and  down  the. — Omit  the  and  (Ketoid  here)  as  quite  superfluous  in 
this  phrase.  If  correspondingly  written  in  longhand,  the  reader  would  readily 
supply  the  and.  Especially  easy  is  it  to  supply  words,  such  as  and  here,  which 
are  usually  but  slightly  spoken. 

-'•  Ing  cabins.— The  combination  Gay-Kay  or  Kay-Gay  is  comparatively  diffi- 
cult, and  in  phrase-writing  the  reporter  may  usually  obviate  the  difficulty  by 
omitting  one  of  the  consonants  ;  writing,  for  instance,  El-Gay-Bens  (i.e.,  log-'ab- 
inz)  for  log  cabins. 

""•  if  you  were. — A  distinction  might  be  made  between  you  were  and  you 
would,  by  writing  Yeh-weh  for  the  former  and  Yuh-wuh  for  the  latter.  But  this 
distinction  is  of  little  consequence,  since  the  context  will  suffice  to  distinguish 
them  if  both  are  written  alike  ;  and  besides,  to  write  them  both  alike  (Yuh-wuh 
or  Yeh-weh,  according  to  convenience)  is  following  the  analogy-  of  Waywehi  for 
we  were  or  we  would;  Wuh-wuh1  for  what  would,  what  were. 

27  we  look  around.— Wen-hook  in  first  position  for  we  ;  add  Lay-Krend  for 


132  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    EEADER. 

men,  our  legislators,  and  political  philosophers,  and  we  see  tlicni 
moving  heaven  and  earth  to  control  men  ;  but  the  American  Bible  So- 
ciety seeks  to  reverse  the  policy,  and  proceeds  upon  the  opposite  idea, 
that  of  training  and  leaching  men  to  govern  themselves— that  of  in- 
fusing the  elements  of  intelligence,  knowledge,  wisdom,  and  virtue, 
by  which  they  can.  regulate  and  direct  themselves  and  their  own  con- 
duct in  life.  Now,  I  hold  that  this  is  a  great  idea,  important  to  be 
looked  to.  A  great  drawback 


27 


upon  our  civilization,  in  these  dark  places,  these  pre- 
cincts of  our  country,  is  that  they  arc  made  Tip  of  men 
so  depraved,  so  wretched,  so  ignorant  as  to  be  incapable1  of  Kelf-gov- 
ermuent.2  Educate  and  elevate  the  mind,  so  that  they  can  judge  and 
determine  for  themselves,  and  all  is  well,  and  peaceful,  and  happy  in 
society.  Now  the  Christian  religion  we  hold  accomplishes  this  ob- 
ject. It  teaches  men  that  the  body  was  made  for  the  soul.  It  teaches 
men  that  the  doctrine  of  their  immortality,  and  that  the  great  end  of 
life,  is  to  subject  their  lower  nature  to  the  higher  nature.  The  Chris- 
tian religion,  I  boldly  maintain,  is  the  author  of  all  that  is  truly  good 
and  benevolent  in  human  nature  ;  that  outside  of  the  teachings  of  the 
Christian  religion  all  is  selfishness ;  that  our  ideas  of  charity,  and  true 
benevolence,  and  love  for  our  race,  we  get  only  in  the  Christian  re- 
ligion. It  infuses  in  its  ethics  the  true  idea,  regulates  the  conscience, 
the  interior  man,  and  so  enables  him  to  govern  himself.  Now  the 
American  Bible  Society  acts  upon  the  idea  that  the  great  honor  of  this 
country  is  the  schoolmaster  and  the  preacher  ;  not  so  much  govern- 
ment, law,  and  legislation.  The  Bible  Society  holds  itself  aloof  from 
other  objects  and  plans  ;  but  it  seeks  to  elevate  the  individual  man, 
to  give  the  Bible  a  wide  circulation  among  the  poor  and  the  ignorant, 
to  train  them  for  God  and  eternity.  Remember  that  when  you  are 
helping  the3  Bible  Society,  you  arc  helping  on  your  race  in  the  true 

look  around  ;  in  which,  to  sayo  disjoining,  we  write  Ic-rnd  with  the  most  available 
form,  Kreud.     In  similar  manner  dispose  of  at  our  iu  second  phrase  following. 

Q  w    i  incapable. — The  Corresponding-Style  contraction,  Kay -Bel2,  for  cnpn- 

£  I  ble,  may  itself  suffer  contraction  in  the  Reporting  Style,  being  written 
Kay -Bee",  the  affix-sign  for-6/e  being  used  because  more  rapid  than  Bel.  This 
plan  of  writing  -ble  by  the  affix-sign  may  be  adopted  by  the  reporter  in  many 
cases  where,  in  the  Corresponding  Style,  Bel  would  be  and  could  be  conveniently 
employed. 

2  self-government.— P.  113,  K.  14. 

*  whs-ii  you  arc  helping  the. — See  p.  59,  (4),  of  this  Reader. 


KEY.    TO   THE   KEPOBTINa   EXERCISES.  133 

way  of  progress,  elevation,  and  salvation.  When  you  help  on  other 
causes,  it  may  or  may  not  have  this  effect ;  but,  depend  upon  it,  just 
in  proportion  as  you  sustain  the  American  Bible  Society,  you  sustain 
those  elements  and  agencies  which  look  toward  the  real,  positive  pro- 
gress of  your  race ;  you  are  doing  that  which  elevates  the  mind,  which 
improves  the  conscience,  which  makes  men  capable  of  self-government 
and  advancement  toward  true  civilization ;  for  there  is  no  political 
economy,  no  true  political  philosophy,  no  true  government,  or  system 
of  morals,  but  such  as  Hows  immediately  out  of  the  teachings  of  tho 
gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  Religion  is  not  merely  intended  to  save  the 
Koul  in  heaven,  but  to  elevate  the  human  race,  and  give  it  a  loftier 
civilization  even  here,  and  we  should  look  upon  it  in  this  light ;  and 
because  the  Bible  Society,  without  hindrance,  without  modification, 
without  let,  without  restriction  or  qualification,  is  consecrated  to  this 
one  end,  I  love  it,  and  pray  for  it,  and  co-operate  with  it.4 

Allow  me,  as  I  have  never  had  the  pleasure  of  meeting  with  you 
upon  tliis  platform  before,  and  as  I  have  come  a  long  way,  to  present 
one  more  idea.  The  next  idea  upon  which  the  American  Bible  Society 
is  based,  and  which  it  represents  prominently,  is  that  of  Christian  un- 
ity— the  entire  oneness  of  God's  people  everywhere.  Look  at  its  or- 
ganization. When  was  there  ever  a  time  when  I  met  my  brethren  as 
I  meet  them  here  to-day — brethren  of  all  the  glorious  old  communions 
that  I  have  been  hearing  about,  and  thinking  about,  and  praying 
about  so  long?  Oh,  brethren!  my  heart  is  glad  to  meet  you  here 
upon  this  platform  to-day.  The  organization  embodies  representatives 
from  the  prominent  churches  of  our  land.  Its  basis  is  such  that  all 
love  it,  though  we  may  to  some  extent  put  different  constructions 
upon  some  parts  of  it ;  we  all  recognize  it  as  the  same5  Holy  Book — 
as  coming  from  God — the  grand  supernatural  light,  to  teach  a  be- 
nighted world  the  way  to  God  and  heaven.  Upon  that  platform  we 
are  all  united.  We  are  all  united  in  the  enjoyment  of  its  effects ;  for 
your  heart  glows  with  gratitude  and  enthusiasm,  as  mine  does,  when- 
ever I  see  the  displays  of  God's  work  anywhere.  We  glory  in  the  ef- 
fects wrought  by  the  American  Bible  Society.  If  it  has  been  any- 
where the  instrumentality  of  bringing  some  poor  unlettered  man  or 
woman  to  God,  we  rejoice  in  it,  no  matter  where  it  is,  in  what  part 


*  with  it.— It  is  desirable  that  with  it  shall  be  written  Dhet1,  in  analogy  with 
for  it,  if  it,  etc.  To  more  readily  distinguish  it  from  that  (Dheti),  it  may  be  writ- 
ten with  the  bottom  of  the  Dhet  resting  on  tho  upper  line,  or  Dhet0  (i.e.,  Dhct 
zero),  as  in  the  engraving. 

G  us  the  same. — Better  omit  the  as  a  hindrance  and  enlarge  Iss2,  to  add  tho 
s  of  same ;  then  vocalize  with  a,  to  aid  tho  reading. 


134  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

of  the  country1'  it  is.  AVhenever  we  hear  that  good  has  come  from  this 
Society,  we  all  delight  and  rejoice  in  it.  Brethren,  in  this  day  of 
mutual  antagonism,  of  strife,  of  divisions,7  and  to  some  extent^  sec- 
tarian bitterness,  0  I  rejoice 


OO  that  there  is  a  platform  upon  which  we  can  all  stand  ;  I 
>£O  rejoice  that  I  can  meet  my  brethren1  here  of  the  various 
denominations  of  the  country ;  that  here  we  arc  all  one,  all  alike 
standing  on  the  same  common  foundation  ;  I  rejoice  in  this  platform. 
Coining,  as  I  do,  from  Alabama,  I  rejoice  to  meet  upon  this  platform 
my  brethren  from  the  great  State  of  New  York,2  from  New  England, 
and  the  Northwest,  and  to  feel  that3  here  we  are  one,  bound  by  the 
same  love  to  God  and  the  same  love  to  man,  and  destined  to  the  same 
common  heaven,  and  with  the  same  common  Bible.  I  rejoice  to  meet 
them  where  I  believe  there  is  a  cementing  and  uniting  power  in  the 
American  Bible  Society.  I  feel  it,  and  know  it ;  and  here,  my  breth- 
ren, standing  upon  the  same  common  platform,4  with  the  same  com- 
mon Bible,  and  destined  to  the  same  common  heaven,  can  we  not 
have,  and  will  we  not  have,  the  same  common  country.  I  feel  and 

6  in  what  part  of  the  country.— En1,  in,  shortened  to  add  t  for  what;  then 
add  Tret  lor  part ;  oinit  of  the  (as  readily  supplied),  and  add  Kay  for  country. 

1  of  divisions. — As  there  is  an  obvious  pause  V>efore  this  of,  we  write,  and 
do  not  imply  it  by  writing  divisions  near  the  preceding  word. 

8  and  to  some  extent. — Omit  the  slight  pause  before  the  parenthetic  ex- 
pression, to  some  extent,  Sem'-Stent,  and  prefix  Ketoid  for  and. 

_  Q    i  my  brethren.— 24G,  1. 

2  from  the  great  State  of  New  York.— A  preposition,  from,  with 
an  object  of  seven  words.  HOW  shall  we  produce  a  corresponding  writing-phrase? 
Fer2,  from  (omit  Vie  as  superfluous,  that  is,  needlessly  written);  add  Grets, 
great;  join  State  by  Iss-Tet  (an  optional  form  where  the  more  regular  Steh-Tee 
cannot  be  easily  used);  omit  of;  join  En-Yay  for  N.  Y.=New  York. 

"  and  to  feel  that.— Here  (since  Tetoid  prefixed  to  Fel4  wonld  be  read  as 
but)  prefix  Ketoid  as  and  to  Fell  (to  feel)',  then  add  Dhet  for  the  that,  called  a  "  non- 
junction,"  as  bere  it  introduces,  or  stands  for,  a  sub-sentence,  which  here  ex- 
tends to  the  following  period-mark. 

<  upon  the  same  common  platform.— P.  160,  R.  12.  Form  is  usually 
contracted  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  Standard  Plionography,  Em  being  omitted. 
See  INFORM,  UNIFORM,  REFORM,  MULTIFORM,  TRANSFORM,  DEFORM,  PERFORM, 
PLATFORM,  etc.,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary.  These,  in  compliance 
with  the  great  principle  of  UNIFORMITY  observed  throughout  Standard  Pho- 
nography, have  analogous  contractions. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  135 

believe  that  wo  will  press  onward  in  the  great  work  of  spreading 
God's  religion  over  all  the  face  of  the  earth.  These  are  aggressive 
ideas ;  they  are  wide,  all-comprehensive,  dynamic  ideas,  and  we 
should  adhere  to  the  American  Bible  Society,  because  it  is  based 
upon  and  represents  these  aggressive  ideas. 

Brethren,  I  love  to  feel,  when  I  am  engaged  in  any  cause,  that  it  is 
an  expansive  cause,  and  expanding  world-wide,  all-embracing  ;  that  it 
has  love,  and  mercy,  and  hope.  I  love  to  think  that  it  has  a  plat- 
form, whereon  all  the  lovers  of  the  good  and  true  can  stand.  And 
it  is  for  these  reasons,  among  others,5  that  I  love  the  American  Bible 
Society,  and  I  shall  carry  home  with  me  a  strong  affinity3  and  love 
for  it,  because,  since  coming  up  here,  I  see  elements  of  development, 
of  progress,  of  love,  of  expansive  benevolence,  such  as  enlist  me, 
more  than  ever,  in  this  glorious  cause.  May  God  help  you,  and  the 
great  city  of  New  York,  to  stand  by  this,  your  glorious  institution, 
that  reflects  so  much  honor  upon  you7  all  over  this  land.  May  God 
help  you  to  sustain  it,  that  its  influence  may  go  out  all  over  this  land, 

5  among  others.— See  Dim,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

6  affinity. — The  cases  in  which  contraction  is  resorted  to  in  the  Reporting 
Style  of  Standard  Phonography,  in  writing  words  ending  in  -ty,  may  be  specified 
as  follows : 

1.  In  many  words  the  consonant  (t)  of  the  termination  -ty  is  expressed  by 
shortening  a  letter  ;   thus,  Eut2-Gret,  integrity  ;  Pet-Blet,  compatibility  ;  Tee2- 
Tclt,  totality  ;  Iss-Velti,  civility  ;  Per-Shelt,  partiality  ;    Fet2-Elt,  fatality  ;  Pet'- 
EH,  futility  ;  Bret-Let,  brutality;  Kel-Met,  calamity;    Vees-Net,  vicinity;   EP- 
Not,  affinity  ;    Plent3,  plenty  ;    Chert3,  charity  ;    Pret2,  pretty  ;    Bent3,  bounty  ; 
Kleti,  quality  ;    Gleti,  guilty  ;    Flet',  faulty  ;    ThreU,  authority  ;  Meti,  mighty  ; 
Sens-Ret,  sincerity  ;  Met-Ret3,  maturity ;  Em-Jert1,  majority  ;  Eta^Nert,  minor- 
ity ;  Slay-Bret,  celebrity  ;  Ef-Kelt,  faculty  ;  Pers2-Pret,  prosperity  ;    Emter2-Let, 
materiality  ;  Fer^Let,  formality  ;  Lay2-Kelt,  locality. 

2.  The  termination  -ty  is  frequently  omitted  when  the  preceding  part  of  the 
word  is  sufficient  to  characterize  it,  especially  when  a  rather  difficult  junction 
would  bo  avoided  ;  thus,  ATeldl  (i.e.,  valid1,  validity  ;  Ray2-Ped  (i.e.,  rapid),  rapid- 
ity ;  Kay-Ped1  (i.e.,  cupid),  cupidity  ;  Tcei-Mcd,  timid-ity  ;  Emteru=(i'.e.,  matern), 
maternity  ;  Fcrtern3  (i.e.,  fratern),  fraternity  ;  Nerl-Em  (i.e.,  enorm),  enormity  ; 
Layl-Brr-l  (i.e.,  liberal),  liberality  ;  Rel1,  reality  ;  Merl2,  morality. 

3.  When  -ty  forms  a  part  of  the  termination  I  t-j  or  r-t'j,  (1)  these  terminations 
are  (a)  either  implied,  by  disjoining  the  preceding  letter,  as  in  the  Corresponding 
Stylo  (232,  8),  (fc)  or,  what  is  more  usual  in  the  Reporting  Style,  absolutely  omit- 
ted, the  preceding  letter  not  being  disjoined:  thus,  Efsi-Bee,  feasibility;  Sens-Bee2, 
sensibility  ;    Fels--Bee,  flexibility  ;    Per2-Bee,  probability  ;    Pei^-Pee,   property  ; 
Pees--Teo,  posterity  ;  (2)  or,  if  more  convenient,  the  principle  of  specification  1 
or  2  is  employed,  as  in  writing  prosperity,  majority,  minority,  locality,  family,  ma- 
teriality. 

*  upon  you.— P.  1G9,  R.  12. 


13C  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

and  that  it  may  go  onward,  extending  further  and  further,8  until,  in 
its  benevolent  embrace,  it  covers  the  whole  earth. 


POLITICS. 

SPEECH    OF    MR.    GAULDEN,    OF    GEORGIA- 
Delivered  in  the  Baltimore  Democratic  Convention,  in  1860. 

MR.  PRESIDENT'  AND  GENTLEMEN  OF  THE  CONVENTION  :— I  come  here 
from  the  State  of  Georgia,  indorsed  by  that  State  Convention  and  by 
the  Convention  at  Charleston.10  This  ought  surely  to  give  me  a 
right  to  be  heard  before  you ;"  and  though  I  have  not  joined  my 
fortune13  in  the  State  of  Georgia  either  to  the  House  of  York  or  to  the 
House  of  Lancaster,'3  I  feel  that  I  have  a  right  here  to  speak  to  the 
great  Democratic  party14  of  the  United  States.  I  have  been  pained, 
as  a  citizen  of  these  United  States,  to  sec  the  elements  of  disruption 
and  disorganization  which  seem  to  prevail  in  the  midst  of  this  most 
intelligent  assembly.  I  have  felt15  that  the  experiment  of  the  capa- 

s  further  and  further.— 270,  c. 

9  Mr.  President. — The  word  president  here  Is  contracted  to  pres.,  under  the 
principle  of  237,  R.  2. 

10  at  Cliarleston. — Cherlst  is  a  special  contraction  for  Charleston.    237,  R.  2. 

11  before  you. — P.  CO,  iv.  4. 

12  my  fortune.— 246,  1. 

13  Lancaster.— 236,  4.      Kay  or  Gay  may  very  frequently  be  omitted  when 
coming  between  Ing  and  other  letters  ;  as  linguist,  El-Iugst  ;  sanguine,  Sing-en2  ; 
links,  El-Ing[Kay]-Iss. 

w  Democratic  party. — This  phrase  will  occur  several  times  in  the  course 
of  this  speech  ;  and  it  will  fairly  be  entitled  to  a  special  contraction.  But  I  have 
given  it  here,  as  it  would  probably  be  written  when  first  occurring.  (6).  The  re- 
porter who  seeks  to  save  himself  unnecessary  labor  will  very  shortly  after  com- 
mencing to  report  a  convention,  a  law  case,  a  debate,  and  even  shorter  matters, 
devise  special  contractions  for  phrases  which  he  perceives  will  be  of  frequent 
occurrence,  unless  the  ordinary  expression  should  be  sufficiently  short.  See  237, 
R.  2. 

15  I  have  felt  that  the. — Have  is  implied  here  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciple of  p.  123,  note  8,  of  this  Reader. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISE?.  137 

bility  of  man  for  solf-government  was  about  to  prove  a  failure  here, 
and  that  the  Genius  of  Liberty  was  about,  shrieking,  to  leave  the 
world.  But  I  trust  that  this  may  be  the  darkest  hour  just  before  the 
day ;  and  that  from  these  elements  of  discord  the  representatives  of 
the  intelligent  American  people  here  assembled  may  be  able  to  de- 
vise a  plan  upon  which  the  great  Democratic  party  of  the  United 
States  may  be  united,  and  that  we  will  yet  add  another16  victory 

OA      to  the  many  we  have  already  achieved. 

LJ<U  I  am  an  advocate  for  maintaining  the  integrity  of  the 
National  Democratic  party  ;  I  belong  to  the  extreme  South  ;  I  am  a 
proslavery  man1  in.  every  sense  cf  the  word — aye,2  and  an  African 
slave-trade  man.3  [Applause1  and  laughter.]  The  institution  of  slav- 
ery, as  I  have  said"'  elsewhere,  has  done  more  to  advance  the  prosper- 
ity' and  intelligence  of  the  white  race,7  and  of  the  human  race,  than, 

10  add  another. — To  secure  a  very  quickly  written  sign  for  this  speech- 
phraso,  omit  the  an  as  a  hindrance,  and  then  lengthen  Doe3,  add,  to  add  dhr  foe 
otlitr.  See,  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  DHR  2  and  3,  c. 

t){\    i  In  the  days  of  slavery,  the  word  slavery  was  of  such  frequent  occur- 
£«     rence  as  to  deserve  a  special  contraction.    It  may  bo  written  Slav,  as 
in  pro-slavery,  Per2-Slay  ;  anti-slaver ;/,  En-Tee^J?lay  ;  slave  Slates,  Slay—Stets  ;  slav- 
ery in  the  Territories,  Slay2  En-Tret  Rays  ;  stave-breeding,  SIay2-Bred:('iug  ')  ;  slare- 
trailing,    Slay2-Tred:('iug ') ;     slaveholder,   Slay2-Laydcr  ;      slave-State,   Slay2-Stct  ; 
slavery  extension,  Slay2-Sten. 
-  aye.— 102,  R.  3  ;  08  ;  102. 

3  African  slave-trade  man. — African,  in  accordance  with  tho  priuciplo  of 
special  contraction  (237,  It.  2,  fcj,  is  here  contracted  to  For. 

4  applause. — This  sign  for  applause  is  distinct  from  Phonography,  and  has 
the  advantage  of  being  quite  rapid,  and  at  the  same  time  constructed  upon  a  plan 
which  may  bo  followed  in  indicating  cheers,  hisses,  etc.,  the  first  longhand  letter 
of  the  word  being  written,  and  the  pen  swept  around  it,  as  iu  the  case  of  a  in  tho 
engraving.      (6).    The  modifiers,   "great,"    "immense,"    "tremendous,"  "pro- 
longed," etc.,  may  be  sufficiently  indicated  by  writing  the  letter  largo  ;   "great 
applause,"  for  instance,  by  a  made  quite  large — and,  of  course,  with  the  lino 
around  it.     (c).  In  transcribing,  the  words  applause,  etc.,  should  be  treated  as  in- 
dependent senti'iioos,  and  enclosed  in  brackets  to  distinguish  them  from  (ho 
words  of  tho  sp< -alii  r  ;  thus  :   [Applause.],  but  without  the  period  if  introduced 
in  t'ae  roiddlo  of  a  sentence.   Generally,  for  the  better  appearance  of  typography, 
and  because  tho  "  caso"  is  not  fully  supplied  with  brackets,  the  curves  are  used 
instead. 

6  I  liavc  salil. — Have  is  implied  hero.    See  p.  123,  note  0,  cf  this  Reader. 

c  prosperity. — This  word  might  bo  written  Pers-Peo  ;  but,  to  distinguish.  U 
from  prof p<-:!,  Pcrs2-Pco,  it  is  belter  to  write  it  in  this  manlier, 

7  -wlilto  race — 103,  R.  1 ;  Ii3,  R.  1,  b. 


138  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

all  else  together.  I  believe  it  to  be  founded  upon  the  law  of  Nature, 
and  upon  the  law  of  God  ;s  I  believe  it  to  be  a  blessing  to  all  races.  I 
believe  that  liberty  would  not  truly  exist  in  this  Western  world'*  ex- 
cept by  maintaining  the  integrity  of  the  great  National  Democratic 
party.10  [Applause.]  As  for  this  "Irrepressible  Conflict"  party," 
with  their  serried  ranks  now  ready  to  march  down  upon  us,  '*  I  have 
no  faith  in  it,  because  it  is  founded  in  anarchy,  in  everything  anti- 
republican,  in  everything  that  is  opposed  to  human  progress ;  while  I 
understand  the  idea  of  the  great  National  Democratic  party  to  be 
non-intervention  in  its  broadest  sense. 13  [Applause.]  Now,  niy  North- 
ern friends,14  I  do  not  know  that  I  can  do  anything  in  Georgia 
to  reconcile  these  matters  ;  but  whatever  I  can  do,13 1  will  do.  [Ap- 
plause.] 

I  say  that  our  friends  in  Georgia,  who  are  crying  out  for  protection 
to  slavery  in  the  Territories,  are  advocating  a  mere  theory,  a  mere  ab- 
straction, a  thing  that  is  not  and  cannot  be.  They  would  do  much 
better  if  they  would  demand  protection  from  the  General  Govern- 
ment,1" and  have  a  line  of  police  established  along  the  border  of  the 
Slave  States,  to  catch  and  hang  the  thieving  Abolitionists  who  are 
stealing  our  niggers.  [Laughter  and  applause.]  This  is  a  means  of 
protection.  Why?  Because  it  is  practical.  [Renewed  laughter  and 

s  law  of  God.— 182,  R.  1,  6.  Notice  in  the  engraving  how  an  Ef-book  is 
made  on  curves  somewhat  longer  than  an  En-hook.  It  may  be  distinguished 
from  the  En  and  Shon  hooks  thus  :  Regard  the  En-hook  as  an  unclosed  Iss  ;  the 
Ef-hook  on  curves  as  an  elongated  En-hook — rather,  as  ail  unclosed  Steh-loop  ; 
the  Shon-hook  as  a:i  unclosed  Ster  loop. 

o  "Western  world. — Tho  En-hook  is  omitted  to  secure  a  desirable  phrase- 
Bign.  P.  109,  R.  12,  I. 

10  great    national    Democratic     party. — En   is  here  used  for  national. 
The  whole  phrase-sigu   transferred  to  the  common  print  is  "Great  N.  Dem.  P." 
237,  R.  2,  6. 

11  irrepressible    conflict    party. — This  is  a  special  contraction.     If  very 
frequent,  Ar  simply  would  be  written  for  irrepressible. 

"  npon  us.— P.  182,  R.  2. 

is  broadest  sense.— 23C,  3. 

11  my  Northern  friends. — Ner  is  here  used  for  JYbrf.Vrr,  i:i  rvcrorcla»ro 
with  the  principle  of  special  contraction.  237,  R.  2. 

is  but  whatever  I  can  do. — Tef  for  whatever  ia  here  joined  to  Tetoid2  (for 
but).  See  p.  78,  n.  17,  of  this  Reader,  where  it  is  shown  that  the  plan  of  joining 
Tee  to  but  was  originated  by  the  author.  (l>).  /is  omitted  here,  as  it  may  bo  in 
many  other  cases  where  some  pronoun  must  bo  supplied,  and  where  the  context 
directs  what  one.  See  under  /  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

16  from  the  general  government. — Jay  here  stands  tor  general,  under  the 
principle  of  cpccial  contraction.  237,  R.  2. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  139 

applause.]  Here  is  my  old  native  State  of  Virginia17 — the  slave-trad- 
ing and  slave-breeding  State  of  Virginia18 — [Laughter.] 

DELEGATE  FROM  VIRGINIA" — I  call  the  gentleman  to  order.  He  casts 
an  imputation  upon  Virginia  by  calling  her  the  ' '  slave-breeding  State 
of  Virginia." 

MR.  GAULDEX20 — Well,  I  will  say  the  slave-breeding  State  of  Georgia, 
then.  I  glory  in  being  a  slave-breeder21  myself.  [Loud  laughter.p2 
I  will  face  the  music  myself,  and  I  have  got  as  many  negroes  as  any 
man  from  the  State  of  Virginia.  And  as  I  invited  the  gentlemen  of 
this  Convention  at  Charleston  to  visit  my  plantation,  I  will  say  again, 
that  if  they  will  come  to  see  me,  I  will  show  them  as  fine  a  lot  of 
negroes,  and  the  pure  African,  too,  as  they  can  find  anywhere.  And  I 
will  show  them  as  handsome  a  set  of  little  children  there  as  can  be  seen 
[laughter],  and  any  quantity  of  them,  too.  [Renewed  laughter.]-3 
And  I  wish  that  Virginia  may  be  as  good  a  slave-trading  and  slave- 
breeding  State  as  Georgia ;  and  in  saying  that  I  do  not  mean  to  be 
disrespectful  to  Virginia,  but  I  do  not  mean  to  dodge  the  question  at 
all. 

Now,  I  want  no  office  ;  I  never  asked  any  ;  I  did  not  ask  the  State 
Convention  to  send  me  here  ;  but  I  am  here  to  tell  the  truth  to  you 
all,  and  this  is  my  idea  of  non-intervention.  I  want  the  State  of  Vir- 

17  State  of  Virginia. — In  some  cases,  as  in  this,  it  is  better  to  express  of  by 
a  hook  than  to  imply  it.  • 

19  slave-breeding  State  of  Virginia.— 237,  R.  1,  6.   See  p.  103,  n.  4,  of  this 
Reader. 

19  Delegate    from    Virginia. — It  seems  natural  to  commence  the  words  of 
a  speaker  with  a  paragraph  ;  but  for  the  reporter  such  a  practice  is  not  best,  es- 
pecially in  the  case  of  one  speaker  interrupting  another;  for,  too  much  time  would 
be  consumed  in  carrying  the  pen  back  to  commence  a  paragraph.      (6)  It  is  best 
usually,  in  case  of  a  change  of  speakers,  to  phonograph  the  name  of  the  speaker, 
inclosing  it  in  a  circle  ;  (c)  or,  if  there  could  be  no  confusion — as  there  might  bo 
if  two  speakers  had  the  same  initial — write  the  first  longhand  letter  of  the  speak- 
er's name,  usually  inclosing  it.    In  this  phrase-sign  from,  is  omitted,  under  the 
principle  of  250,  3. 

20  G. — G.  is  here  written  for  Gaulden.    Of  course,  in  transcribing,  Mr.  should 
be  prefixed.    See  preceding  note. 

21  slave-breeder. — The  formative  of  an 'actor 'may  frequently  be  omitted. 
P.  142,  R.  5 ;  p.  194,  R.  7. 

22  loud  laughter — The  modification  of  loud  is  indicated  by  making  the  sign 
of  pleasantry  or  laughter  larger  than  usual.     See  p.  137,  note  4,  of  this  Reader. 

23  renewed    laughter. — I  see  no  particular  necessity  of  inserting  renewed 
here.    It  was  probably  clone  by  the  reporter  to  avoid  the  monotony  of  the  repeti- 
tion of  the  word  laughter. 


140  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

glnia,  if  she  has  negroes,  to  have  as  many  as  she  pleases.  If  yon  want 
slavery  in  the  State  of  Massachusetts,  I  want  you  to  have  it.  If  you 
want  slavery  in  Indiana,  and  Ohio,  and  Wisconsin,  and  Minnesota,  in 
God's  name  have  it.  It  is  your  right  to  have34  slave?,  and  just  as 
many  or  as  few  as  you  please ;  I  will  never  join  any  party  which  de- 
sires to  force  slavery  anywhere,  or  to  keep  it  from  any  place.  [Ap- 
plause.] I  believe  that  is  regulated  by  the  law  of  God,  of  Nature's 
God,  and  all  history  proves  that  to  be  so,  and  all  that  I  ask  is  "hands 
off,  "  leave  it  to  the  people  of  the  States  and  of  the  Territories  to  set- 
tle that  matter  for  themselves  under  the  Constitution  of  the  United 
States.23  [Applause.] 

And  now,  while  I  am  up,  I  want  to  put  my  veto  upon  one  thing.23 
I  know  that  I  am  not  going  to  be  applauded27  in  what  I  say  ;28  but 
seed  sown  in  good  time  will  bring  forth  fruit ;  and  though  you  may 
say  now  that  I  am  wrong,  yet  I  think  I  shall  live  to  see  the  day  when 
the  doctrines  which  I  advocate  to-night  will  be  the 


30 


doctrines  of  Massachusetts  and  of  the  North  ;  for 

"  Truth  crushed  to  earth  •will  rise  again  ; 

The  eternal  years  of  God  are  hers  ; 
'While  error,  wounded,  writhes  in  pain, 
And  dies  amid  her  worshipers." 

I  say  I  go  for  non-intervention  in  the  broadest  sense  of  the  term.  I 
say  that  this  whole  thing  should  be  taken  out  of  the  hands  of  the 
(Jen oral  Government.  I  say  it  is1  all  wrong  to  be  spending  two  or 
three  millions  of  dollars2  annually  from  our  pockets,  and  sacrificing 

=  l  it  is  your  right  to  have. — Have,  is  added  here  by  the  Vee-hook,  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  method  of  writing  hope  to  have,  Pel3.  To  must  be  supplied  to 
complete  the  construction. 

-'•  under  the  Constitution  of  the  ITnited  States. — One  of  the  Tees  of 
Constitution  is  here  omitted  to  secure  this  sign.  230,  U. 

=5  upon  one  thing.— P.  1C9,  R.  12,  b. 

-~  I  know  that  I  am  not  going  to  he  applauded. — The  affix-sign  'ing' 
is  omitted  in  writing  going  (237,  II.  1,  b),  to  secure  tlio  advantage  of  phrase-writ- 
ing. This  phrase  would  have  beru  written  in  the  Old  Phonography,  Retoid'-En 
Dhet  Petoid'-Meut-Gay:'  ing  '  Bee3  Pel'-Ded.  Compare  the  two  expressions. 

-=  in  what  I  say. — P.  Cl.  xvi.  of  this  Reader.  This  phrase,  so  eisily  and 
beautifully  expressed  in  Standard  Phonography,  would  have  been  written  in  the 
Old  Phonography,  EU.I  AVuhi  Retoid'-Es. 

„  ~     1 1  say  it  is.— P.  01,  xvi. 

o  U 

:  two  or   three  millions   of   dollars. — See,  iu   this  Reader,   p.  79, 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  141 

thousands  of  lives  upon  the  coast  of  Africa,3  in  that  terrible  clime,4  to 
prevent  our  going  there  to  get  a  few  negroes.  If  it  is  right  for  us  to 
go  to  Virginia  and  buy  a  negro,  and  pay  $2,0003  for  him,  it  is  legally 
right  for  us  to  go  to  Africa,  where  we  can  get  them  for  $50.  [Applause 
and  laughter. ]*  Here  is  the  condition  we  are  placed  in,  and  you  may 
as  well  come  to  your  senses  and  face  the  music. 

There  are  2,000  of  our  negroes  now  down  at  Key  West,  begging  and 
pleading  not  to  be  sent  back.  If  they  should  be  sent  back,  what  would 
be  the  result  ?  One  half  of  them  would  die  before  they  got  there,  and 
the  other  half  would  be  turned  upon  the  coast  of  Africa,  upon  the 
coast  of  Liberia,  among  strangers,  to  be  eaten  up  by  cannibals,  or  be 
caught  and  sold  again,  or  die  of  starvation ;  and  this  you  call  human- 
ity. I  say  it  is  piracy.  I  say  that  our  Government  is  acting  against 
right  and  reason  in  this  matter.  And  if  the  Southern  men  had  the 
spunk  and  spirit  to  come  right  up  and  face  the  North,  I  believe  the 
Northern  Democracy7  at  least  would  come  to  the  true  doctrine  of 
popular  sovereignty  and  non-intervention.  [Applause  and  laugh- 
ter.] 

Think  of  it !  Two  thousand  of  these  poor  barbarians  from  Africa, 
caught  within  the  last  four  weeks,  and  kept  upon  that  miserable  island 
of  Key  West,  dying  there  from  disease  and  starvation,  and  what  do  not 
die"  are  to  be  sent  back  by  our  Government  at  an  expense  of  one  or  two 
millions,  though  they  are  pleading  and  begging  not  to  be  sent  back  and 
landed  upon  the  coast  of  Africa.  It  is  cruel,  inhuman,  wrong,  and  I 
appeal  to  the  good  sense  of  the  American  nation  against  it.  Look  at 
John  Bull.9  He  has  bound  us  to  catch  all  we  can  and  send  them 

note  3.  The  word  millions  is  here  represented  by  Ems,  under  tlao  principle  of 
special  contraction.  237,  R.  2. 

3  upon  the  coast  of  Africa. — To  avoid  breaking  up  this  phrase,  omit  tho 
t  of  coast  and  leave  of  the  to  be  supj)lied. 

*  in  that  terrible  clime. — A  slight  saving  is  hero  effected  over  the  Corre- 
sponding Style  by  writing  '  bio '  by  the  affix-sign  (Bee)  instead  of  Bel.  See,  in 
this  Reader,  p.  101,  note  5. 

6  $2,OOO.— 274. 

6  Applause  and  laughter. — The  signs  for  applause  and  laughter  are  hero 
•written  without  lifting  the  pen,  constituting  a  sort  of  phrase-sign.  It  illustrates 
a  reporter's  care  to  effect  every  possible  saving  of  labor. 

'  Northern  Democracy. — Northern  is  here  contracted  to  Ner,  in  accordance 
with  the  principle  of  special  contraction.  The  phrase-sign,  transferred  to  tho 
common  print,  is  "Nor.  Dem." 

8  and  what  do  not  die. — See,  in  this  Reader,  p.  118,  note  9. 

9  John  Bull. — This  is  a  special  contraction.    This  sign,  transferred,  is  "  3. 
Bull."    837,  B.  2. 


142  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

back  at  an  expense  of  $25  per  head.  We  send  them  back.  But 
what  does  John  Bull  do  ?  When  he  gets  them  he  apprentices  them 
out  again,  and  makes  slaves  of  them.  That  is  the  hypocritical  treaty 
that  you  arc  bound  by.  And  yet  I  hear  no  Southern  voice  or  North- 
ern voice  raised  against  this  aggression  upon  the  law  of  nature  and 
of  nature's  God.  But  I  intend  to  raise  my  voice  against  it,  humble 
as  it  is. 

Now  this  may  be  a  secondary  question  before  us  to-night.  The  great 
point  is  harmony  and  union  in  the  great  Democratic  party.  Let  us 
whip  the  Black  Republicans  ;10  let  us  win  the  fight ;  and  when  we  have 
settled  these  things,  let  us  act  together  and  all  will  be  right.  [Ap- 
plause.] 


NO   LAW   FOR   SLAVERY. 

[Speech  of  Gerrit  Smith  at  the  State  Anti-Slavery  Convention,  in  Milwaukee, 
June  17th,  1857.] 

I  HAVE  not  come  here  to  denounce  slaveholders,  nor  to  say  that 
they  are  worse  than  other  men.  If  they  are  worse,  it  is  owing  to  the 
misfortune  of  their  circumstances.  If,  as  many  suppose,  they  are  the 
very  worst  of  men,  it  is  because  they  arc  the  subjects  and  victims  of 
the  very  worst  education. 

That  the  slaveholder  is  to  a  large  extent  unconscious"  of  the  wick- 
edness12 of  his  relation  is  beyond  controversy.  Deplorable,  however, 
as  is  this  unconsciousness,  it  happily  leaves  room  in  him  for  goodness. 
Virtues  the  slaveholder  can  certainly  have.13  Washington14  was  a 
slaveholder,  and  strikingly  were  the  nobler  virtues  grouped 

10  Black  Republicans. — Bel3  is  hero  written  for  Slack,  in  accordance  with 
the  principle  of  general  contraction  (237,  R.  2).     If  the  phrase  were  occurring  fre- 
quently, in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  237,  R.  2,  b,  it  would  bo  written 
BeP-Rays;  i.e.,  "Bl.  Rs." 

11  unconscious. — The  prefix-sign  for  uncon-  is  here  joined,  and  the  final  s  is 
omitted,  as  in  many  other  words  ending  with  the  sound  shus.    See,  in  this  Read- 
er, p.  74,  note  3. 

'2  wickedness.— 237,  R.  1. 

13  can  certainly  have.— P.  109,  R.  12.    This  phrase,  in  the  Old  Phonogra- 
phy, would  have  been  written  Ken2  Iss-Ret^-En-El  Vee2. 

14  Washington. — This  word  is  too  long  to  write  in  full,  and  the  best  con- 
traction is  Ishi-Ten. 


31 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  143 

in  him.  We  must  dismiss1  our  prejudices  against  the 
slaveholder  and  do  him  full  justice.  In  innumerable  in- 
stances is  he  graced  with  beautiful  traits  of  character.2  Of  course  this 
could  not  be,  did  he  know  the  wickedness  of  his  relation.3  Were  he  to 
know  that,  and  yet  to  continue  in  the  relation,4  to  see  his  sin  and  yet 
to  cling  to  it,  his  whole  soul  would  be  so  debased  that  nothing5  virtu- 
ous, nothing  generous  could  spring  up  and  live  in  it.  Unconscious- 
ness of  his  wrong  explains  the0  possibility  of  his  goodness. 

That  the  slaveholder  should  persist  in  remaining  a  slaveholder 
ought  not  to  surprise  us ;  nor  ought  we  to  regard  him  as  pre-emi- 
nently wicked  for  such  persistence.  Think  how  rarely,7  even  among 
ourselves,  a  man  becomes,8  in  the  full  and  emphatic  sense  of  the 
word,  an  Abolitionist.  All  over  the  world  a  new  education  is  needed 
— an  education  into  a  simple,  honest  love  of  manhood,  and  into  a 
deep  and  abiding  reverence  for  it.  Hitherto,  at  the  North9  as  well 
as  at  the  South,  our  schools  and  churches  have  not  been  such  as  to 
impress  men  with  the  dignity  and  grandeur  of  their10  common  nat- 

n  A     x  we  must  dismiss. — 236,  3. 

2  beautiful  traits  of  character. — 171,  3.  This  phrase,  in  the  Report- 
ing Style  of  the  Old  Phonography,  would  havo  been  written  Bet2-Fel  Trots2  1'et- 
oid!-Ker-Kay. 

3  wickedness  of  his  relation. — Wickedness  is  here  contracted,  as  afew  lines 
before  ;  his  is  added  by  a  circle,  of  being  implied. 

*  in  the  relation. — In  relation  is  distinguished  from  in  real-ity  by  the  En  in 
the  former  being  brought  down  so  that  Rel  may  rest  on  tho  lin*%  while  in  the 
other  phrase  Rel  is  above  the  line.  246,  1. 

B  that  nothing. — A  needless  fear  on  the  part  of  the  Old-Phonographic  pub- 
lishers caused  them  to  prohibit  the  joining  of  letters  in  many  cases,  where  they 
might  have  been  joined  with  ease,  and  with  advantage  in  respect  of  speed,  To 
make  the  junction  easy  between  Dhet  and  En,  it  is  only  necessary  to  curve  both 
Dbet  and  En  more  than  usually. 

6  explains  the. — (a)  The  plan  of  omitting  initial  Kay  in  many  such  words 
as  exist  (Ses-Tee2),  experience  (Sprens2),  explain  (Splen2)— an  omission  correspond- 
ing to  the  rapid  and  defective  utterance  of  these  words,  i.e.,  almost  'zist,  'sperience, 
'splain — was  first  presented  in  the  Hand-Book.  It  is  no  valid  objection  to  such 
contractions  that  they  do  not  save  much  ;  it  is  conceding  that  they  save  some- 
thing, and  that,  without  some  countervailing  disadvantage,  they  are  useful. 
Their  advantage  is  that  they  save  time  in  the  omission  of  a  letter,  and  also  by  fa- 
cilitating phrase-writing.  (6).  As  to  joining  the  in  this  case,  see  187,  B.  1. 

i  how  rarely. — See  pp.  59-60,  iv.,  2,  of  this  Reader. 

8  a  man  becomes.— 244,  R.  3,  (1). 

9  at  the  North.— 237,  R.  2. 

1°  of  their.— See  p.  79,  note  1,  in  this  Reader. 


144  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER, 

ure."     In  every  part  of  our  country  the  work  is  still  undone  of  bring- 
ing men  to  believe  that 

"The  one  solo  sacred  tiling  beneath  tlio  cope  of  heaven  is  mau.">2 

Open  the  eyes  of  the  slaveholder  to  the  greatness  and  glory  of  man 
— even  of  the  most  bruised  and  battered  specimen  of  man — and  he  is  at 
once  an  Abolitionist.  The  like  discovery  can  alone  transform  the13 
non-slaveholder  into  an  Abolitionist.  All  those  before  whose  heaven- 
anointed  vision  stand  revealed  the  divine  image  and  the  moral  sub- 
limity of  man — all  those,  and  none  others,"  are  Abolitionists.  As  im- 
possible would  it  be  for  him  who  is  blessed  with  this  revelation  to  op- 
].i-:.-s  or  despise  his  brother,  as  to  pour  contempt  upon  the  pyramids 
among  the  works  of  men,  or  upon  Mont  Blanc15  among  the  works  of 
God. 

Nor  have  I  come  here  to  oppose  the  doctrine  of  "compensation"— 
a  doctrine  so  unwelcome  to  the  mass  of  Anti-Slavery  men.  On  the 
contrary,  were  the  slaveholders  to  emancipate  their  slaves,  T  should 
be  glad  to  have  the  nation  give  five  hundred  millions  of  dollars  to  (he 
emancipators,13  and  bestow  something  on  the  emancipated  also.  In- 

11  common  nature.— (a)  The  word-sign  for  common  was  first  presented  in 
the  Hand-Book,     (b)  Common  was  previously  written 'com ':Euv. 

12  man." — The  quotation  marks  (")  are  placed  at  the  end  of  this  quotation., 
l>ut  not  at  the  beginning,  where  it  is  sufficiently  indicated  by  the  words  intro- 
ducing the  quotation. 

13  transform  the. — Standard  Phonography  beautifully  exemplifies  the  great 
law  of  UNIFORMITY  in  accordance  with  which  it  was  constructed,  iu  the  con- 
tractions for  words  ending  in  form-ed;   thus,  form-ed,  Fer1 ;  conform-ed,  '  con ': 
Per1 ;    deform-ed,  Deel  Fer  ;    inform-ed,  En-Fcr1  ;  j>frfurt,i-etl,  Per—Fur  ;  reform-ed, 
Ray'-Fer ;  transform-ed,  Ter&2-Fer  ;  uniform,  En-Fer3  ;  multiform,  Melt- Fer. 

1 '  and  none  others. — In  a  few  cases  the  Dher  tick  is  written  upward,  as  in 
this  phrase-sign.  With  a  pencil  it  will  be  easy  to  make  it,  and  even  with  a  pen  it 
will  not  be  so  difficult  that  its  use  will  not  be  advantageous. 

'"•  >Iont  Blanc. — The  foreign  pronunciation  of  this  word  is  Mo,  Bla( — (,)  sig. 
nifying  the  nasalization  of  the  preceding  vowel  (see  Hand-Book,  p.  203,  §  11).  For 
the  method  of  stenographically  indicating  nasalization,  see  Haud-Book,  p.  203, 
§  12,  1  and  2.  These  words  might  have  been  written  Ment1  Bel2-Ing-Kay,  as  if 
pronounced  Mont  Blank,  the  letters  being  interpreted  by  general  English  analo- 
gy, as  is  usually  done  in  phouographing  foreign  words  and  names.  See,  in  this 
Reader,  p.  98,  note  15. 

16  emancipators. — (a)  In  many  cases,  when  a  verb,  as  emancipate  (Em-Ens- 
Pet),  ends  with  a  shorleucd  straight-line,  and  the  actor,  as  emancipator,  is  formed 
by  the  addition  of  the  consonant  r,  the  reporter  may  write  for  the 'actor'  tho 
form  for  the  verb,  (t)  But  if,  in  order  to  avoid  confusion,  as  of  emancipated  and 
emancipator,  some  other  mode  of  writing  tho  actor  must  be  adopted,  the  reporter 
may  lengthen  the  stroke,  as  in  writing  emancipator,  Eni-Ens-Peeter.  See,  in  this 
Reader,  p.  CO,  xii. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  145 

deed,  inasmuch  as  the  North  has  sought  her  own  commercial  gains 
and  her  own  political  and  ecclesiastical  advantages,  in  allowing,  not 
to  say  encouraging,  the  South  to  extend  the  area  of  slavery  and  mul- 
tiply her  investments17  in  slaves,18  I  do  not  see  how  she  could  he  hon- 
est, and  yet  leave  the  South  to  hear  alone  the  whole  pecuniary  loss 
of  emancipation.  Such  loss  there  would  be.  I  admit  that  time 
would  turn  it19  into  great  gain.  But,  for  the  present,  it  certainly 
would  he  loss. 

To  my  enumeration  of  the  things  for  which  I  have  not  come  here  I 
will  add  hut  one  more.  I  have  not  come  to  oppose  the  dissolution40 
of  the  Union.  Nay,  I  am  free  to  declare  that  if  the  South  or  the  North, 
the  East  or  the  West,  desire  to  secede21  from  it,22  I  would23  have  no 
force  employed  to  prevent  the  secession.24  Let  the  seceder  go  in  peace, 

i"  investments.— 237,  R.  1,  b. 

is  in  slaves.— P.  108,  R.  10. 

•9  would  turn  it. — See,  in  this  Reader,  p.  Cl,  xvi. 

2"  dissolution.— Dissolution  ia  written  Dees-Elshon,  to  distinguish  it  from 
desolation,  Dues--LayKhou. 

21  desire  to  secede. — The  word  secede  and  its  derivatives  may  bo  advanta- 
geously written  in  accordance  with  the  novel,  Standard-Phonographic  principle 
of  using  an  initial  large  circle.  In  this  case,  in  connection  with  the  principle  of 
implying  to  by  joining,  a  phrase-sign  is  secured  which  is  considerably  shorter 
than  the  Old  expression  of  this  phrase — Dees-Ar  Petoid2  Es2-Sdee. 

"-  from  it.— P.  01,  xvi.,  of  this  Reader.  The  Old-Phonographic  expression 
of  this  phrase  was  Fer2  Tee3. 

23 1  would.— The  advantage  of  a  stenographic  device  may  not  when  consid- 
ered alone,  be  very  apparent.  It  might,  for  instance  bo  objected  that  Tetoid  for 
/  was  but  a  little  briefer  than  Petoid-Retoid.  But  it  might  be  replied  that  the 
aggregate  saving  of  a  number  of  little  contrivances  of  frequent  use  would  bo 
considerable.  And  if  these  devices,  in  addition  to  securing  a  briefer  expression 
for  certain  words,  obviate  frequently  the  loss  of  time  in  lifting  the  pen,  their  val- 
ue is  greatly  enhanced.  This  phrase-sign  is  a  good  illustration  of  this  idea.  First, 
Tetoid  for  /  is  nearly  twice  as  rapid  as  Petoid-Retoid.  Secondly,  the  lifting  of  tho 
pen  which  would  have  been  required  if  the  latter  form  for  7  had  been  employed, 
is  obviated  by  Tetoid.  So  that  there  is  effected  a  gain  over  the  Old  Phonography 
of  more  than  100  per  cent. 

21  employed  to  prevent  the  secession. — (a)  To  is  implied  here  by  join- 
ing. The  is  omitted,  and  to  be  supplied,  (b).  I  have  found  it  very  useful  in  var- 
ious kinds  of  reporting,  especially  legislative,  to  write  session  by  Issesh-on,  or  by 
enlarging  the  final  circle  of  a  preceding  word,  and  adding  the  Eslron-hook;  thus, 
end  of  the  seision,  Endseslron2  ;  at  the  session,  Teesesh-on3  ;  this  session,  Dhceses2- 
Eshou  ;  next  session,  Enses2  Eshou  ;  at  the  last  session,  Tee3-Layses-Eshon.  Seces- 
sion may  be  added  to  a  preceding  word  (without  a, final  circle),  as  in  this  case,  ia 
an  analogous  manner. 


14G  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

followed  with  our  blessings  and  not  with  our  curses.  At  the  same 
time,  let  me  declare  that  I  am  the  friend  of  the  Union ;  would  not 
have  it  dissolved,  but  would  have  it  endure  forever.  What  is  more, 
I  should  be  glad  if,  with  the  consent  of  all  parties  concerned,25  it 
could  spread  over  all  North  America, "G  and  carry  its  superior  vigor, 
intelligence,  and  civilization  to  peoples  who  are  perishing  for  need 
of  them. 

Having  now  said  for  what  I  did  not27  come,  I  will  proceed  to  say  for 
what  I  did  come  here.  It  was  for  only  one  thing ;  and  that  is,  to  Ic- 
seech  you  to  know  no  law  for  slavery,-8  and  to  trample  underfoot  whatever  claims 
to  be  a  law  for  slavery.  Possibly,  however,  there  are  persons  in  this  as- 
sembly, who  would  stop  me  on  the  very  threshold  of  my  argument 
by  telling  me29  that  the  Constitution  is  for  slavery.  But  what  if  it 
is?  What  if, 

from  beginning  to  end,  it  is  all  for  slavery?     That  decs 
not  make  slavery  a  law.     That  docs  not  make  the  Con- 
stitution a  law  for  slavery.     That  but  proves  that  Ihc  Constitution 


20  of  all  parties  concerned. — Throe  novel,  Standard-Phonographic  princi- 
ples and  devices  combine  in  this  case  to  produce  a  remarkably  condensed  expres- 
sion of  these  four  words : — 1.  The  addition  of  all  by  an  El-hook  to  Petoid1  (of). 
2.  The  formation  of  phrase-signs,  even  iu  case  of  necessary  disjoining,  commenc- 
ing the  disjoined  letter  near  the  preceding,  overlapping  them.  (See  p.  102,  note 
2,  of  this  Reader.)  3.  The  use  of  a  new  word-sign  for  party  (Pee).  Compare  this 
expression  with  the  Old-Phonographic  expression — Petoid1  Bedoid1  Pee-Ray-Tees 
Sarned*. 

23  over  all  North  America. — The  Old-Phonographic  expression  of  this 
phrase  would  be  Ver1  Bedoid1  Ner-Itk  Em-Ray-Kay. 

27  for  what  I  did  not. — (a)  What  is  here  added  by  shortening  the  sign 
(EC2)  foTfor.  See  p.  Cl,  xvi.,  of  this  Reader.  (6)  The  practiced  reporter  may,  in 
some  phrases,  omit  /,  BATHER  THAN  DISJOIN  THE  LETTER  FOLLOWING  rr,  writing, 
for  instance,  Fet2-Dent,  instead  of  FetS-TetoidiDent1,  for  for  what  I  did  not.  (Sen 
the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  under  the  word  /.)  There  is  an  in- 
stance of  the  application  of  tbis  plan  in  the  following  phrase-sign  for  for  wliat  I 
did  come. 

"-'  no  law  for  slavery. — Slay  being  used  as  a  (special)  word-sign  for  slavery, 
this  phrase-sign  falls  under  the  general  principles  of  phrase-writing — even  as  to 
using,  for  sake  of  convenience  Sel  instead  of  Slay  ;  for  it  is  allowable  and  not  un- 
frequent  to  change  the  direction  of  a  letter  having  two  directions,  or  to  change 
the  outline  of  a  word  (sometimes  even  of  a  sign-word),  in  order  to  secure  a  phrase- 
sign.  For  instance,  in  Tces2-El-En-Ef,  it  is  a  well  known  fact,  not  only  is  the  hook 
of  the  word-sign  of  well  (Wei2)  omitted,  but  the  stroke  is  written  downward.  The 
hook  of  known  is  also  omitted  so  that  fact  (Ef)  may  be  joined, 

M  by  telling  inc.— 237,  R.  1,  6. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  14? 

itself  is  no  law.  The  first  thing  in  regard  to  any  statute,  constitu- 
tion,1 or  decree  is  not  to  determine  by  means  of  it  what  other  things 
are  or  are  not  law,  but  whether  itself  is  or  is  not  law.  Preliminary 
to  applying  the-  yard-stick3  to  the  measurement  of  the  cloth  is  the 
inquiry  whether  it  is  a  yard-stick — whether  it  is  a  true  measure. 

The  Constitution  cannot  be  a  law  for  slavery.  It  cannot  be,  if  for 
no  other  reason  than  that,  so  far  as  it  may  be  for  slavery,  it  is  void. 
Just  so  far4  it  is  void  for  absurdity.  Not  less,  but  infinitely  more, 
absurd  would  the  Constitution  be  in  declaring  man  a  chattel  than  in 
declaring  wood  stone  or  stone  wood.  But  surely5  you  would  nots 
regard  as  law  the  declaration  that  wood  is  stone  or  stone  wood.  How 
much  less,  then,  should  you  suffer  the  declaration  that  man  is  a  chat- 
tel to  command  your  respect  and  obedience  !7  We  are  surprised  and 


32 


1  a  law the  Constitution. — In  this  case  a  long  dash  is  substituted 

for  the  repeated  words,  tiiat  does  not  make.    276,  a.    This  is  a  novel  and 
valuable  characteristic  of  Standard  Phonography. 

2  to  applying:  the. — The  Old-Phonographic  expression  of  this  phrase  would 
be  Petoid2  Pel3:'  ing '  e1 — i.e.,  two  strokes,  two  dots,  and  three  liftings,  while  the 
Standard-Phonographic  expression  requires  but  two  strokes  and  one  lifting,  and 
has  the  merit  of  greater  legibility. 

3  yard-stick. — In  this  contraction  stick  is  represented  by  the  Steh-Ioop  (st). 
The  character  of  the  discourse  here  hardly  justifies  the  use  of  this  sign  as  a  special 
contraction.    It  is  rather  an  instance  of  the  use  for  general  purposes,  by  the  expe- 
rienced reporter,  of  contractions  which  would  b«  employed  by  the  beginner  for 
special  purposes  only.    The  experienced  reporter,  in  the  course  of  his  practice, 
will  so  thoroughly  memorize  many  contractions  invented  for  special  purposes, 
that  ho  may  safely  introduce  them  into  any  kind  of  reporting,  especially  if  they 
arc  sufficiently  suggestive  not  to  depend  much  upon  the  context  for  legibility. 

*  just  so  far. — The  principle  of  236,  3 — allowing  the  omission  of  t  when  it 
occurs  between  s  and  another  consonant — is  almost  as  applicable  and  serviceable 
in  phrase-writing  as  in  the  writing  of  single  words.  See  phrases  commencing 
with  JUST  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

6  but  surely. — The  Standard-Phonographic  principle  of  enlarging  a  small 
Ar-hook  to  add  I  may  bo  advantageously  employed  to  add  the  termination  ly  to 
sure,  Sher2;  Sherl2,  surely  ;  and  near,  Xeri  ;  Kerli,  nearly; — but  never  when  the 
sign  thus  produced  would  have  some  other  and  conflicting  value  ;  and  hence 
Merl1  should  not  be  used  for  merely  ;  for  this  use  might  conflict  with  the  use  of 
that  sign  for  immorally. 

6  you  would  not.— See  p.  CO,  x.  of  this  Reader. 

7  and    obedience. — (a)  The  general  rule  which  I  have  observed  in  devising 
a  contraction  for  a  word  and  as  many  of  its  derivatives  as  can  safely  be  represent- 
ed by  one  contraction,  is  to  go  only  so  far  in  their  expression  as  they  coincide, 
and  sometimes  to  stop  short  of  that  if  the  words  are  very  long,  and  a  suggestive 
contraction  can  be  secured  without.     To  illustrate,  disobedient,  disobediently,  and 
disobedience,  being  of  different  parts  of  speech,  can  safely  bo  represented  by  one 


148  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

amused  by  the  historical  fact  that  a  Roman  challenged  for  his  favorite 
horse  the  honors  due  only  to  a  man.  But  wherein  is  it  more  absurd 
to  count  a  horse  for  a  man,  as  did  the  Roman,  than  to  count  a  man 
for  a  horse,  as  does  the  slaveholder. 

It  is  claimed  that  the  Constitution  is  a  law  for  slavery  on  the  ground 
that  it  is  a  bargain  between  the  whites  and  blacks  for  making  one  the 
slaves  of  the  other  ?  But  such  a  bargain  would  be  void  for  lack  of 
mutuality  and  consideration.  It  is  not  credible  that  the  blacks5  came 
into  it ;  and  if  they  did,  it  is  not  possible  that  they  received  an  equiv- 
alent, or,  indeed,  any  return  whatever  for  consenting9  to  be  reduced 
to  slavery.  Such  a  reduction  does  of  itself  incapacitate  for  receiv- 
ing any,  even  the  least  measure  of  compensation.  In  the  very  selling 
of  his  manhood,  the  seller  puts  it  out  of  his  power  to  receive  the10  pur- 
chase-money. He  cannot  be  paid  for  making  himself  a  chattel.  Ev- 
ery attempted  bargain  for  unmanning  himself  is  necessarily  void. 
Perhaps  it  will  be  said  that  the  bargain  in  question  was  not  between 
the  whites  and  blacks,  but  between  the  whites  and  the  whites — the 

contraction  ;  for,  the  context  will  determine  -whether  the  contraction  should  be 
read  as  an  adjective,  an  adverb,  or  a  noun.  These  three  words  coincide  in  the 
syllables,  disob&d,  which  is  all  that  ia  necessary  to  express,  to  suggest  these  words. 
These  syllables  are  expressed  by  Deesi-Bed.  (6)  It  sometimes  happens  that,  while 
a  word  which  is  formed  by  prefixes  (as  dis-obedient  from  obedient)  can  be  contract- 
ed, the  primitive  word  cannot,  because  the  expression  of  the  common  part  of  the 
primitive  and  its  derivatives  (as  Bed  for  OBEDient-ly-ce)  is  not  sufficiently  sug- 
gestive, and  may  have  some  other  and  conflicting  use.  (c)  Vocalization,  howev- 
er, as  Bed(p)1  lor  obedient,  may  render  the  contraction  sufficiently  suggestive,  and 
therefore  allowable. 

s  blacks. — This  is  a  special  contraction,  formed  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciples of  237,  R.  2. 

9  for  consenting.— P.  112,  R.  7,  6. 

10  puts  it  out  of  his  power  to  receive  the. — (a)  The  sign  for  it  is  short- 
ened to  add  out  (see  p.  61,  xvi.  of  this  Reader) :  of  is  implied,  as  is  very  frequently 
the  case  before  his  ;  his  is  added  by  the  small  circle  (Iss) ;  and  to  between  power 
and  receive  is  implied  by  joining,     (b)  It  may  be  observed  here  that  to,  in  such  a 
case,  is  not  implied  without  any  reierence  to  the  context ;  for  a  junction  in  one 
case  may  imply  nothing,  in  another  case  of,  and  in  another  case  to.    The  same 
principle  of  legibility  and  distinction  applies  here  that  was  defined  on  p.  76,  note 
13,  c,  namely— TVhen  the  same  thing  (letter,  word,  or  principle,  110  matter  what) 
has  different  uses  (as  the  joining  has,  as  jnst  mentioned)  the  uees  must  be  so  dif- 
ferent that  one  could  not  reasonably  be  substituted  for  the  other  in  any  case,  (c) 
This  phrase— Put*  it  out  of  his  power  to  receive— wonld  very  probably  have  been 
written  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  the  Old  Phonography,  Pets'  Tee*  Tee'  Petsoidi- 
Pee-Ar  Petoid2-Rays-Vee— i.e.,  nine  strokes  and  four  liftings  ;  while  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  expression  requires  but  five  strokes  and  not  one  lifting,  i.e.,  gains 
100  per  cent,  over  the  Old  expression. 


KEY   TO   THE   REFUTING   EXERCISES.  149 

whites  of  the  North  and  the  whites  of  the  South.  But  quite  as  em- 
phatically, in  such  case  as  in  the  other,  would  the  bargain  lack  valid- 
ity. For,  certainly  it  is  not  competent  for  two  parties  to  annul  the 
rights  of  a  third.  They  may  enter  into  a  compact  to  confirm,  but  not 
to  destroy,  his  rights.  To  say  that  the  Constitution  is  a  bargain  be- 
tween two  descriptions"  of  persons  to  take  away  all  the  rights,  ay, 
even  all  the  manhood,  of  a  third,  is  to  say  that  the  Constitution  is 
the  guiltiest  and  foulest  of  all  conspiracies,  and  at  the  very  furthest 
remove  from  all  possibility  of  being  law. 

But  to  return  to  my  declaration,  that  even  if  the  Constitution  were 
from  beginning  to  end  in  favor  of  slavery,12  it  nevertheless  could  not 
be  a  law  for  slavery.  Do  not  understand  me'3  to  admit  that  it  is  in 

n  between  two  descriptions.— This  same  sign  might  in  som»  other  case 
be  written  for  "between  all  descriptions  ;  "  but  the  context  here  makes  the  use 
of  it  for  "between  two  descriptions  "  safe  and  allowable.  The  following  words — 
"all  the  manhood  of  a  third  " — would  not  accord  with  reading  this  sign  "be- 
tween all  descriptions."  That  "between  two  descriptions"  is  the  proper  reading 
is  also  inferrible  from  the  fact  that  the  preceding  sentence  is  speaking  of  two  par- 
ties annulling  the  rights  of  a  third.  The  words,  "  To  say  that  tke  Constitution  is  a 
bargain,"  etc.,  commencing  this  sentence,  show  that  the  speaker  is  continuing 
the  discussion  of  the  question  of  "  a  bargain  between  the  whites  of  the  North  and 
the  whites  of  the  South,"  mentioned  in  the  fourth  sentence  preceding  ;  and  men- 
tioned or  adverted  to  in  every  sentence  following  that,  up  to  the  word  in  which 
this  phrase-sign  (Betl-Wen-Bedoid-Skershons)  occurs.  I  give  the  few  preceding 
sentences  as  a  specimen  of  the  discriminating  criticism  which  is  now  and  then 
required  in  reading  notes — not  tha't  it  takes  the  practiced  reporter  a  hundredth 
part  of  the  time  to  settU  such  a  question  as  I  have  consumed  in  setting  forth  the 
reasons  in  favor  of  the  correct  reading  of  the  phrase-sign,  which  is  the  subject  of 
this  note.  The  exercise  of  discrimination  which  will  be  demanded  through  a 
few  years'  practice  of  reporting  is  better  calculated,  in  my  opinion,  to  develop  a 
fine  critical  sense,  a  minute  knowledge  of  language,  an  ability  to  determine  from 
what  a  speaker  lias  said  what  lie  should  say,  than  any  other  study,  not  even  ex- 
cepting that  of  the  classics.  There  is  a  close  similarity  between  the  mental  exer- 
cise required  by  the  study  of  the  classics  and  that  demanded  by  the  study  and 
practice  of  reporting  ;  but  the  reporter's  profession  (which  calls  for  constant 
study)  more  imperatively  requires  that  beneficial  mental  exercise  which  is  in- 
duced by  classical  study  ;  and  his  reputation  as  a  reporter  and  his  income  de- 
pending upon  the  earnestness  and  carefulness  with  which  ho  pursues  his  profes- 
lon,  he  has  greater  inducements  to  call  forth  his  utmost  power  than  are  usually 
:d  to  classical  stndnnts.  There  is  the  additional  advantage  that  the  con- 
tand  varied  accumulation  of  knowledge  necessitated  by  the  pursuit  of  his 
ission  sustains  and  adds  to  his  native  and  acquired  intollpctu.il  power; 
while  the  modicum  of  valuable  knowledge  secured  by  the  many  months  of  study 
required  for  the  attainmpnt  nf  a  barfly  tnlrrable  knowledge  of  the  classical  lan- 
guages is  a  meaner  compensation  for  the  toil. 

12  in  favor  of  slavery.— 240,  1. 

13  do  not  understand  me.— P.  169,  B.  12,  b. 


150  SECOND    STAtfDAKD-PHONOGRAl'HIC    READER, 

favor  of  it.  Most  emphatically  do  I  deny  that  it  is.  Such  denial  is 
due  to  truth  and  to  the  memory  of  the  men  who  adopted  the  Consti- 
tution. 

The  Constitution  is  not  for  slavery,14  unless  they  who  adopted  it 
meant  it  to  be  for  slavery.  Eut  there  can  be  no  evidence  that  they  so 
meant,  unless  there  is  evidence  that  they  saw  slavery  in  the  Constitu- 
tion.15 When  the  masses  vote  for  a  paper,  it  is  never  to  be  alleged 
that  they  vote  for  crime  in  it,  unless  the  crime  is  on  the  face  of  it, 
and  they  are  thereby  certainly  apprised  of  what  they  are  doing. 
Hence  we  do  our  ancestors  great  and  cruel  wrong  when  we  charge 
them  with  having  established  the  superlative  injustice  of  slavery  in  a 
paper  which,  at  the  most,  but  covertly  alludes  to  it.  If  slavery  is 
openly  there,  then  blame  them  ;  but  not  if  it  only  hirks  there.  It  is 
worthy  of  mention  that  the  courts  concur  with  common  sense  in  hold- 
ing that  no  law  is  to  be  interpreted  in  behalf  of  palpable 1C  injustice, 
unless  such  injustice  is  expressed17  in  irresistibly  clear  terms.  Says 
the  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States  :  "  Where  rights  are  infring- 
ed, where  fundamental  principles  are  overthrown,  where  the  general 
system18  of  the  laws  is  departed  from,  the  legislative  intention 
must  be  expressed  with  irresistible  clearness  to  induce  a  court  of 
justice 

to  suppose  a  design  to  effect  such  objects." — 2  Cranch, 
390.  Surely,  he  must  be  quite  ignorant  of  the  spirit 
which  prevailed  among  the  American  masses  at  the  close  of  the  Revo- 
lutionary War,  who  believes  that  a  Constitution  expressly  and  clear- 
ly for  slavery  would  have  been  adopted  by  them. 

w  Constitution  is  not  for  slavery.— The  frequent  occurrence  of  this  word 
brings  it  under  the  phrase-writing  principle  of  244,  K.  3,  1 — namely,  "A  common 
substitute,  or  a  iiouii  of  frequent  occurrence,  is  frequently  joined  to  a  following 
verb." 

15  in  the  Constitution. — The  first  t  of  Constitution  is  omitted  here  (in  accord- 
ance with  236,  3,  6),  in  order  to  secure  the  advantage  of  phrase-writing.  The  same 
principle  is  followed  in  writing  unconstitutional.     See  this  word  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary  ;  also  the  Compendium,  p.  113,  R.  15. 

16  palpable.— See  p.  101,  note  5,  of  this  Reader.     The  form  given  for  this 
word  in  Isaac  Pitman's  Vocabulary  is  Pec-Lay-Pee-Bel.    Standard  Phonography 
mates  a  considerable  gain  over  the  Old  Phonography  by  its  improved  outlines  in 
many  cases  where  no  now  principles  are  involved  except  the  principles  of  analogy, 
uniformity,  and  speed,  which  for  the  first  are  fully  developed  (or  applied)  in 
Standard  Phonography. 

17  is  expressed.— P.  132,  R.  4 ;  246,  1. 

is  general  system — P.  169,  R.  12,  I ;  237,  R.  2. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  151 

But  it  is  said  that  they  who  framed  the  Constitution  intended  it  to 
be  for  slavery.  What  if  they  did  ?  The  Constitution  is  not  what  the 
handful1  who  framed  it,  but  what  the  masses  who  adopted  it,  in- 
tended it  to  be.  A  deed  of  land  is  not  what  the  scrivener,  but  what 
the  grantor  and  the  grantee  meant  to  have  it.2 

I  am  not  willing,  however,  that  the  framcrs  of  the  Constitution 
should  be  misrepresented  or  dishonored.  I  see  not  one  particle  of 
evidence  that  they  meant  to  establish  slavery,  or  even  to  spare  it  for 
another  generation.  They  put  into  the  Constitution3  many  powers, 
any  one  of  which  is  capable  of  being4  wielded  for  the  immediate  and 
entire5  overthrow0  of  the  whole  system  of  American  slavery.7  Did 
they  qualify  them  so  as  to  exempt  slavery  from  their  operation  ?  This 
they  certainly  would  have  done  had  they  been  intent  to  establish 
slavery,  or  even  to  prolong  its  life  beyond  a  few  years.8  But  they  did 
it  not.9  They  did  not  say,  "No  person  except  a  slave,"  but  "No 

nn     l  handful.— P.  194,  E.  9. 

2  meant  to  have  it. — To  is  implied  here  by  joining,  and  it  is  added  to 
have  by  shortening  its  sign.  The  best  expression  ia  the  Old  Phonography  for 
this  easily  and  rapidly  uttered  phrase  would  be  Ment2  Petoid2-Vee-Tee  ;  i.e.,  four 
strokes  and  one  lifting  ;  while  the  Standard-Phonographic  expression  requires 
but  two  strokes  and  no  lifting  ;  i.e.,  is  more  than  twice  as  fast  as  the  Old  expres- 
sion, and  yet  probably  not  faster  than  the  utterance  would  be. 

8  into  the  Constitution. — The  is  omitted  here  under  the  principle  of  250,  3, 
and  the  first  t  of  Constitution  is  omitted  (in  accordance  with  236,  3,  b),  to  secure  a 
desirable  phrase-sign. 

*  is  capable  of  being. — See  p.  101,  note  7,  of  this  Reader.  If  the  usual  form 
for  being  were  Bee-Ing,  the  Ing  would  be  omitted  in  such  a  combination  as  this, 
because  of  its  difficulty.     If  the  usual  form  were  Bee:ing  (i.e.,  with  the  dot  'ing'), 
the  dot  might  be  omitted  in  such  a  phrase,  under  the  principle  of  237,  E.  1,  b. 

*  entire.— Enter*  as  a  word-sign  for  entire,  and  Enteri-EI  for  entirely,  were 
first  presented  by  the  author.     The  Old-Phonographic  outlines  were  En-Tee-Ray, 
entire;  En-Tee-Ray-Lay,  entirely.     "Entirety"  will  be  written  by  the  derivative 
word-sign,  Enter!-Tce.    P.  142,  E.  5.    The  Old-Phonographic  form  for  this  word 
was  En-Tee-Eay-Tee. 

6  overthrow.— 229,  E.  1,  a. 

~  American  slavery. — This  is  a  special  contraction,  formed  in  accordance 
with  the  principle  of  237,  E.  2,  b. 

*  beyond  a  few  years. — 246,  1. 

o  but  they  did  it  not.— The  best  Old-Phonographic  expression  for  this  phrase 
•would  have  been  Tetoid2-Dhee-Dee-Dee  (or  Bed)  Tee2  Net*.  The  Old  Phonography 
would  have  done  better  with  the  more  usual  form  of  expression — but  t/tey  did  not 
do  it  (or  do  so).  But  Standard  Phonography  is  as  well  adapted  to  extemporaneous 
speech  as  to  the  studied  composition  of  books.  It  not  ia  Standard  Phonography 


152  SECOND   STANDAIiD-PHONOGUAPHIC    READER. 

person  shall  be  deprived  of  life,  liberty,  or  property  -without  clue  pro- 
cess of  law."  They  did  not  say,  "The  right  of  the  people  except 
slaves, ' '  but  ' '  The  right  of  the  people  to  keep  and  bear  arms  shall 
not  be  infringed."  It  is  superfluous  to  remark  that  the  masters  will 
throw  down  their  whips  whenever  Government  shall  obey  the 
Constitution  and  protect  the  slaves  in  taking  up  their10  muskets.  The 
framers  of  the  Constitution"  did  not  say,  "The  right  of  the  people 
except  the  slaves,"  but  "The  right  of  the  people  to  be  secure  in  their 
persons,"  etc.,12  "shall  not  be  violated."  Nor  did  they  confine  Con- 
gress to  color  or  condition  in  obtaining  recruits  for  the  army  and 
navy.  I  need  not  say  that  slavery  would  come  to  a  speedy  end  were 
Congress  to  go  among  the  blacks  as  freely  as  among  the  whites  to 
supply  the  army  and  navy  with  officers  and  privates.  It  is  only  by 
observing  in  every  direction  the  policy  of  proscribing,  degrading,  and 
outraging  the  black  man13  that  slavery  can  be  maintained.  Again,  in 
forbidding  attainder,  the  framers  of  the  Constitution  did  not  except 
slavery,  which  is  the  worst  possible14  form  of  attainder.  Nor  did  they 

is  represented  by  Tent.  It  could  not  be  joined  to  Ded  ;  yet  to  avoid  tho  loss  of 
time  of  writing  it  iu  its  proper  position  when  staudiug  alone  (i.e.,  on  tlie  line), 
it  is  made  to  overlap  the  Ded  as  a  substitute  for  joining. 

10  in  taking  up  their.— 237,  K.  1,  6  ;  264. 

11  the  framers  of  the  Constitution. — 1G4.    To  secure  a  desirable  sign  for 
this  phrase,  which  it  now  appears  •will  probably  occur  frequently  iu  this  part  of 
the  speech,  the  s  of  framers  is  omitted,  and  the  first  t  of  Constitution,  in  accordance 
with  236,  3,  b. 

12  etc. — (a)  The  common  "  &  "  is  a  contraction  lor  the  Latin  ET  (and),  the 
left-hand  portion  being  E  and  the  right-hand  portion  being  intended  for  the  up- 
right portion  of  T,  which  is  made  into  T  by  the  concluding  stroke  ;  I  say  conc/ud- 
ing  stroke,  for  the  proper  and  easiest  way  of  making  this  sign  is  to  commence 
with  the  right-hand  stroke,  as  though  making  a  v  backward,  and  making  a  circle 
at  the  top  of  the  left-hand  side  of  the  v,  to  run  a  line  across  the  two  strokes  ; 
which  line  may  be  joined,  in  rapid  writing,  with  the  following  word,  or  with  the 
following  letter,  as  in  writing  "  <£c."    (6)  The  expedient  ••&"  may  properly  be 
written  (if  written  correctly)  for  and  in  all  cases  in  transcribing,  except,  of  course, 
at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,     (c)  The  contraction  "&c."  or  "etc."  (which 
last  is  the  form  now  usually  adopted  in  books)  is  a  contraction  of  the  Latin  it 
eel-era.    (See  Webster's  Unabridged  Dictionary,  under  ET  CJETERA.)    It  is  some- 
times pronounced  "et  setera,"  or  (being  translated)  "and  so  forth."    In  either 
ca.se  the  reporter  may  write  Tees2-Ter  (i.e.,  et  set-era),    (d)  If  any  person  should 
wisli  a  greater  distinction  between  the  phrase  et  cetera  (Tccs2-Ter)  and  it  is  truf. 
(also  Tees2-Ter)  than  the  non-conflicting  uses  of  the  si^n,  it  may  be  secured  by 
writing  the  more  frequent  et  cetera  with  Tces2-Ter,  with  the  Ar-hook  implied  (171, 
2),  and  it  is  true  with  Tees-Iss-Tcr,  i.e.,  with  a  distinct  Ar-hook. 

13  black  man.— Bel3  for  Hack  is  a  special  contraction.    237,  R.  2. 

n  worst  possible. — The  t  of  worst  is  omitted  here,  in  accordance  with  236,  3, 
in  order  to  secure  the  advantage  of  a  phrase-sign. 


KEY  TO   THE  REPORTING  EXERCISES.  153 

provide  for  the  defeating  of  the  writ  of  habeas  corpusra  by  allowing  the 
plea — the  entirely  effectual  plea— of  property  in  man.  They  provided 
for  the  suspension"*  of  the  writ  in  certain  specified  cases ;  but  slavery 
is  not  one  of  those  cases.  Well  did  Professor  Christian  say,  "  It  is  this 
writ  which  makes  slavery  impossible  in  England." 

When  I  said  that  the  frainers  of  the  Constitution  put  many  powers 
into  it  that  could  be  used  effectually  for  the  destruction  of  slavery,  I 
hope  you  did  not  understand  me  to  claim  that  such  use  of  them  was 
their  purpose.  All  I  claim  at  this  point  is,  that  inasmuch  as  it  was 
understood  on  all  hands  that  slavery  was  to  cease  in  a  few  years,  no 
care  was  taken,  and  no  disposition  was  felt,  to  protect  it  from  being 
swept  away  by  the  principles  and  provisions  of  the  Constitution. 

Am  I  asked  why  the  frainers  of  the  Constitution  did  not  in  terms 
provide  for  the  abolition  of  slavery,  I  answer  that,  in  the  first  place,17 
inasmuch  as  slavery  was  dying18  and  doomed,  this  was  not  thought  to 
be  necessary  ;  and  that,  in  the  second  place, 19  they  were  not  willing  to 

15  habeas  corpus. — This  is  a  contraction  formed  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciple of  237,  R.  2,  b,  Hay  standing  for  habeas  and  Ker  for  corpus.    But  it  may  be 
used  as  a  general  contraction. 

16  suspension. — The  publisher  of  Standard  Phonography,  in  devising  con- 
tractions, has  constantly  kept  in  view  the  principle  of  making   ANALOGOUS 
CONTRACTIONS    FOR  ANALOGOUS  WORDS  ;  so  that  one  contraction  familiarized 
usually  indicates  or  suggests  the  contractions  for  analogous  words.  Many  contractions, 
for  instance,  are  formed  in  analogy  with  the  contractions  for  apprehensive  sion 
(Preu3)  ;  apprehensible  (Prens3)  ;  as  Ses-Peu2,  suspension-sive  ;    Steu2,  extension- 
Bive ;  Stens3,  extensible  ;  Speu2,  expensive-ness  ;  Spen3,  expansive-sion  ;  Spens3, 
expansible  ;  Dee  Klen,  declension  ;  Rays-Pen,  responsive  ;  Rays-Pens,  responsi- 
ble-ility  ;  i.e.,  contractions  of   words  ending  with   nsion-sive-siveness,  terminate 
with  an  En-hook  ;    while  the  contractions   of  words  ending   with  nsible-ility, 
terminate  with  the  Ens-circle.      187,  R.  2,  a.     Compare  the  Old-Phonographic 
Kays-Pens,  expensive  ;  Rays- Pens,  responsible.    If  you  make  a  contraction  for 
responsive  (Rays-Pens)  in  analogy  with  that  for  expensive  (Kays-Pens),  it  conflicts 
with  responsible.       Kays-Pens3    expansive    (in    analogy    with  expensive],    would 
conflict  with  Kays-Peus3,  expansible  (in  analogy  with  responsible).    So  Analogy, 
Uniformity,  Consistency,  being  sacrificed  at  the  outset,  had  to  be  sacrificed  to 
the  end. 

17  in  the  first  place.— This  phrase-sign,  though  employed  in  any  kind  of 
of  reporting,  is  formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  237,  R.  2,  6— Ef  stand- 
ing for  first  and  Pel  for.ptace. 

18  slavery  \vas  dying. — The  frequent  use  of  the  word  slavery  in  this  speech 
brings  it  under  the  principle  of  phrase-writing  expressed  in  244,  R.  3,  1. 

19  in    the    second    place. — This  phrase-sign,  though  properly  used  in  all 
kinds  of  reporting,  is  formed  in  accordance  wich  the  principles  of  237,  R.  2,  b — 
Skay  (i.e.,  sec.)  standing  for  second  and  Pel  for  place,    (b)  Other  signs  for  corre- 
sponding phrases  may  be  formed  in  like  manner,  as  En-Ith-Pel,  in  the  third  place 


154  SECOND   STANDARD-PBOXOGRAPHIC    READER. 

let  posterity  learn  from  the  pages  of  the  Constitution  that  their  coun- 
try had  ever  been  disgraced  with  slavery.  The  silence  of  the  Consti- 
tution respecting  slavery  shows  far  more  loathing  and  shame  of  it 
than  could  any  express  condemnation  of  it,  however  emphatic. 

But  it  is  said  that  there  is  history  to  prove  that  the  framers  of  the 
Constitution  were  willing  to  let  slavery  continue.  I  admit  it.  What 
is  more,  I  admit  that  there  arc  clauses  in  the  Constitution  which  con- 
tribute proof  of  the  truth  of  this  history.  Nevertheless,  to  go  into 
history  for  the  sake  of  interpreting  these  clauses  in  behalf  of  crime  is, 
as  we  have  already  seen,  wholly  unwarranted  by  the  rules  of  interpret- 
ation. It  is  its  letter,  and  not  its  history,  that  is  the  Constitution. 
For  the  sake  of  argument,  however,  I  will  admit  that  these  clauses 
refer  to  slavery. 

But  for  how  long  was  slavery50  to  continue  ?  Only  for  some  twenty 
years  were  they  willing  to  let  it 


34 


continue.     And  what  is1  more,  the  mass  of  it  was  rea- 
sonably expected  to  be  of  the  comparatively  mild  type 

of  house  and  farm  slavery,  and  not  of  the  severe  type  of  plantation2 

slavery. 

— ItU  standing  for  Hard;  Eni-EP-Ith-Pel,  in  the  fourth  place— with  Ith  to  distin- 
guish it  from  in  the  first  place ;  En-Ef-Ef-Pel,  iu  the  filth  place  ;  En-En-Pel,  in  the 
next  place  ;  En-El2(tor  last)-fel  (or  Nels-Pels")  in  the  last  place. 

2°  was  slavery.— 244,  E.  3,  4. 

O  4     l  and  -what  is. — Ketoid(awd)  TVuhi(!e'iat  joined  as  a  hook)  is  distinct 
"•4    from  Tetoid'(or)  V?\ih(wltal).    The  Wuh-hook  may  be  made  into  a  circle 
to  add  i.t,  etc. 

-  plantation.— This  may  be  regarded  as  a  special  contraction.  The  full  form 
would  be  Plen-Teeshon.  (6)  Generally,  in  Standard  Phonography,  when  the 
same  sign  stands  lor  a  primitive  word  and  one  or  more  derivatives,  some  or  all  of 
them  being  contracted,  that  sign  is  written  in  the  proper  or  assigned  position  of 
the  primitive,  whatever  may  be  the  accented  vowel  (i.e.,  the  proper  position)  of 
the  derivatives  ;  thus,  Esl  Em,  assirnilate-d  ion  ;  Plent3,  plant-ed-(er)-ation  ; 
Kay-Pee2,  capacious-ty  ;  Deet-Klen,  decline-able-ation  ;  Dees2-Pet,  despot-ic-ical- 
ically  ;  Dee2-Men,  diminish-ed-ution  ;  Dee3-Men,  admonish-ed-ition  ;  Dee1-Men, 
dom-inate-d-ion-nt ;  Kays2-Entcr,  eccentric-al-ity  ;  Kays-Eel,  exclaim-ed,  exclam- 
ation-tory  ;  Fels2-Bee,  flexible-ihty  ;  Feri-Jed,  frigid-ity  ;  Jay2-Ger,  geography- 
ical-er;  Pee^Kret,  hypocrite-ical ;  En-Drenl,  indoctrinate-d-ion  ;  Eu-Sper1,  m- 
spire-ation  ;  Ent'-Ket,  intellect-ual-uality  ;  Ent'-Med,  intinudate-d-ion  •  En-Vet1, 
iiivito-d-aticn  :  Em-Jay3,  majesty -ic  ;  Em-Thed2,  mcthod-ic-ical,  Methodism; 
Eru-Thedst2,  Methodist-ic-ical ;  FeH-Ger,  photography  ic-ist-er  ;  Pers'-Pet,  pre- 
cipitate-d-iou  ;  Eay-Fet,  relute-d-ation  ;  Kay'-Pet,  repeat-ed;  repetition  ,  Ray-!- 
Pet,  repute-d-atiou  ,  Ray-Pod,  rapul-ity-ly.  (c)  This  general  principle  corre- 


KEY   TO   THE  EEPOETING   EXERCISES.  155 

I  said  that  the  framers  of  the  Constitution  expected  slavery  to  con- 
tinue for  only  some  twenty  years.3  The  historical  truth  that,  in  this 
country*  as  well  as  in  England,5  the  cessation  of  the  African  slave- 
trade  was  looked  to  as  the  cessation  of  slavery  itself,  is  undisputed. 
Now  history  is  confirmed  at  this  point  by  the  migration  and  impor- 
tation clause  of  the  Constitution — that  clause  protecting  the  trade  for 
only  twenty  years.  But  that  slavery  itself  was  expected  to  continue 
only  so  long  is  manifest  from  the  fact  that  this  protection,  brief  as  it 
was,  was  to  be  enjoyed  only  by  the  then  existing  States.6  But  if  the 
new  States  (and  remember  that  the  Constitution  expressly  provides 
for  their  admission)7  were  not  to  be  allowed  to  participate  in  the  Af- 
rican slave-trade,  it  was  because  they  were  not  to  be  allowed  to  have 
slavery.  Having  slavery  without  recruiting  it  from  Africa  was  a 
thing  not  then  thought  of.  If,  however,  the  new  States  were  denied 

spends  to  the  general  rule  of  position  applying  to  derivative  word-signs.  See 
261,  E.  2.  It  serves  to  distinguish  many  contracted  outlines,  which  by  the  gen- 
eral rule  of  position  would  occupy  the  same  position,  and  hence  bo  undistin- 
guished except  by  meaning  (or  the  context),  (d)  The  suggestiveness  (i.e.,  legi- 
bility) of  contractions  for  derivative  words  is  favored  by  placing  them  in  the 
position  of  the  primitive  ;  for,  the  primitive  word  being  first  read  or  suggested, 
that  and  the  context  will  at  once  indicate  what  derivative  is  to  be  employed.  For 
instance,  Em-Thed2  will  easily  be  read  as,  or  suggest,  method,  and  t/iat,  if  it  be  not 
the  required  word,  will  suggest,  in  connection  with  the  context,  the  proper  word 
for  the  place,  namely,  methodic,  methodical,  methodically,  or  Methodism,  (e)  When 
the  proper  position  of  a  primitive  word  and  that  of  the  derivative  words  would 
be  different,  as  of  refute^)  and  refutation^),  and  the  corresponding  position  of  the 
two  words  would  be  the  same,  they  are  both  placed  in  that  position  (as  Eay2- 
Fet,  refute-d-ation),  unless  a  different  position  is  required  for  distinction's 
sake ;  as  Eay3-Pet,  repute-d-ation,  to  distinguish  these  words  from  EayS  Fed, 
rapid-ly,  rapidity  (which  is  in  conformity  with  the  rule),  and  Eayi-Ped,  repeat- 
ed, repetition. 

3  twenty  years.— See  Hand-Book,  p.  199,  b. 

4  in  this  country.  -The  word-sign  Kay2  for  country  was  first  introduced  by 
the  Hand-Book. 

6  in  England — Ing-end1  (i.e.,  Eng'nd),  as  a  word-sign  for  England,  was  in- 
troduced by  the  Hand  Book.    It  is  distinct  from  the  sign  for  English  and  thing 
(Ingi),  and  is  more  suggestive  in  phrase-writing,  especially  when  brought  out  of 
its  proper  position,  than  the  Old  sign  (Ingi). 

«  existing  States.— 237,  E.  1,  6. 

7  (  ). — The  reporter  should  endeavor  to  indicate  parentheses  as  often  as  pos- 
sible.    If  not  indicated,  they  are  apt  frequently  to  cause  difficulty  in  reading  ; 
for,  if  the  reader  shoiild  not  at  once  observe  the  parenthesis,  and  read  it  with 
suitable  inflections,  the  idea  not  being  received,  the  sentence  would  appear  con- 
fused, and  nnich  time  would  be  lost  in  arriving  at  the  correct  reading. 


15G  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGltAl'llIC    READER. 

the  right  to  have  slavery,  it  follows  that  the  old  States  were  not  to 
be  allowed  to  establish  it,  since  that  would  be  to  allow  an  inequality 
of  rights  between  the  new  and  the  old  States."  No  one  claims  that 
such  inequality  exists  in  the  contemplation9  of  the  Constitution. 

Another  proof  that  slavery10  was  allowed  only  a  brief  duration  is  to 
be  found  in  the  Ordinance  for  the  Northwest  Territory.  That  and 
the  Constitution  were  framed  at  nearly  the  same  time,"  and  to  some 
extent'2  by  the  same  men.  The  Ordinance  provides  for  the  recapture 
of  fugitive  servants;  and,  inasmuch  as  it  speaks  expressly  of  slavci-v, 
we  will  assume  that  fugitive  slaves  are  included.  But  the  Ordinance, 
like  the  migration  and  importation  clause  in  the  Constitution,  confines 
its  benefits  at  this  point  (if  benefits  they  may  be  callfdi  to  the  old 
States.  It  was  only  those  who  had  escaped  from  "any  one  of  the 
original  States"  that  might  be  recaptured.  Hence,  like  that  clause, 
the  Ordinance  also  shows  that  the  new  States  were  not  to  have 
slavery  at  all,  and  that  the  old  States  were  not  to  have  it  after  the 
few  years  allowed  them  in  which  to  bring  it  to  a  peaceful  and  gradual 
close. 

But  I  may  be  asked  why,  since  the  Ordinance  and  the  migration 
and  importation  clause  both  prove  so  clearly  the  policy  and  purpose 
of  .abolishing  slavery,  there  is  nothing  in  the  fugitive  servant  clause 
of  the  Constitution  to  prove  the  like  policy  and  purpose.  Why  does 
not  this  clause,  like  that  in  the  Ordinance,  limit  the  right  of  recapture 


8  and  the  old  States. — The  is  omitted  here,  and  and  is  adapted  to  the  position 
of  old.     (b)  The  practiced  reporter  may  thus  usually  dispose  of  the  phrase  anil  the, 
thus  saving  many  a  lifting  of  the  pen  without  at  all  impairing  legibilitj-. 

9  in  the  contemplation. — 250,  3.    This  phrase-sign  might  be  read  in  con- 
templation, instead  of  "in  the  contemplation."     In  all  such  cases  of  omissions  and 
possible  double  readings,  either  the  intended  sense  is  not  affected  by  the  omission 
of  a  word,  or  the  context,  carefully  considered,  will  show  that  a  word  needs  to  be 
supplied. 

10  that  slavery.— 244,  R.  3  (6). 

»  at  nearly  the  same  time.— This  phrase  would  very  probably  have  been 
written,  in  the  Reporting  Style  of  the  Old  Phonography,  Tee:1  Neri-El  f-1  (i.e.,  a  dot 
above  the  line)  Sem2  Teei  ;  i.e.,  with  five  strokes,  one  dot,  and  four  liftings  :  while 
the  Standard-Phonographic  expression  requires  but  fotir  strokes  and  no  dots  and 
no  liftings  :  i.e.,  is  nearly  100  per  cent,  faster  than  the  Old  expression.  (6)  Same 
time  may  usually  be  written  Semt,  without  vocalization  (with  a),  and  be  distin- 
guished from  some  time  (Semt),  provided  the  preceding  the  is  expressed,  as  in  this 
phrase-sign. 

12  and  to  some  extent.— And  (Ketoid)  is  here  prefixed  to  Sem4,  to  some. 


KEY   TO    THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  157 

to  "the  original  States?"  )3  The  simple  and  sole  explanation  is  that  this 
clause  in  the  Constitution  docs  not  refer1*  to  slaves. 

The  fact  that  this  clause  does  not  limit  its  uses  to  the  old  States 
utterly  forbids  the  putting  of  a  pro-slavery  interpretation  upon  it.  If 
the  Convention  intended  to  have  it  apply  to  slaves,  why  did  they  not 
qualify  it  so  as  to  make  it  correspond  with  the  Ordinance  and  the  mi- 
gration and  importation  clause  ? 

Again,  the  language  of  the  fugitive  servant  clause  in  the  Constitu- 
tion makes  it  wholly  inapplicable  to  slaves.  The  persons  referred  to 
in  this  clause  are  debtors.  Service  is  due  from  them.  But  the  slave, 
being  a  mere  chattel,  and,  therefore,  incapable  of  making  a  contract, 
can  owe  nothing.  Says  Justice  Best :  "A  slave  is  incapable  of  com- 
pact. ' '  The  slave  codes15  all  declare  that  he  can  own  nothing. I6  But 
manifestly,  he  who  can  own  nothing  can  owe  nothing. " 

And  there  is  still  one  other  reason  why  we  should  believe  that  the 
framers  of  the  Constitution  did  not  intend  to  help  slavery  live,  and 
why  we  should  believe  that  they  committed  themselves  to  no  guiltier 
policy — guilty  I  admit  it  was — than  that  of  allowing  the  dying  demon 
a  few  years  in  which  to  die.  It  is,  that  to  believe  the  contrary  involves 
them  in  the  grossest  hypocrisy.  They  began  the  Constitution  with 
the  solemn  declaration  that  they  intended  it  to  "secure  the  blessings 
of  liberty ;"  and  when  they  had  finished  it,  and  were  about  to  sub- 
mit it  to  the  people,  they  unanimously  struck  from  it  the  word  "ser- 
vitude," and  supplied  its  place  with  "service,"  for  the  avowed 
reason  that  servitude  denotes  the  condition  of  slaves,  and  service 
the  obligations  of  freemen.  For  one,18 1  am  not  prepared  to  call  them 
hypocrites,  as  all  virtually  do  who  impute  to  them  pro-slavery 
purposes, 

13  to  the  original  States.— P.  169,  R.  12,  5. 

14  does  not  refer. — To  make  the  junction  easy,  make  Net  quite  curved,  and 
Bay  more  slanting  than  usual  in  the  •word  refer. 

is  slave  codes.— 182,  R.  1,  6. 

10  nothing:. — Isaac  Pitman  has  sometimes  written  this  word  Ending,  and  to 
prevent  clashing  with  anything,  the  latter  word  (or  phrase)  was  written  Eu-Ith- 
Ing.  This  plan  did  not  produce  satisfaction,  and  no  other  mode  of  remedying 
an  obvious  difficulty  having  presented  itself,  he  wrote  Ending,  anything,  and  En- 
Ith-Ing,  nothing.  This  trouble  is  easily  disposed  of  by  providing  nothing  with  a 
needed  contraction,  En-Ith2. 

i'  nothing. — To  indicate  a  paragraph  to  bo  made  in  the  transcription,  the 
period  mark  is  doubled. 

18  for  one. — As  one  is  somewhat  emphasized  here,  it  is  better  to  write  the 
phrase  Ef-'-Weu,  rather  thau  Feu2. 


158  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 


35 


I  will,  at  this  stage1  of  my  remarks,  speak  of  the  pro- 
slavery  interpretations  of  the  Constitution  by  anti-slav- 
ery men.  Coming  from  such  a  source,  they  are  peculiarly  pernicious. 
The  mass  of  the  American  people-  are  worshipers3  of  the  Constitu- 
tion. They  recognize  no  higher  authority.  For  anti-slavery  men, 
therefore,  to  tell  them  it  is  pro-slavery,  is  to  bring  them  under  a 
mighty  influence  to  uphold  slavery.4  Most  lamentable,  therefore, 
is  it  that  so  many  of  these  sincere  lovers  of  freedom  should  be  taxing 
their3  ingenuity3  to  prove  that  the  Constitution  is7  pro-slavery. 

Freedom  can  bear  any  other  opposition  better  than*  this,  which  she 
encounters  in  the  house  of  her  friends.  She  can  bear  to  be  opposed 
by  the  current  religion  of  the  country,  for  the  people  are  fast  losing 
all  respect  for  a  conventional  and  spurious  religion,  which  mixes  it- 
self up  with  slavery,9  instead  of  sternly  demanding  its  extinction.10 
She  can  bear  to  be  opposed  by  the  Democratic  party,  which,  Ahab- 
like,  has  sold  itself  to  work  evil,  or  by  such  Republicans  as  use  free- 
dom to  serve  party.  But  the  one  thing  that  freedom  cannot  bear11 
is  to  have  anti-slavery  men,  anti-slavery  leaders,  the  most  distin- 
guished12 and  influential  anti-slavery  newspapers,  at  work  to  rob  the 
poor  and  powerless  slave  of  the  Constitution,  and  give  it  to  the 
proud  and  powerful  slaveholder.  Oh  !  if  there  is  anything  that  be- 
longs to  the  slave,  it  is  this  paper,  which  our  fathers13  would  not 
consent14  to  stain  with  the  word  "slavery,"  and  which  they  were15 

n  f    i  at  this  stage. — This  common  phrase  needs  a  phrase-sign,  which  is 

00  secured  by  changing  lor  the  purpose  the  usual  form  of  stage  (Steh-Jay), 
as  in  the  engraving. 

2  American  people.— P.  1C9,  R.  12,  6. 
*  worshipers.-?.  194,  R.  7. 

4  to  uphold  slavery.— 244,  R.  3  (4). 

5  taxing  their.— See  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary,  DHB,  5. 

6  ingenuity. — P.  135,  note  6,  1,  of  this  Reader. 

1  Constitution  is 244,  R.  3,  (1). 

8  better  than.— See  this  Reader,  p.  CO,  xiii. 
»  with  slavery.— 244,  R.  3  (5). 

10  extinction. — See  this  and  the  related  words  in  the  Standard-Phonographic 
Dictionary. 

11  freedom  cannot  bear.— 244,  R.  3  (1). 

12  most  distinguished.— 236,  3. 

13  which  our  fathers. — See  this  Reader,  p.  61,  xv. 
i»  would  not  consent.— P.  112,  R.  7,  b. 

15  and    which    they    were.— See  DHB  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dic- 
tionary ;  and  also  p.  60,  xii.  of  this  Reader. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  159 

determined  should  go  down  to  posterity  with  a  clean  and  fair  face  for 
liberty. 

I  have  said13  much  to  you  in  praise  of  the  Constitution.  Let  it  not 
be17  inferred,  however,  that  I  claim  for  it  the  first  place  in  your  hearts. 
Among  all  State  papers,  such  pre-eminence18  belongs  to  the  Declara- 
tion of  Independence.  They  greatly  exaggerate  the13  merits  of  the 
Constitution  who  see  in  it  the  origin  of  the  Union.  As  it  does  itself 
declare,  it  was  made  "in  order  to  form23  a  more  perfect  Union."  The 
Union  already  existed.  It  had  been  entered  into  even  before  1776. 2I 
It  was,  however,  the  Paper  of  that  memorable  year — the  noblest  po- 
litical paper  ever  sent  over  the  world — that  was  the  first  to  set  forth, 
formally  and  authoritatively,  the  reason  why  the  American  Colonies22 
should  become  one  nation,  and  the  first23  thus  to  set  forth  the  sublime 
and  mighty  principles  which  were24  to  vitalize  and  forever  govern 
that  nation.  This  is  the  paper  which  deserves  to  be  called  the  first 
Constitution  of  our  country ;  for  it  is  the  first  in  the  order  of  time 
and  the  first  in  the  degree  of  authority.  One  of  the  eminent  states- 
men (General  Root)  of  my  State  pronounced  it  "the25  fundamental 
law  of  the  land  ;"  and  another  (John  C.  Spencer)  declared  it  to  be 
" above  al!2J  Constitutions  and  all  laws."  The  Federal  Constitution 

10  I  have  said. — See  this  Reader,  p.  127,  notes  8  and  9. 

i"  I*t  it  not  be. — Tents,  it  not,  is  a  valuable  word-sign,  first  presented  by 
the  Hand  Book.  See  phrases  beginning  with  LET  IT  NOT  in  tho  Standard-Phono- 
graphic Dictionary. 

ls  such  pre-eminence. — Pre-eminence  is  written  in  full,  as  in  the  engrp.v- 
ing,  and  thus  distinguished  from  prommence-y  and  permanence-y,  which  are  con- 
tracted. See  these  words  and  EMINENCE  iu  the  Dictionary. 

19  exaggerate  the. — Isaac  Pitman  gave  Kays-Jay-Ret  as  the  outline  of  tbis 
word.  See  this  Reader,  p.  143,  note  6. 

33  in  order  to  form. — See  this  Reader,  p.  22,  note  23. 

21  '76.— See  this  Reader,  p.  81,  note  5. 

22  American  colonies.— P.  1G9,  R.  12. 

-'•'•  and  the  first.— See  this  Reader,  p.  150,  "note  8. 
21  which  were.— See  this  Reader,  p.  70,  note  11. 
*5  pronounced  it  the.— 23G,  3. 

-6  above  all.— See  this  Reader,  p.  CO,  xiv.  The  principle  of  adding  all  and 
will  by  an  El-hook,  or  of  are,  were,  or  our  by  an  Ar-Ifook,  is,  of  course,  as  applica- 
ble within  a  word,  as  in  this  case,  as  in  those  words  to  which  an  El-hook  or  Ar- 
hook  is  prefixed,  as  Bel1,  by  all;  thus,  Bee2-Vel,  above  all ;  Schel2,  suck  will;  Bee2- 
Ycr,  above  our  ;  Scher2,  such.  are. 


1GO  SECOKD    STAXDARD-PHOXOGRAMTIC    READER. 

should  be  interpreted  in  the  light  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence.27 
But,  alas!  in  these  degenerate  days,  that  Constitution,  with  all  its 
pro-slavery  interpretations,  is  blindly  worshiped,  and  the  great  and 
heavenly  principles  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence  are  ridiculed 
as  "a  fanfaronade  of  nonsense,"  and  as  "glittering  generalities."  The 
Constitution,  instead  of  being  used  to  disparage  and  make  void  the 
Declaration  of  Independence,  should  rather  be  viewed  as  supplement- 
al to  it,  and  as  serving  to  carry  out  into*'  detail  the  broad  and  pre- 
cious principles  of  that  first  and  greatest  Constitution.  Our  fathers 
could  have  had23  no  possible  right  to  contravene  or  slight  those  prin- 
ciples. Had  they,  when  making  and  adopting  the30  Constitution, 
been  guilty  of  overlooking  or  in  any  wise  dishonoring  them,  they 
would  therein  have  been  guilty  of  the  most  infamous  treason 
toward  all  their  countrymen  who  had  expended  treasure  or  periled 
life  to  establish  them,  and  also  toward  the  good  Lafayette  and  the 
other  gallant  foreigners  whom  those  principles  had  attracted  to  our 
shores. 

I  spoke  of  the  principles  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence.  Prom- 
inent among  them  is  that  which  asserts  that  "all  men  arc  created 
equal."  This  principle  is  the  very  soul  of  the  Declaration  of  Inde- 
pendence ;  and  being  therefore  the  very  soul  of  the  Constitution,  it 
instantly  annihilates  all  possible  pro-slavery  interpretations  of  that 
instrument.  I  do  not  forget  that,  according  to  Chief  Justice  Taney's 
recent  discovery,  black  men  did  not  come  within  the  scope  of  this 
principle,  and  were  not  a  part  of  "all  men." 


36 


Nevertheless,  they  were  men,  and  they  voted  and  fought 
by  the  side  of  those  who  affirmed  that  ' '  all  men  are  cre- 
ated equal."  Why,  then,  does  the  Chief  Justice  exclude  them?  The 
words  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence  do  not  intimate  their  ex- 
clusion. What  rules  of  interpretation  are  there  to  authorize  him  to 
go  away  from  the  plain  meaning  of  these  plain  words  for  the  purpose1 

"'  Declaration  of  Independence.— This,  like  any  other  similar  phrase,  as 
soon  as  it  appears  likely  to  occur  often,  is  contracted  under  the  principle  of  237, 
R.  2. 

2S  carry  out  into. — See  this  Eeader,  p.  61,  xvi. 

-3  could  have  Had.— P.  Gl,  xvi.  of  thifi  Reader. 

30  when  making  and  adopting  the. — See  this  Reader,  p.  77,  note  4. 

Q/»     *  for  the  purpose. — This  phrase-sign,  thongh  properly  employed  in 

«JW     any  kind  of  reporting,  is  formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of 

special  contraction  (237,  R.  2,  I),  the  being  omitted,  under  the  principle  of  250,  3. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  1G1 

of  fastening  the  crudest  wrong  upon  the  black  man,  and  of  involving 
the  fathers  in  the  deepest  and  basest  and  most  hypocritical  injustice  ? 
There  are  none.2  In  gross  violation  of  the  rules  of  legal  interpreta- 
tion, at  the  expense  of  blackening  the  fame  of  the  fathers,  and  at  the 
expense  of  outraging  all  tho  rights  and  murdering  all  the  manhood  of 
his  equal  brothers,3  has  the  Chief  Justice  undertaken  to  show  that  our 
fathers,  when  speaking  of  "  all  men,"  did  not  mean  all  men.  And  all 
this  has  he  done,  notwithstanding  the  fathers  spoke  so  evidently  with 
philosophical  precision,  and  notwithstanding,  too,  that  they  spoke  with, 
religious  solemnity,4  and  called  God  to  witness  their5  sincerity.  But 
our  fathers  knew  as  well  as  we  do  that  all  parts  of  the  human  brother- 
hood are  equally  dear  to  the  great  heart  of  their  common  Maker. 
Were  they,  then,  such  brazen-faced  hypocrites  as  to  dare  appeal  to  His 
knowledge  of  their  conscious  rectitude,  when  all  the  while  they  were 
guilty  of  the  mental  reservation  which  the  Chief  Justice  imputes  to 
them  ? — guilty  of  deliberately  excluding  a  portion  of  their  fellow-men 
from  the  equal  rights  of  all  men?— nay,  guilty  of  denying  that  God 
has  sent  •  that  portion  into  the  world  with  rights7  equal  to  those  of 
other  men  ? 

The  Chief  Justice  admits  thats  "All  men  "  "  would  seem  to  embrace 

2  there  are  none. — Are,  in  phrase-writing,  is  frequently  expressed  by  Ray  ; 
but  when  written  alone,  and  generally  when  commencing  phrase-signs,  the  most 
convenient  sign  is  Ar.    It  is  the  most  convenient  also  because  of  allowing  short- 
ening for  the  derivative  sign-word  art,  and  lengthening  for  tho  addition  of  dKr. 
See  DHB  in  the  Dictionary.     It  would  not  be  allowable  to  shorten  Ray  when  alone 
for  art;  and  it  allowable,  tho  sign  wonld  not  be  suggestive.     Tn  Standard  Pho- 
nography it  would  be  allowable  to  lengthen  Ray  for  ace  thr,  but  Raydber,  though 
allowably  used  after  another  word  for  these  words,  would  not,  when  aloue,  be  so 
suggestive  as   Ar-dher,  nor  so  convenient  for  joining  with  a  following  word. 
Therefore,  tbe  general  use  of  Ray  for  are,  when  standing  alone,  cannot  be  ap- 
proved.    27,  R.  2,  6. 

3  equal  brothers.— 246,  1. 

4  solemnity. — See  this  Reader,  p.  135,  note  G. 

5  to  witness  their. — See  this  Reader,  p.  CO,  xiii. 
«  God  has  sent — 2-11,  R.  a  (1). 

i  with  rights. —  With  as  well  as  we  may  be  joined  to  Em,  En,  Ray,  Lay,  by 
the  Way-hook,  as  in  this  case.  P.  168,  R.  3. 

s  admits  that. — Tho  rule  of  27,  4,  of  turning  the  circle  between  two  strokes 
in  tho  most  convenient  manner,  is  complied  with  in  this  caso  by  writing  it  as  in 
the  engraving — though  it  might  be  nearly  as  easy  to  write  tb.e  circle  on  the  back 
of  Dhct ;  which  method  some  writers  may  prefer. 


162  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

the1  whole  human  family."10  "  Seems,  madam !  Nay,  it  is."  He 
also  admits  that  the  words  "  would  be  so  understood  if  used  in  a  simi- 
lar" instrument  at  this  day."  Important  admission  !  Entirely  fatal, 
as  we  shall  see,  to  his  attempt  to  pervert  their  significance !  For  that 
the  statesmen  of  this  day  have  a  broader,  juster,  and  more  fraternal 
sense  of  human  rights  than  had  the12  statesmen  of  that  day,  is  a  deep 
delusion.  All  false  is  it  that  the  statesmen  of  that  day  were  so  bigot- 
ed as  to  forget,  and  that  the  statesmen  of  this  day  are  so  catholic  as  to 
remember,  that  Africans  are  men. 

Who  was  the  first  President  of  the  United  States  ?  An  open  Aboli- 
tionist. For  Washington  not  only  emancipated  his  own  slaves,  but 
confessed  his13  anxiety  to  vote  for  the  emancipation  of  other  men's 
slaves. 

Who  was  the  most  intellectual  among  the  great  men  of  the  Revo- 
lution ?  This  honor  would  probably  be  accorded  to  Alexander  Ham- 
ilton, who  said  :  "The  sacred  rights  of  mankind  are  not  to  be  rum- 
maged for  among  old  parchments  or  musty  records.  They  are  written 
as  with  au  sunbeam  in  the  whole  volume15  of  nature,  by  the  hand 
of  the  Divinity  itself,  and  can  never  be  erased  or  obscured  by 
mortal  power.  All  men  are  by  nature  entitled  to  equal  privileges. 
Natural  liberty  is  the  gift  of  the  beneficent  Creator16  to  the  whole 
human  race." 

Who  was  the  pre-eminently  practical  and  common-sense17  man  of 
the  Revolution?  Perhaps  Benjamin  Franklin. l8  Nevertheless,  scarcely 

9  would  seem  to  embrace  the.— See  this  Reader,  p.  76,  note  13. 

10  human  family.— P.  169,  R.  12,  6. 
"  in  a  similar.— P.  168,  R.  10,  a. 

i-  than  had  the.— See  this  Reader,  p.  61,  xvi. 

»  confessed  his.— 244,  R.  3  (4). 

n  as  with  a.— 245. 

ls  whole  volume. — 1  04. 

ic  beneficent  Creator. — See  BENEFICENT  in  the  Standard-Phonographic 
Dictionary. 

17  and  common-sense. — Though  in  most  cases  of  joining  TetoiiU  for  either 
or  or  and.  the  context  would  make  the  necessary  distinction,  yet,  for  distinction's 
sake,  it  is  well  not  to  join  or  to  a  following  stroke,  when  and  would  necessarily  be 
joined  in  the  same  way.  Or  can  be  safely  joined,  of  course,  in  all  cases  whero 
and  might  be  joined  by  Ketoid. 

''  Kenjamin  Franklin. — Franklin  is  contracted  to  Fcr-Klen,  in  accordance 
with  a  general  principle  (236,  4)  ;  but  Benjamin  is  represented  by  Bee,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  principle  of  special  contraction  (237,  P  2).  Of  course,  such  a  con- 
traction for  such  a  familiar  name  may  be  used  in  any  kind  of  reporting. 


1CEV   TO    THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  163 

was  the  Constitution,  of  which  he  himself  was  a,  framcr,  adopted,  ere, 
as  President  of  the  Pennsylvania  Abolition  Society,  he  petitioned19 
Congress  to  abolish  slavery.  His  petition  said  that  the  power  of  Con- 
gress should  be  exercised  impartially  in  behalf  of  "all  descriptions  of 
people,  without  distinction  of  color. " 

Who  was  the  first  Chief  Justice  of  the  United  States?  John  Jay, 
the  President  of  the  New- York  Abolition  Society — the  man  who  said  : 
' '  Till  America  comes  into  this  measure  (the  abolition  of  slavery) ,  her 
prayers  to  heaven  will  be  impious."50  Moreover,  it  was  he  who  said 
that  one  reason  why  the  word  ' '  slaves ' '  was  not  put  into  the  Con- 
stitution was,  thatei  slavery  is  ' '  repugnant ' '  to  that  part  of  the  Declar- 
ation of  Independence  which  says,  "All  men  are  created  equal."  In 
other  words,  John  Jay  said  that  "all  men,"  in  that  instrument,  in- 
cludes Africans.  Roger  B.  Taney  says  it  does  not.22  "Which  is  the 
better  authority? 

Chief  Justice  Taney  has  four  reasons  for  his  conclusion  that,  in  the 
days  of  the  Revolution,  "all  men"  did  not  mean  all  men.  1st.  The 
Constitution  is  for  slavery.-3 


37 


But,  as  we  have  seen,1  it  is  full  of  powers  for  killing,  and 
has  none  for  saving,  slavery.  It  is  ashamed  to  mention 
the  hateful2  word.  His  three  other  reasons  are :  1st.  The  whites  of 
that  period  u-ould  not  intermarry  icith  the  blacks.  2d.  Nor  consent  to  serve 
with  them  i?i  the  militia.  3d.  Nor  consent  to  the  naturalization  of  alien  blacks. 
But  will  the  whites  of  this  period  ?  Oh  no — no  more  than  the  whites 
of  that.  Poor  Chief  Justice !  Greatly  do  you  need  to  improve  your 
logic!  1st.  You  admit  that,3  in  our  day,  "all  men"  includes  Afri- 
cans. 2d.  Yoxi  admit  it  because  of  our  greater  respect  for  their  rights. 

13  he    petitioned. — See  Standard -Phonographic  Dictionary  under  ANCIENT. 

20  impious. — Tliis  word  is  vocalized  with  yii  for  i-u,  to  distinguish  it  from 
Empsi,  impossible.  Both  words  being  of  the  same  purt  of  speech,  one  would,  be 
liable  to  be  read  for  the  other,  if  written  alike. 

21 -was  that. — 217.  It  should  bo  observed  that  the  joined  ends  of  Zee  and 
Dhct  are  not  tapered.  To  taper  them  would  lose  the  advantage  of  joining. 

-2  it  does  not.- 23,  244,  R.  3  (1). 

"  Constitution  is  for  slavery — 244,  R.  3  (1)  and  (5), 

jj~    !  as  we  have  seen.— 245. 

2  hateful.— P.  119,  R.  8. 
3  you  admit  that. — P.  CO,  xi.  of  this  Reader. 


164  SECOND   ST.OttURD-PHOSOGRAPinC    READER. 

But  this  respect  is,  in  fact,  immeasurably  less  than  it  was4  in  the  Rev- 
olution ;  and  hence,  in  the  Revolution,  far  more  emphatically  than  it 
does  now,  did  ' '  all  men ' '  include  Africans. 

What,  however,  have  these  prejudices,  or,  indeed,  any  other  of  the 
prejudices  of  the  whites  against  the  blacks,  to  do  with  the  question  of 
citizenship?  The  mutual  prejudices  of  Catholics  and  Protestants  are 
strong.  Nevertheless  they  let  each  other  vote  and  be  citizens.  80, 
too,  the  whites,  notwithstanding  their  prejudices  against  the  blacks, 
let  them  vote  and  be  citizens.  This  is  true  now.  More  emphatically 
true  was  it  in  the  times  of  the  Revolution.  The  articles  of  Confedera- 
tion betrayed  this  prejudice  in  the  use  of  the  word  "white."  Never- 
theless they  accorded  citizenship  to  the  blacks — South  Carolina  and 
Georgia  alone  voting  against  it.5  How  absurd  to  doubt  that  it  is  ac- 
corded0 in  the  Constitution,  which  contains  not  the  word  "  white  !  " 

But  I  must  hasten  to  the  end  of  my  words.  I  said  that  I  came  here 
to  beseech  you  to  know  no  law  for  slavery,  but  to  trample  under  foot 
whatever  claims  to  be  a  law  for  slavery.  I  honor  your  intelligent 
Judiciary  for  declaring  the  Fugitive  Slave  Act  unconstitutional.  I 
honor  Wisconsin  for  standing  bravely  by  her  brave  Judiciary.  A  good 
and  glorious  example  is  all  this.  But  I  am  here  to  call  on  you  for  a 
still  better  and  more  glorious  example.  Wisconsin — both  her  people 
and  her  judges — must  know  no  law,  nor  admit  the  possibility  of  any 
law,  for  slavery.  A  statute  may  be  in  favor  of  slavery  ;  a  constitution 
— even  the  idolized  Federal  Constitution — may  be  in  favor  of  slavery  ; 
but  the  voice  of  all  Wisconsin  must  be,  that  slavery  is  too  repugnant 
to  justice  and  humanity,  to  reason  and  religion,  to  be  capable  of  wear- 
ing any,  even  the  least,  semblance  of  law. 

A  blessed  result  of  your  disowning  the  lawfulness  of  slavery  will  be 
releasing  your  conscience  from  all  obligation  to  re-plunge  into  the  hell 
of  slavery  your  poor  brothers  and  sisters,  who  have  come  up  out  of  it 
with  their  scarred  bodies,  and,  by  the  help  of  the  friendly  North  star,7 
worked  their  danger-crowded  way  as  far  as  your  borders.  Wherever 

1  less  than  it  wits. — The  direction  of  even  •word-signs  whoso  stroke  is  El  or 
Lay  is  sonietinn  *  changed  for  convenience  of  phrase-writing,  as  Layshon  in 
changed  to  Elshon  in  the  very  next  phrase.  It  is  added  to  than  by  l\alvin;_'.  8 'e 
p.  01,  xvi.  of  this  Reader.  See  LESS  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

5  against    it. — See  phrases  beginning  with.  AGAINST  in  the  Standard-Phono- 
graphic Dictionary. 

6  that    it    is    accorded. — Kred  for  accorded  is  here  vocalized  with  a  for  the 
Bake  of  greater  legibility. 

7  North  star — In  this  special  contraction,  Aort/i  is  expressed  by  Xcr,  and  the 
consonants  of  star  by  the  Stcr-loop. 


KEY   TO   THE  REPORTING  EXERCISES.  1G5 

the  conscience  is  so  perverted  as  to  admit  this  obligation,  alas!  how 
baleful  must  be  its  influence  upon  the  whole  character !  How  such  a 
conscious  obligation  must  shackle  all  manly  freedom  !  How  it  must 
debase  and  sink  the  nature  that  has  fallen  under  it!  So  long  as  this 
soul-shriveling  obligation  remains  in  the  public  conscience  of  Wiscon- 
sin, so  long  the  religion  of  Wisconsin  cannot  be  the  generous  and  en- 
nobling religion  of  Jesus  Christ ;  cannot  be  characterized  by  the  bold- 
ness, honesty,  and  impartial  love  of  the  true  religion.  Young  as  your 
State  is,  you  nevertheless  have  a  University  at  your  seat  of  govern- 
ment, well  endowed,  prosperous,  and  with  a  ripe  scholar  at  its  head. 
It  was  my  good  fortune  to  spend  a  day  with  him  during  the  past  week. 
I  know  the  great  worth  of  this  cherished  friend  of  my  youth  and  man- 
hood. But  I  also  know  that  if  the  Fugitive  Slave  Act,  or  any  pro- 
slavery  interpretations  of  duty,  shall  be  allowed  to  continue  to  exert 
their  withering  influence  upon  the  moral  sense  and  public  sentiment 
of  your  State,  this  Institution,  notwithstanding  its  great  advantages, 
cannot  fail  to  suffer  immensely 

in  common  with  all  your  educational  and  religious  inter- 
ests ;  ay,  and  with  your  material  interests  also.  The 
highest  culture  of  the  understanding  cannot  be  reached  where  the 
people  receive  the  behests  of  slavery  as  law.  Wisconsin  manhood  can 
never  realize  the  beau  ideal  of  manhood  until  it  shall  have  been  aroused 
to  throw  off  from  its  conscience,  indignantly  and  forever,  all  obliga- 
tion to  do  what  is  mean  and  cruel  and  wicked.  And  when,  I  ask,  is  a 
man  doing  what  is  mean  and  cruel  and  wicked,  if  it  is  not  when  he 
permits  himself  to  be  transformed  into  a  bloodhound,1  to  bay  upon 
the  track  of  innocent  human  prey  ? 

Among  the  most  valuable  results  of  your  ignoring  all  law  for  slavery 
will  be  the  preparation  of  your  way  to  grow  in  the  knowledge  of  true 
law — a  knowledge  inferior  to  no  other  in  its  happy  influence  upon  the 
character.  To  whatever  extent  you  are  now  guilty  of  recognizing  in 
slavery  the  name  and  obligations  of  law,  and  of  thus  according  to  the 
very  worst  thing  the  name  and  obligations  due  to  the  very  best,  to 
that  extent  do  you  now  trifle  with,  and  twist,  and  blunt  your  moral 
nature.  But  when  you  shall  have  come  to  identify  law  with  right, 
nnd  to  acknowledge  nothing  to  be  law  which  is  not  right— though  I 
readily  admit  that  there  are  many  violations  of  right,  and  therefore 
many  illegalities,2  which  it  is  better  to  bear  with  than  resist — then 

~  _     i  bloodhound.— 25. 

2  aiegralities.— See  this  Reader,  p.  135,  note  6. 


1GG  SECOND  STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

you  will  have  entered  a  law-school3  in  which  wisdom  and  goodnec? 
grow  as  constantly  as  do  folly  and  wickedness  outside  of  it  ;4  a  law- 
school  in  which,  under  the  teachings  of  true  law,  the  mind  expands  as 
rapidly  as  it  becomes  dwarfed  when  under  the  influence  of  those  con- 
ventional legalities  which  lack  all  the  great  elements  and  all  the  soul 
of  true  law. 

I  have  done.  I  came  here,  as  I  have  repeatedly  told  you,  to  ask 
you  to  know  no  law  for  slavery.  There  is  no  remedy  for  slavery  hut 
to  deny  its  legality.  Do  what  you  will  against  slavery,  you  will  only 
be  helping  it,  so  long  as  you  acknowledge  it  to  be  law.  In  vain  will  a 
man  talk,  and  pray,  and  labor  for  the  prevention  of  forgery,  perjury, 
theft,  and  murder,  if  nevertheless  he  admits  in  their  behalf  the  plea 
that  they  are  sacred,  obligatory  law.  Once,  however,  declare  it  an 
outlaw,  and  make  your  declaration  sincere  and  effective  by  refusing  to 
vote  for  any  man  who  recognizes  its  legality,  and  then  slavery  will 
have  nothing  to  do  but  to  die. 

The  abolition  of  all  American  slavery  !5  How  joyful6  the  anticipa- 
tion of  an  event  which  shall  terminate  wrongs  so  sad,  miseries  so  un- 
utterable !  Thrice  blessed,  then,  the  slave,  whose  weary  bondage 
will  at  last  be  ended !  Even  still  more  blessed  the  liberation  of  the 
slaveholder ;  for,  the  sorrows  in  which  slavery  binds  the7  slave  are  as 
nothing  compared  with  the  sins  in  which  slavery  binds  the  slave- 
holder! Thrice  blessed,  then,  our  nation,  when  delivered  from  its 
great  curse  and  peril !  Thrice  blessed,  then,  and  no  longer  thrice 
cursed,  its  influence  upon  the  other8  nations  of  the  earth!  Safe, 
then,  the  Union  purchased  with  precious  blood !  Indivisible,  then, 
our  beloved  country,  when  slavery  shall  be  blotted  out,  and  when  all 
the  great  beneficial9  interests,  no  longer  hindered  by  that  one  terri- 
ble,10 destructive,  and  disuniting  interest,  shall  be  left  free  to  work 
harmoniously  and  mightily  in  binding  North,  and  South,  and 
East,  and  West  in  a  peaceful  and  loving  fellowship,  never  more  to  be 
broken ! 

3  a  law-school. — In  many  compound  words,  the  elements  of  which  it  is  de- 
sirable shall  be  united  in  their  forms  as  they  arc  joined  by  the  voice,  the  form  of 
one  or  the  other  of  the  elements  is  changed  BO  as  to  admit  of  their  being  joined, 
as  in  this  word,  law-school ;  in  writing  which,  school  is  changed  from  ita  usual 
outline  (Skel),  which  would  not  join  with  Lay  (law). 

*  outside  of  it.— It  is  here  added  by  halving,  of  being  implied.    250,  3. 

5  of  all  American  slavery. — American  tlavery,  in  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciple of  special  contraction,  is  represented  here  by  Em  for  American  and  Slay  for 
tlavery. 

"joyful.— P.  110,  K.  8. 

•  bintfs  the.— 1ST,  11.  1. 

8  upon    the   other. — 264,  R,  4.     See  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary, 
tinder  DHB. 

9  beneficial. — See  this  word  in  the  Dictionary. 

10  terrible.— See  this  Reader,  p.  101,  note  5. 


KEY   TO    THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  167 

LAW    REPORTING.1 

ME.    EDWARD    SMITH    SWORN. 
Direct  Examination. 


OQ      Q-2  What  is  your  occupation  ?3 


A.2  Civil  surveyor ;  have  been  so  since  1831. * 

Q.  In  this  city  ?5 
A.  Tcs,  sir.G 

OQ     l  I-aw  Reporting. — See  an  article  on  the  subject  of  "  Phonography  in 
«Ji/    Law  Courts,''  in  Odds  and  Ends,  p.  181. 

"  Q  and  A. — It  is  best  to  begin  every  question  with  the  letter  Q,  written 
small,  as  in  the  engraving,  for  the  sake  of  speed.  Close  at  the  end  of  the  question 
•write  a — for  the  double  purpose  of  denoting  the  termination  of  the  question  (i.e., 
as  a  period)  and  the  beginning  of  tho  Answer.  A  small  q  at  the  end  of  the  Answer 
has  a  corresponding  use.  There  is  thus  saved  the  necessity  and  the  loss  of  time 
of  making  a  period,  or  of  commencing  a  new  paragraph  with  every  question  and 
answer. 

(6)  In  transcribing  testimony,  place  Q.  and  A.  just  at  the  loft  of  a  lino  (either 
ruled,  as  in  "  legal  cap,"  or  iormed  by  folding  tho  paper,  as  lawyers  sometimes 
do)  about  one  inch  from  the  left-hand  side  of  the  page,  or  perhaps  a  little  more 
in  case  tlie  manuscript  is  to  be  stitched  or  bound  at  the  side.  This  margin  should 
be  considerable,  so  as  to  allow  of  annotations  at  the  side.  However,  in  case  of  tho 
report  being  bound  (as  other  books  usually  are)  at  the  side,  room  in  the  margin 
need  not  be  left  for  annotations  ;  for,  they  can  then  be  placed  on  the  opposite 
page,  which  should  be  blank. 

(c)  Ease  of  reference  to  testimony  is  favored  by  leaving  an  extra  Hank  line  be- 
tween an  Answer  and  the  following  Question. 

(d)  The  letter  Q  is  to  be  placed  before  every  sentence  to  which  the  witness  ro- 
sponds  as  to  a  question  ;  i.e.,  before  every  real  question,  even  though  it  should 
not  have  tho  form  of  one. 

(e)  In  transcription,  it  is  unnecessary  to  write  the  interrogation  point  (?),  for  it 
would  be  superfluous,  the  sign  of  a  question  (Q)  having  already  been  written  at 
the  beginning. 

3  What  is  your  occupation. — Tho  word  your  is  omitted  here,  undei  the 
principle  of  250,  3,  in  order  to  secure  the  advantage  of  a  phrase-sign.  See  this 
Reader,  p.  75,  note  10. 

*  1831. — Soo  this  Reader,  p.  83,  note  2.  In  law-reporting  there  is  no  need  of 
placing  an  apostrophe  or  stroke  bel'oro  tho  last  figures  of  dates. 

6  in  this  city — The  circle  of  Dhees  might  have  been  enlarged  to  express  the 
first  sound  of  city  ;  but  one  *  may  bo  omitted  safely,  and  with  an  advantage  as  to 
speed,  in  accordance  with  p.  1C4,  R.  8. 

6  Tes,  sir. — This  very  valuable  word-sign,  especially  for  the  reporting  of  tes- 
timony, was  first  presented  by  tho  Hand-Book. 


168  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Q.  Have  you  made  a  map  showing  where  a  line  forty-eight  feet 

west  of  the  westerly  line  of  West-street7  will  come  ? 
A.  I  have. 

Q.  Is  that  it? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

The  diagram  here  shown  to  the  witness  was  marked  "Exhibit 
No.  4. "* 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Smith  make  this  ? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Cross  Exami?iation.s 

Q.  At  whose  request  did  you  make  the  map  in  question? 
A.  At  the  request  of  the  plaintiffs  in  the  suit. 10 

Q.  What  data  did  you  make  your  estimates  upon? 

A.  There  is  no"  estimate  made  about  the  map  ;  it  is  a  simple  sur- 
vey showing  where  a  line  forty-eight  feet  west  of  the  westerly 
line  of  West-street  would  cross  these  premises — what  portion 
would  be  taken  in  ;  showing  an  absolute  fact.  I  can  go  on  and 
describe  the  process  if  that  is  what  is  wanted. 

~  West-street. — The  t  of  TFcst  is  omitted,  in  accordance  with  23C,  3  ;  and 
then  one  of  the  Es-souuds  is  omitted  under  the  license  of  p.  194,  R.  8. 

8  Kxhibit    No.  4. — It  is  well  for  the  reporter  of  testimony  to  insert  in  the 
margin  of  bis  notes  the  number  of  the  Exhibits,  as  in  the  engraving,  so  that  he 
can  readily  refer  to  the  testimony  concerning  them  ;  and  also  in  the  margin  of 
the  transcript,  for  the  ready  reference  to  them  by  the  lawyers,  or  other  persons 
making  use  of  the  report. 

9  Cross-Examination. — It  i8  well,  if  there  is  sufficient  time,  to  write  "C.  E." 
for  Cross-Examination,  as  iu  the  engraving,  at  the  beginning  of  the  notes  of  the 
cross-examination.     But  if  there  is  iiot  time,  go  on,  even  without  any  break,  sim- 
ply writing  "  xq  "before  the  first  cross-question;    as  "  Rdq  "  is  written  before 
the  first  question  on  the  Re-direct  Examination,  and  "  Ilxq"  before  the  first  ques- 
tion on  the  Rf.-cross  Examination.     (V)  Before  every  question  by  the  Court,  write 
"qc ; "  and  "  qj"  before  every  question  by  a  Juror. 

10  plaintiffs  in  tlie  suit.— 187,  K.  1. 

11  there  is  no,  etc. — The  distinct  affirmations  of  a  witness,  which  iu  ordin- 
ary matter  would  be  regarded  as  separate  sentences,  are  usually  iu  reports  of 
testimony  separated  by  semicolons  (;)  instead  of  periods ;  though,  if  these  sen- 
tences were  quite  independent,  I  should  conform  to  the  ordinary  rules  of  punc- 
tuation, and  separate  them  by  periods.     It  is  advisable  to  punctuate  quite  freely 
iu  taking  the  words  of  a  witness,  because  there  is  more  difficulty  frequently  than 
most  other  kinds  of  reporting  in  determining  the  correct  punctuation  ;  upon 
which,  perhaps,  iu  testimony  very  much  may  depend. 


KEY    TO    THE   EEPOETTNO    HXERCISES.  169 

Q.  Are  there  any  estimates  of  distances  m  the  map? 
A.  There  are  measurements  in  the  map. 

Q.  Upon  what  data  did  you  make  your  measurements? 

A.  On  the  known  fact  that  West-street  is  seventy  feet  wide  at  right 
angles ;  and  I  was  instructed  to  ascertain  where  a  line  forty- 
eight  feet  from  the  westerly  side  of  West-street  would  intercept 
these  stalls  as  they  are  called. 

Q.  And  that  is  the  line  in  red? 

A.  One  red  line  shows  the  westerly  line  of  West-street ;  the  other, 
the  forty-eight  feet, 

Q.  And  the  first  red  line  looking  westerly  chows  the  westerly  lino 

of  West-street  as  it  is  at  present  ? 
A.  Yes,  Bir. 

Q.  And  the  other  red  line  parallel  with  it  shows  where  forty-eight 

feet  west  of  thc~wcsterly  line  of  West-street  would  come  ? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

He-direct  Examination. 

Q.  Did  you  at  any  time  make  a  map  showing  the  amount  of  surface 

filled  in  between  Yesey  and  Dcy  ctrccts,  west  of  West-street  ? 
A.  I  did. 

Q.  Have  you  that  map? 
A.  I  have  it  here. 

The  map  was  here  marked  by  the  Referee  "Exhibit  ITo.  5." 
Q.  This  is  the  westerly  line  of  West-street  ? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  From  what  was  that  line  established  ? 
A.  As  by  the  law  of  1798. '* 

Q.  The  premises  in  the  suit  on  that  map  arc  shown  in  blue  lines  ? 
A.  They  are  shown  by  a  pink-shade  round  them. 
Q.  Does  this  pink-shado  exclude  the  piers  and  include  the  forty- 
eight  feet  ? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Sinco  when  have  these  premises  been  filled  in  ? 
Objected  to13  as  assuming  a  fact  not  proved. 

!2  1798. — This  date  not  belonging  to  the  present  century,  had  to  be  written 
in  full.  Seo  this  Reader,  p.  83,  note  2. 

ls  Objected  to. — I  usually  •write  Obj,  as  in  the  engraving,  for  Objected  to  ;  1, 
because  I  can  then  more  readily  refer  to  tho  Objections  ;  2,  because  it  saves  mak- 
ing a  period,  or  commencing  a  new  paragraph. 


270  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    EEADEE. 

Q.  Arc  those  premises  filled  in  ? 

A.  They  are. 

Q.  Since  when  were  they  filled  in? 

A.  Since  1829  ;  they  have  all  been  filled  in  since  1829. 

Q.  Were  you  at  any  time  employed  by  any  of  the  city  authorities 

to  survey  the  ground  then  filled  in  and  make  a  map  of  it  ? 
A.  I  was,  sir — a  portion  of  it. 
Q.  When? 
A.  In  1849. 
Q.  By  whom? 
A.  By  the  Street  Commissioner,  at  the  request  of  the  Chairman  of 

the  Market  Committee. 
Q.  What  was  the  object  of  that  survey? 
Objected  to. 

Mr..  E -11  I  want  to  show  that  the  ground  was  occupied  as  far 

back  as  five  years  prior  to  our  lease ;  that  is,  as  far  back  as  1853. 
Ma.  B —  — .  Xo  matter  what  the  answer  to   that  may  be,  it  won't 
show  that. 

Objection  sustained,  because  the  inquiry  went  to  the  motive 
of  the  party  having  the 

J  A  curvey  made. 

Tt U      Q.  Did  vou  make  a  map  of  yorrr  survey  ? 
A.  I  did. 

Q.  Is  it  here? 
A.  No,  sir.' 

i*  E .  Tliis  is  the  initial  of  the  name  of  one  of  the  lawyers  employed  in 

this  case.  The  initial,  or  (perhaps  for  distinction's  sake,  when  two  or  more 
names  begin  with  the  same  letter)  two  letters,  is  all  that  is  necessary  to  write  in- 
stead of  the  lawyer's  name.  These  letters  might  be  inclosed  by  a  curved  line,  as 
suggested  in  this  Reader,  p.  139,  n.  19,  6;  but  this  may  usually  be  saved  in  law- 
reporting,  without  causing  confusion  or  doubt,  especially  when  the  long  period 
is  placed,  as  is  the  case  in  the  engraving,  before  the  initial  letter  or  letters,  '  (6) 
When  a  lawyer's  name  is  written  at  the  commencement  of  his  remarks,  especial- 
ly ia  a  body  of  testimony,  the  transcriber  should  commence  it  a  little  to  the  left 
of  the  left-hand  line  of  writing,  as  in  this  Key.  It  should  be  underlined  with 
two  strokes  of  the  pen.  And  upon  the  neatness  of  doing  this,  and  other  little 
things  of  the  kind  very  much  of  the  good  appearance  of  a  manuscript-report  will 
depend  ;  and  hence  ilpays  to  do  them  well — neatly. 


i  A,   No,  sir. — The  JVb,  tir  may  be  joined  to  A.  advantageously,  as 

shown  ia  tlie  engraving!  tbc  En  being  joined  to  the  A  without  an 
angle. 


40 


TO  lius  KKPoKTina  rxiatoidiis.  171 


Q.  A  copy  of  it  I1 
A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  What  did  you  do  with  that  map  ? 

A.  It  was  taken  to  the  Committee3  and  left  with  them  ;  that  is  the 
last  I  have  seen  of  it. 

Q.  Were  you  employed  in  1850  by  any  person  connected  with  the4 

city  authorities  to  take  soundings  near  these  premises? 
A.  I  was. 

Q.  Did  you  make  soundings? 
A.  I  did. 

Q.  Did  you  draw  a  plan  ? 
A.  I  did. 

Q.  Plan  of  what  ? 

A.  Plan  of  filling  the  outer  bulkhead. 

Q.  What  did  you  do  with  that  plan  ? 

A.  I  left  it  with  the  Street  Commissioner. 

Q.  When  was  that? 

A.  In  1851,  I  think  ;  late  in  the  spring  of  1851. 

Q.  On  that  plan  was  there  any  designation  of  the  outer  bulkhead 

as  it  is  now  ? 
A.  No,  sir,  not  as  it  is  at  present. 

Q.  When  was  the  present  bulkhead  first,  begun  ? 

A.  I  think  it  was  along  in  the  early  part  of  the  fall  of  1851  ;  I 
speak  from  memory  alone  ;  I  may  not  be  strictly  correct  as  to 
the  date  ;  it  was  in  1851  ;  I  think  the  early  part  of  the  fall. 

Q.  When  was  it  finished  ? 
A.  In  1853. 

Q.  During  that  time  was  there  any  filling  in  cf  the  intermediate 
space  ? 

J  copy  of  It.  —  TV'rite  Kay-Pee-Yet,  or  (as  illustrated  in  tho  engraving)  add  of 
by  the  Vee-hook,  and  shorten  the  stroke  to  add  it, 

3  to   the    committee.  —  Write  Tee4  (iltee)  with  the  comm-dot  above  the  line 
over  the  Tee,  if  deemed  necessary.    The  better  way  is  that  illustrated  in  tho  en- 
graving —  namely,  by  Petoid*  (=to  the)  and  Tee  under=  committee. 

4  connected    with    the.  —  It  is  unnecessary  to  •write  or  imply  the  conn,  for 
Ket2  (ekt)  is  made  legible  by  the  following  with.    Observe  that  the  similar  form, 
Ketoid-Weh',   and  -were,  has  the  Ketoid  above  the  line,  and  Weh  ON  the  line  ; 
whereas  in  ccnnecttd  with  the  KET  is  oa  the  line,  and  with,  is  joined,  running 
tbrcugh,  or  below,  tho  line. 


172  KECOXI)    STANDAHD-PHOXOGKAPHIC    HEADER. 

A.  It  was  going  on  nil  the  time. 

Cross-Examination  Resumed. 

Q.  Bid  not  the  bulkhead  give  way,8  so  as  to  render  useless  the  land 

ia  front  within  the  pink-shade  upon  Exhibit  No.  5  ? 
A.  Not  that  I  am  aware  of. 
Q.  Ciiice  1353,  and  about  the  time  of  its  completion  in  1853,  as  you 

have  stated,  were  you  in  the  habit  of  being  upon  or  adjacent  to 

these  premises  ? 

A.  I  have  baen  there5  occasionally,  but  for  no  particiilar  purpose. 
Q.  Which  of  the  city  authorities  employed  you  to  make  soundings, 

as  you  have  stated  ? 
A.  The  Street  Commissioner. 
Q.  What  was  his  name  ? 
A.  Mr.  Dodge.* 


CHARGE    TO   THE  JURY. 

\Charge  of  His  Honor,  Judge  Nelson,  in  the  case  of  Alexander  Smith,  d  al, 
versus  Alvin  Higgins,  et  al.  In  the  United  States  Circuit  Court  for  the 
Southern  District  of  New  York.~\ 

GENTLEMEN  OF  THE  JURY  :s  The  patent9  in  this  case  was  originally 
granted  to  Alexander  Smith  on  the  18th  of  June,  1850.  On  the  10th 
of  December  of  the  same  year,  an  undivided  half  of  the  patent  was 
assigned  to  Jonathan  Smith.10  The  suit  is  in  the  name  of  the  two." 

5  give  \<ray. — As  in  this  phrase  it  -would  be  inconvenient  to  join  "Way  to  give, 
join  the  brief  wa.    See  WAT  iu  the  Dictionary. 

6  I   have   been   there. — Here  the  En-hook  of  been  is  omitted  BO  that  the 
•writer  may  have  the  great  advantage  of  lengthening  Bee  to  add  there. 

'  Dodge. — It  is  usually  unnecessary  to  insert  in  the  notes  the  word  Mister 
(see  Webster).  If  it  should  be  inserted  in  the  transcript  even  when  not  spoken, 
it  could  do  no  harm.  At  any  rate,  the  memory  may  bo  relied  upon  iii  such  a  triv- 
ial matter  as  that. 

8  Gentlemen  of  the  Jury.— P.  ICO,  E.  12,  6. 

9  patent.— The  use  of  Poo3  as  a  word-sign  for  patent  originated  with  the  au- 
thor.   Its  value  will  be  seen  in  the  engraving  of  this  charge. 

i»  to  Jonathan  Smith. — Jay  is  here  written  for  Jonathan,  under  the  princi- 
ple of  special  contraction  (237,  R.  2).  When  it  first  occurred  in  reporting  the  case 
(of  which  this  charge,  of  course,  was  but  a  email  part),  it  was  written  in  full — 
Jay-En-Then.  See  this  Reader,  p.  122,  note  6  ;  p.  136,  note  14. 

11  of  the  two.— See  this  Reader,  p.  79,  note  3. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  173 

The  patent  was  surrendered  and  re-issued  with  an  amended  specifica- 
tion on  the  llth  of  May,  1852.  The  suit  is  founded  upon  this  re-is- 
sued patent  and  amended  specification. 

The  first  question  to  be  considered  by  the  Court  and  Jury12  is,  what 
is  the  invention  of  the  plaintiff?  This  we  must  ascertain  and  settle  in 
order  to  be  able  to  determine  whether  or  not  it  has  been  appropriated 
or  infringed  by  the  defendant. 13 

The  invention  is  described14  by  the  patentee  as  a  new  and  useful 
apparatus  for  parti-coloring  yarn. 15 

It  is  therefore  a  patent  for  machinery — for  the  means  to  be  used  in 
this  work.  The  patentee  then  refers  to  the  modes  of  parti-coloring  in 
use  at  the  time  he  made  his  invention ;  the  first  being  by  printing,  and 
the  second  by  dipping  the  skeins  into  a  dye- vat,  the  part  not  to  be 

12  by  the  Court  and  Jury. — 250,  3.  The  words  Court  and  Jury,  in  law-re- 
porting, are  usually  commenced  with  a  capital  letter. 

is  by  the  defendant.— The  use  of  Dee2  for  defendant  and  Def2  for  defense, 
originated  with  the  author.  I  mention  this  fact  here,  as  in  many  other  cases  I 
have  mentioned  the  fact  of  having  devised  word-signs  and  contractions  and  in- 
troduced valuable  principles,  in  order  that  history  may  not  be  falsified  or  con- 
cealed by  those  who  for  any  reason  would  obscure  or  deny  my  improvements  of 
the  art,  or  underrate  their  value.  But  it  must  not  be  supposed  that  I  have  men- 
tioned a  tithe  of  the  instances  of  my  improvements.  They  are  too  frequent  to 
permit  that.  Take  this  line  for  instance.  Ken2  is  a  new  word-sign  for  question  ; 
the  phrase-sign  for  by  the  Court  and  Jury  would  not  have  been  found  in  the  Old 
Phonography  ;  En-Ven2  for  invention  is  a  new  contraction,  in  analogy  with  which 
many  other  contractions  are  formed.  Plent2  is  a  new  word-sign  for  Plaintiff. 
Dee2-Tren  is  a  new  contraction  for  determine.  Whether  or  not  would  not  have  been 
so  quickly  written  by  the  Old  Phonographers.  Per2-Pret  is  a  new  contraction  for 
appropriated,  formed  in  accordance  with  a  new  general  principle,  which  makes  a 
saving  of  one  or  more  strokes  in  thousands  of  words.  En-Fren1  is  a  new  con- 
traction for  infringed.  In  the  next  line  there  are  fourteen  variations  from  the 
Old  Phonography,  by  which  fourteen  strokes  and  eight  liftings  of  the  pen,  be- 
sides other  advantages,  are  gained  over  the  Old  Phonography. 

u  is  described — P.  182,  K.  4. 

is  parti-coloring:  yarn. — This  is  a  special  contraction,  in  which  Pret-Kel 
stands  for  parti-coloring  (ing  being  omitted),  and  yarn  is  added,  as  though  it  were 
the  word  ya'n,  by  the  En-hook.  The  phrase  might  have  been  written  Pret-Kel- 
Arn,  but  the  Am  in  rapid  writing  would  degenerate  into  nearly  an  En-hook  ;  and 
thus,  in  fact,  originated  the  sign  in  the  engraving,  so  far  as  representing  yarn  by 
an  En-hook  is  concerned.  (6)  In  this  contraction  the  word  color  should  strictly 
have  been  represented  by  its  sign,  Kler  ;  but  the  small  hook  is  used,  because  the 
making  of  the  large  hook  would  require  more  time  than  the  small  one  ;  and  there 
is  no  countervailing  objection  on  the  ground  of  legibility,  because  the  contrac- 
tion given  in  the  engraving  is  perfectly  legible  ;  and  no  principle  is  violated,  be- 
cause it  falls  under  the  principle  of  special  contraction  (237,  R.  2),  which  permits 
the  abbreviation  of  sign-words  quite  as  readily  as  others. 


174       SECOXD  STANDARD -PHONOGRAPHIC  READER. 

dyed  being  clamped,  or  tied,  or  wrapped  around,  to  prevent  the  ac- 
cess of  the  dye. 

He  then  states  that  these  methods'6  in  previous  use  were  imperfect, 
the  printing  not  admitting  of  permanent  colors,  besides  requiring 
complex  machinery,  and  the  dyeing  by  clamping,  tying,  etc.,  being 
unsuccessful  on  account  of  the  access  of  the  dye  to  the  parts  sought  to 
be  excluded.  He  then  speaks  of  the  nature  of  his  improvement,  which, 
he  says,  consists  of  parti-coloring  yarns  that  have  been  reeled,17  by 
means  of  direct  immersion18 


41 


in  the  dye,  by  the  use  of  movable  frames1  adapted  to  re- 
ceive and  hold  the2  skeins  as  they  are  arranged  upon  a 
reel,  and  so  combined  with  the  dye- vat  that  they  will  permit  the  yarn 
to  be  let  down  to  a  determinate  distance  in  the  dye.  There  is  then  a 
particular  description  of  the  machinery  used  in  this  process,3  and  final- 
ly the  more  material  part  of  the  specification,  particularly  when  we 
are  inquiring  as  to  the  thing  invented  or  discovered — the  claim. 
What  the  patentee  claims  to  have  secured  is  the  method  substantially 
as  described,4  of  parti -coloring  yarns  which  have  been  reeled,3  by  di- 

16  that  these  methods.— See  this  Reader,  p.  94,  note  8. 

"  that  have  been  reeled.— See  this  Reader,  p.  146,  note  28. 

is  direct  immersion.— 164. 

.  .     i  movable  frames.— This  is  a  special  contraction.    237,  R.  2,  ft. 

41 

s  adapted  to  receive  and  hold  the. — And  is  omitted  here.  This 
phrase  occurred  very  often  throughout  the  entire  case  ;  so  that  the  omission  of 
and  from  it  was  safe,  although  it  would  not  have  been,  perhaps,  if  it  had  occurred 
but  rarely. 

3  in  this  process. — There  are  two  modes  of  avoiding  disjoining  :  cither  omit 
the  circle  of  this  as  in  the  engraving,  or  turn  the  circle  on  the  back  of  the  curve, 
as  illustrated  elsewhere.  The  latter  mode  is  not  difficult,  after  a  little  training. 

*  substantially  as  described.— This  phrase  is  of  frequent  occurrence  in 
patent  suits,  and  this  phrase-sign  makes  a  great  gain  over  the  Old-Phonographic 
expression—  Sbees2-Teu  Iss2  Dee-Skay-Bed. 

5  which  have  been  reeled. — P.  169,  R.  12.  In  case  the  Advanced  Corre- 
sponding and  the  Reporting  outline  for  the  present  tense  of  a  verb  terminates 
with  a  full-length  stroke  with  a  large  initial  hook — as  Bee-Rel,  barrel;  Kler2,  color 
—the  Advanced  Correspondent  may  add  the  d  of  the  past  tense  either  by  Dee  or 
(rather)  by  shortening  ;  (2)  but  the  Reporter  in  such  case  writes  the  present  for 
the  past  tense  (or  time),  because  (A)  he  thereby  saves  either  an  additional  stroke 
or  the  little  extra  care  of  shortening,  (B)  and  secures  the  further  advantages  (a)  of 
adding  a  consonant,  as  n  (for  yarn}  in  the  special  phrase-sign  Rel'en1,  reeled  yarn; 


KEY   TO   THE  REPORTING   EXERCISES.  175 

rect  and  free  immersion,  by  means  of  frames  carrying  the  reeled 
yarns,"  combined  with  the  dyeing-vat  by  machinery  adapted  to  let 
down  and  draw  up  the  frame  and  measure  the  extent  of  the  immer- 
sion. The  reel  on  which  the  yarn  is  reeled  (which  was  exhibited  in 
Court)  is  not  a  part  of  the  combination,  and  as  regards  this  question 
of  novelty  in  the  combination,  described  by  the  patentee,  and  in  which 
his  invention  consists,  may  be  laid  out  of  view.  The  thing  invented, 
then,  is  this:  The  horizontal  frame  carrying  the  reeled  yarns  com- 
bined with  the  dyeing- vat  by  machinery  adapted  to  let  down  and 
draw  up  this  frame  and  measure  the  extent  of  the  immersion,  or  the 
extent  of  the  line  of  dyeing  upon  the  yarn.  In  other  words,  the  thing 
discovered  is  the  combination  of  the  horizontal  frame  carrying  the 
reeled  yarns  with  the  dyeing  vat  by  machinery — which  must  always 
be  kept  in  view  as  very  important — which  lets  down  the  frame  carry- 
ing the  yarn,  and  draws  it  up,  and  at  the  same  time  measures  the 
line  of  yarn  to  be  dyed. 

Now,  this  being  the  thing  invented — the  improvement  patented — 
the  next  question7  is,  is  it  new  and  useful  ?  It  must  be  both  in  order 
to  constitute  a  valid  patent.  The  utility  of  the  arrangement  and  com- 
bination I  have  not  understood  to  be  contested  by  the  learned  counsel 
for  the  defendant.1* 

As  to  the  novelty  of  the  arrangement  and  combination,  there  has 
been  introduced  in  the  course  of  the  trial,  intending  to  bear  upon  this 
question,  as  well  as  upon  the  question  of  infringement,  the  previous 
printing  apparatus,  the  clamping  process  and  apparatus,  and  the  meth- 
ods of  Graham,  Stevenson,  Whittock,  and  that  of  Kerr,  one  of  the 
witnesses  who  testified  on  the  part  of  the  defendant. 

Now,  the  question  of  novelty  is  not  whether  free  immersion  has 
been  before  used  for  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns ;  but  whether  this 
dyeing  of  parti-colored  yarns  by  free  immersion  was  done  previous 
to  the  date  of  the  invention  of  the  plaintiff,  by  an  arrangement  and 

(6)  of  shortening  to  add  it,  as  Rcldi,  reel  (or  reeled]  it,  Klerd-,  color-ed  it;  (c)  and  of 
of  lengthening  to  add  thr,  as  m  Reldher1,  reel  (or  reeled)  tlir ;  Klerdheri,  clear-ed 
Utr. 

<  reeled  yarns.— In  this  special  contraction  yarns  is  added  the  same  as  in 
Pret-Klens,  parti-colored  yarns. 

'  next  question. — 23G,  3. 

8  by  the  learned  counsel  for  the  defendant.— Lay -Kay  Deo  Jor  learned 
counsel  for  the  defendant  may  bo  introduced  into  general  reporting,  though  it  is 
formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  special  contraction  (237,  11  2,  /<)—  Lay 
standing  lor  learned,  Kay  {or  counsel,  and  Dee  for  defendant.  This  sigu;  transferred 
to  the  common  print  would  be  "L.  C.  D/'  See  phrases  commencing  with  Learn- 
ed Counsel  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 


176  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

combination  of  machinery  like  that  described  in  his  patent.9  This  is 
not  a  patent  for  the  discovery  of  the  idea  of  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns 
by  immersion  in  the  dye,  but  it  is  for  an  arrangement  and  combination 
of  machinery,  as  a  means  to  be  used  in  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns  by 
immersion  in  the  dye.  In  order,  therefore,  to  disprove  the  novelty  of 
the  invention,  it  must  be  shown  that  these  previous  modes  used  prac- 
tically in  dyeing  parti-colored  yarns  by  immersion  or  otherwise,  em- 
braced within  them  this  combination  and  arrangement  of  the  ma- 
chinery described  in  the  patent.  If  it  was  done  by  modes  and  pro- 
cesses not  embracing  this  combination  and  arrangement,  then  such 
previous  use  would  not  disprove  the  novelty  of  the  plaintiffs  inven- 
tion.10 

On  this  point,  therefore — the  question  of  novelty — it  will  be  your 
duty  to  look  into  these  old  modes  of  parti-coloring  yarn  by  immersion 
or  otherwise  in  the  dye,  and  say  whether  they  contain  the  special  com- 
bination and  arrangement  of  the  machinery  described  and  used  by  the 
plaintiff. 

If  you  should  arrive  at  a  conclusion  in  favor  of  the  plaintiff  as  to  the 
novelty  or  utility  of  his  improvement,  the  next  question  will  be  as  to 
the  alleged  infringement  by  the  defendant  in  the  adoption  of  machin- 
ery whereby  yarn  is  parti-colored  by  immersion.  That  question  will 
depend  upon  the  fact  whether  or  not  the  arrangement  of  the  machin- 
ery used  by  the  defendant  in  dyeing  yarn  embraces  the  combination 
of  the  plaintiff;  in  other  words,  whether  the  defendant's  mode  and 
machinery  embodies  within  it  the  new  ideas  of  the  patentee  ;  whether 
or  not  he  has  appropriated  the  ideas  which  lie  at  the  foundation  of 
the  plaintiffs  improvement  or  discovery. 

In  order  to  constitute11  an  infringement,  it  is  necessary  that  the 
arrangement  and  combination  of  the  party  charged  with  the  infringe- 
ment should  be  the  same  to  the  eye,  or  in  point  of  fact.  If  they  em- 
body the  ideas  of  the  patentee,  and  the  machinery  of  the  defendant 
operates  by  such  adoption  and  appropriation,  then,  though  thearrange- 
ment  may  be  apparently  different,  in  reality12  and  in  judgment  of  law 
an  infringement  exists.  Hence,  it  will  be  not  only  proper,  but  essen- 
tial, that  the  jury  should  look  into  the  arrangement  and  operation  of 
the  machinery  used  by  the  defendant  for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining 

»  described  in  liis  patent.— 24G,  1. 
Jo  plaintiff's  invention.- 187,  E.  1. 

11  in  order  to  constitute. — This  phrase  might  bo  written  by  the  advanced 
reporter,  Nerdl-Stet,  the  first  t  of  constitute  being  omitted  under  236,  3. 

12  in    reality. — See-  thes9  words,  and  in  relation,  among  the  phrases  begin- 
ning -with  In  in  tho  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 


KEY   TO  ftffi  BEPOliTlNG   EXEflCISES.  177 

whether  or  not  it  embodies  within  it  the  principle  of  the  patentee  ; 
whether  or  not  its  successful  operation  is  attributable  to  such  appro- 
priation. If  it  does,  then  it  is13  an  infringement.  If  it  does  not,  then 
there  haa  boeu  no  infringement. 

It  has  been  insisted  by  the  learned  counsel  for  the  defend- 
ant1 that  he  does  not  use  the  reeled  yarn,  or  rather  the 
yarns  on  a  reel,  as  is  done8  by  the  plaintiff;  and  hence  it  is  insisted 
that  in  this  respect  the  defendant's  arrangement  or  combination  of 
machinery  differs  from  that  of  the  plaintiffs.  It  is  true,"  however, 
that  the  combination  and  arrangement  of  the  machinery  of  the  plain- 
tiff is  useless,  and  would  not  be1  patentable  without  yarn  to  be  oper- 
ated upon  in  the  process  of  dyeing  ;  and  in  order  to  make  out-  an  in- 
fringement, it  must  appear  that  the  defendant  not  only  used  the  com- 
bination of  the  plaintiff,  but  that  it  is  used  for  dyeing  by  letting  down 
and  taking  up  the0  reeled  yarn  into  .and  out  of  the  vat,  and  measur- 
ing the  extent  of  the  immersion  at  the  time. 

I  will  state  this  proposition  again,  as  it  is  undoubtedly  important. 
I  have  said  that  the  combination  and  arrangement  of  the  plaintiff's 
machinery  is  useless,  and  would  not  be  patentable  without  yarn  to  be 
operated  upon7  in  the  dyeing  process.  The  invention  is  the  combina- 
tion for  the  purpose  of  dyeing  by  immersion,  and  the  machinery  which 
is  employed  to  effectuate  this  process.  It  must  therefore  appear,  in 
order  to  constitute  an  infringement,  that  the  defendant  uses  this  com- 
bination and  arrangement  for  the  purpose  of  dyeing  by  immersion,  by 
means  of  machinery  which  lets  down  the  yarn  into  the  dye  ;  that  he 
uses  the  combination  of  machinery  which  effects,  or  appears  to  effect, 
this,  and  at  the  same  time  measures  the  extent  of  the  dyeing.  Wheth- 
er or  not  the  yarn  to  be  dyed  is  on  a  reel,  like  the  plaintiff's,  is  not 

is  then  it  is.— See  this  Reader,  p.  61,  xvi. 

\  f)    1  l>y  the  learned  counsel    for   the    defendant. — This  phrase-sign 
44    is  formed  in  accordance  with  the  principle  of  special  contraction  (237 
R.  1,  b).    For  the  is  omitted  under  250,  3.     Seu  this  Reader,  p.  175,  note  8. 

2  as  is  done. — 245. 

3  it  is  true. — See  this  Header,  page  152,  note  12. 

4  and  would  not  be. — See  this  Reader,  118,  note  9. 

6  and    in    order   to   make    out. — To  is  implied  by  joining,  and  out  added 
to  the  word-sign  lor  make  (Em)  by  halving  it.     V.  61,  xvi. 

«  and  taking:  up  the.— 237,  R.  1,  6. 

'  to  be  operated  upon.— See  this  Reader,  p.  103,  note  4. 


178  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

material.  If  the  yarn  is  so  arranged  as  to  be  acted  upon  by  the  plain- 
tilFs  combination,  and  is  so  acted  upon  by  the  defendant's  arrange- 
ment that  it  may  be  let  down  into  the  dye  and  taken  up,  and  at  the 
same  time  measure  the  extent  of  the  immersion,  then  an  infringement 
exists.  There  would  then  be  an  embodiment  of  the  ideas  of  the  pat- 
entee in  the  arrangement  or  combination  of  the  machinery  of  the  de- 
fendant, and  an  appropriation  of  the  improvement  of  the  patentee. 
Gentlemen,  this  branch  of  the  case,  the  question  of  novelty,  is  a  ques- 
tion of  fact  which,  under  the  views  of  the  law  which  I  have  endeavored 
to  explain  to  you.  must  be  examined  and  determined  for  yourselves. 
Undoubtedly,  before  the  plaintiff  is  entitled  to*  recover,  he  must  have 
established  to  your  reasonable  satisfaction  that  his  new  mode,  com- 
bination, or  arrangement  of  machinery  for  the  purpose  of  dyeing 
parti-colored  yarns,  and  the  ideas  involved  and  embodied  in  this  new 
arrangement  and  combination  which  enabled  him  to  work  out  his 
improvement  as  a  useful  one  ;  that  these  are  substantially,  practically 
involved,  embodied  in  the  defendant's  arrangement  and  operation  of 
his  machinery.  If  you  find  these  there,  although  the  form  may  be 
different  to  the  eye — if  you  find  the  essence  of  the  plaintiffs  arrange- 
ment, the  practice  and  operation  of  it  embodied  within  the  defendant's, 
then,  in  judgment  of  law,  there  is  an  infringement.  This  is  a  question 
of  fact,  which  it  is  your  province  to  determine. 

The  remaining  question  in  the  case  is  the  question  of  damages,  which 
has  been  presented  by  the  counsel  for  the  plaintiff.  Upon  this  ques- 
tion the  general  rule  is  that  the  patentee  or  his  assignee,  in  case  of  an 
infringement  or  appropriation  of  his  invention  by  another'  without  his 
license,  the  patentee  or  the  assignee,  as  the  case  may  be,  is  entitled  to 
the  actual  damages10  which  he  has  sustained"  by  reason  of  this  in- 
fringement. It  is  often,  indeed  almost  always,  '"an  exceedingly  diffi- 

s  is  entitled  to.— This  contraction  for  entitled  (En-Tee1)  is  valuable.  See 
EXTITLE-D  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

9  by  another. — See  under  DHB  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 

10  the  actual  damages, — As  the  word  damage  will  probably  occur  often  in 
this  part  of  the  charge,  it  may  safely  be  contracted  to  Dee-Em  (i.e.,  dam.). 

n  \vliich  he  has  sustained. — Here  tustained  is  added  to  has  by  making  the 
circle  triple-size  nominally — that  is,  a  little  larger  than  the  Ses-circle  is  usually 
made  by  the  writer. 

11  an    exceedingly   difficult. — The  word  exceedingly  is  written  in  full  by 
Kays-Dee:'  ingly  '  (232,  5).     In  analogy  with  the  word-sign  for  exist  (Ses-Tee2),  the 
Kay  may  be  elided  ;  and  ingJy  may  bo  omitted  under  the  principle  of  237,  R.  1,  6. 
I  prefer,  however,  to  make  at  once  Sdee1  a  word-sign  for  exceedingly.    See  these 
words  in  the  Dictionary. 


KEY    TO    THE   REPORTING    EXERCISES.  179 

cult  question  to  arrive  at,  upon  any  certain13  or  satisfactory  data. 
The  theory,  or  the  principle  in  respect  to  the  damages,  is  that  a  per- 
son who  adopts,  appropriates,  or  uses  the  improvement  of  another, 
interferes14  with  his  custom,  his  monopoly,  or  rather  property  (for  it 
is  not  a  monopoly,  it  being  the  fruits  of  his  own  mind),  and  affects  the 
benefits  which  he  would  otherwise15  be  entitled  to ;  and  the  jury 
should  look  into  the  case  with  a  view  to  ascertain  the  actual  damage 
which  the  patentee  under  such  circumstances  has  sustained.  The  rule 
of  law  excludes  any  exaggerated  or  vindictive  damage,  which  is  some- 
times allowed  in  cases  of  willful  trespass.  That  rule  of  damage  has 
no  application  in  this  case. 

In  this  case,  one  view  probably  to  be  taken  upon  the  question  of 
damages  would  be  this  :  the  benefits  and  advantages,  whatever  they 
may  be,  if  there  are  any,  derived  in  the  use  of  the  plaintiffs  improve- 
ment over  the  old  modes  practiced  and  in  use  ;  and  this  is  the  useful 
result,  if  any,  consequent  upon  the  new10  invention  over  old  modes. 
If  it  can  be  shown  that  there  are  benefits  and  advantages  derived  by 
the  use  of  the  new  mode  over  the  old,  these  are  such  as  are  to  be  taken 
into  consideration17  upon  the  question  of  damages. 

You  have  heard  the  testimony  of  the  experts  which  has  been  offered. 
I  shall  not  go  over  or  call  attention  particularly  to  it.  Their  estimates 
and  opinions  arc  not  always  reliable1*  and  very  certain.  But  still  they 
are  competent  and  admissible  on  the  question  of  damages,  and  proper 
to  be  taken  into  account  by  the  jury  in  attempting  to  arrive  at  the 
actual  damages  which  the  plaintiff  has  sustained.19  This  is  also  a  ques- 
tion of  fact  which  belongs  to  the  jury,  and  with  which  I  do  not  de- 
sire20 to  interfere. 

13  upon  any  certain. — Any  is  vocalized  with  «•,  so  that  the  phrase-sign  may 
not  be  read  upon  uncertain. 

14  interferes. — See  this  Reader,  p.  103,  noto  7.      Tho  words  interfere-d  are 
contracted  in  analogy  with  infer-red  (En-Ef2)  to  Ent-Ef1.     See  these  words  in  the 
Dictionary. 

l:'  which,  he  would  otherwise.— See  this  Reader,  p.  119,  note  9  ;  p.  60,  xiii. 

10  upon  the  new.— The  is  omitted  under  250,  3.  See  NEW  in  the  Standard- 
Phonographic  Dictionary. 

17  to  be  taken  into  consideration. — The  En-hook  of  taken  (Ten)  is  omit- 
ted to  secure  the  advantage  of  phrase-writing,  and  into  is  omitted  under  250,  3. 

13  reliable. — See  this  Reader,  p.  101,  note  5. 

1D  lias   sustained. — The  circle  for  has,  Iss2,  is  tripled  to  express  three  Esses. 

20  and  with  which  I  do  not  desire.— This  speech-phrase  is  reduced  to 
writing,  thus  :  and-with-which  ;  adding  Ketoid  (one  of  the  forms  for  joining  /  to  a 
preceding  word) ;  then  adding  do  not  desire. 


180  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 


ALEXANDER  VON  HUMBOLDT. 

[An  Address  by  Prof.  Francis  Lieber,  at  a  Meeting  calkd  by  the  New-  York 
Geographical  Society,  held  on  the  evening  of  June  2nd,  1859,  in  (lie  Hall 
of  the  New- York  Historical  Society. ~\ 


43 


' '  TUB  whole  earth  is  the  monument  of  illustrious  men. ' ' 
There  are  passages  in  the  works  of  antiquity  which,  to 
our  ears  and  minds,  have  the  sound  and  the  depths  of  inspiration. 
They  impress  themselves  on  our  souls.,  and  corresponding  occasions  on 
the  paths  of  our  lives  restore  them  to  visible  letters.  Such  seem  to 
me  these  words  of  Pericles,  and  such  the  occasion  which  has  brought 
us  together  in  this  place.  What  Pericles  said,  in  his  funeral  speech, 
of  the  men  who  had  fallen,  not  for  the  defense  but  for  the  glory  of 
Athens,  seems  to  apply  in  a  double  sense  to  Alexander  von  Humboldt. 
Wherever  death  occurs  or  is  remembered,  there  is  solemnity  ;'  nor  can 
we2  wholly  free  ourselves  even  from  mourning' when  a  revered  man  has 
left  us,  however  full  his  measure  of  a  f.vvnred  life  may  have  been.3  He 
lived  so  long  and  so  large  a  life  that  generations  over  the  whole  globe 
had  grown  up  familiar  with  his  name,  and  we  were  so  accustomed  to  it 
that  our  very  intellects  feel  a  degree  of  discomfort  at  presenting  to  our 
minds  the  world  henceforth  as  existing  without  him.  Yet  it  is  one  of 
the  noblest  delights  for  those  who  reflect  and  love  to  be  grateful,  to 
trace  the  chief  components  of  the  monument  of  illustrious  men  to 
their  authors — to  find  whence  came  the  discoveries,  inventions,  con- 
ceptions, institutions,  and  endeavors  of  ages  in  the  field  of  culture, 
freedom,  and  truth.  Who  has  not  enjoyed  the  pleasure  of  finding  the 
spots  on  the  chart  of  human  progress,  where  you  put  down  your 
finger  and  say :  Here  is  Aristotle,  here  are  the  Waldenses,  here  the 
causes  and  the  effects  of  the  University — and  of  tracing  the  lines  of 
civilization  in  different  directions  from  point  to  point?*  And  this  de- 
light we  may  enjoy  when  meditating  on  the  period  of  which  Humboldt 

.  _     i  solemnity. — Sjc  tins  Reader,  p.  135,  note  C,  2. 
-  nor  can  we.  —P.  1G9,  R.  12,  6. 

3  may    have    l>ecn. — Erah  being  used  as  a  word-sign  for  may  be— 'en  is  writ- 
ton  by  adding  the  En-book,  have  beiug  omitted  and  to  be  supplied.     240  ;  250,  3. 
The  best  Old  expression  of  this  phrase  was  Em--Vec-Ben  ;  i.e.,  the  New  expres- 
sion is  more  than  three  times  as  fast  as  the  Old. 

4  from  point  to  point. — 250,  3,  example  From — to. 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  181 

was  one  of  the  most  distinct  exponents— we  may  enjoy  it  even  now, 
although  he  has  left  us  but  yesterday  ;  for  God  allowed  to  him  days  so 
long  that  he  passed  into5  history  before  he  passed  away  from  among 
us.  Many  of  my  young  friends  have  asked  me  as  their  teacher,  and, 
indeed,  many  other  friends  have  repeated  the  question,  as  I  conversed 
with  them  on  that  news  which  on  its  arrival  attracted  more  interest 
than  the  advice  of  the  threatening  contest  on  the  plains  of  Italy — "Was 
he  not  the  greatest  man  of  the  century  ?  I  do  not  believe  it  fit  for 
man  to  seat  himself  on  the  bench  in  the  chancery6  of  humanity,  and 
there  to  pronotmce  this  one  or  that  one  the  greatest  man.  How  many 
men  have  been  called  the  greatest !  But  if  it  is  an  attribute  of  great- 
ness to  impress  an  indelible  stamp  on  aa  entire  movement  of  the  col- 
lective mind  of  a  race  ;  if  greatness, 


in  part,1  consists  in  devising  that  which  is  good,  large, 
and  noble,  and  in  pcrscveringly  executing  it  by  means 
which,  in  the  hands  of  others,  wonld  have  been  insufficient,  and 
against  obstacles  which  would  have  been  insurmountable  to  others ; 
if  the  daring  solitude  of  thought  and  loyal  adhesion  to  its  own  royal- 
ty is  a  constituent  of  greatness ;  if  rare  and  varied  gifts,  such  as  mark 
distinction  when  singly  granted,  showered  by  Providence  on  one  manj 
if  modest  amenity  gracing  these  gifts,  and  encouraging  kindliness  tcr 
every  one  of  every  nation  that  proved  earnest  in  his  pursuit — wheth- 
er he  had  chosen  nature  or  society,  the  hieroglyphics  or  the  liberty  of 
America,  the  sea  and  the  winds,  or  the  languages,  astronomy,  or  in- 
dustry y  the  canal  or  prison  discipline,  geography,  or  Plato  ;  if,  in  ad- 
dition, an  organizing  mind — a  power  of  evoking  activity  in  the  sins'. 
gi»h  --and  sagacity  and  tmbrokcn  industry  through  a  life  lengthened 
far  beyond  that  which  the  psalmist  ascribes  to  a  long  human  existence ; 


•'  that  he  passed  into. — A  t  is  omitted  here  for  the  sake  of  phrase- writing 
(236,  3),  as  also  in  the  subsequent  phrases — before  he  passed  away;  great-cst  man. 

c  in    the    chancery- — See    CHANCEKT  In  the  Standard-Phonographic    Dic- 
tionary. 


ji     'in  part. — 24C,  1.    Tho  Old  form  for  part  was  Pee-Eet ;  bttt  the  best 

Tr'l     form  both  alone  and  in  phrase-writing  is  Pret.    It  also  is  the  best  form 

for  part  in  the  following  words:    compartment,  'com ':Pret-Ment ;    depart-ed,  rs, 

Dee-Pret  ;  department,  Dee-Pret-(Ment)  ;  impart,  Em-Prct,    Bco  In  parlictUar  and 

In  part  in  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary. 


182  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER, 

if  a  good  fame,  encircling  the  globe  on  its  own  pinions,  and  not  car- 
ried along  by  later  bistory — if  these  make  up  or  prove  greatness,  then 
indeed  we  may  sa)',  without  presumption,  that  our  age  has  been  grac- 
ed by  one  of  the  greatest  men — so  favored  an  exemplar  of  humanity 
that  he  would  cease  to  be  an  example  for  \is  had  he  not  manifested 
through  his  whole  life  of  ninety  years  that  unceasing  labor,  unvary- 
ing love  of  truth  and  advancement,  and  that  kindness  to  his  fellow- 
beings,  which  are  duties,  and  in  which  every  one  of  us  ought  to  strive 
to  imitate  him.  What  an  amount  of  thinking,  observing,  writing, 
traveling,  and  discovering  he  has  performed,  from  that  juvenile  essay 
of  his  on  the  textile  fabrics  of  the  ancients,  to  the  last  line  of  his 
"Cosmos,"  which  reminds  us  of  Copernicus  reading  the  last  proof- 
sheet  on  his  death-bed,2  shortly  before  his  departure;  or  of  Mozart, 
who  directed  with  dying  looks  the  singing  of  a  portion  of  his  requiem, 
which  he  had  in  part  composed  on  his  death-bed !  Let  us  one  and  all, 
young  and  old,  symbolize  by  his  name  the  fact  that,  however  untrue 
assuredly  the  saying  is  that  genius  is  labor,  it  is  true  that  the  neces- 
sary factor  or  coefficient  of  genius  and  of  any  talent  is  incessant  dili- 
gence. We  are  ordained  not  only  to  eat  the  bread  of  our  mouth  in 
the  sweat  of  our  brow,  but  to  earn  in  the  same  way  the  nourishing 
bread  of  the  mind.  This  is  no  world  of  trifling,  and  Humboldt,  like 
the  Greeks,  whose  intellectuality  he  loved  to  honor — whose  Socrates 
loved  to  say,  Arduous  are  all  noble  things — was  a  hard-working  man, 
far  harder  working  than  most  of  those  who  arrogate  the  name  to 
themselves.  He  ceased  to  work,  and  to  work  hard,  only  when  he 
laid  himself  down  on  that  couch  from  which  he  never  rose  again.  It 
is  not  considered  inappropriate,  I  believe,  on  occasions  like  this,  to 
give  distinctness  to  the  picture  by  stating  personal  observations.  Al- 
low me,  then,  to  relate  a  very  simple,  yet  n,  characteristic  fact.  I  vis- 
ited Humboldt  at  Potsdam,  in  the  year 


45 


1844,  when  he  had  reached,  therefore,  the  age  of  75  ;  for 
yoxi  know  that  he  was  born  in  that  memorable  year  of 
17G9,  in  which  Cuvier  was  born,  and  Wellington,  and  Chateaubriand.1 
and  Napoleon,  and  Canning,  and  Walter  Scott,  and  Mackintosh — just 

2  on  liis  tleatli-bed. — 25. 

j  K    i  Chateaubriand.— This  name  is  pronounced  Shatobrio,- — (.)  indicat- 
40     ing  the  nasalization  of  the  preceding  vowel.     It  might  have  been  writ- 
ten Chet-BrenU,  as  though  pronounced  Chatobriand.      See  this  Header,  p.  98, 
note  10. 


KEY    TO    THE    REPORTING    EXERCISES.  183 

ten  years  after  Schiller3 — just  twenty  after  Goethe.3  Humboldt  told  me 
at  that  time  that  he  was  engaged  on  a  work  which  he  intended  to  call 
Cosmos;  that  he  was  ohliged  chiefly  to  write  at  night,  for  in  the  morn- 
ing he  studied  and  arranged  materials,  and  in  the  evening  he  was 
ohliged  to  he  with  the  king  from  9  o'clock  to  about  11.  After  his 
return  from  the  king  he  was  engaged  in  writing  until  one  or  two 
o'clock.4  Humboldt,  when  in  Berlin  or  Potsdam,  was  retained — if 
we  may  use  a  professional  term — to  join  the  evening  circle  of  the  king 
for  the  indicated  hours.  It  was  all,  I  believe,  he  was  expected  actu- 
ally to  perform  in  return  for  the  titles,  honors,  and  revenue  which 
he  was  enjoying,  except  that  the  monarch  sometimes  selected  him  as 
a  companion  for  his  journeys.  Humboldt  described  to  me  the  char- 
acter of  these  royal  evening  reunions.  Everything  of  interest,  as  the 
day  brought  it  to  notice,  was  there  discussed.  The  drawing  of  a  beau- 
tiful live  oak  near  Charleston,  which  a  fair  friend  had  made  for  me, 
was  taken  by  Humboldt  to  that  circle,  where  it  attracted  so  much  at- 
tention that  he  begged  me  to  leave  it ;  and  he  told  me  that  the  vol- 
ume describing  our  aqueduct,  which  my  friend  the  author — now  the 
president  of  our  college — had  given  me  at  the  time  of  its  publication, 
and  which  I  had  then  sent  him,  had  furnished  the  topic  of  discussion 
for  an  entire  week.  "We  collected,"  he  said,  "all  possible  works 
on  ancient  and  modern  aqueducts,  and  compared,  discussed,  and  ap- 
plied for  many  successive  evenings."  Is  there,  then,  a  royal  road  to 
knowledge,  after  all,  when  a  Humboldt  can  be  retained?  May  I  ex- 
tend your  supposed  permission  of  giving  personal  anecdotes,  provided 
they  are  of  a  sufficiently  biographical  character,  such  as  Plutarch, 
perhaps,  would  not  have  disdained  to  record  ?  I  desire  to  show  what 
interest  he  took  in  everything  connected  with  progress.  I  have  rea- 
son to  believe  that  it  was  chiefly  owing  to  him  that  the  King  of  Prus- 
sia offered  to  me,  not  long  after  my  visit,  a  chair  to  be  created  in  the 

2  Schiller.— Pronoimced  Shel-cr.     This  does  not  violate  the  rule  of  101,6; 
for  this  is  not  Shel,  but  Shier.    Moreover,  that  is  a  rule  of  safety  for  the  inexperi- 
enced writer,  but  not  necessarily  to  be  observed  by  the  reporter,  who,  able  to 
command  his  pen  or  pencil,  can  as  surely  distinguish  by  difference  of  inclination 
between  Shel  and  Shen  when  standing  alone  as  between  Chay  and  Ray,  Shel  be- 
ing written  more  inclined  than  Shen.     This  liberty  becomes  safer  in  the  case  of 
Shier,  for  there  is  no  separate  outline  Ish-shon  to  conflict  with.     It  is  also  sal'er 
in  case  of  Sheldher,  because  in  the  case  of  double-lengths  the  distinction  of  in- 
clination is  very  easy.     207,  R.  6. 

3  Goetlie. — The  sound  of  the  German  oe  or  6  (da,  as  a  German  calls  if)  is  tho 
sound  of  the  vowel  in  first,  erst,  earth.    For  its  Standard -Phonographic  sign,  see 
Compendium,  p.  206,  §24,  Nos.  31  and  32.    Goethe  =Gce-te. 

4  one  or  two  o'clock.— 250,  3.    See  this  Reader,  p.  79,  note  3. 


SECOND   STANr>AttD-l>HONOGnAl>niC 

tmiversity  of  Berlin,  exclusively  dedicated  to  the  Science  and  Art  of* 
Punishment,  or  to  Fcenology.  I  had  conversed  with  the  monarch  on 
the  superiority  of  solitary  confinement  at  labor  over  all  the  other 
prison  systems,  when  he  concluded  our  interview  with  these  words  : 
"I  wish  you  would  convince  Mr.  von  Humboldt  of  your  views.  He 
is  rather  opposed  to  them.  I  shall  let  him  know  that  you  will  see 
him."  Humboldt  and  prison  discipline  sounded  strange  to  my  ears. 
I  went,  and  found  that  he  loved  truth  better  than  his  own  opinion  or 
bias ;  and  my  suggestion  that  so  comprehensive  a  university  as  that 
of  Berlin,  our  common  native  city,  ought  to  be  honored  with  having 
the  first  chair  of  Posnology  (for  which  it  was  high  time  to  carve  out 
a  distinct  branch,  treating  of  the  convict  in  all  his  phases  after  the 
act  of  conviction),  was  seized  upon  at  once  by  his  liberal  mind.  He 
soon  carried  the  Minister  of  Justice  along  with  him,  and  the  offer  to 
which  I  have  alluded  was  the  consequence.  On  the  other  hand,  a 
friend,  whose  name  is,  perhaps,  more  interwoven  with  the  history  of 
our  canal  than  that  of  any  other  citizen,  except  Clinton,  informs  me 
that  ho  had  the  pleasure  of  sitting  by  the  side  of  Humboldt  at  a  royal 
dinner  at  Charlottsburg.  During  the  whole  time,  they  were  engaged 
in  conversing  almost  exclusively  on  our  great  canal,  and  that  greater 
one  which  ought  to  unite  in  everlasting  wedlock  the 


46 


sturdy  Atlantic  and  the  teeming  Pacific,  having  now 
yearned  for  one  another  for  centuries.  Humboldt  spoke 
with  a  knowledge  of  details  and  a  sagacious  discernment  which  were 
surprising  to  my  friend,  well  versed  in  all  the  details  of  these  topics. 
Although  it  has  been  stated1  by  high  authority  that  the  works  of 
Humboldt  show  to  every  one  who  can  "read  between  the  lines/'  an 
endeavor  to  present  nature  in  her  totality,  unconnected  with2  man, 
I  cannot  otherwise  than  state  here  that,  on  the  contrary,  it  has  ever 
appeared  to  me  that  this  great  man,  studying  nature  in  her  details, 
and  becoming  what  Bacon  calls  her  interpreting  priest,  elevates  him- 
self to  those  heights  whence  he  can  take  a  comprehensive  view  of  her 
in  connection  with3  man  and  the  movements  of  society,  with  lan- 
guage, economy,  and  exchange,  institutions,  and  architecture,  which 
is  to  man  almost  like  the  nidifying  instinct  to  the  bird.  Humboldt' s 
tendency  in  this  respect  seems  to  me  in  its  sphere  wholly  dissimilar 

j  ft     i  although  it  has  been   stated,— P.  169,  E.  12.     Bee  this  Keacfer,  p. 
40     Cl.xvi. 

2  unconnected  with. — 250,  3,  and  example  With. 

3  in  connection  With.— 250,  3,  and  example  With. 


KEY   TO    THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  185 

to  the  view  which  his  friend  Hitter  takes  of  geography  in  connection 
with  history.  Humboldt,  it  would  seem,  could  hardly  be  expected  to 
stand  in  a  different  relation  to  the  natural  sciences.  He  was,  with  all 
his  erudition  and  the  grandeur  of  his  knowledge,  eminently  a  social4 
man.  I  have  found  a  passage  in  a  paper  written  by  a  diplomatist  and 
highly  cultivated  writer,  Yarnhagen  von  Ense,5  which,  I  feel  sure, 
will  be  listened  to  with  interest.  Yon  Ense  describes  his  sojourn  in 
Paris  in  1810,  and  says : 

' '  In  the  salons  of  Metternich0  (at  that  time  Austrian  Ambassador 
near  the  Court  of  St.  Cloud)  I  saw  Humboldt  only  as  a  brilliant  and 
admired  meteor — so  much  so,  that  I  hardly  found  time  to  present  my- 
self to  him,  and  to  whisper  into  his  ear  a  few  of  those  names  which 
gave  me  a  right  to  a  personal  acquaintance  with  him.  Rarely  has  a 
man  enjoyed  in  such  a  degree  the  esteem  of  all,  the  admiration  of  the 
most  opposite  parties,  and  the  zeal  of  all  in  power  to  serve  him.  Na- 
poleon does  not  love  him.  He  knows  Humboldt  as  a  shrewd  thinker, 
whose  way  of  thinking  and  whose  opinion  cannot  be  bent ;  but  the 
Emperor  and  his  Court,  and  the  high  authorities  in  the  state,  have 
never  denied  the  impression  which  they  received  by  the  presence  of 
this  bold  traveler,  by  the  power  of  knowledge,  and  the  light  which 
seems  to  stream  from  it  in  every  direction.  The  learned  of  all  nations 
are  proud  of  their  high  associate,  all  the  Germans  of  their  country- 
man, and  all  the  liberals  of  their  fellow."  ~  °  °  "It  has  been 
rarely  vouchsafe!, "  continues  Yon  Ense,  "to  a  man  in  such  degree  as 
to  Humboldt,  to  stand  forth  in  individual  independence  and  always 
equal  to  himself,  and  at  one  and  the  same  time,  in  scientific  activity 
and  in  the  widest  social7  and  international  intercourse,  in  the  solitude 
of  minute  inquiry,  and  in  the  almost  confusing  brilliancy  of  the  soci- 
ety of  the  day  ;  but  I  know  of  no  one  who,  with  all  this,  has  endeav- 
ored throughout  his  whole  life  to  promote  the  progress  and  welfare  of 
our  race  so  steadily,  uniformly,  and  with  such  ample  success." 

So  far  Von  Ense.  This  picture  is,  doubtless,  true ;  but  we  ought 
not  to  recall  it  to  our  memory  without  remembering  at  the  same  time 

*  a  social. — The  rule  of  161,  B,  is  conformed  to  here,  for  She!  does  i.r>t  Btand 
alone. ;  but  the  word  social  may  be  written  by  the  reporter  Iss-Shel  even  when 
alone,  if  he  is  particular  to  write  the  Shel  more  inclined  thau  Shen  would  natu- 
rally be.  See  this  Reader,  p.  183,  note  2. 

8  Varnhagen  von  Ense. — Pronounced  Fiirnha-gen  fon  En-se. 

6  Metternich. — Pronounced   Met-ernio.      For   the  Standard-Phonographic 
sign  for  the  sound  o,  see  the-  Compendium,  p.  20G,  §  24,  No.  06.     As  to  the  soond, 
see  p.  '210,  §  25,  No.  60. 

7  social. — See  this  Reader,  p,  183,  note  2,  and  p.  185,  note  4. 


18G  SECOND    STASDAKD-PHOXOGnATHIC    EEADEB. 

one  of  his  most  prominent  characteristics — his  simplicity  and  amenity, 
K '>  i:;lierent  in  him  that  they  M*crc  never  dimmed,  so  f:-.r  as  I  know,  by 
the  luster  of  his  talents  or  energy  of  his  thought.  The  most  perfect 


47 


of  social  refinement  which  I  have  to  this  day  in  my  mind, 
is  an  early  evening  party  at  the  villa  of  William  A^UII 
Ilumboldt,  near  the  Lake  Tegel.  Nature  has  not  done  much  for  that 
spot,  hut  refined  simplicity,  courtesy,  and  taste,  easy  interchange  of 
thought  and  experience,  men  of  name  and  women  of  attractive  ele- 
gance and  high  acquirements,  young  and  old,  travelers,  courtier:;, 
soldiers,  and  students,  music,  works  of  art,  with  green  lawns,  shrub- 
bery, and  winding  paths  along  smooth  water  and  waving  fields,  are 
components  of  that  scene  in  the  midst  of  which  the1  two  illustrious 
Ilximboldts  moved  and  delighted  others  as  much  as  they  seemed  to 
be  gratified,2  giving  and  receiving  as  all  the  others  did,3  never  conde- 
scending, never  indicating  a  consciousness  that  they  encouraged  the 
timid,  but  showing  how  gladly  they  received  additional  knowledge 
from  every  one.  There  are  men  here  around  me,  of  honored  names 
in  those  sciences  which  Ilumboldt  cultivated  more  especially  as  his 
own.4  I  hope  they  will  indicate  to  us  how  he  infused  a  new  spirit 
into  them  —  how  he  immeasurably  extended  them,  how  he  added  dis- 
coveries and  original  conceptions  ;  but  I,  though  allowed  to  worship 
these  sciences  in  the  peristyle  only,  and  not  as  a  consecrated3  priest, 
crave  permission  to  say  a  few  words  even  on  this  topic.  Some  fifteen 
years  ago,  Ilumboldt  presided  over  the  annual  meeting  of  naturalists, 
then  held  at  Berlin.  In  his  opening  speech  he  chiefly  discoursed  of 
the  merits  of  Linnaeus.  He  knew  of  Linnaeus  as  Herodotus  knew  of 
Salamis  and  Thermopylae  ;  for,  the  life  of  the  great  Swede  overlapped 
by  some  ten  years  that  of  Humboldt,  and  all  he  there  said  of  Linnaeus 
seems  to  me  to  apply  to  himself  with  far  greater  force,  and  on  an  en- 
larged scale.  In  that  speech,  too,  I  remember  he  quoted  his  friend 
Schiller.  Humboldt  was,  in  a  marked  manner,  of  a  poetic  tempera- 

i  in    tho    midst    of   which   the.—  23G,  3.    The  t  of  midst  is  elided,  in 
accordance  with  236,  3,  and  (if  is  implied  by  joining. 

-  soemed  to  be  gratified.  —  Seem  is  written  hero  instead  of  the  past  fense, 
bf,  is  added  by  -widening,  and  to  is  omitted.     See  this  Header,  p.  82,  note  11. 

3  as   all    the    others    did.  —  See  DHE  in   the  Standard-Phonographic  Dic- 
tionary. 

'  as  his  own.—  P.  182,  R.  4. 

5  as  a  consecrated.  —  P.  112,  K.  7,  6. 


i  <j 
4:  ( 


KEY   TO   THE   REPORTING   EXERCISES.  187 

meat.  I  do  not  believe  that  without  it  he  would  have  been  able  to 
receive1  those  living  impressions  of  nature,  and  to  combine  what  was 
singly  received,  in  those  vivid  descriptions  so  true  and  transparent 
that  they  surprise  the  visitor  of  the  scenes  to  this  day.  He  had  that 
constructive  imagination — I  do  not  speak  now  of  inventive  fancy — • 
without  which  no  man  can  be  great  in  any  branch,  whether  it  belong 
to  nature  or  to  history.  But  yesterday  an  officer  of  our  navy,7  whose 
profession  has  made  him  well  acquainted  with  South  America,  by  sea 
and  land,  with  the  Andes — one  of  the  monuments  of  our  illustrious 
man8— told  me  that  he  knew  of  no  descriptions,  or  rather  characteris- 
tics, so  true  to  living  reality  as  "Humboldt's  Views  of  Nature,"  which 
he  had  perused  and  enjoyed  on  the  spot.  The  power  of  collocation 
and  shrewdness  of  connection,  the  knowledge  of  detail  and  the  ab- 
sence of  a  desire  to  perceive  things  according  to  a  system,  the  thirst 
for  a  knowledge  of  the  life  of  nature,  and  the  constant  wish  to  make 
all  of  us  share  in  the  treasures  of  his  knowledge — his  lucid  style, 
which  may  raise  his  ' '  Cosmos  "  to  a  German  classic — these  seem  to  me 
to  characterize  Humboldt  in  his  studies  of  nature,  besides  all  that 
which  he  has  done  as  a  professional  naturalist.  Humboldt's  name 
and  life  may  be  termed,  with  strict  propriety  of  language,  interna- 
tional. He  read  and  spoke  English  and  Italian.  He  spoke  and  wrote 
Spanish  with  care  and  correctness,  and  French  almost  as  well  as9  Ger- 
man. He  lived  for  entire  periods  of  many  years  in  Paris,  and  counted 
many  French  among  his  best  friends, 10  yet  not  at  the  expense  of  pa- 
triotism. In  that  very  speech  at  Berlin, 


A  O      which  has  been  mentioned,1  he  dwells  with  pleasure  on 
jbO      the  penetrating  effect  which  the  German  mind  has  exer- 


«  he  would  have  been  able  to  receive. — See  Compendium,  249 ;  p.  1G9, 
R.  12  and  R.  14. 

'  of  our  navy. — 25. 

«  of  onr  illustrious  man.— Man  is  vocalized  here,  BO  that  it  shall  not  be 
read  men,  though  a  critical  reporter  would  not  need  such  aid  for  the  correct  read, 
ing  of  the  phrase-sign. 

9  almost  as  •well  as. — The  t  of  almost  is  omitted  under  236,  3,  as  is  added 
by  enlarging  the  circle,  and  the  hook  of  well  is  omitted,  for  the  sake  of  phrase, 
writing. 

1°  among  his  best  friends.— 230,  3  ;  164. 


48 


i  which  has  been  mentioned.— P.  169,  R.  12. 


188  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

cised  on  all  the  physical  sciences,  no  less  than  in  the  mental  branches. 
Humboldt  was  a  dweller  in  kingly  palaces — a  courtier,  if  you  choose,2 
and  the  son  of  a  courtier — without  a  taint  of  servile  flattery  or  of  sub- 
mission. He  was  rather  the  honored  guest  of  royalty.  He  loved  lib- 
erty, and  considered  it  a  necessary  element  of  our  civilization.  He 
was  a  sincere  friend  of  substantial,  institutional  freedom.  His  mind 
often  traveled  to  this  country ;  and  that  he  loved  America,  sometimes 
with  sadness,  is  sufficiently3  shown,  were  it  not  otherwise  well  known, 
by  the  singular  love  which  the  Americans  bore  him.  To  me  that  lit- 
tle piece  of  news  was  inexpressibly  touching,  which  simply  informed 
us  that  our  Minister  in  Berlin,  with  the  Americans  now  present  at 
that  city — a  cluster  of  mourners  from  afar — formed  part  of  his  funeral 
procession — the  only  foreign  nation  thus  represented.  In  his  simplic- 
ity and  genial  warmth  he  did  what  many  a  bold  man  would  have 
hesitated  to  do.  I  was  present  as  a  young  and  distant  listener,  when 
at  Rome,  immediately  after  the  Congress  of  Verona,  the  King  oi 
Prussia,  Humboldt,  and  Niebuhr,  conversed  on  the  affairs  of  the  day, 
and  when  the  last-mentioned4  spoke  in  no  flattering  terms  of  the  po- 
litical views  and  antecedents  of  Arago,  who,  it  is  well  known,  was  a 
very  advanced  republican  of  the  Gallican  school,  an  uncompromising 
French  democrat.  Frederick  William  the  Third  simply  abominated 
republicanism,  yet  when  Niebuhr  had  finished,  Humboldt  said,  with 
a  sweetness  which  I  vividly  remember,  "Still  this  monster  is  the 
dearest  friend  I  have  in  France."  Humboldt  had  all  his  brother's 
views  of  the  necessity  of  the  highest  university  education,  and  he 
gave  impulse  to  many  a  scientific,  historical,  or  ethnological  expedi- 
tion, fitted  out  even  by  foreign  governments,  for  he  was  considered 
the  counselor  of  all.  But  I  cannot  dwell5  here  any  longer  on  his  ver- 
satility and  manifold  aptitude.  It  is  proved  by  the  literature  of  al- 
most every  branch.  If  we  read  "Barth  on  Central  Africa,"  we  find 
Humboldt ;  if  we  read  Say's  "Political  Economy,"  we  find  his  name  ; 
if  we  study  the  history  of  the  Nineteenth  Century,  we  find  his  name 
in  the  diplomacy  of  Prussia  and  France  ;  if  we  read  general  literature, 
we  find  his  name  in  connection  with  Schiller  and  Madame  dc  Stacl , 
if  we  look  at  modern  maps,  we  find  his  isothermal  lines ;  if  we  con- 


2  if  you  choose.— P.  1G7,  R.  2. 
s  is  sufficiently.— P.  182,  R.  4. 

4  last-mentioned.— 236,  3. 

5  but  I  cannot  dwell. — 7  is  omitted  hero  under  250, 3,  for  tho  sake  of  plirase- 
•writing.     See  the  Standard-Phonographic  Dictionary  under  /. 


KEY  TO  THE  REPORTING  EXERCISES.  189 

suit  Grim's  Dictionary  of  the  German  Language,  we  find  Humboldt 
as  authority.  That  period  has  arrived  to  which  Croesus  alluded  in 
the  memorable  exclamation,  "Oh,  Solon,  Solon,  Solon!  "  and  we  are 
now  allowed  to  say  Humboldt  was  one  of  the  most  gifted,  most  fortu- 
nate, and  most  favored  mortals — favored  even  with  comeliness,  with 
a  brow  so  exquisitely  formed  that,  irrespective  of  its  being  the  symbol 
of  lofty  thought,  is  pleasant  to  look  upon  in  his  busts,  as  a  mere  beau- 
tiful thing — favored  even  in  his  name,  so  easily  pronounced  by  all 
nations  which  were  destined  to  pronounce  it.  When  we  pray  not 
only  for  the  kindly  fruits  of  the  earth,  but  also,  as  we  ought  to  do, 
for  the  kindly  fruits  of  the  mind,  let  us  always  gratefully  remember 
that  He  who  gives  all  blessed  things  has  given  to  our  age  and  to  all 
posterity  such  a  man  as  Humboldt. 


190  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    HEADER. 

EXHIBIT 

OF 

GENEALOGY  OF  STANDARD  PHONOGRAPHY. 


STANDARD  PHONOGRAPHY— "  The  best  system  of  modern  Short- 
hand Writing"- — consists:  • 

1.  Of  New  Principles,  Rules,  Combinations,  Devices,  Contractions, 

Word-Signs,  and  Phrase-Signs,  originated  by  the  Author  oi 
this  EXHIBIT.  (For  a  statement  of  many  of  these  Improve- 
ments, see  pages  389-91  of  Vol.  II.  of  the  Standard- Phonographic 
Visitor.) 

2.  Of,  as  a  Basis,  the  Ninth  Edition  of  the  Old  Phonography,  as 

amended  by  the  Author  of  this  EXHIBIT — 

THE  NINTH  EDITION,  published  in  1852,  being  an  improvement, 
by  different  Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  EIGHTH  EDITION,  published  in  1847 — an  improvement,  by  dif- 
ferent Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  SEVENTH  EDITION,  published  in  1845 — an  improvement,  by 
different  Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  SIXTH  EDITION,  published  in  1844 — an  improvement,  by  dif- 
ferent Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  FIFTH  EDITION,  published  in  1842 — an  improvement,  by  dif- 
ferent Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  FOURTH  EDITION,  published  in  1841 — an  improvement,  by  dif- 
ferent Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  THIRD  EDITION,  published  in  December,  1840 — an  improve- 
ment, by  different  Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  SECOND  EDITION,  published  in  July,  1840 — an  improvement, 
by  different  Phonographers,  upon — 

THE  FIRST  EDITION,  or  STENOGRAPHIC  SOUND-HAND,  published  in 
1837 — an  improvement  (by  Isaac  Pitman  and  S.  A.  Good,  it 
is  supposed)  upon — 

HARDING' s  STENOGRAPHY,  published  in  1823 — an  improvement 
upon — 

TAYLOR'S  STENOGRAPHY,  published  in  1786 — which  was  an  improve' 
ment  upon  various  systems  of  Shorthand  preceding. 


EXHIBIT    OF    ENLARGING   BRIEF    S,  W,  AND  Y.  191 

EXHIBIT 

OF 

ENLARGING  BRIEF  S,  W,  AND  Y. 

A  phonographic  student  wished  some  means  of  fixing  in 
the  memory  the  Enlarged  Brief  Way  and  Yay  signs.  In 
the  STUDENT'S  JOURNAL  for  April,  1886,  Whole  Number  172, 
there  was  given  the  following : 

Answer:— Preliminarily,  observe,  that,  by  the  enlarging  of  Iss  you 
double  the  s,  as  in  writing  Ses1,  is  as ;  Sesz,  as  is.  In  seeking  some 
quicker  mode  than  the  Old  Phonography  furnished,  for  writing  such 
phrases  as  we  would,  with  you,  you  were,  it  occurred  to  us  to  follow  out 
the  analogy  of  doubling  the  Iss ;  thus:  Way weh>  [we  enlarged],  we 
were,  we  would;  Wehweh1  [with  enlarged],  with  what;  Wuhwuh1 
[what  enlarged],  what  we-re ;  Wuhwuh*  [would  enlarged]  would  we. 
Then  why  not  enlarge  the  brief  Yay  to  double  the  y  ?  Because  we 
found  that  such  use  would  be  of  very  little  value.  It  seemed  desira- 
ble, as  we  added  the  auxiliaries  were  and  would  to  the  pronouns  we  and 
what,  to  add  them  to  the  pronouns  ye  and  you.  So  we  arrived  at  this 
plan:  Yay  well1  [ye  enlarged] ,  ye  were,  you  would;  Yehweh2  [yet  en- 
larged], yet  were,  yon  were;  Yuhwuh2  [you  enlarged],  you  would; 
Yuhwuh1  [beyond  enlarged],  beyond  what.  There  still  remained,  as 
troublesome  in  Old-Phonographic  ways,  such  phrases  as  with  you 
[Weh1  Yuh2],  were  you  [Well'2  Yuh2],  what  you  [Wuh1  Yuh2],  would  you 
[Wuh2  Yuh2] .  As  we  had  already  decided  as  best  to  double  the  w 
brief  signs  to  add  w,  it  occurred  to  us  to  incline  the  brief  iv  to  add  a 
y;  thus,  we  yet,  TFayyeh1 ;  with  you,  Wehyeh1 ;  were  you  (or  yet), 
Wehyeh2;  what  you  (or  yet),  Wuhyuh1 ;  would  you  (or  yet),  Wuh- 
yuh2.  As  to  FORM  of  the  enlarged  brief  w  and  y  signs,  it  should  be 
observed  that,  as  the  brief  w  and  y  signs  are  like  small  hooks  of  Kel, 
Ken,  Tef,  Ter,  so  the  enlarged  signs  are  like  the  large  hooks  of  Kler, 
Kayshon,  etc.,  or,  rather,  like  unclosed  Ster  loops.  See  illustrations 
in  the  stereographic  cut  below.  In  considering  the  advantage  of 
these  enlarged  w  and  y  signs,  it  should  be  observed  that  such  signs  as 
for  we  yet,  would  you,  etc.,  lay  the  foundation  for  many  derivative 
phrase-signs  which  are  very  useful ;  as,  for  we  would  have,  Waywehf  ; 
what  we  have,  Wuhwuhf1 ;  you  would  have,  YuhwuhR 


192  SECOND    STANDAKD-PIIONOGRAPHIO    HEADER. 

____  is,  his,  ___  is  as;     o    as,     O    asis,     as  has 

uue  ,          we.    were,  iue   would  j        with,       with    uiHo.r  .(  c  were 
C  "J«re    lye  ,  were,  what;       lohat,        tyha.t  we-re,   what   juould  -, 

o  ujould,  O    ujoulSj^e,    u>oui<J  ujWt. 

c  O  c      .:,       O 

lue,          uie  i^et  ^          with,          ujitn  v^ou1,  c.  ujere  ,  d  uJere^ou, 

were  i^e-t  -,  *    luhal,          ujhatijou.,  tuWt  ije-f;  o  tu    ,    O  u)1*  IJOU^OT  tje  ij 
i^e          ye  were  /or  would]-,    u   tjet  ,    U  yet   LUC-TC  (     you. 
oij    o  you,  O  you  were      /'    tuouldj;      beyond,          be^onj- 


were 


I  <"      <^s>  <; 

c       x>       J     ;  =        =  < 

C  Z>3C  >  \'  P'l 

c  v.     J  V.      ,  C;     *  \     '          >» 

^    ,   V^   -,    j>     ,    V    J    I  ;   ^     .-X. 

O         3  I 

^    ',      Q     •>     ^  ',     O-     c    .    V.   ; 
"      c      >.    \     -,      ^      -      ^     -,     a     ,      c 
\       r\  «      ^   ,    ^     c        N.      N     ',      Cjonc)'  j-rj-.o     ^_t^ 


CHART    OF   CONTENTS.  193 


CHART    OF    CONTENTS. 


Page. 

A.  ENGRAVED    EXEBCISES 1-48 

ANCIENT  AND  MODERN  PHILOSOPHY 3 

LOGIC 4 

GEOLOGY 5 

EVIDENCES  OF  THE  CIRCULATION  OF  THE   BLOOD 6 

RELIGION    AND  SCIENCE 8 

CREATION 11 

THE  AGE  OF  THE  HUMAN  RACE 13 

THE  INFALLIBILITY  OF  THE  CHURCH 15 

AUDI  ALTEHAM  PAETEM 17 

THE  AMERICAN  BIBLE  SOCIETY 23 

POLITICS 28-38 

GAULDEN'S  PRO-SLAVERY  SPEECH 28 

No  LAW  FOR  SLAVERY — Gerrit  Smith's  Anti-Slavery  Speech 30 

LAW    REPORTING 39-13 

TESTIMONY 39 

CHARGE  TO  THE  JURY 40 

ALEXANDER  VON  HUMBOLDT— Prof.  Lieber's  Eulogium 43 

B.  PREFACE 49-52 

C.  INTRODUCTION 53-68 

1.  PHONOGRAPHIC  NOMENCLATURE 53 

2.  KEY  TO  THE    PRONUNCIATION 56 

3.  EXAMPLES  OF  PHONOGRA  PHIC    DESCRIPTION 50 

4.  EXHIBIT   OF  REPORTING-STYLE  POSITION 63 

5.  POSITION  OF  WORDS  IN  THE  DICTIONARY 65 

C.  EXHIBIT  OF  PHONOGRAPHIC   PHRASE-WRITING 66 

7.  PHRASE  SIGN  POSITION 68 

8.  WORD-DISTINCTIONS 68 

D.  KEY  TO  THE    ENGRAVING 69-189 

With  a  great  body  of  Instruction  in  the  form  of  Notes. 

E.  EXHIBIT  OF  GENEALOGY  OF  STANDARD  PHONOGRAPHY 190 

EXHIBIT  OF  ENLARGING  BRIEF  S,  W,  AND  Y , 191 

F.  INDEXES.     1.  OF  INTRODUCTION  AND  NOTES... 194 

2.  OF  EXERCISES  AND  KEY 000 


194  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 


INDEX  OF  THE  NOTES. 


A. 

A-n,  joining  of page  03,  note  15. 

A-n-d,  tick— value  of 72,  n.  22. 

A  supplied  after  o/aud  to 71,  n.  15  and  17. 

A  law— the  Constitution 147,  n.  1. 

A  man  becomes 143,  n.  8. 

A  rock — sharpening  angles 117,  u.  3. 

A  scholar  . . .' 113,  n.  6. 

Above  all 159,  n.  26. 

Above  our 159,  n.  26. 

Accessible 126,  n.  7. 

Accom — objection  to  heavy  dot  for,  answered   77,  n.  4. 

According 72,  n.  23. 

According— to 120,  n.  2. 

According  to  all  this  testimony 120,  n.  2. 

Actor— formative  of,  sometimes  omitted 139,  n.  21. 

Actor — sometimes  represented  by  the  verb 81,  u.  '2. 

Actor— the 144,  n.  1C,. 

Adapted  to  receive  [and]  hold  the 174,  n.  2. 

Add  another 137,  n.  16. 

Admits  that 161,  n.  8. 

Affinity 135,  n.  6. 

Affixes   omitted 145,  n.  17  ;  177,  n.  6. 

African  slave-trade  man 137,  n.  3. 

Against  it 164,  n.  5. 

Against  the 85,  n.  2. 

Against  you 118,  n.  8. 

Age  of  the  human  race 99,  n.  12. 

Ah!  Oh!  O! 87,  n.  6. 

All  added  by  a  hook,  advantage  of 72,  n.  26  ;  78,  n.  16  ;  110,  n.  10  ;  159,  u.  20. 

All  or  will  added  by  a  hook,  or  by  enlarging  an  Ar-hook 60,  xiv. 

Alldhr 186,  n.  3. 

All  things 89,  n .  7. 

Almost  as  well  as 187,  n.  9. 

Although  it  has  been  stated 184,  n.  1. 

American  Bible  Society,  report  of 121,  n.  4. 

American  Bible  Society 122,  n.  0. 

American  Colonies 159,  n.  22. 

American  people 122,  n.  4  ;  158,  n.  2. 

American  slavery,  special  contraction  for 151,  u.  7. 


INDEX   OF   THE  NOTES.  195 

Amiens,  written  as  a  French  word ( < . i i m ....... .98,  n.  10. 

Among  his  best  friends 187,  n.  10. 

Among  others 135,  n.  5. 

Among  them  the 125,  n.  4. 

Analogous  contractions  for  analogous  words 78,  n.  15  ;  153,  n.  16. 

Ancieut 70,  11.  4. 

Ancient  and  modern  philosophy  compared 3-4  ;  69-74. 

AndAuA  Or  distinguished .• , 126,  n.  5;  162,  n.  17. 

And  bad 122,  n.  1. 

A-n-d  before  Kay'  etc 118,  n.  5. 

And  behold  I  am  with  you 110,  n.  14. 

And  best  interests 121,  n.  7. 

A-n-d  tick  prefixed  to  Skier Ill,  n.  6. 

And  com-,  etc 102,  n.  11. 

And  false  ones 122,  n.  2. 

And  I  tell  you  that 129,  n.  8. 

And  when  joined  by  Tetoid 123,  n.  13. 

And,  how  joined  to  Fel,  Thel,  etc 122,  n.  2. 

And  joined  by  horizontal  or  perpendicular  tick 70,  n.  7. 

And  in  order  to  make  out 177,  n.  5. 

And  none  others 144,  n.  If. 

Aiid  obedience 147,  n.  7. 

And  omitted 174,  n.  2. 

And  (&) 152,  n.  12. 

And  perpendicular,  how  distinguished  from  Or 81,  n.  I. 

And  prefixed  to  fourth-position  to  feel 134,  n.  3;  134,  n.  8. 

And  read  it 131,  n.  2. 

And  redeemed 126,  n.  5. 

And  secularism 123,  n.  13. 

And  so  forth 152,  n.  12. 

Aud  taking  up  the 177,  n.  6. 

And  (Tetoid)  distinguished  from  Or  (Tetoid) 162,  n.  17. 

And  the  first 159,  n.  23. 

And  the  occurring  medially 75,  n.  7. 

And  the,  how  it  may  be  disposed  of  by  the  practiced  reporter 159,  n.  23. 

And  the  old  States 156,  n.  8. 

And  the  world 118,  n.  4. 

And  they  others  again .' 112,  n.  3. 

And  the  nature  of  whose  connection 91,  n.  12. 

And  there  should  be  other  means 129,  n.  4. 

And  to  feel  that 134,  n.  3. 

And  to  oblige 100,  n.  15. 

And  to  some  extent 134,  n.  9;  156,  n.  12. 

And  [to]  work 85,  n.  4. 

And  what 127,  n,  13. 

And  what  do  not  die 141,  n.  7. 

And  what  is 154,  n.  1. 

And  which  they  were 158,  n.  15. 

And  while  it  does  not  controvert  the 125,  n.  19. 

And  with  which  I  do  not  desire 179,  n.  20. 

And  would  not  be 177,  n.  4. 

Angles,  sharpening  of 117,  n.  3. 


196  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Answer.    No,  sir 170,  n.  1. 

Anything  and  Nothing  distinguished 137,  n.  16. 

[Applause] , 137,  n.  4. 

Applause  and  laughter 141,  u.  6. 

Are  added  by  Ar-liook  or  by  enlarging  a  small  El-hook 61,  xv. ;  77,  n.  8. 

Ar-hook  implied 130,  u.  20. 

Ar-hook  enlarged  to  add  1 59,  ix. 

Ar-hook  implied  in  Dhees-Ger,  etc '. 124,  n.  15. 

Are,  sometimes  Ray  in  phrase-writing 161,  u.  2. 

Are,  were,  or  our  added  by  hook 61,  xv. 

Around,  etc.,  added  by  its  briefest  consonant  expression 128,  n.  16. 

Articles  generally  omitted  when  impediments 85,  n.  1. 

As  a  cousccrated 186,  n.  5. 

As  all  the  others  did 186,  n.  3. 

As  his  own 186,  n.  4. 

As  is  done 177,  n.  2. 

As  long  as  I  bold 110,  n.  13. 

As  prefixed  to  fourth-position  words  occasionally '. 125,  n.  29. 

As  ours— as  adapted 87,  n.  3. 

As  the  same 133,  n.  5. 

As  there  is 119.  n.  10. 

As  to  and  as  to  the  distinguished 100,  n.  3. 

As  toils,  etc 90,  n.  2. 

As  to  whether  the 125,  n.  20. 

As  we  have  seen 103,  n.  1. 

As  with  a 162,  n.  14. 

Artificial 115,  n.  5. 

At  any  rate 98,  n.  5. 

At  first 114,  n.  3. 

At  added  by  shortening 61,  xvi.;  73,  n.  29. 

At  Charleston 136,  n.  10. 

At  least  distinguished  from  at  last 78.  n.  2. 

At  length,  i.e.,  at  ten',  Tien' 102,  n.  10. 

At  nearly  the  same  time 156,  n.  11; 

At  the  North 143,  n.  9. 

At  this  stage 158,  n.  1. 

Attentively : 80,  n.  5. 

Audi  alteram  partem 104,  n.  11. 

Aye 137,  n.  2. 

B. 

Baconian  philosophy 73,  n.  33. 

Base[d]  upon 122,  n.  3. 

Beautiful  traits  of  character 143,  n.  2. 

Be  added  to  may 82,  n.  8. 

Bee  for  -ble  occasionally 101 ,  n .  5 . 

Re  added  to  Inm 82,  n.  IV: 

Been  dhr  and  Be  dhr 79,  n.  20. 

Before  he  ventured  to  speak  of  it 82,  n.  0. 

Before  and  its  word-sign 75,  n.  10. 

Before  you 136,  n .  11. 


INDEX   Of   THE   NOTES.  197 

Being i51,  u .  4. 

Believeth  not llfi.  n .  8. 

Below  it 80,  n.  5. 

Beneficent  Creator 102,  n.  16. 

Beneficial 160,  11 .  0 . 

Benefits  of  reporting  studies  and  practice 149,  n.  11. 

Benjamin  Franklin 162,  n.  18. 

Better  than 158,  n .  8. 

Between  two  descriptions 149,  n .  11 . 

Beyond  a  lew  years 151,  u .  g . 

Binds  the 166,  n.  7. 

Black  man 152,  n.  13. 

Black  Republicans 142,  n.  10. 

Blacks 148,  n.  8. 

-I3Ie  sometimes  written  by  Bee  when  Bel  would  be  used  in  the  cs 140,  n.  4. 

Bloodhound 165,  n.  1. 

•Body 115,  n .  4. 

Brackets,  use  of  in  Nomenclature 56. 

Breaking  up  phrases  illustrated 110,  n.  12. 

Brief  Way  and  Yay 71,  n  .21. 

Brief  Way  and  Yay  enlarged 60,  x. 

Brief  Way  j  oined  like  an  En -hook  to  ticks  and  dashes 118,  n .  9 . 

British  Association 99,  n.  11. 

Broadest  sense 138,  n .  13 . 

But  a  part  of  its 74,  n.  4. 

But  I  am  not  sure  that 129,  n.  12. 

But  I  cannot  dwell 188,  n.  5. 

But  it 78,  n .  17. 

But  not  and  Or  not 125,  n .  21 . 

But  surely 147,  n .  5. 

But  they  did  it  not 151,  n.  9. 

But  to  the  eye  of  Cuvier 79,  n.  20. 

But2-whatever  I  can  do 138,  n.  15. 

By  another 178,  n .  9 . 

By  contending  popes 103,  n.  3. 

By  telling  me  . 146,  n.  29. 

By  the  defendant 173,  n.  13. 

By  the  learned  counsel  for  the  defendant 175,  n.  8. 

By  the  long 103,  n .  2. 

By  the  name 93,  n.  1. 

By  the  regular 112,  n.  5. 

C. 

Can  certainly  have 1*2,  n.  13. 

Can  fail 105,  n.  14. 

Can  there  be 116,  n.  9. 

Can  we  accomplish  there 127,  n.  13. 

Can  we— En-hook  omitted  as  an  impediment 86,  n.  7. 

Capable 101,  n.  5. 

Carry  out  in  to 160,  n.  28. 

Carry  out  their 106,0.19. 


198  SECOND    STANDARD-PHOXOGRAPHIC    READER, 

Chancery  ...............................................................  181,  n.  C. 

Change  of  outlines  or  directions  for  phrase-writing  .....................  15.-J.  n.  1. 

Chapters  and  verses  ....................................................  1CM,  n.  10. 

Cuarai'teristics  of  the  Reporting  Style  ......................................  58-02. 

Charles  the  Second  ......................................................  73,  n.  34. 

"  Chase  with  the  speaker  "  to  be  avoided  ..........................  ,  ...........  62. 

Chateaubriand  ..........................................................  182,  n.  1. 

Cheers,  etc.,  mode  of  indicating  .........................................  137,  n.  4. 

Cicero  ...................................................................  71,  n.  19. 

Circle  between  two  strokes  ....................................  94,  n.  8  ;  101,  u.  8. 

Circle,  large  initial  ...........................................  71,  n.  19  ;  145,  n.  21. 

Circles  between  curves  ......................................  71.  n.  19  ;  174,  u.  10. 

Circle,  most  convenient  way  of  turning  ................................  123,  n.  12. 

Circle,  triple  size  .......................................................  173,  u.  11. 

Classical  and  Reporting  studies  compared  ..............................  149,  n.  11. 

Combinations  of  principles  .............................................  107,  u.  4. 

Common  nature  ........................................................  144,  n.  11. 

Con-  and  com-  implied  ..............................  73,  n.  30  ;  143,  n.  9  ;  180,  u.  5. 

Con-  or  Com-  implied  by  writing  under  ...................................  70,  n.  8. 

Confessed  his  ..........................................................  102,  n.  13. 

Conflict  contracted  ......................................................  121,  u.  10. 

Connected  with  the  .....................................................  171,  n.  4. 

Constitution  and  unconstitutional  .....................................  150,  n.  15. 

Constitution  is  ......................................................  ..  .  .158,  n.  7. 

Constitution  is  for  slavery  .............................................  103,  11.  'J3. 

Constitution  is  not  for  slavery  .........................................  150,  n.  14. 

Contra  o  implied  by  proximity  .........................................  125,  n.  19. 

Contractions,  general  rule  for  devising  ..................................  147,  n.  7. 

Contraction  for  Habeas  Corpus  ..........................................  153,  n.  15. 

Contractions,  principle  of  ...............................................  154.  n.  2. 

Contractions,  principle  of,  similar  to  general  rule  of  position  ........  154,  n.  2  (c). 

Contractions  —  progressive  degrees  of  ...............  112,  n.  3  ;  122,  n.  G  ;  143,  u.  C. 

Contractions,  suggestiveness  generally  determined  by  position  of  primi- 

tive word  ........................................................  154,  n.  2  (d). 

Contractions,  sometimes  vocalized  ......................................  147,  u.  7. 

Contraction,  value  of  a  good  one  ........................................  70,  n.  12. 

Contri-  joined  ............................................................  9G,  n.  2. 

Contributed  ......................  .  .......................................  90,  n.  2. 

Contribution  .............................................................  90,  n.  2. 

Country,  new  word-sign  for  .............................................  155.  n.  4. 

Copy  of  it  ...............................................................  171,  n.  2. 

Could  distinctly  joined  to  they  ...........................................  82,  n.  10. 

Could  have  had  ........................................................  100,  n.  29. 

COM'  thr  distinguished  from  Ca'  thr  .......................................  88,  n.  7. 

Court  and  jury  .........................................................  173,  n.  12. 

Criticism,  discriminating,  by  the  reporter  .............................  149,  n.  11. 

Cross  examination,  noting  of  ............................................  108,  n.  9. 

Cuvier,  pronunciation  of  .................................................  79,  n.  20. 


Dagger,  use  of  in  Nomenclature  ...............................................  5C, 

Dashes  with  hooks,  how  distinguished  from  shortened  letters  ..........  76,  n.  13. 


INDEX    OF   THE   NOTES.  199 

Dates,  writing  of 83,  n.  2;  167,  n.  4. 

Dates  of  preceding  centuries. 169,  n.  12. 

Declaration  of  Independence... 160,  n.  27. 

Defendant,  word-sign  for 173,  n.  13. 

"Democratic  party"  contracted 136,  n.  14. 

Dependent  infinitive  joined 104,  n.  10. 

Derivative  contractions  or  word-signs,  positions  cf 154,  u.  2,  b,  c,  and  d. 

Derivative  word-signs 86,  n.  5. 

Derivative  words  sometimes  contracted  and  not  the  primitives 147,  n.  7,  b. 

Described  in  bis  patent 176,  n.  9. 

Description,  pbonograpbic  example  of 56-58. 

Desire  to  secede 145,  n.  21. 

Dliees-Em 174,  n.  16. 

Dbr  and  sometimes  Tr  and  Dr  added  to  straight  lines  by  lengthening 60,  xii. 

Dhr=  their,  there,  they  are,  they  were,  other,  added  by  a  heavy  tick 60,  xiii. 

Dhr-tick,  instance  of  use 77,  n.  7. 

Dhr=their,  there,  etc.,  added  by  lengthening  to  straight  lines.  .60,  xii.;  166,  n.  8. 

Different  directions  of  certain  letters 146,  n.  28. 

Different  readings 156,  n.  9. 

Different  values  of  phonographic  letters  distinguished 76,  n.  13. 

Direct  immersion 174,  n.  18. 

Directions  changed  forsake  of  phrase-writing 146,  n.  28  ;  164,  n.  4. 

Discoverer 81,  n.  2. 

Discrimination  required  in  note-reading 156,  n.  9. 

Disdained  to  be 70,  n.  5. 

Disparities  in  speed  in  the  Old  Phonography 92,  n.  14. 

Dissolution — how  distinguished  from  Desolation 145,  n.  20. 

Distinction  of  signs,  principle  of 76,  n.  13. 

Docs  not  refer 157,  n.  14. 

Do  not  understand  me 149,  n.  13. 

Downward  forms  occasionally  used  for  greater  convenience 88,  n.  1. 

Drift 98,  n.  9. 

E. 

Ease  of  junction  secured  by  shaping  of  letters 96,  n.  5 ;  143,  n.  5. 

El-hook  on  curves,  for  for  v,  and  to  add  liave,  ever,for-th 61,  xvii.;  140,  n.  24. 

Ef-hook  and  En-hook  on  curves 138,  n.  8  ;  157,  n.  15. 

Ef-Sem 94,  n.  8. 

El-hook  employed  to  add  all  or  mill 60,  xiv. 

El-hook  enlarged  to  add  r 59,  ix.;  71,  n.  20. 

El-hook,  small,  enlarged  sometimes  to  add  are,  were,  our 60,  xv. 

Emancipators 144,  n.  15. 

Employed  to  prevent  the  secession 145,  n.  24. 

Ems-Ith 162,  n.  8. 

England,  new  word-sign  for 155,  n.  5. 

Eudhert,  =,  » 119,  n.  12. 

En-hook  adding  than 61,  xviii. 

Ku-hook  omitted  as  an  impediment 81,  n.  3  ;  81,  n.  4 

Enlargement  of  the  semicircles  (Weh  or  Wuh,  Yen  or  Yuh) 106,  n.  1. 

Enlarging  Issi 110,  n.  11. 

Ens-circle  between  strokes 166,  n.  7  ;  168,  n,  10 ;  176,  n.  10. 

Entire  and  its  derivatives 151,  n.  5. 


200  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Entitle-d....  ............................................................  178,  n.  8. 

E^ual  brothers  ..........................................................  161,  n.  3. 

Es  sounds  omitted  .......................  73,  n.  34  ;  103,  n.  9  ;  1G7,  n.  5  ;  168,  n.  7. 

Et  cetera  and  it  is  true  ..................................................  152,  n.  12. 

Ever  added  by  Ef-hook  on  curves  .....  .  ..................................  61,  xvii. 

Everything,  speedy  writing  of  ...................................  .........  103,  n.  3. 

Exaggerate  the  .........................................................  159,  n.  19. 

Examples  of  Phonographic  Description  .....................................  56-58. 

Exercises  —  how  used  in  study  .................................................  49. 

Exceedingly  difficult  ...................................................  178,  n.  12. 

EXHIBITS  : 

Of  Nomenclature  .....................................................  53-50. 

Of  Characteristics  of  the  Reporting  Stylo  .............................  58-62. 

Of  Enlarging  Brief  S,  W,  and  Y  .........................................  191. 

Of  Reporting-Style  Position  ..........................................  63-65. 

Of  Phonographic  Phrase-Writing  .....................................  63-67. 

Of  Phrase-Position  ......................................................  68. 

Of  Word-Distinctions  ....................................................  08. 

Of  History  of  Phonography  .............................................  190. 

Omission  of  Vowels  —  Reportiug-Style  characteristic  ...................  58,  i. 

Exhibits,  the  noting  of  ..................................................  108,  n.  8. 

Existing  States  ..........................................................  155,  n.  6. 

Explains  the  ............................................................  113,  n.  6. 

Extemporaneous  speech,  phrases  of  ..........................  130,  n.  18  ;  151,  n.  9. 

Extinction  .............................................................  158,  n.  10. 

Extracts,  how  indicated  .................................................  115,  n.  6. 


Fallible  .................................................................  101  ,  n.  5. 

Family  after  family  ....................................................  106,  n.  20. 

Far[ther  and]  farther  .....................................................  96,  n.  8. 

-Fer-red  .................................................................  103,  n.  7. 

Final  Wuh-hook,  rule  for,  stated  ........................................  118,  n.  9. 

Fixed  stars  —  impeding  letters  omitted   ..................................  91,  n.  11. 

For  added  by  Ef-hook  on  curves  .........................................  61,  xvii. 

For  consenting  ..........................................................  148,  n.  9. 

For  a  considerable  time  .................................................  103,  n.  4. 

-Fore  added  ..............................................................  89,  n.  8. 

Foreign  names  ....................................  98,  n.  10  ;  144,  n.  15  ;  182,  n.  1. 

Foreign  languages,  reporting  of  .........................................  114,  u.  1. 

For  ouo  ................................................................  157,  n.  18. 

For  our  ................................................................  127,  n.  14. 

For  Ike  omitted  ..........................................................  177,  n.  1. 

For  the  papal  dignity  ...................................................  102,  n.  1. 

For  the  purpose  ..............................................  109,  11.  3  ;  1GO,  n,  1. 

For  what  I  did  not  .....................................................  146,  n.  27. 

Form,  and  its  derivatives,  platform,  etc  ..................................  134,  n.  4. 

Forms  changed  occasionally  ............................................  91,  n.  10. 

Forth  contracted  .........................................................  83,  n.  1. 

For-th  added  by  Ef-hook  on  curves    ......................................  01,  xvii. 

Fourth  position—  for  Hay,  etc  ......................  .  .....  .  ..............  121,  n.  5. 


INDEX   OF  THE  XOTES.  201 

Fourth  position — for  Kel,  etc 98,  n.  3. 

Fourth  position  for  words  beginning  with  Iss 100,  n.  1. 

Fractions,  writing  of 97,  n.  10. 

Freedom  cannot  bear 158,  n.  11. 

French  u,  representation  of 79,  n.  20. 

from  it,  and  its  old  expression 145,  n.  22. 

From  point  to  point 180,  n.  4. 

From  the  general  government 138,  n.  16. 

From  the  great  State  of  New  York 134,  n.  2. 

From— to,  example  of 88,  n.  2  ;  180,  n.  4. 

-Ful-l;/-ness,  added  by  Ef-hook  on  curves 61,  xvii. 

-Fulness   109,  n.  6. 

Further  and  further 136,  n.  8. 

Futility 75,  n.  11. 

G. 

Gay  between  Ing  and  other  letters  sometimes  omitted 136,  n.  13. 

General 138,  16. 

General  contractions 74,  u.  3. 

General  council,  specially  contracted 101,  n.  4. 

General  system — omitting  En-hook  as  impediment 150,  u.  18. 

Gentlemen  of  the  jury 172,  n.  8. 

Give  way 172,  n.  5. 

God  [Aljmighty's  agency 125,  n.  3. 

God  expects  us 129,  n.  6. 

God  has  Bent  161,  n.  6. 

Goethe 183,  n.  3. 

Good  writer 90,  n.  10. 

Go,  therefore 109,  n.  4. 

Gordiau  knot  cut 72,  n.  23. 

Great  National  Democratic  Party 138,  n.  10. 

Greatest  speed  of  writing,  how  to  attain  it 51,  par.  1. 

Greek  text,  pronunciation  of 114,  n.  1. 

n. 

Habeas  Corpus 153,  n.  15. 

Had  added  by  shortening 61,  xvi.;  160,  n.  29;  162,  n.  12. 

Halving  to  add  It,  Had,  What,  Would,  and  sometimes  At  and  Out 61,  xvi. 

Hand,  hesitating  movement  of,  to  be  avoided 50,  par.  1. 

Handful 151,  n.  1. 

Has  found  its  way 95,  n.  1. 

Hast  Thou  made  them  all 95,  n.  9. 

Has  sustained 179,  n.  19. 

HateJul 163,  n.  2. 

Have,  added  by  Ef-hook  on  curves 61,  xvii. ;  123,  n.  7. 

Have,  added  by  Vee-hook 140,  n.  24. 

Have  all 78,  n.  16. 

Hare  implied  after  /.  .126,  n.  8;  127,  n.  9  ;  130,  n.  22;  136,  n.  15;  137,  n.  5;  159,  n.  16. 
Have  not  omitted  when  it  can  be  conveniently  written  by  a  hook. . .  .127,  n.  9  (c). 

Have  omitted .75,  n.  9;  91,  n.  8;  126,  n.  8;  127,  n.  9:  130,  n.  22. 

Have  omitted  before  been 77,  n.  9. 


202  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Have  supplied  before  irregular  past  participles 127,  n.  9. 

He  petitioned 163,  n.  19. 

77e,  represented  by  a  tick 58,  iv.,  1. 

He  would  have  been  able  to  receive 187,  n.  G. 

Hear  the  otber  side,  and  why 104,  n.  11. 

Heavy  and  light  dots  distinguished 77,  u.  5. 

Here  and  there 1-7,  n.  10. 

Heretofore 115,  u.  5. 

High,  higher,  highest 125,  u.  1. 

tits  added  to  a  loop 102,  u.  13. 

Hooks  sometimes  implied  by  offsets 174,  n.  18. 

Hooks  omitted. .  .81,  n.  3  ;  80,  n.  3  and  4 ;  91,  n.  8  ;  179,  n.  17  ;  180,  n.  2 ;  184,  n.  1. 

Horizontal  first-position  words  adapted 99,  n.  13. 

How  can  you  believe 119,  n.  1. 

How  expressed  by  a  tick 59,  iv.,  2. 

How — modes  of  writing 120,  n.  1. 

How  rarely 143,  n.  7. 

Human  family 1C2,  n.  10. 

Human  mind si,  n.  4. 

I. 

/ansl  I  have 105,  n.  18. 

I  believe  that  it  is  right  to  have 129,  n.  11. 

7,  brief  sign  for 130,  n.  23. 

I  command  you 117,  n.  1. 

I  command  you  to  go 109,  u.  1. 

7,  expressed  by  a  tick 59,  iv.,  3. 

1  have  been  there 172,  n.  6. 

I  have  felt  that  the 136,  n,  14. 

I  have  had  my  heart 131,  n.  23. 

I  [have]  loved  the 126,  n.  8. 

I  have  presented 130,  n.  23. 

I  have  Raid 137,  n.  5;  159,  n.  16. 

I  have  seen 127,  n.  9. 

I  know  that  I  am  not  going  to  be  applauded 140,  n.  27. 

I  offor 121,  n.  8. 

I  preached  the  Gospel Christ  Jesus 115,  n.  6. 

I  said  I  would  teach 118,  n.  9. 

I  say  it  is 140,  n.  1. 

7  sometimes  "omitted 133,  n.  15;  146,  n.  27,  b  ;  138,  n.  5. 

7,  tlie  pronoun,  when  written  alone 105,  n.  13. 

I  will  make  it 108,  n.  11. 

I  would 113,  n.  23. 

I  would  that  tliey  felt  more  tliat  it  is  God's  Y,"ord 130,  n.  19. 

I  would  to  God 130,  n.  18. 

7  written  to  imply  have 1^3,  n.  8;  127,  n.  9. 

-t'c  omitted 7J,  n.  CO  ;  77,  n.  5  ;  77,  n.  10. 

If  they  could  be 82,  n.  10. 

If  you  choose 188,  n.  2. 

If  you  were  (or  would) 131,  n.  26. 

Ignore,  position  of,  and  of  ignorance,  iynorant 130,  n.  li. 

Illegalities 165,  n.  2, 


INDEX   OF   THIS   NOTES.  203. 

Impediments,  omission  of 75,  n.  7  ;  77,  n.  11 ;  78,  n.  13  ;  80,  n.  8;  81,  3  and  4. 

Impeding  letters  omitted * 86,  n.  7. 

Impeding  syllables,  ing,  etc.,  omitted 89,  n.  6. 

Implying  ing  preceding  a-n  ox  the 77,  n.  4  ;  147,  n.  2  ;  160,  n.  30. 

Implying  ing  preceding  thr 96,  u.  9  ;  158,  n.  5. 

Impious  and  impossible 163,  n.  20. 

Implication  :   Con 121,  n.  10. 

Implication  :  Contro-a,  etc.,  occasionally  like  con 125,  n.  19. 

Implying  and  Supplying  distinguished 71;  n.  15  ;  148,  n.  10,  6. 

Implying  lo 72,  n.  23. 

In  a  general  council 101,  n.  4. 

In  a  similar 162,  n.  U. 

In  a  spiritual 123,  n.  14. 

In  a  state  of  civilization 97,  n.  1. 

In  comparison  with  those  which 94,  n.  5. 

In  connection  with 184,  n.  3. 

In  consequence  of  your  commission 109,  n.  5. 

In  England 1 55,  n.  5. 

In  favor  of  slavery 149,  n.  12. 

/rt-hook  distinguished  from  similar  signs 76,  n.  !3. 

In  one  or  other 87,  n.  4. 

In  order  [to] 110,  n.  8. 

In  order  to  constitute 176,  n.  11. 

In  order  to  form 159,  n.  20. 

In  our,  best  position 86,  n.  6. 

In  prefixed  by  an  In-hook 123,  n.  14  ;  145,  n.  18  ;  162,  n.  11. 

In  [t/te]  relation  and  in  real-ity 143,  n.  4. 

In  reality 17%  n.  12. 

In  slaves 145,  n.  18. 

In  taking  up  their 152,  n.  10. 

In  that  terrible  clime 141,  n.  4. 

In  this  city 1 67,  n.  5. 

In  this  country 155,  n.  4. 

In  thi[s]  process 174,  n.  3. 

In  the  chancery 181,  n.  6. 

In  the  Constitution 150,  n,  15. 

In  the  contemplation 156,  n.  9. 

In  the  conversion  of  the  world 129,  n.  13. 

In  the  faith Ill,  n.  19. 

In  the  first  place 153,  n.  17. 

In  the  form 123,  n.  11. 

In  the  rnidst  of  which  the 186,  n.  1. 

In  the  prefixed  to  Sker,  etc 93,  n.  2. 

In  the  second  place 153,  u.  19. 

In  the  relation  distinguished  from  fn  reality 143,  n.  4. 

In  value 107,  n.  8. 

In  what  I  say 140,  n.  28. 

In  what  is 98,  n.  8. 

In  what  part  of  the  country 134,  n.  6. 

Incapable 132,  n.  1. 

Indian's  skull  found  at  New  Orleans,  ago  of 99,  n.  12. 

Infinite-ly,  etc , 92,  n.  14. 


204:  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    KEADEK. 

Ing-dot  omitted 105,  n.  15  ;  146,  n.  29. 

Ing  lengthened  to  add  tiir 135,  n.  5. 

-Ing  implied 77,  n.  4. 

-Ing  therefore 96,  n.  9. 

-Ing  thr 103,  n.  5. 

Ingenuity 158,  n.  6, 

-Ingly  represented 85,  n.  3. 

-Ings 77,  n.  4. 

Initials  for  speaker 139,  B.  19. 

Initial  circle,  large,  saving  of 71,  n.  19  ;  145,  u.  21  and  24. 

Initial  circle,  implying  an  Ar-hook 124,  u.  15. 

Interfere-d 179,  n.  14. 

Interrogation,  mark  of,  in  law-reporting IC7,  n.  2,  6. 

Interruptions 139,  11.  19. 

Into  the  air 74,  n.  2. 

Into  omitted 179,  n.  17. 

Into  the  Constitution 151,  n.  3. 

Into  your  hands 118,  n.  7. 

Introduction 53-68. 

Investments 145,  n.  17. 

Irrepressible  conflict  party 138,  n.  11. 

Is  capable  of  being 151,  u.  4. 

Is  commanded  to  send 109,  n.  7. 

Is  described 173,  u.  14. 

Is  ever 124,  n,  18. 

Is  expressed 150,  n.  17. 

Iss-hhel  may  be  used  by  a  reporter  even  when  it  is  alone 185,  n.  4. 

Is  not  possible 99,  n.  13. 

Is  prefixed  by  enlarging  a  circle 173,  n.  14  ;  188,  n.  3. 

Is  suflicient-ly 188,  n.  3. 

Is  that 128,  n.  1. 

Is  the  same  as  commanding 110,  n.  II. 

Is  therefore 89,  n.  8. 

Is  to 128,  n.  2. 

Iss  Per,  etc.,  ocurring  medially  76,  n.  1. 

-Istie-al-ly,  how  treated 77,  n.  10. 

It  is  true,  and  et  cetera 152,  n.  12. 

It  added  by  shortening 61,  xvi.;  80,  n.  C  ;  97,  n.  2  ;  123,  n.  9  ;  128,  n.  15  ;  (with 

it)  133,  n.  4  ;  140,  n.  1  ;  145,  n.  19  anO.22  ;   1GG,  n.  4  ;  177,  n.  13  ;  184,  n.  1. 

It  added  to  the  past  tense  of  verbs  ending  in  Mel,  Xel,  Kel 174,  n.  5-,  B. 

It  appeared  to  be — ed  omitted 104,  n .  10. 

It  does  not 163,  n.  22. 

Ith-Sem 94,  n.  8. 

It  is  a  well-known  fact 148  n .  28. 

It  is  true 177,  n.  3. 

It  is  your  right  to  have 140,  n.  24. 

It  may  be  that  there  are 82.  n .  8. 

It  may  perhaps,  etc 110,  n.  12. 

It  not 159,  n.  17. 

It  seems  certain  that  they  were 98,  n.  6. 

Its  added 76,  n.  12. 


INDEX   OF   THE  NOTES.  205 

J. 

Jesus  Christ  addressed  you  ..............................................  116,  n.  7. 

Jonathan  Smith  ........................................................  172,  n.  10. 

John  Bull  ...............................................................  Hi,  n.  9. 

John,  chapter  15  and  verse  10  ..........................................  108,  n.  10. 

Joinings  made  easy  by  varied  shapes  .....................................  89,  n.  7. 

Julius  II.  —  s  omitted  ....................................................  103,  n.  9. 

Jury  to  be  capitalized  in  transcribing  ..................................  173,  n.  12. 

Just  so  far  ..............................................................  147,  n.  4. 

K. 

-Kay  omitted  ..................................................  73,  n.  30  ;  75,  n.  8. 

Kay-  omitted  ...........................  75,  n.  8;  131,  n.  25;  136,  n.  13;  143,  n.  6. 

Key  to  the  pronunciation  .....................................................  56. 

Key  to  the  Reporting  Exercises  ............................................  69-189. 


Lancaster  ..............................................................  136,  n.  13. 

Lapping  and  joining  instead  ...........................................  146,  n.  25. 

Lapping,  as  in  they  did  it  not  .............................................  151,  n.  9. 

Lapping  in  phrase-  writing   ..............................................  79,  n.  1. 

Lapping  for  joining  ...........................................  84,  n.  3  ;  107,  n.  8. 

Lapping  of  words  in  phrase-writing  .....................................  Ill,  n.  2. 

Large  hook  for  /on  Em,  En,  Ray  .........................................  59,  viii. 

Large  hook  for  I  on  Em  —  instances  of  value  ..............................  69,  n.  2. 

Large  hook  letters,  shortening  of  .............................  69,  n.  2  ;  163,  n.  19. 

Large  initial-circle,  advantage  of  ........................................  71,  n.  19. 

Large  initial-  hook  letters  —  ending  verbs  in  the  present  tense  ...........  174,  n.  5. 

Large  initial  hooks  ......................................................  71,  n.  20. 

Last-mentioned  .........................................................  188,  n,  4. 

Laughter,  renewed  .....................................................  139,  n.  23. 

Law  courts,  Phonography  in  ............................................  167,  n.  1. 

Law  of  God  .............................................................  138,  n.  8. 

Law  Reporting  ............................................  .  .............  167,  n.  1. 

Law  Reporting,  punctuation  in  ........................................  168,  n.  11. 

Law-school  ..............................................................  166,  n.  3. 

Lawyer's  names,  how  indicated  '  .................  .......................  170,  n.  14. 

Legibility  aided  occasionally  by  disjoining  .........................  93,  n.  4  and  5. 

Legibility  of  words  aided  by  context  ....................................  103,  n.  2. 

Legibility  and  distinction  aided  by  use  or  sense  ........................  148,  n.  10. 

Lengthening  principle  —  proper  use  of  ..................................  116,  n.  9. 

Less  than  it  was  ........................................................  164,  n.  4. 

-Lessness  .................................................................  109,  n.  6. 

Let  it  not  be  ............................................................  159,  n  .  17. 

Let  there  be  ..............................................................  80,  n.  1. 

Letters  disjoined  or  crossing  .........................  .........................  56. 

Letters  must  not  be  made  too  large  ..................................  49,  last  par. 

Liftings  in  phrase-writing  ..............................................  107,  n.  5. 

Like  signs,  how  distinguished  ..........................................  76,  n.  13. 

Little  savings  and  great  gains  ..........................................  145,  n.  23. 


206  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Lo!  I  am  with  yon  always  .............................................  119,  n.  13. 

Log  cabins  .............................................................  131,  u.  -25. 

Long  stroke  before  last  figure  of  dates  ....................................  81,  11.  5. 

Look  around  ...........................................................  128,  n.  1C. 

Loud  laughter  .........................................................  139,  n.  22. 

-U\j  .....................................................................  75,  n.  11. 

•Ly,  frequently  represented  by  enlarging  an  Ar-hook  ....................  147,  n.  5. 

-Lty  ........................................................  75,  n.  11;  135,  n.  G,  3. 

-Ly  omitted  ...........................................  76,  n.  2  ;  80,  n.  5  ;  90,  n.  7. 

-Ly  —  presently  ......................................  .  ...................  110,  n.  9. 

M. 

Make  and  take,  contractions  for  ..........................................  75,  n.  6. 

Make  it  ................................................................  108,  n.  11. 

Maybe  ..................................................................  180,  n.  3. 

May  have  been  ..........................................................  180,  u.  3. 

Meant  to  have  it  ........................................................  151,  11.  2. 

Metternich  ..............................................................  185,  u.  G. 

Merely  and  immorally  ....................................................  117,  11.  4. 

Ministering  spirits  .......................................................  89,  n.  G. 

Misrepresentation,  what  it  is  ...........................................  104,  n.  12. 

Mont  Blanc  ............................................................  144,  n.  15. 

Moral  perfection  ........................................................  70,  n.  10. 

More  than  one  ...........................................................  82,  n.  7. 

Most  distinguished  ....................................................  158,  n.  12. 

Most  High  ......................................  .  .......................  102,  n.  G. 

Movable  frames  .........................................................  174,  n.  1. 

Mr.  generally  omitted  in  note-taking  ............................  .'  .......  172,  n.  7. 

Mr.  President  ...........................................................  136,  n.  9. 

Multiply  -ied-mnltitude  ..................................................  CO,  n.  2. 

Must  have  been  there  ...................................................  79,  n.  20. 

My  brethren  ............................................................  134,  n.  1. 

My  Northern  friends  ...................................................  138,  n.  14. 


Names,  noting  of  .......................................................  »70,  u.  .-,. 

Names,  foreign,  how  written  ............................................  98,  n.  10. 

Nasalization,  how  expressed  .............................................  98,  n.  10. 

Natural  philosophy  ....................................................  Ill,  u.  17. 

Naturalism  .............................................................  123,  u.  12. 

-Nest  omitted  ...........................................................  143,  n.  3. 

Never  ...................................................................  70,  u.  1  2. 

Nomenclature,  Phonographic  .................................................  53. 

No  law  for  slavery  ......................................................  14G,  u.  28. 

No  other  idea  ..........................................................  119,  n.  12. 

None  others  ............................................................  144,  n.  14. 

Nor  can  we  ..............................................................  180,  n.  2. 

Xorth  contracted  ..............................................  143,  u.  9;  1G4,  u.  7. 

North  star  ..............................................................  164,  n.  7. 

Northern  ....................................................  138.  n.  11  ;  141,  n.  7. 

Northern  Democracy  ....................................................  141,  n.  7. 


I3TDEX    OF   THE   NOTES.  207 

Not  added  by  an  En-hook 125,  n.  21. 

Not  a  year  or  two Ill,  u.  15. 

Kot  with  preceding  t!i,  m,  etc 110,  n.  8. 

Notes,  discrimination  required  in  reading 149,  n.  11. 

Notes  iu  this  Reader,  tlie  aim  of 51. 

Notes— the  references  in 52. 

Notes  on  the  Exercises,  objects  of   51,  bot. 

A'ol/tirtg  and  anything 157,  u.  10. 

Noticeable  circumstance  that 95,  n.  12. 

Numbers,  how  usually  written 79,  u.  3  ;  141,  u.  5 ;  172,  u.  11. 

Numerals,  Phonographic 76,  n.  3. 

Numerical  terms,  iieed  of  signs  for 78,  n.  19. 


O. 

O  and  Oh 87,  n.  G. 

Obedience,  disobedience,  etc 147,  n.  7. 

Objected  to 1C9,  n.  13. 

Objections,  noting  of 1G9,  n.  13. 

Objections  to  certain  contractions  answered 143,  n.  G  ;  145,  n.  23. 

Of  a  human  being 118,  n.  G. 

Of  added  by  a  Vee-hook 90,  n.  11;  139,  n.  17. 

Of  added  by  Ef-hook  on  curves Gl,  xvii. 

Of  all  American  slavery 166,  n.  5. 

Of  all  parties  concerned 146,  n.  25. 

O/by  a  Vee-hook 90,  n.  11. 

Of  divisions;— of  written  and  why 134  n.  7. 

Of,  followed  or  not  by  an  article,  implied £9,  vi. 

Of  having 73,  n.  28. 

Of  human  enjoyments G9,  n.  3. 

©/"implied — advantage  of 09,  n.  3  ;  71,  n.  17. 

Of  its 74,  u.  4  ;  79,  n.  2. 

Of  occasionally  written  by  Vee-hook  rather  than  implied 139,  n.  17. 

O/omitted  between  words  joined 71,  u.  16. 

Of  our  illustrious  man J87,  n.  8. 

Of  our  lost  ones 88,  n.  1. 

Of  our  navy 187,  n.  7. 

Of  our  own,  Prentoidi 90,  n.  4. 

Of  the  omitted 141,  u.  3. 

Of  the  omitted  as  impeding  words 90,  n.  G. 

Of  the  two 172,  n.  11. 

Of  t hoir 143,  n.  10. 

Of  their  and  of  it,  new  Hand-Book  phrases 79,  n.  2. 

Offer  distinguished  f  roni  form 121,  n.  8. 

-Ography-ic-al  78,  n.  15. 

Oil!  Ol  and  Ah! 87,  u.  G. 

Old  Phonography — confusion  of  as  to  viho-se-m 124,  u.  16. 

"  defect  as  to  the  representation  of  or  not,  but  r.ot 125,  u.  21. 

"  "      in  the  representation  of  extemporaneous 

speech 130,  n.  18. 

"  did  not  imply  to 70,  u.  5. 


208  SECOND    STANDAED-MOKOGIlAPmc   UEADEK. 

Old  Phonography  did  not  provide  word-signs   for  numerical  de- 
nominations   78,  n.  Id. 

"  disparities  of  speed  in 02,  n.  14. 

••  its  inferiority  as  to  outlines 150,  n.  1(5. 

"  its  mode  of  expressing  a-n 72,  n.  22. 

"  plan  of,  as  to  w  and  y 71,  n.  21. 

rule  of,  as  to  joining 89,  n.  7. 

"  rule  of,  as  to  joining  and 70,  n.  7. 

"  sacrificed  uniformity  and  consistency 153,  n.  16. 

OMISSIONS : 

1.  Of  words 61,  zix.;  76,  n.  3  ;  126,  n.  8  ;  131,  n.  4  ;  129,  n.  13. 

Of  an 113,  n.  7  ;  1U7,  n.  16. 

Of  impeding  words 82,  n.  7;  90,  n.  6;  91,  n.  8  ;  (of  the) 

134,  n.  6;  (the)  42,  n.  5  ;  133,  n.  6  ;  (the  after  and)  118,  n.  4  ;  (or)  111,  n. 

15;  183,  n.  4  ;  (with)  97,  n.  11 ;  (7  omitted  in  certain  cases)  14G,  n.  27. 

2.  Of  syllables  or  letters 122,  n.  4  ;  131.  n.  25  ;  (as  k)  143,  n.  6  ;  (Kay  or 

Gay)  136,  n.  13  ;  (as  n)  113,  n.  9  ;  (as  t)  181,  n.  6 ;  (as  En-hook)  117,  E.  2  ; 
149,  n.  13  ;  (of  ny)  1 18,  n.  6  ;  (in  phrase-writing)  1 16,  n.  9  ;  J 18,  n.  8  ;  (as 
Ing  when  difficult)  146,  n.  9  ;  140,  n.  27  ;  151,  n.  4  ;  (of  Eses)  73,  n.  34. 

3.  Of  Impediments 77, 

n.  11  ;  94,  n.  5;  128,  n.  18;  (as  En-hoot)  130,  n.  16;  91,  n.  11 ;  95,  n.  11  ; 
103,  n.  8;  105,  n.  Hand  15;  138,  n.  9,  13  and  16  ;  150,  n.  15  ;  183,  n.  4. 

4.  Of  Vowels  in  the  Reporting  Style 58,  par.  1 ;  130,  n.  21 . 

5.  Of  superfluous  words  or  letters 98,  n.  6  ;  97,  n.  1  ;  183,  n.  4. 

6.  Of  pronouns  readily  supplied 138,  n.  15. 

On  as  adverb 80,  n.  7. 

On  liis  deathbed 182,  n.  2. 

On  omitted 76,  n.  3. 

One  added  by  an  En-hook 103,  n.  2. 

One  and  the  same 75,  u.  7. 

One  or  two  oclock 1S3.  n.  4. 

One  omitted 76,  n.  3. 

Only  conflict 121,  n.  10. 

Only  one 103,  n.  2. 

Or  disjoined  where  a-n-d  would  be  Tetoid CI,  n.  1. 

Or  omitted 1G3,  n.  4. 

Or  embraces — how  Tetoid  is  distinguished  from  and 123,  n.  8. 

Or  when  joined CO,  n.  12. 

Or  not— joining  hooks  to  ticks 125,  n,  21. 

Or  that  distinguished  from  and  that 90,  u.  12. 

Other  added  by  Thr-tick CO,  xiii.;  129,  n.  3. 

Other  added  by  lengthening CO,  xii.;  129,  n.  4. 

Other  added  by  lengthening  straight  line 137,  n.  1G. 

Otter  added  to  Ing  by  lengthening 135,  n.  5. 

Othe.r'and,  for  on  the  other  hand CO,  n.  4. 

Our  added  by  Ar-hook 74,  n.  36  ;  86,  u.  6. 

t  "  — position  of  signs  thus  formed 127,  u.  14  ;  159.  u.  26. 

Our,  are,  or  were,  added  by  hook 61,  x.v. 

Oar  added  by  hook,  general  rule 127,  n.  14. 

Out  added  by  shortening 129,  n.  9. 

Out  at  usury 73,  n.  29. 

Out  of  nothing 90,  u.  11. 


INDEX  OF   THE  NOTES.  209 

Outlines,  changed  sometimes  In  phrase- writing.,, 158,  n.  1. 

Outside  of  it 106,  n.  4. 

Over  all  North  America 146,  n.  26. 

Overlapping  for  joining  in  phrases 103,  n.  4  ;  139,  n.  18 ;  140,  n.  25  ;  177,  n.  7. 

Overthrow 151,  n.  6. 

P. 

Palpable 150,  n.  16. 

Paragraphs,  indicated ..157,  n.  17. 

Paragraphing 139,  n.  18. 

Parentheses 155,  n.  7. 

Parenthetical  words  in  phrase- writing 125,  n.  4. 

I'n i-i -nl.,  depart-ed,  etc 181,  n.  1. 

Parti-coloring  yarn 7 173,  n.  15. 

Party,  in  special  contractions,  added  to  Em  by  widening 136,  n.  li. 

J'ast  participles  before  which  have  may  be  omitted 127,  n.  9. 

Past  tenses  of  verbs  ending  with  a  full-length  stroke  with  a  larger  initial 

hook 174,  n.  5. 

Past  time  written  by  present 59,  vii. 

Patent-ed 172,  n.  9. 

Patience,  result  of £0,  par.  G. 

Pels  distinguished  from  Pletoid=-Peo 12H,  n.  17. 

Period 1G7,  n.  2. 

Perpendicular  tick  for  a-n-d 70,  n.  7. 

Phonographic  nomenclature,  explanation  of 53. 

Phonographic  nomenclature,  use  of 51,  par.  3. 

Phonographic  numerals  for  dates 81,  n.  5. 

Phonographic  numerals,  how  distinguished  sometimes 81,  n.  5  ;  83,  n.  2. 

Phonography  in  Law  Courts 1G7,  n.  1. 

Phraaeographic  power  in  Standard  Phonography 62,  xxi. 

Phrases — breaking  up  of,  illustrated 130,  n.  19. 

Phrases  broken  up  by  running  down  or  above  too  much 102,  n.  1. 

Phrase-writing 62,  xxi.; 

129,  u.  G ;    130,  n.  IS  ;   143,  n.  8  ;  146,  n.  25  ;  177,  n.  2  ;  156,  n.  10  ;  158, 
n.  I,  4,  7,  9,  and  11;  161,  n.  G;  162,  n.  14;  163,  u.  22,  23 and  1;  164,  n.  4. 

Phrase-writing  by  shortest  consonant  expression 98,  n.  5. 

Phrase-writing,  Exhibit  of 66. 

Phrase- writing  facilitated  by  Standard  Phonography G2,  last  par. 

Phrase-writing,  general  principles GG,  A. 

Phrase- writing — joining  of  a  common  substitute 150,  n.  14. 

Phrase-writing,  occasional  principle 128,  n.  1C. 

Phrase-writing  occasionally  requires  change  of  word-forms 102,  n.  6. 

Phrase-writing  of  special  importance  to  the  reporter G'2. 

Phrase-writing,  overlapping  in 103,  u.  4  ;  139,  n.  18. 

Phrase- writing,  progressive  degrees  of 112,  n.  3. 

Phrase-writing,  special  principles  of 67,  B. 

Pltysical,  specially  contracted 78,  n.  15. 

Pitman's,  Isaac,  use  of  the  disjoined  ticks  criticized 77,  n.  4. 

Place,  in  first  place,  etc 153,  n.  19. 

Pla iutiffs  in  the  suit 168,  n.  10. 

Plaintiff's  invention. 176,  n.  10. 


210  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    REA1  KR, 

Plantation l.r>4,  n.  2. 

Platonic  philosophy 73.  n.  :»ri. 

Position,  adaptation  of 77,  u.  <i ;  124, 

n.  18 ;  134,  n.  1  ;  149,  n.  12  ;  150,  n.  17  ;  151.  n.  8 ;  161;  n.  3  ;  176,  n.  9. 

Position,  distinction  between  Third  and  Fourth  in  case  of  horizontals  . .  .69,  u.  1. 

Position  figures 55. 

Position,  frequent  and  less  frequent,  for  distinction 86,  u.  7. 

Position  of  signs  formed  by  prefixing  our  by  an  Ar-hook  or  by  enlarging 

the  small  El-hook .- 127,  n.  14. 

Position  of  a  contraction  fora  number  of  related  words 154,  u.  2. 

Position  of  a  contraction  sometimes  determined  by  the  rule  of  the  corre- 
sponding style 154,  n.  2,  e. 

Position— the  third  for  Kay  Red,  etc 118,  n.  5. 

Position  zero 133,  n.  4. 

Power — why  written  Pee-Ray  in  rt 74,  n.  1. 

Pre-eminence,  prominence,  and  permanence 159,  n.  18. 

Present  for  past  tense 74,  n.  35  ;  87,  n.  2. 

Present  for  past  tense,  advantage  of 78,  n.  14. 

Present  time  written  for  the  past 59,  vii- 

Principles  instead  of  mere  memory 118,  n.  7. 

Principles,  values  of 130,  n.  18. 

Profligate  pontificate 103,  n.  8. 

Progressive  contraction 73,  n.  33. 

Progressive  contractions  illustrated • 122,  n.  G. 

Progressive  degrees  of  phrase-writing 112,  n.  3. 

Prominently 121,  u.  6. 

Pronunciation  of  Luke  x.,  16 114,  n.  1. 

Pronoun ce[d]  it  the 159,  n.  25. 

Pronunciation,  Key  to 56. 

Pronunciation  to  be  written — foreign  or  English 144,  n.  15. 

Proslavery 137,  u.  1. 

Prosperity  and  prospect 137,  n.  6. 

Proximity  to  imply  of  only,  advantage  of G7,  n.  17. 

Punctuation  in  note-taking 79,  n.  4. 

Put  in  their  claim 102,  n.  8. 

Puts  it  out  of  his  power  to  receive  the 14s1,  n.  10. 

Q. 

Question  and  answer,  best  mode  of  noting 167,  n.  2. 

(Jit'  xiinn-eJ,  etc 96,  u.  3. 

Quostions  by  the  Court  and  by  a  Juror,  how  indicated 188,  n.  9. 

Quotation  marks — final 144,  n.  12. 

Quotations  repeated — how  to  manage 115,  n.  6. 


R. 

Rate  of  reading  or  speaking  from  memory 115,  n.  C,  b. 

Uay-Ter  and  Ray-Der 90,  n.  10. 

Rfadinj  notes — a  difficulty  in,  avoided , 75,  n.  3. 


INDEX   OF   THE  NOTES.  211 

Reading  notes  of  exercises  written  from  dictation 50,  par.  4. 

Heady  reading,  no w  acquired 98,  n.  7. 

Reeled  yarns 175,  n.  6. 

Rejoicingly 85,  n.  3. 

Reliable 175,  n.  18. 

Repeated  quotations  usually  not  taken  in  full 115,  n.  6,  c. 

Repeated  words  joined  by  and 96,  n.  8. 

Repetition  of  words 136,  n.  8  ;  147,  n.  1. 

Repetitions 106,  n.  20. 

Repetitions,  expressions  of 61,  xx. 

Repetitions,  mode  of  expressing  in  Standard  Phonography 

61,  xx.;  96,  n.  8;  119,  u.  11;  H7,  n.  1. 

Reporter's  principle  ground  of  reputation 104,  n.  12. 

Reporting  Exercises 1-48. 

Key  to 69-189. 

"  "  notes  on 69-189. 

"         foreign  languages 114,  u.  1. 

"          American  Bible  Society  Anniversary 121,  u.  4. 

"         Style  study  and  practice  and  study  of  the  Classics  com  pared..  141,  n.  11. 

"         — what  it  is  and  what  it  is  not 104,  n.  12. 

Reporting  Lists — how  easily  committed 49. 

Reporting  Lists  must  be  familiarized 49. 

Reporting-Style  characteristics 58-62. 

Reporting-Style  position,  exhibit  of 63. 

Roman  Catholics,  specially  contracted 100,  n.  2. 

Roman  contracted 102,  n.  7. 

Round  joined  to  look-ed 131,  n.  27. 

R-ty 136,  n .  6,  3. 


S. 

Same  and  some  time 156,  n.  11. 

Schiller 183,  n.  2. 

Scientific  societies 95,  n.  10. 

Secede 145,  n.  21. 

Secession  added  by  Seseshon 145,  n.  24. 

Seem-ed  to  be  gratified 186,  n.  2. 

Selections  for  the  Exercises 52. 

Seems  to  have  established 107,  n.  4. 

Self  government 132,  n.  2. 

Self-  prefixed 89,  n.  5  ;  132,  n.  2. 

Session  added  by  Iss-eshon 146,  n.  24. 

Shaping  letters  for  easy  junction 129,  n.  10  and  12  ;  130,  n.  17  ;  131,  n.  23. 

She)  and  Shier  alone 183,  n.  2. 

Shon  andTiv  hooks 70,  n.  9. 

.Shortened  hook  letters  distinguished  from  hook  dashes 76,  n.  12,  e. 

Shus  li-ness,  words  ending,  contracted 74,  n.  3  ;  142,  n.  11. 

Size  of  writing  best  for  speed 49,  last  par. 

Slavery  and  derivatives 137,  n.  1 ;  ICG,  n.  5. 

Slave-breeding  State  of  Virginia 139,  n.  is. 

Slave-breeder 139,  n.  21. 


212  SECOND   STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   READER. 

Slave  codes  .............................................................  157,  n.  15. 

Slavery  was  dying  .....................................................  153,  n.  18. 

Small  El  or  Ar  hook  enlarged  to  add  consonant  ............................  51),  is.. 

Social  .............................................................  185,  n.  4  aii  d  7. 

Society,  frequently  contracted  ...........................................  95,  n.  10. 

Society  and  association  distinguished  in  contractions  ....................  99,  u.  11. 

So  far  as  to  say  ...........................................................  91,  n.  9. 

Solemnity  ...............................................................  161,  u.  4. 

Somebody  ..............................................................  115,  n.  4. 


So  much 


>  3- 


So  much  more  important  than  those  ....................................  107,  u.  7. 

So  well  ...................................................................  94.H.O. 

Space  for  punctuation  ...................................................  79«  n-  *• 

Space  left  for  omitted  word  ............................................  H9.  u-  H- 

Speaker,  chase  with,  how  to  avoid  ......................................  62,  par.  4. 

Speaker,  how  to  get  close  up  with,  as  with  a  bound  ..........  62,  par.  4  ;  92,  n.  14. 

Speakers,  change  of  ....................................................  13^>  n-  19- 

Spsaker's  name,  how  indicated  .........................................  170,  u.  14. 

Special  contractions  to  be  devised  by  the  reporter  ......................  136,  u.  14. 

Special  contractions,  principles  and  instances  ...............  78,  n.  17;  91,  n.  11  ; 

101,  n.  4;    102,  n.  7;    103,  n.  7  ;    122,  n.  7  ;    136,  n.  8,  9,  and  10  ;    136,  n.  14; 
137,  u.l  and  3;    138,  n.  10,  11.  14,  and  16  ;     140,  n.  2;    141,  n.  7  and  9  ;    147, 
n.  2  ;    148,  n.  8  ;    151,  n.  7  ;    154,  n.  2  ;  155,  n.  4  and  5  ;  100,  n.  27  ;  150,  n.  1  ; 
162,  n.  18  ;    164,  n.  7  ;    166,  n.  5  ;    172,  n.  10  ;    174,  n.  1  .  175,  n.  6  ;  178,  n.  10. 
Special  contractions,  progressive  ........................................  73,  n.  23. 

Special  contractions,  used  as  general  ----  147,  n.  3  ;  160,  n.  1  ;  162,  n.  13  ;  175,  n.  8. 

Speech-phrases  occasionally  broken  up  .........................  ;  .......  99,  n.  14. 

Speech-phrases  with  corresponding  writing-phrase  .....................  102,  n.  1. 

...............  103,  n.  3  and  4. 

Standard-Phonographic  Series—  Fourth  Volume  ...............................  49. 

Standard  Phonography  —  greatly  superior  to  other  systems  in  respect  of 

phrase-writing  ...........................................  62,  ixi.  ;  151,  n.  9. 

Standard  Phonography  —  adequacy  in  the  phrases  of  common  speech  .  .130,  n.  18. 
"  advantages  of  referred  to  .......................  75,  n.  10. 

''  how  it  makes  the  rough  places  smooth  .........  92,  n.  14. 

"  "  its  mode  of  expressing  repetitions  ..............  147,  n.  ]. 

"  object  of  mentioning  superiorities  ............  173,  n.  15. 

superiority  of,  as  to  outlines  often  where  no  now 

principles  aro  involved  ..................  150,  n.  16. 

"  uniformity  of  .......................  103,  n.  7  ;  153,  n.  16. 

word-signs  of,  how  constructed  ..................  S2,  n.  6. 

Star  ..........................................................  9!,n.  11  ;  104,  n.  7. 

Supplying  aud  Implying  distinguished  .................................  71,  n.  IP. 

State  of  Virginia  .......................................................  130,  n.  17. 

Stationary  ...............................................................  70,  n.  9. 

Straight  lines  lengthened  to  add  thr,  and  tr,  dr  ............................  60,  xii. 

Straight  lines,  you  and  we  prefixed  to  .......................................  60,  xi. 

St.=  Saint  adapted  in  position  ..........................................  Ill,  n.  18. 

Stmly  of  the  Classics  and  Reporting  compared  .........................  149,  n.  11. 

Subjects  of  verbs  ........................................................  120,  n.  3. 

Substantially  as  described  ..............................................  174.  n.  4. 

Such  another.  ..  .  ,,l!o,  u,7. 


INDEX   OF    THE   NOTES.  213 

Such  are 159,  n.  26. 

Such  will 159,  n.  26. 

Surely H7,  n.  5. 

Suspension 153,  n.  16. 

T. 

Tacitus,  quotation  from 104,  n.  11. 

Take  it 108,  n.  11. 

Taking  it  for  granted 77,  n.  11. 

Taxing  their 158,  n.  5. 

Teach  all  nations 1 10,  n.  10. 

Teach  others 112,  n.  4. 

Terrible 166,  n.  10. 

Testimony,  notes  of,  to  be  freely  vocalized 168,  n.  11. 

Text  after  text,  etc 113,  n.  g. 

Texts,  quoted  passages,  when  not  quoted  in  full 114,  u.  1. 

Than  added  by  an  En-hook  to  comparatives 61,  xviii.;  70,  n.  13. 

Thau  had  the 158,  n.  8;  162,  n,  12. 

Than  omitted  as  au  impediment 82,  n.  7. 

Tiiat  as  a  conjunction  joined 91,  a.  7. 

That  distinguished  from  with  it  (Thet°) 133,  n.  4. 

That  have  been  reeled 174,  n.  17. 

That  it  is  accorded 164,  n.  6. 

That  joined  to  Ens-circle 95,  n.  12. 

That  nothing 143,  n.  5. 

That  slavery 156,  n.  10. 

That  these  methods 174,  n.  16. 

The  actual  damages 178,  n.  10. 

The  added  by  Petoid 123,  n.  10. 

Tlte  added  occasionally  by  Petoid 123,  n.  11. 

TAe-dot ™,  n.  24. 

The  emphasized 78,  n.  12. 

The  Father  has  said  it 120,  n.  3. 

The  framers  of  the  Constitution 152,  n.  11. 

The  circle,  the  turning  of 94,  n.  8. 

The.  omitted 179-  n>  16- 

The  sometimes  omitted 74,  n.  2;  75,  n.  7. 

written  separately 72,  n.  24. 

There  are  none 161>  n-  2- 

Therefore  added 89>  n-  8- 

There  have 123,  n.  7. 

There  is  no 168-  n-  u- 

Then  thr 103,  n.  6. 

Therefore  added  by  lengthening  and  an  Ef-hook 89,  n.  8. 

Therefore  it  is 128,  n.  15. 

Therefore  it  is  a  clear  case  that 117>  n-  )0- 

These  great  results 12*>  n-  15- 

These  (i)deas 122-  n-  5- 

They  cannot Ill,  n.  1. 

They  were  added  by  lengthening 158,  n.  !5. 

Third  position  distinguished  from  Fourth  in  case  of  horizontals 69,  n.  1. 


214  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Third  position  for  half-lengths 122,  11.  1. 

This  grand  design 130,  n.  20. 

This  grand  idea 130,  u.  21. 

This  great  work 129,  u.  7. 

This  immense  fabric 94,  n.  8. 

This  language Ill,  n.  1C. 

Th is  proposition— ways  of  writing 105,  n.  17. 

TAr-tick...60,  xiii.;  77,  n.  7  ;  103,  n.  7  ;   106,  u.  19  ;   128,  u.  18  ;  129,  n. 3;   161,  n.  5. 
Thr  added  to  present  tense  of  verbs  ending  in  large  initial-hooks,  as  Mel, 

Nel,  Rel,  etc 174,  n.  5. 

Thr  added  by  lengthening 86,  n.  I. 

Tkr=  other  added  by  lengthening 87,  u.  4. 

Thr,  and  tr  or  dr  added  by  lengthening.  .60,  xii.;  78,  n.  18  ;  124,  n.  17  ;  137,  n.  16; 

178,  u.  9. 

7%r=  their,  etc.,  added  by  d/ir-tick 60,  xiii. 

TAr-tick  written  upwards 144,  u.  14. 

Thr  added  by  lengthening  straight  lines 78,  n.  18. 

Through  which 129,  n.  10. 

Ticks  with  hooks 90,  u.  4. 

Ticks  and  dashes  have  hooks  joined 125,  n.  21. 

To  a  higher 125,  u.  1. 

To  all  people 12G,  n.  6. 

To  all  portions,  but  it,  etc 128,  n.  17. 

To  applying  the  yard-stick 147,  n.  3. 

To  be.  Bee3,  how  origh,   ted 90,  n.  3. 

To  be  added  to  Em 186,  n.  2. 

To  be  operated  upon 177,  n.  7. 

To  be  taken  into  consideration 179,  n.  17. 

To  (have)  been 90,  n.  3. 

To  have — to  supplied  and  have  added 129,  n.  11. 

To  have  been  added  to  Em 82,  n.  11. 

To  himself 69,  n.  1. 

To  implied  belore  the  circle 73,  n.  31. 

To  implied  before  a  circle 70,  n.  14. 

To  implied  before  Web-hook 90,  n.  1. 

To  implied  in  two  ways 59,  v.,  1  and  2. 

To  implied  with  and  prefixed 85.  n.  4. 

To  it,  therefore 124,  u.  17. 

To  look  upon  him 117,  n.  2. 

To  omitted 72,  n.  27;  91,  n.  9. 

To  our 74,  n.  36. 

To  our  knowledge 9G,  n.  5. 

To  save  the  world 130,  n.  15. 

To  serve — with  circle  in  fourth  position 121,  n.  9. 

To  the 71,  n.  15. 

To  the  calculation 98,  n.  4. 

To  the  committee 171,  n.  3. 

To  Ike  by  Petoid* ;  Chetoid',  to  how 89,  n.  9. 

To  the  by  the  fourth  position 71,  n.  17. 

To  the  hearty  co-operation 121,  n.  5. 

To  the  original  States 157,  n.  13. 

To  the  time 98,  n.  7. 


INDEX    OF    THE   NOTES.  215 

To  uphold  slavery 158,  n.  4. 

To  witucss  their 161,  n.  5. 

Too  much 89,  n.  3  and  4. 

T  omitted 140,  n.  24  ;  141,  n,  3. 

Tr  and  dr  added  by  the  advanced  writer  to  straight  lines  by  lengthening.  .CO,  xii. 

Transcribing  law  reports 167,  u.  2,  b,  c,  d,  e. 

Transfer-red,  etc 103,  n.  7. 

Transform  the 144,  u.  13. 

Turning  loose  their 128,  n.  18. 

Twenty  years 155,  u.  3. 

Two  or  three  millions  of  dollars , 140,  n.  2. 

Two  thousand  dollars 141,  n.  5. 

Two,  writing  of .' 79,  u.  3  ;  172,  n.  11;  183,  n.  4. 

•Ty,  ~ity,  -y,  in  contractions    75,  n.  11 ;  135,  n.  6  ;  1352,  n.  0  ;  158,  n.  G  ; 

161,  n.  4  •  165,  n.  2  ;  180,  n.  1. 

U. 

Unconnected  with 184,  n.  2. 

Uncon-  joined 142,  u.  1. 

Unconscious 142,  n.  11. 

Under  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States 140,  n.  24. 

Under  which  it  is  made  to  appear 92,  n.  13. 

Uniformity  of  contraction 144,  n.  13. 

UNIFORMITY  illustrated 103,  n.  7  ;  134,  n.  4  ;  135,  n.  6;  144,  u.  13. 

Up  and  down  the 131,  n.  24. 

Upon  any  certain 179,  n.  13. 

Upon  one  thing 1 40,  n.  26. 

Upon  other  means 130,  n.  16. 

Upon  the  coast  of  Africa 141,  n.  3. 

Upon  the  other 166,  n.  8. 

Upon  the  same 123,  u.  10. 

Upon  the  same  common  platform 134,  n.  4. 

Upon  us 138,  n.  12. 

Upon  what 105,  n.  13. 

Upon  you 135,  n.  7. 

Useful 70,  n.  6. 

Use  this 130,  n.  17. 

Us  joined  by  enlarging  the  circle 72,  u.  25. 

Us,  principle  of  joining  in  Standard  Phonography 72,  n.  25  ;  138,  n.  12. 

Uses  distinguished, , , , 76,  n.  12. 


V. 

Varnhagen  von  Ense 185,  n.  6. 

Vee-hook  to  add  have 129,  n.  11. 

Verb  for  the  actor 81,  u.  2. 

Verses  and  chapters,  how  indicated 108,  n.  10. 

Vocalization  in  the  Reporting  Style 164,  n.  6  ;  179,  n.  12  ;  187,  n.  8. 

Vowels  generally  omitted  in  the  Ueporting  Style 58,  i. 


21G  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Varying  letter-shapes  for  easier  junction 102,  n.  9. 

Vaster  than 95,  u.  1 1. 

W. 

Washington,  contraction  for 142,  11.  14. 

Was  slavery 154,  n.  20. 

"Was  that 103,  n.  21. 

Was  transferred 103,  n.  7. 

Way,  brief,  enlarged CO,  x.;  87,  n.  5;  108,  n.  1  ;  Exhibit  of,  191. 

We  can  send 86,  n.  8. 

We  could  not  get 127,  n.  11. 

We  frequently  prefixed  by  a  hook  to  straight  lines  even GO,  xi. ;  86,  u.  8. 

WTe  may  be 94,  n.  7. 

We  look  around 131 ,  n.  27. 

We  must  dismiss 143,  n.  1. 

We  prefixed  by  a  Way-hook CO,  xi. ;  75,  n.  5. 

We  may  be  (Wemb) 94,  n.  7. 

Were  expressed  by  an  Ar-hook  or  by  enlarging  a  small  El-hook Cl,  xv. 

Were  and  are  added  by  an  Ar-hook,  how  distinguished 70,  n.  11. 

Were,  added  by  an  Ar-hook,  shown  to  be  new 70,  n.  11. 

Were,  our,  or  are  added  by  hook 61,  xv. 

Western  Roman  Empire 102,  n.  7;  112,  n.  3. 

Western  world „.. , 138,  n.  9. 

West  street 168,  n.  7. 

We  were  and  we  would 131,  n.  26. 

What  added 105,  u.  13;  127,  n.  12;   141,  n.  8;  154,  n.  1. 

What  added  by  shortening.  .01,  xvi. ;  105,  n.  11  ;  118,  n.  9  ;  140,  u.  28  ;  146,  n.  27. 

What  added  to  witli 73,  n.  32. 

What  I  am  going  to  say 107,  n.  9. 

What  is  your  occupation 167,  n.  3. 

What  other  means 129,  n.  3. 

What  would  you  think 10G,  n.  1. 

Whatever  may  be 107,  n.  C. 

Whatever  (Tef)  joined  to  but 138,  n.  15. 

Wheu  making  and  adopting  the 160,  n.  SO. 

When  we  bring  it  out 129,  n.  9. 

When  you  are  helping  the 132,  u.  3. 

Where  there  are,  Werdher:Ray 79,  n.  1. 

Whether  or  not 173,  n.  13. 

Which  have  been  made 96,  n.  4. 

Which  have  been  meiitioued 187,  n.  1. 

WLich  have  been  reeled 174,  n.  5. 

Which  he  has  sustained 178,  n.  11. 

Which  he  would  otherwise 179,  n.  15. 

Which  our  fathers 158,  n.  13. 

Which  they 102,  n.  9. 

Which  were 1 59,  n.  24. 

Which  were  so 70,  n.  II. 

While,  Old  form  for,  criticized 92,  n.  5. 

White  race 137,  n.  7. 

Whole  volume 162,  n.  15. 


INDEX   OF   THE   NOTES.  217 

Whose,  who-m  .........................................................  124,  n.  16. 

Who  understands  you  ..................................................  113,  n.  9. 

Why,  Old  form  criticized  .................................................  92,  n.  5. 

Widening  of  Em  .......................................................  13G,  n.  14. 

Wickedness  ............................................................  142,  n.  12. 

Wickedness  of  his  relation  ..............................................  143.,  u.  3. 

Will  or  all  added  by  hook  or  enlarging  Ar-hook  ..........................  GO,  xiv. 

Will  or  oil  by  El-hook,  or  added  by  enlarging  Ar-hook  ....................  81,  u.  9. 

Will  think  you  a  coward  ................................................  118,  n.  5. 

Within  itself  ............................................................  123,  n.  9. 

With  it  (Duct*)  and  that  (Dhef)  ..........................................  133,  n.  4. 

With,  omitted  ..................................  96,  u.  G  ;  97,  n.  11  ;  184,  n.  2  and  3. 

With  rights  .............................................................  161,  n.  7. 

With  slavery  ............................................................  158,  n.  9. 

With  what  ..............................................................  73,  n.  32. 

With  their  ..............................................................  91,  n.  10. 

With  you  ................................................................  114,  n.  2. 

Words,  gradual  agglutination  of  ........................................  119,  u.  13. 

Words  omitted  as  impediments  ..........................................  82,  n.  7. 

Word  Positions  in  the  Dictionary  .............................................  G5. 

Words  repeated  ........................................................  119,  n.  U. 

Word-signs,  value  of  ....................................................  70,  n.  12. 

Word-signs,  appropriate  ones  needed  ....................................  92,  u.  14. 

Word-signs,  occasionally  need  vocalizing  ...........  82,  n.  G  ;  115,  n.  16  ;  187,  n.  8. 

Word-signs  with  derivatives  .............................................  86,  n.  5. 

Words  used  as  words  should  bo  underscored  ..............................  98,  u.  9. 

Word-signs  and  contractions  of  tho  Eeporting  Stylo  to  bo  learned  thor- 

oughly ..................................................................  49. 

Word-signs  used  as  prefix-signs  .........................................  151,  u.  6. 

Word-signs  and  contractions  may  sometimes  be  vocalized  ................. 

.....................................  82,  n.  6;  91,  n.  8;  108,  n.  11  ;  111,  n.  G. 

Words  omitted  ........................................  82,  n.  7  ;  88,  n.  2  ;  90,  n.  G  ; 

9G,  n.  G  ;    97,  n.  11  ;    106,  u.  20  ;    118,  n.  9  ;    138,  n.  15  ;    167,  n.  3  ;    174,  n.  2  ; 

177,  n.  1  ;    178,  n.  9  ;  179,  n.  16  and  17  ;    180,  n.  4  ;  183,  n.  4  ;  184,  n.  2  and  3. 
Worshippers  ............................................................  158,  n.  3. 

Worst  possible  ..................  .  ........................  ,  .............  152,  n.  14. 

Would  added  by  shortening  ...........................  ,  ....  ........  .  ......  61,  xvi. 

Would  added  by  Wuh-hook    .......................  118,  n.  9  ;    127,  n.  4  ;  187,  u.  6. 

Would  added  to  we,  etc  ..........................  ,  ,  ,  .  .....................  87,  u.  5. 

Would  cause  him  to  bo  regarded  ........................................  82,  n.  11. 

Would  not  consent  ......................  ,  ,,  ............................  158,  n.  14. 

Would  joined  to  Ketoid  ..................................................  118,  n.  9. 

Would  seem  .......................  ,  .....................................  76,  n.  13. 

Would  seem  to  embrace  the.  ,  ,  ,  ,  ........................................  1G2,  n.  9. 

Would  turn  it  ..................  ..  ......................................  145,  n.  19. 

Writing  exercises  from  dictation  ..........................  50,  par.  2  and  last  par. 

Writing,  size  of  must  not  bo  too  largo  ................................  49,  last  par. 

Wuh-hook,  final,  rule  of  stated  ..........................................  118,  n.  9. 

Wuh-hook  made  into  a  circle  ............................................  154,  u.  1. 


Yay,  brief,  enlarged  ....  ...........  ................  ..........  60,  x.:  10G,  u.  1  ;  191. 


218  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    HEADER. 

Yearly 90,  n.  7. 

Yes,  sir 107,  11.  0. 

Yet  after  all 129,  n.  5. 

Yet  to  be  brought  to  light 82,  n.  9. 

You  admit  that 1C3,  n.  3. 

Yon  agree  with  me 107,  n.  5. 

You  expressed  in  phrase-writing  by  Yeh  sometimes 59,  iv.,  4. 

You  sometimes  written  by  a  Yuh-hook GO,  xi.;  105,  n.  16  ;  163,  n.  3  ;  183,  n.  2. 

Yon  say  that  is 105.  n.  16. 

You  want 1 0'.i,  u .  J . 

You  were  and  you  would 131,  11.  20. 

You  would  not 147, 11.  C. 

Z. 

Zeedheri,  2,  » 119.  n.  10. 

Zero  position 133, 11.  4. 

&. 

&c,,.  132,  n.  12. 


INDEX   OF    THE   EXERCISES   AND   KEY.  219 


IXDEX  OF  THE  EXERCISES  AND  KEY 

OF   THE 

SECOND     STANDAKD-PHONOGKAPHIC     READER. 


NOTE. — Par=paragraph  ;  t=top  ;  m=middle;  b=bottom;  tm=bet\veen  top 
iinil  middle  ;  mb=betweeu  middle  and  bottom.  Figures  over  48  refer  to  pages  of 
the  Key  ;  under  49,  to  pages  of  the  Engraved  Exercises. 


Abolitionists,  who  are  they 31  tin  ,  144. 

Abolition  of  Slavery,  why  not  expressly  provided  for  by  the  Framers  of 

the  Constitution 33  mb  ;  154. 

Age  of  the  Human  Race 13-15  ;  05-99. 

"All  men  created  equal,'1  etc.— what  did  it  mean? 36  t ;  161. 

American  Bible  Society 23-28  ;  121-135. 

Anatomy,  Comparative,  uso  of  in  restoring  history  of  primeval 

earth 5  b  ;  79-80. 

Ancient  and  Modern  Philosophy  compared 3-4  ;  69-74. 

Ancient  Philosophers,  business  of 3m  ;  72  t. 

A  New  Education  needed 31  tin  ;  143. 

Ansted,  Prof. — quotation  from 5  ;  78-80. 

Aristotle's  View  of  Creation 12  t ;  90. 

B. 

Baconian  Philosophy,  its  object  and  effect 3  b  ;  69-70. 

Bacon,  Lord,  what  he  proposed 3  b  ;  69-70. 

Baltimore  Democratic  Convention  of  1860— Mr.  Gaulden's  speech  in.  .28  ;  136-142. 

Bible,  different  copies  of 13  t  ;  93  t. 

Blacks,  were  they  citizens  under  the  Constitution 37  tm  ;  1C3-4. 

Blood,  the  circulation  of,  proved  by  Harvey 6-7  ;  80-83. 

"Buck's  Theological  Dictionary  "  quoted 11-13  ;  91-95. 

C. 

Cahill,  Rev.  Dr. — abstract  of  a  lecture  by 17;  102. 

Catholic  Church  claimed  to  be  infallible 17  ;  102. 

Change  wrought  by  Death 10  m  ;  87  m. 

Charge  to  the  Jury 39  ;  167-179. 

Chief  Justice  Tauey's  discovery 36;  160  ;— 37  ;  164. 


220  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Chronology 13  tm  ;  93  m. 

Church  of  Rome,  its  Infallibility  discussed 15-17  ;  99-104. 

Church  of  Rome,  what  it  claims 15  b  ;  100  tin. 

Circulation  of  the  blood,  evidences  of G-7  ;  80-83. 

Compensation  to  the  slaveholder 31  in  ;  144  b. 

Conflict  between  Ideas 24  ;  121  b. 

Creation 11-13  ;  89-95. 

Creation,  different  dates  for  assigned 13  ;  93. 

Creation,  Rev.  Dr.  Pye  Smith's  theory  of 8  ;  83-4. 

Creative  Power  of  the  Deity 13  t ;  94  in. 

D. 

Declaration  of  Independence,  importance  of 35  m  ;  159. 

Discoverers,  their  usual  treatment 7  m  ;  K2  m. 

Disowning  the  lawfulness  of  Slavery,  results  of 37  nib  ;  104  b. 

Dissolution  of  the  Union 31  nib  ;  145. 

fi. 

Edinburgh  Review,  extract  from 3-4  ;  69-74. 

Effects  of  the  Baconian  Philosophy 3  b  ;  73  l>74. 

Evidence  offered  by  traces  of  animal  life  in  the  strata  of  the  earth C  t ;  79  tm. 

Evidences  of  the  Circulation  of  the  Blood G-7;  80-83. 

Extinct  animals,  traces  of,  in  the  earth's  strata G  t ;  79  t. 

F. 

Framors  of  the  Constitution— wcro  they  guilty  of  hypocrisy? 34  b  ;  157  mb. 

Franklin,  Benjamin,  petitioned  for  the  Abolition  of  Slavery 36  mb  ;  1G3  t. 

Fugitive-servant  clause  of  the  Constitution— does  it  refer  to  Slaves 34  m  ;  157. 

G. 

Gaulden,  of  Georgia,  speech  of,  in  the  Baltimore  Democratic  Convention.  .28  ;  13G. 

Geology 5;  78-80. 

Gerrit  Smith,  speech,  of,  claiming  that  there  can  be  no  law  for  Slavery. .  .30  ;  142. 
Greek  Quotation 21 1 ;  114. 

H. 

Hamilton,  Alexander — his  remark  about  the  sacred  rights  of  mankind.  .30  m;  102. 

Handsome  set  of  little  children 29  mb  ;  139. 

Harvey,  discoverer  of  the  Circulation  of  the  Blood 7  ;  81. 

Heliopolis  (Egypt),  investigations  at 14  m  ;  9G  b. 

History,  primeval,  restored 5  b  ;  78  m. 

Horner,  Mr.  Leonard— his  researches  in  the  Nile  valley 14  tm  ;  90  m. 

Human  Race,  age  of 13-15;  95-104. 

Humboldt,  Alexander  von 43-48;  1SO-189. 


INDEX   OF   THE   EXERCISES   AND   KEY.  221 


I. 

Ideas,  conflict  between 24  t ;  121  b. 

Infallibility,  no  foundation  for,  iu  lleasou  or  Scripture 16  nib  ;  101  b. 

Infallibility  of  the  Catholic  Church,  what  it  means 17  m ;  104-105. 

Infallibility  of  the  Church— against  the 15  ;  99. 

"      —for 17;  104. 

Intellect,  brilliant  triumph  of 6  ;  78  b. 

Intolerance,  are  its  bars  broken  down? 25  b  ;  128  tin. 

J. 

Jay,  John,  Chief  Justice  of  the  United  States — what  he  said  of  Slavery. 

3G  mb;  163m. 

K. 

Key  to  the  Reporting  Exercises 69-180. 


Laws  of  Nature,  stability  of 17mb;  105  m. 

Law-Ueporting 39  ;  1G7. 

Liberty,  Genius  of,  can  it  shriek? 28  b  ;  137. 

Lieber,  Prof.  Francis,  au  Address  by 43-48  ;  180-189. 

Logic 4;  75-78. 

M. 

Man.  Greatness  and  Glory  of 31  Ira  ;  144. 

Mann,  Hon.  Horace — what  he  said  about  Religion  and  Science 8  ;  83-86. 

Memphis  (Egypt),  chronological  investigations  at 14  mb  ;  97  t. 

N. 

New  States — Did  the  Constitution  give  them  the  right  to  have  Slavery  ? 

34  tm  ;  156m, 

No  Law  for  Slavery 30;  142, 

Non-intervention,  a  Slave-breeder's  idea  of 29  mb ;  139  b, 

O. 

Orthodox  View  of  the  World's  Salvation 24  tm;  123, 

Our  Friends  in  Heaven 9-11;  86-89, 

P.] 

Patience  of  Harvey  in  philosophical  investigation 7  tm ;  82  t. 

Philosophers,  ancient,  business  of 3  m  ;  70. 

Philosophy  of  Health,  extract  from 6-7  ;  80-83. 

Philosophy,  Seneca's  view  of , 3  tm ;  72. 


222  SECOND    STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC    READER. 

Platonic  Philosophy,  aim  of 3  mb  ;  73  b. 

Politics 28-;<8  ;  130  142. 

Posidonius  and  Seneca 3  tm  ;  71-72. 

Priests— call  they  make  a  mistake  ill  Faith  ? 20  t ;  111-112. 

Pro-Slavery  interpretations  of  the  Constitution  by  Anti-Slavery  men.  .33  t ;  158  t. 

B. 

Ramoses  II.,  Statue  of,  when  erected 14  mb  ;  97  t. 

R  -asouing  Process,  sameness  of,  in  all  cases 4  b  :  75-78. 

Religion  and  Science 8-10;  83-80. 

Rights  of  Mankind,  where  written 30  mb  ;  1C2  m. 


Sassnett,  Dr.  William  J.,  an  Address  by 23-28:  120-130. 

Science  not  Sectarian 8  b  ;  85  t. 

"        the  Interpreter  of  Nature 9  mb  ;  80. 

Secession,  Gerrit  Smith's  view  of 31  mb  ;  145  b. 

Seneca's  view  of  Philosophy 3m  ;  72. 

Slaveholders,  character  of 30  mb  ;  142-143. 

Slavery,  a  practical  way  to  protect 29  in  ;  138  b. 

"        how  long  was  it  to  continue 33mb;  134. 

"        no  law  for 30  ;  142. 

"        remedy  for 38  m  ;  100. 

"        the  institution  of,  claimed  to  bo  the  chief  eource  of  the  pros- 
perity and  intelligence  of  the  White  Race 29  t  ;  137  b. 

Smith,  Rev.  Dr.  Pye — his  theory  concerning  the  Garden  of  Eden 8  t ;  84  t. 

Stowo.  Mrs.  Harriet  Beecher,  quoted 9-11 ;  85-89. 

Supreme  Being  alone  infallible 10  nib  ;  102  t. 

Supreme  Court,  what  it  says  respecting  laws  against  rights  and  funda- 
mental principles , 32  b  ;  150  nib. 

T. 

The  Bible  claimed  to  bo  the  grand  instrumentality  for  saving  the 

world 20  tm;  128  b. 

The  Bible  recognized  as  coming  from  God,  notwithstanding  different 

constructions 27  mb  :  133  mb. 

Tho  Christian  Religion  said  to  be  the  source  of  all  that  is  truly  good  in 

Human  Nature 27  t ;  132  m. 

The  Constitution — is  it  a  bargain  between  the  Whites  and  Blacks? 32  m  ;  148. 

The  Constitution — is  it  a  bargain  between  the  Whites  of  the  North  and 

the  Whites  of  the  South  ? 32  m  ;  140. 

The  Constitution— is  it  a  law  for  Slavery  ? 31  b  ;  140  b  ;— 32  t ;  147. 

"  Pro-slavery  interpretations  of  by  Anti-slavery  men.  .35  t ;  158. 

"  was  it  intended  to  favor  Slavery  ? 32  b  ;  150. 

"  "  "  by  the  Trainers  or  by  the  People  to 

favor  Slavery  ? 33  t ;  151. 

Theological  preconceptions,  tenacity  of 8m;  84  m. 


INDEX    OF   THE   EXERCISES   AND    KEY.  223 

Tho  way  to  govern  men 2Gb  ;  131  b. 

Traces  of  Animal  Lifo  in.tho  strata  of  the  earth — evidence  offered  there- 
by   G;  79,  b. 

IT. 

Union,  dissolution  of 31  mb  ;  145. 

LW. 

Washington 3G  m  ;  1G2  m. 

Whateley's  "  Elements  of  Logic,"  extract  from 4  ;  75-78. 

World's  Salvation,  Orthodox  and  Rational  views  of  tlie 24  tm  ;  123. 

AVrit  of  Habeas  Corpus,  effect  of  ou  Slavery 33  m  ;  153  t. 


STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC 
AND  OTHER  WORKS. 

ANDREW  J.  GRAHAM, 

AUTHOR  AND  PUBLISHER. 

744.  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 

PHONOGRAPHY  is  a  shorthand  system  of  writing  according  to  sound  or  pronun- 
ciation, rejecting  silent,  letters  ami  ambiguous  signs.  The  original  system  (Steno- 
graphic Souiul-IIiiiul,  1837)  was  an  improvement  by  Isaac  Pitman,  of  England,  on 
the  system  of  Harding  (1823, 1828),  which  was  an  improvement  on  the  system  of 
Samuel  Taylor  (1766). 

'•  EDITIONS  "  OF  THE  OLD  PHONOGRAPHY.— The  Old  Phonography  was  va- 
riously modified.  The  different  modifications,  or  systems,  called  "editions,"  were 
published  —First  edition,  in  1837  ;  Second  edition,  Jan.,  1840  ;  Third  edition,  Dec., 
Isl!)  ;  Fourth  edition,  1841  ;  Fifth  edition,  1812 ;  Sixth  edition,  1844  ;  Seventh 
edition,  1815;  Kigh'th  edition,  1817  ;  Ninth  edition,  1853.  This  last  and  best  edi- 
tion was  made  the  basis  of  Standard  Phonography.  See  ODDS  AND  ESDS  for  an  ac- 
cuunt  of  the  characteristics  of  these  "  editions." 


"  Standard  Phonography  is  now  acknowledged  by  the  most  accomplished  phonog- 
raphers  to  be  the  best  system  of  shorthand  writing  that  has  ever  been  offered  to  the 
world.  lu  the  Adaptation  of  its  Characters  to  the  sounds  of  our  language,  in  its 
Legibility,  in  its  Powers  of  Contraction,  in  the  Rapidity  with  which  it  can  be  writ- 
ten, in  the  Logical  and  Convenient  A  rrangement  and  Presentation  of  its  Principles, 
and  in  its  Ease  of  Acquisition,  it  immeasurably  surpasses  every  other  system  of  short- 
hand.— PROF.  JOHN  B.  HOLMES,  A.  St.,  LL.  B. 

"  The  only  system  worth  the  attempt  to  learn." — CIIAS.  A.  SUMNEB.  the  leading 
reporter  of  San  Francisco. 

"  Standard  Phonography  is  (he  most  philosophical,  rapid,  and  beautiful  system 
of  shorthand  writing  ever  invented.  The  system  of  Phonography  as  now  used,  is 


11 

the  result  of  the  labor  and  study  of  ANDREW  J.  GRAHAM,  by  whom  Pitman's  system  was 
used  as  a  basis,  while  he  has  made  very  many  alterations,  and  added  many  new 
features  [new  principles,  rules,  combinations,  devices,  contractions,  and  word- 
signs],  making  it  at  once  the  most  unique  and  useful  system  of  writing  that  can  be 
imagined." — Haver/lilt  Gazette. 

IMITATIONS. — See  comparisons  of  them  with  Standard  Phonography  In  Nos. 
27  and  72  of  the  STCDEXT'S  JOURNAL,  where  the  demonstration  is  complete  that  the 
imitations  require  about  one  tllird  more  labor  and  space  than  Standard  Pln;i;o^i  a- 
phy;  and  are  inferior  iu  every  other  respect.  See  VISITOR  Vol.  II.,  for  an  overwhelm- 
ing body  of  testimonials  from  the  best  reporters  of  the  country,  against  the  inferi- 
or imitations  and  in  favor  of  Standard  Phonography.  See  Chas.  A.  Sumner's  Lec- 
ture on  Shorthand  and  Reporting. 

THE  STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC   SERIES. 

"  A  more  complete  series  of  works  on  any  subject  than  Mr.  Graham's  Standard- 
Phunographic  Series  has  never  been  published.  These  Text-Books  are  the  only  ones 
that  are  perfect  in  themselves  ;  and,  in  no  respect,  could  I  suggest  an  improve- 
ment in  the  manner  of  bringing  the  subject  before  even  the  dullest  student;  and 
the  introduction  of  them  into  all  institutions  of  learning,  where  Phonography  is 
taught,  is  the  highest  compliment  that  can  be  paid  to  their  merit." — CHARLES  FLOW- 
ERS, a  superior  reporter. 

The  Outline.— In  Miniature  Book-form,  bound  in  paper,  5  cents.  One  Doz- 
en, 36  cents. 

The  Little  Teacher.— Comprises :  1.  THE  OUTLINE,  presenting  all  the 
chief  elements  of  Standard  Phonography  in  eight  primer-size  pages  ;  2.  THE  LITTLE 
READING  EXERCISES — furnishing  in  16  little  pages  an  exercise  on  each  section  of  the 
Outline.  3.  Miniature  edition  of  THE  CORRESPONDENT'S  LIST  of  Word-Signs,  Con- 
tractions, Phrase-Signs,  Prefixes,  and  Affixes  of  the  Corresponding  Style.  AST  The 
Little  Teacher  is  a  useful  pocket  companion  for  students  of  the  Synopsis  or  Hand- 
Book.  Price,  40  cents. 

The  Synopsis.— New  and  Improved  edition. — Comprises:  1.  The  Synopsis  (in 
16  duodecimo  pages)  of  all  the  Principles  of  the  Corresponding  Style,  unmistakably 
presented,  with  numerous  engraved  illustrations.  2.  The  Reading  Exercises — in 
which  there  is  an  extended  illustration  and  application  of  each  section  of  the  text  ; 
followed  by  several  pages  of  connected  reading  matter,  with  an  interlined  transla- 
tion. 3.  "  The  Correspondent's  List" — 12mo  edition— comprising  an  alphabetical 
list  of  Corresponding  Word-Signs,  Contractions,  Phrase-Signs,  Prefixes,  and  Affix- 
es. This  edition  is  well  adapted  to  the  use  of  either  Classes  or  Private  Students, 
50  cents.  K&~  This  is  a  highly  useful  book  for  students  of  the  Hand-Book  ;  in  mak- 
ing frequent  reviews  of  the  elements. 

The  Hand-Book. — Presents  every  principle  of  every  style  of  the  Art — com- 
mencing with  ttie  analysis  of  words,  and  proceeding  to  the  most  rapid  Reporting 
Style — in  such  a  Form  and  Manner,  with  such  Fullness  of  Explanation  and  Com- 
1  lateness  of  Illustration,  and  with  such  other  features  as  to  fully  adapt  the  work  to 
the  use  of  Schools  and  to  Self-Instruction.  The  analysis  and  classification  of  the 
of  the  sounds  of  the  voice  (given  in  the  Appendix  to  Part  II.),  will  furnish  invalua- 
ble assistance  to  those  wishing  to  pet  the  correct  pronunciation  of  any  foreign  lan- 
guage. 366  duodecimo  pages.  Price,  bound  in  muslin,  with  embossed  side-title. 
$:2.00;  post-paid,  $2.10. 

"  FULL,  CONCISE  and  PHILOSOPHICAL  in  its  development  of  the  theory  of  writing 
by  sound,  ADMIRABLE  in  its  arrangement,  and  REPLETE  with  IMPROVEMENTS  and  re- 


Ill 

finements  on  the  Art  as  previously  defined,  it  affords  the  learner  a  safe  means  of 
obtaining  a  speed  in  reporting  at  least  one-fourth  greater  than  can  be  acquired  by  any 
other  method.'' — Xew  York  Herald. 

First  Header. — New  and  Revised  Edition  :  Stercographed  in  the  Corres- 
ponding Style  ;  with  interpaged  lley  ;  with  Questions  ;  and  with  Notes.  $1.75; 
postpaid,  $1.81.  Key  separate,  with  Questions  and  Notes  ;  60c.;  postpaid,  54c. 

Second  Reader. — New  and  Revised  Edition :  Stereographed  in  the  Reporting 
Style,  with  Key  and  Notes.  To  be  studied  in  connection  with  the  Reporting- 
Style  chapter  of  the  Hand-Book.  $1.75  ;  postpaid,  51.81. 

Standard.-Plionograph.ic  Dictionary. — " The  last  great  crowning 
work  of  the  Standard  Series,"  gives  the  pronunciation  and  the  best  outlines 
(Corresponding,  Advanced  Corresponding,  and  Reporting)  of  about  60,000  words, 
and  the  forms  for  about  60,000  phrases.  Beyond  comparison  with  any  shorthand 
dictionary  or  vocabulary  ever  published.  Invaluable  to  writers  of  either  style. 
Cloth,  $5  ;  genuine  morocco,  $7  ;  (Octavo-form  from  the  same  plates,  with  wide 
margins),  cloth,  $G  ;  leather,  $8 ;  morocco,  $9. 

Tlie  Reporter's  List. — In  preparation — with  engraved  forms  and  ex- 
planations— in  pocket-size  pages.  It  will  combine,  in  one  list,  all  the  Word-Signs 
and  Contractions  and  Phrase-Signs  of  the  Corresponding-Style  and  Reporting- 
Style  Lists  of  the  Hand-Book,  with  some  additions  from  the  Dictionary,  arranged 
in  phonographic-alphabetic  order.  The  pages  appear  as  fast  as  ready  in  the  STU- 
DENT'S JOURNAL  commencing  with  the  1878  volume.  This  will  be  an  invaluable 
Va.de  Mecum  ("  go  with  me  ")  to  all  phonographic  students. 

Lady  of  tlic  Lake.— By  Sir  Walter  Scott.  With  Frontispiece.  Stereo- 
graphed  in  the  advanced  corresponding  style,  with  iuterpaged  key  ;  and  with 
Notes.  Total  number  of  pages,  328.  Price,  $2  ;  postpaid,  $2.10.  Morocco,  $4  ; 
postpaid,  $4.10. 

PERIODICAL    VOLUMES  : 

Odds  and  Ends  (or  Phonographic  Intelligencer). — In  common  print. — Has 
a  variety  of  matter  of  interest  and  value  to  phonograpliers.  75  cents. 

Standard-Phonographic    Visitor. 

Volumes  1,  2,  3,  and  4— Out  of  print.  Vol.  5  (numbers  1  to  41,  1870),  8  pages 
each  number,  mostly  in  the  Reporting  Style  with  Notes — 15  cents  a  number  (odd 
numbers  only). 

THE    STUDENT'S    JOURNAL. 

Round  Volumes:— Vol.  1  (1872)  to  Vol.  4,  quarto,  $1.50  each,  bound  ;  ppd. 
$1.68.  Vol.  5  (1870),  one-half  in  phonography,  $2.50  ;  ppd.  $2.68  (out  of  print)  ; 
Vol.  6  (1877)  to  14  (1885),  bound,  each,  $2.50  ;  ppd.  $2.68. 

Vol.XVI. (1887)— subscription,  ?2— continues  the  Reporter's  List  (several  pages 
each  number),  unvocalized  corresponding-style  exercises  (with  key  and  questions 
for  self-instruction)  ;  reporting-stylo  exercises  (with  key  and  notes)  ;  with  much 
valuable  matter  in  common  print  so  hyphenized  as  to  show  proper  phrase-writ- 
ing (part  in  the  corresponding-style  and  part  in  the  reporting-style).  See  speci- 
mens of  JOURNAL  engraving,  "contents  "-lists  of  several  numbers,  and  various 
subscription  "  Offers  "  in  Graham's  New  Circular,  16  quarto  pages. 

THE     MINIATURE    SERIES. 

This  series  will  consist  of  little  volumes,  about  3  by  5  inches.  Now  ready  The 
Outline,  the  Little  Reading  Exercises,  The  Correspondent's  List  (embraced  in  The  Little 
Teacher).  In  preparation,  The  Reporter's  List,  and  various  little  reading  books, 
and  works  of  reference. 


IV. 

PHONOGRAPHIC    ENVELOPS. 

10  cents  a  pack.  Glance  at  Standard  Phonography,  presenting  on  the  face  of  the 
envelop  (leaving  room  for  stamp  and  address)  all  the  leading  features  of  the  Art. 
The  Lords  Prater  in  the  Reporting  Style.  The  I'konvgraphic  Alphabet,  large  size. 
And  Christian  Names. 

PHONOGKAPHIC     STATIONERY. 

Triple-Line    Paper  tor  phonographic  writing.    20  cents  a  quire. 
Reporting  Cover,  CO  cents.    Pencil    Note-Books,  5  cents  ;  ppd,  8c. 
Phonographic  Steel  Pens,  15  cents  a  dozen  ;  £1.52  per  box  of  12  doz. 

PHONOGRAPHIC     DOCUMENTS. 

'*  All  About  Phonography." — No.  27  STUDENT'S  JOURNAL— answers 
numerous  questions  of  those  who  are  or  would  become  phonographers  ;  and 
demonstrates  by  comparisons  with  other  systems  the  great  superiority  of  Stand- 
ard Phonography.  2  cents.  For  distribution  as  circulars,  50  cents  a  hundred 
^Jl.10  postpaid).  With  space  for  writing  or  printing  the  phonographic  Book- 
seller's or  Teacher's  address. 

Shorthand  and  Reporting.  By  CHARLES  A.  SUMNEE.  Part  engraved. 
10  cents. 

Popular  Uses  and  Benefits  of  Standard  Phonography.  Lecture  by 
CHAULES  A.  SUMNEB.  15  cents. 

BRIEF     LONGHAND. 

A  system  of  contractions  in  common  longhand  writing,  as  icnb=it  cannot  be. 
A  new  and  improved  edition,  illustrating  "Partial  Phonography."  that  is,  the 
combination  of  frequent  phonographic  word-forms  with  the  Brief  Longhand 
contractions.  60  cents. — This  work  contains  Directions  for  Correcting  Printer's 
Proofs,  and  the  Keys  to  the  exercises  embrace  remarks  upon  the  means  of  acquir. 
ing  Ease  and  Correctness  in  Composition,  the  method  of  keeping  a  Commonplace 
Book  and  Index  lierum,  the  most  useful  modes  of  reading,  etc. 

ENGLISH     GRAITOIAR. 

Graham's  Synopsis  of  English  Grammar.  A  highly  original 
work,  in  which  the  leading  principles  of  grammar  are  presented  in  charts  c  r 
Glances,  followed  by  brief,  easy,  and  comprehensive  statements,  showing  the  re- 
lations of  the  principles.  75  cents. 

PRONOUNCING     WORKS,    ETC. 

Easy  Reading  and  Spelling  Series.— I.  THE  PHONETIC  SPELLING 
BOOK,  10  cents;  postpaid,  12  cents  (out).  II.  THE  FIRST  PHONETIC  READING  BOOK. 
15  cents  ;  postpaid,  17c.  (III.  The  Second  Phonetic  Reading  Book  is  The  First 
Reader  Key). 

Phonetic  Quarterly,  Vol.  1.  A  general  historical  and  critical  review  of 
phonetic  printing  from  Hart,  1C59,  to  the  present  time.  Paper,  25  cents  ;  cloth, 
40  cents. 

Siimner's  Notes  of  Travel  in  Northern  Europe.  CO  illustra- 
tions ;  :',So  pages.  $2;  postpaid,  $2.10. 

New  Circular.— It)  quarto  pages— with  beautiful  title-page  border,  repre- 
senting Graham's  works  ;  with  specimens  of  the  phonographic  departments  of 
the  STUDF.NT'S  JOUENAL  ;  with  specimen  "  Lesson  by  Mail,"  in  the  reporting 
style;  with  many,  beautiful  captions;  with  "Subscription  Offers,"  etc.,  etc., 
too  numorous  to  mention  here.  2  cents  ;  for  distribution  as  circulars,  60  cents 
per  hundred  (postpaid,  $1.10). 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


Form  L9-05m,-9,'47(A5618)444 


'WVERSITY  of  CALlFUiOHA 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 
LIBRARY 


3  1158  01115  4498 


B']         "J""oOO  570  373 

~    b.          r- '  A> 


